THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE for CONCRETE

STRUCTURES
SBC 304 - CR
Code Requirements

2018
 THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE
for
CONCRETE STRUCTURES

(SBC 304-CR)
Key List of the Saudi Codes: Designations and brief titles
Title Code Req.1 Code & Com.2 Arabic Prov. 3
The General Building Code SBC 201-CR SBC 201-CC SBC 201-AR
Structural – Loading and Forces SBC 301-CR SBC 301-CC SBC 301-AR
Structural – Construction SBC 302- CR SBC 302-AR
Structural – Soil and Foundations SBC 303- CR SBC 303-CC SBC 303-AR
Structural – Concrete Structures SBC 304- CR SBC 304-CC SBC 304-AR
Structural – Masonry Structures SBC 305- CR SBC 305-CC SBC 305-AR
Structural – Steel Structures SBC 306-CR SBC 306-CC SBC 306-AR
Electrical Code SBC 401- CR SBC 401-AR
Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR SBC 501-CC SBC 501-AR
Energy Conservation- Nonresidential SBC 601- CR SBC 601- CC SBC 601- AR
Energy Conservation-Residential SBC 602- CR SBC 602- CC SBC 602- AR
Plumbing Code SBC 701- CR SBC 701-CC SBC 701-AR
Private sewage Code SBC 702- CR SBC 702-AR
Fire Code SBC 801- CR SBC 801-CC SBC 801-AR
Existing Buildings Code SBC 901- CR SBC 901-CC SBC 901-AR
Green Construction Code SBC 1001- CR SBC 1001-CC SBC 1001-AR
Residential Building Code-V1 SBC 1101- CR SBC 1101-CC SBC 1101-AR
Arch. Planning and Structural Reqs.
Residential Building Code-V2 SBC 1102- CR SBC 1102-CC SBC 1102-AR
MEP, Gas and Energy Requirements
1. CR: Code Requirements without Commentary
2. CC: Code Requirements with Commentary
3. AR: Arabic Code Provisions

SBC 304-CR-18 i
 THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE
for
CONCRETE STRUCTURES

(SBC 304-CR)

COPYRIGHT © 2018
by
The Saudi Building Code National Committee (SBCNC).
(Edition 200923)

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. All intellectual property rights of this Saudi Code are owned by the National
Committee of Saudi Building Code as per the Saudi laws of the intellectual property. No part of this code may
be reproduced, distributed or leased in any form or by any means, including but not limited to publishing on
cloud sites, computer networks or any electronic means of communication, without prior written permission
from the National Committee of the Saudi Building Code. The purchase of an electronic or a paper copy does
not exempt the individual or entity from complying with the above limitations.

SBC 304-CR-18 i
 THE TECHNICAL COMMITTEE
(SBC 304-CR)
THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE

for

CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1 Prof. Abdulaziz I. Al-Negheimish Chairman
2 Prof. Nadeem A. Siddiqui Member
3 Prof. Abdulrahman Alhozaimy Member
4 Prof. M. Jamal Shannag Member
THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE NATIONAL REVIEW COMMITTEE
COMMITTEE (SBCNC)
1 Dr. Naif M. Alabbadi Chairman
1 H. E. Dr. Saad O. AlKasabi Chairman 2 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Member
2 Dr. Naif M. Alabbadi Vice Chairman 3 Dr. Abdulrahman G. Al-enizi Member
3 Dr. Abdulrahman G. Al-Enizi Member 4 Eng. Saeed K. Kadasah Member
4 Engr. Saeed K. Kadasah Member 5 Eng. Tawifik I. Aljrayed Member
5 Dr. Hassan S. Alhazmi Member
6 Engr. Badr S. AL-maayoof Member REVIEWERS
7 Engr. Fayez A. Alghamdi Member Dr. Jaber M. Alsiwat RCJY team
8 Engr. Mohammed A. Alwaily Member
9 Dr. Bandar S. Alkahlan Member EDITORIAL COMMITTEE
10 Engr. Ahmad N. Hassan Member 1 Prof. Ahmed B. Shuraim Chairman
11 Engr. Abdulnasser S. Alabdullatif Member 2 Dr. Abdallah M. Al-Shehri Member
12 Dr. Hani M. Zahran Member 3 Eng. Tawifik I. Aljrayed Member
13 Engr. Khalifa S. Alyahyai Member
14 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Member EDITORIAL SUPPORT
15 Dr. Ibrahim O. Habiballah Member Engr. Rais Mirza Eng. Rizwan Iqbal
16 Dr. Saeed A. Asiri Member
17 Dr. Abdallah M. Al-Shehri Member
18 Engr. Saad S. Shuail Member
THE ADVISORY COMMITTEE
1 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Chairman
2 Eng. Khalifa S. Alyahyai Vice Chairman
3 Dr. Hani M. Zahran Member
4 Prof. Ali A. Shash Member
5 Prof. Ahmed B. Shuraim Member
6 Dr. Khalid M. Wazira Member
7 Dr. Abdulhameed A. Al Ohaly Member
8 Dr. Hamza A. Ghulman Member
9 Engr. Hakam A. Al-Aqily Member
10 Prof. Saleh F. Magram Member
11 Engr. Nasser M. Al-Dossari Member
12 Dr. Waleed H. Khushefati Member
13 Dr. Waleed M. Abanomi Member
14 Dr. Fahad S. Al-Lahaim Member

SBC 304-CR-18 ii
PREFACE

PREFACE

The Building Code requirements for Concrete Structures (SBC 304) provides minimum requirements
for the materials, design and detailing of concrete buildings for ensuring public safety and health. The
first edition of SBC 304 was published in the year of 2007. SBC 304-18 is the second edition SBC 304
and addresses structural systems, members, and connections, including cast-in-place, precast, plain,
nonprestressed, prestressed, and composite construction. The requirements provided in SBC 304 are
related to design and construction for strength, serviceability, and durability; load combinations, load
factors, and strength reduction factors; structural analysis methods; deflection limits; mechanical and
adhesive anchoring to concrete; development and splicing of reinforcement; construction document
information; field inspection and testing; and methods to evaluate the strength of existing structures.

The current edition of the Code has been substantially reorganized and reformatted relative to its 2007
edition. The prime aims of this reorganization are to keep all the requirements necessary to design a
particular member type in one place and to arrange the chapters in a manner that generally follows the
process and chronology of design and construction. Information that applies to multiple member types,
such as development-length requirements, are put in “utility” or “toolbox” chapters. Thus, the new
layout is more user-friendly and will better facilitate the use of the design provisions.

ACI 318-14 is the base code in the development of this Code. Saudi Building Code National
Committee (SBCNC) has made an agreement with the ACI to use their materials and modify them as
per the local construction needs and regulatory requirements of Saudi Arabia. ACI is not responsible
for any modifications or changes the SBCNC has made to accommodate local conditions.

The writing process of SBC 304-18 followed the methodology approved by the Saudi Building Code
National Committee. Many changes and modifications were made in its base code (ACI 318-14) to
meet the local weather, materials, construction and regulatory requirements.

The committees responsible for SBC 304 Code have taken all precautions to avoid ambiguities,
omissions, and errors in the document. Despite these efforts, the users of SBC 304 may find
information or requirements that may be subject to more than one interpretation or may be incomplete.
The SBCNC alone possesses the authority and responsibility for updating, modifying and interpreting
the Code.

It is a common assumption that engineering knowledge is a prerequisite in understanding code

provisions and requirements; thus, the code is oriented towards individuals who possess the
background knowledge to evaluate the significance and limitations of its content and

SBC 304-CR-18 iii

PREFACE

recommendations. They shall be able to determine the applicability of all regulatory limitations before
applying the Code and must comply with all applicable laws and regulations.

The requirements related to administration and enforcement of this Code are advisory only. SBCNC
and governmental organizations, in charge of enforcing this Code, possess the authority to modify
these administrative requirements.

SBC 304-CR-18 iv
SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS

SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS

The entire SBC 304-18 is divided into 27 chapters and 2 appendices. A brief outline of these chapters
and appendices are given below:

Chapter 1. General—This chapter includes a number of provisions that explain where SBC 304 Code
applies and how it is to be interpreted. It also gives the definition and role of building official and
licensed design professional.

Chapter 2. Notation and Terminology—This chapter lists all the notations that were used in the
Code and Commentary. The various terminologies used in the Code are also defined in this chapter.

Chapter 3. Referenced Standards— All the Standards, or specific sections thereof, cited in this Code,
including Appendices, are listed in this chapter. Thus, chapter 3 identifies the referenced standards
permitted for design.

Chapter 4. Structural System Requirements—This chapter is newly added in SBC 304-18 to

provide an overview of requirements for any structural concrete system. This chapter shall apply to
design of structural concrete in structures or portions of structures defined in chapter 1.

Chapter 5. Loads—This chapter provides the requirements of load factors and combinations for
designing the concrete structural members and concrete structural system.

Chapter 6. Structural Analysis—The general requirements that are applicable for all structural
analysis procedures, modeling of members and structural systems, and calculation of load effects are
provided in this chapter. It also provides a simplified method of analysis for nonprestressed continuous
beams and one-way slabs that can be used in place of a more rigorous analysis when the stipulated
conditions are satisfied. The provisions for the use of the finite element method are also included in
this chapter.

Chapter 7. One-way Slabs—This chapter provides the requirements for the design of nonprestressed
and prestressed one-way slabs, including solid slabs, slabs cast on stay-in-place, noncomposite steel
deck, composite slabs of concrete elements and precast, prestressed hollow-core slabs.

Chapter 8. Two-way Slabs—The requirements for the design of nonprestressed and prestressed slabs
reinforced for flexure in two directions, with or without beams between supports are given in this
chapter. The provisions of this chapter apply to solid slabs, slabs cast on stay-in-place, noncomposite
steel deck, composite slabs, and two-way joist systems.

SBC 304-CR-18 v
SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS

Chapter 9. Beams—This chapter provides the requirements for the design of nonprestressed and
prestressed beams, including Composite beams, One-way joist systems, and Deep beams. The
composite structural steel-concrete beams are not covered in this chapter.

Chapter 10. Columns—The requirements for the design and detailing of nonprestressed, prestressed
and composite columns, including reinforced concrete pedestals, are given in this chapter. The design
of composite columns include both structural steel sections encased in concrete and hollow structural
steel sections filled with concrete.

Chapter 11. Walls—This chapter provides the requirements for the design and detailing of cast-in-
place and precast nonprestressed and prestressed walls. The chapter requirements apply generally to
walls as vertical and lateral force-resisting members. The provisions for in-plane shear in ordinary
structural walls, as opposed to special structural walls, are also included in this chapter.

Chapter 12. Diaphragms—Diaphragms typically are horizontal or nearly horizontal planar elements
that serve to transfer lateral forces to vertical elements of the lateral-force-resisting system. This
chapter provides minimum requirements for the design and detailing of nonprestressed and prestressed
diaphragms, including diaphragms that are cast-in-place slabs; diaphragms that comprise a cast-in-
place topping slab on precast elements; and diaphragms that comprise precast elements with end strips
formed by either a cast-in-place concrete topping slab or edge beams.

Chapter 13. Foundations—This chapter provides minimum requirements for the design of
nonprestressed and prestressed foundations, including shallow foundations such as Strip footings,
Isolated footings, Combined footings, Mat foundations and Grade beams and, where applicable, deep
foundations such as Pile caps, Piles, Drilled piers, and Caissons. While requirements applicable to
foundations are provided in this chapter, the majority of requirements used for foundation design are
found in other chapters of the Code. These other chapters are referenced in this chapter. However, the
applicability of the specific provisions within these other chapters may not be explicitly defined for
foundations.
Chapter 14. Plain Concrete—This chapter provides the requirements for the design of plain concrete
members, including members in building structures, and members in non-building structures such as
arches, underground utility structures, gravity walls, and shielding walls. The requirements of this
chapter shall not govern the design of cast-in-place concrete piles and piers embedded in the ground.

Chapter 15. Beam-Column and Slab-Column Joints—The requirements of this chapter shall be used
for the design and detailing of cast-in-place beam-column and slab-column joints.

SBC 304-CR-18 vi
SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS

Chapter 16. Connections between Members—This chapter provides minimum requirements for the
design of joints and connections at the intersection of concrete members and for load transfer between
concrete surfaces. The provisions of this chapter apply to connections of precast members, connections
between foundations and either cast-in-place or precast members, horizontal shear strength of
composite concrete flexural members, and brackets and corbels.

Chapter 17. Anchoring to Concrete—This chapter provides design requirements for anchors in
concrete used to transmit structural loads by means of tension, shear, or a combination of tension and
shear between (a) connected structural elements; or (b) safety-related attachments and structural
elements. This chapter is restricted in scope to structural anchors that transmit structural loads related
to strength, stability, or life safety. Safety levels specified are intended for in-service conditions, rather
than for short-term handling and construction conditions.

Chapter 18. Earthquake-Resistant Structures—This chapter provides requirements for the design
of nonprestressed and prestressed concrete structures assigned to Seismic Design Categories (SDC) B
through F, including, where applicable, structural systems designated as part of the seismic-force-
resisting system, including diaphragms, moment frames, structural walls, and foundations; and
members not designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting system but required to support other
loads while undergoing deformations associated with earthquake effects. Chapter 18 does not apply to
structures assigned to Seismic Design Category (SDC) A. Chapter 18 contains provisions considered
to be the minimum requirements for a cast-in-place or precast concrete structure capable of sustaining
a series of oscillations into the inelastic range of response without critical deterioration in strength.

Chapter 19. Concrete: Design and Durability Requirements— The requirements for Concrete
properties (e.g. specified compressive strength, modulus of elasticity and modulus of rupture) and
durability are provided in this chapter. This chapter is substantially modified (compared to the base
code) to meet the exposure conditions and durability requirements of the Kingdom.

Chapter 20. Steel Reinforcement Properties, Durability, and Embedments—The requirements for
steel reinforcement are provided in this chapter. The requirements primarily cover (a) material
properties of plain and deformed bars, (b) properties to be used for design, and (c) durability
requirements, including minimum specified cover requirements.

Chapter 21. Strength Reduction Factors—This chapter provides the values of Strength reduction
factors for structural concrete members and connections. The purposes of strength reduction factors 
are: (1) to account for the probability of under-strength members due to variations in material strengths
and dimensions; (2) to account for inaccuracies in the design equations; (3) to reflect the available

SBC 304-CR-18 vii

SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS

ductility and required reliability of the member under the load effects being considered; and (4) to
reflect the importance of the member in the structure.

Chapter 22. Sectional Strength—The provisions in this chapter can be used to calculating nominal
flexural strength, axial strength or combined flexural and axial strength, one-way shear strength, two-
way shear strength, torsional strength, bearing and shear friction of members at critical sections.

Chapter 23. Strut-and-Tie-Models—This chapter provides the requirements for the design of
structural concrete members, or regions of members, where load or geometric discontinuities cause a
nonlinear distribution of longitudinal strains within the cross-section. The strut-and-tie design method,
as described in this chapter, is based on the assumption that D-regions can be analyzed and designed
using hypothetical pin-jointed trusses consisting of struts and ties connected at nodes.

Chapter 24. Serviceability Requirements—This chapter prescribes serviceability requirements that

are referenced by other chapters of the Code. The serviceability includes deflections due to service-
level gravity loads; distribution of flexural reinforcement in one-way slabs and beams to control
cracking; shrinkage and temperature reinforcement; and permissible stresses in prestressed flexural
members

Chapter 25. Reinforcement Details—This chapter provides the requirements for reinforcement
detailing in reinforced and prestressed concrete members and structures. The reinforcement detailing
includes the requirements for minimum spacing; standard hooks, seismic hooks, and crossties;
development of reinforcement; splices; bundled reinforcement; transverse reinforcement; and post-
tensioning anchorages and couplers.

Chapter 26. Construction Documents and Inspection—This chapter contains the Design
information that the licensed design professional shall specify in the construction documents;
Compliance requirements that the licensed design professional shall specify in the construction
documents; and Inspection requirements that the licensed design professional shall specify in the
construction documents. The primary intent of these provisions is that the licensed design professional
must provide all of the construction and inspection requirements in the project drawings and
specifications, rather than referring to the Code.

Chapter 27. Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures—The provisions of this chapter may be
used for strength evaluation of existing structures by analytical means or by load testing.

Appendix A. Steel Reinforcement Information—This appendix provides the details of standard

reinforcing bars, prestressing tendons, and wire reinforcement. The details primarily cover nominal
sizes (in mm), nominal areas (in mm2) and nominal masses (in kg/m).

SBC 304-CR-18 viii

SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS

Appendix B. Two-Way Slabs: Coefficient Methods—Two simple coefficient-based methods which

have been used extensively for designing two-way slabs with satisfactory results are given in this
appendix.

SBC 304-CR-18 ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 —SCOPE OF SBC 304 .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 —GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 —PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 —APPLICABILITY .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.5 —INTERPRETATION .............................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.6 —BUILDING OFFICIAL ........................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.7 —LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL ......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.8 —CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND DESIGN RECORDS ................................................................................................................ 2
1.9 —TESTING AND INSPECTION .................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.10 —APPROVAL OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS OF DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, OR ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ...................................... 2

CHAPTER 2 —NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................ 4

2.1 —SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.2 —NOTATION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 —TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................................................................................... 12

CHAPTER 3 —REFERENCED STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 21

3.1 —SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.2 —REFERENCED STANDARDS ................................................................................................................................................. 21

CHAPTER 4 —STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 25

4.1 —SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.2 —MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.3 —DESIGN LOADS ............................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.4 —STRUCTURAL SYSTEM AND LOAD PATHS ............................................................................................................................... 25
4.5 —STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.6 —STRENGTH..................................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.7 —SERVICEABILITY .............................................................................................................................................................. 26
4.8 —DURABILITY ................................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.9 —SUSTAINABILITY .............................................................................................................................................................. 26
4.10 —STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY ................................................................................................................................................. 26
4.11 —FIRE RESISTANCE .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.12 —REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................................... 26
4.13 —CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION..................................................................................................................................... 27
4.14 —STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES............................................................................................................... 27

CHAPTER 5 —LOADS ..................................................................................................................................... 30

5.1 —SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 30
5.2 —GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 30
5.3 —LOAD FACTORS AND COMBINATIONS................................................................................................................................... 30

CHAPTER 6 —STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS ...................................................................................................... 34

6.1 —SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 34
6.2 —GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 34
6.3 —MODELING ASSUMPTIONS ................................................................................................................................................ 35
6.4 —ARRANGEMENT OF LIVE LOAD ........................................................................................................................................... 35

SBC 304-CR-18 x
TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.5 —SIMPLIFIED METHOD OF ANALYSIS FOR NONPRESTRESSED CONTINUOUS BEAMS AND ONE-WAY SLABS .............................................. 35
6.6 —FIRST-ORDER ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................................................... 35
6.7 —ELASTIC SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS ..................................................................................................................................... 38
6.8 —INELASTIC SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS ................................................................................................................................... 38
6.9 —ACCEPTABILITY OF FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS ....................................................................................................................... 39

CHAPTER 7 —ONE-WAY SLABS ................................................................................................................... 43

7.1 —SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 43
7.2 —GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 43
7.3 —DESIGN LIMITS ............................................................................................................................................................... 43
7.4 —REQUIRED STRENGTH ...................................................................................................................................................... 43
7.5 —DESIGN STRENGTH .......................................................................................................................................................... 44
7.6 —REINFORCEMENT LIMITS .................................................................................................................................................. 44
7.7 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ............................................................................................................................................. 45

CHAPTER 8 —TWO-WAY SLABS .................................................................................................................. 50

8.1 —SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 50
8.2 —GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 50
8.3 —DESIGN LIMITS ............................................................................................................................................................... 50
8.4 —REQUIRED STRENGTH ...................................................................................................................................................... 51
8.5 —DESIGN STRENGTH .......................................................................................................................................................... 52
8.6 —REINFORCEMENT LIMITS .................................................................................................................................................. 53
8.7 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ............................................................................................................................................. 53
8.8 —NONPRESTRESSED TWO-WAY JOIST SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................ 56
8.9 —LIFT-SLAB CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.10 —DIRECT DESIGN METHOD ................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.11 —EQUIVALENT FRAME METHOD ......................................................................................................................................... 58

CHAPTER 9 —BEAMS ..................................................................................................................................... 66

9.1 —SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 66
9.2 —GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 66
9.3 —DESIGN LIMITS ............................................................................................................................................................... 66
9.4 —REQUIRED STRENGTH ...................................................................................................................................................... 67
9.5 —DESIGN STRENGTH .......................................................................................................................................................... 67
9.6 —REINFORCEMENT LIMITS .................................................................................................................................................. 68
9.7 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ............................................................................................................................................. 69
9.8 —NONPRESTRESSED ONE-WAY JOIST SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................ 72
9.9 —DEEP BEAMS.................................................................................................................................................................. 72

CHAPTER 10 —COLUMNS ............................................................................................................................. 77

10.1 —SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 77
10.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................... 77
10.3 —DESIGN LIMITS ............................................................................................................................................................. 77
10.4 —REQUIRED STRENGTH .................................................................................................................................................... 77
10.5 —DESIGN STRENGTH ........................................................................................................................................................ 77
10.6 —REINFORCEMENT LIMITS ................................................................................................................................................ 78
10.7 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ........................................................................................................................................... 78

CHAPTER 11 —WALLS ................................................................................................................................... 83

SBC 304-CR-18 xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS

11.1 —SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 83

11.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................... 83
11.3 —DESIGN LIMITS ............................................................................................................................................................. 83
11.4 —REQUIRED STRENGTH .................................................................................................................................................... 83
11.5 —DESIGN STRENGTH ........................................................................................................................................................ 84
11.6 —REINFORCEMENT LIMITS ................................................................................................................................................ 84
11.7 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ........................................................................................................................................... 85
11.8 —ALTERNATIVE METHOD FOR OUT-OF-PLANE SLENDER WALL ANALYSIS ...................................................................................... 85

CHAPTER 12 —DIAPHRAGMS ....................................................................................................................... 90

12.1 —SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 90
12.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................... 90
12.3 —DESIGN LIMITS ............................................................................................................................................................. 90
12.4 —REQUIRED STRENGTH .................................................................................................................................................... 90
12.5 —DESIGN STRENGTH ........................................................................................................................................................ 91
12.6 —REINFORCEMENT LIMITS ................................................................................................................................................ 92
12.7 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ........................................................................................................................................... 92

CHAPTER 13 —FOUNDATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 95

13.1 —SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 95
13.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................... 95
13.3 —SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 96
13.4 —DEEP FOUNDATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................... 96

CHAPTER 14 —PLAIN CONCRETE.............................................................................................................. 100

14.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 100
14.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 100
14.3 —DESIGN LIMITS ........................................................................................................................................................... 101
14.4 —REQUIRED STRENGTH .................................................................................................................................................. 101
14.5 —DESIGN STRENGTH ...................................................................................................................................................... 102
14.6 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ......................................................................................................................................... 102

CHAPTER 15 —BEAM-COLUMN AND SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS ............................................................... 107

15.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 107
15.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 107
15.3 —TRANSFER OF COLUMN AXIAL FORCE THROUGH THE FLOOR SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 107
15.4 —DETAILING OF JOINTS .................................................................................................................................................. 107

CHAPTER 16 —CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS ............................................................................ 110

16.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 110
16.2 —CONNECTIONS OF PRECAST MEMBERS ............................................................................................................................. 110
16.3 —CONNECTIONS TO FOUNDATIONS ................................................................................................................................... 111
16.4 —HORIZONTAL SHEAR TRANSFER IN COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS ........................................................................ 112
16.5 —BRACKETS AND CORBELS .............................................................................................................................................. 114

CHAPTER 17 —ANCHORING TO CONCRETE ............................................................................................ 118

17.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 118
17.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 118
17.3 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STRENGTH OF ANCHORS ...................................................................................................... 121
17.4 —DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR TENSILE LOADING ................................................................................................................. 122

SBC 304-CR-18 xii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

17.5 —DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR SHEAR LOADING ................................................................................................................... 126

17.6 —INTERACTION OF TENSILE AND SHEAR FORCES ................................................................................................................... 128
17.7 —REQUIRED EDGE DISTANCES, SPACINGS, AND THICKNESSES TO PRECLUDE SPLITTING FAILURE ...................................................... 128
17.8 —INSTALLATION AND INSPECTION OF ANCHORS ................................................................................................................... 129

CHAPTER 18 —EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES ..................................................................... 132

18.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 132
18.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 132
18.3 —ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES ........................................................................................................................................ 133
18.4 —INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES .................................................................................................................................. 133
18.5 —INTERMEDIATE PRECAST STRUCTURAL WALLS .................................................................................................................... 135
18.6 —BEAMS OF SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES ............................................................................................................................. 135
18.7 —COLUMNS OF SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES ......................................................................................................................... 137
18.8 —JOINTS OF SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES ............................................................................................................................. 139
18.9 —SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES CONSTRUCTED USING PRECAST CONCRETE ................................................................................... 140
18.10 —SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALLS ....................................................................................................................................... 140
18.11 —SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALLS CONSTRUCTED USING PRECAST CONCRETE ............................................................................... 144
18.12 —DIAPHRAGMS AND TRUSSES ........................................................................................................................................ 144
18.13 —FOUNDATIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 146
18.14 —MEMBERS NOT DESIGNATED AS PART OF THE SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM ................................................................... 147

CHAPTER 19 —CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS ........................................... 152

19.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 152
19.2 —CONCRETE DESIGN PROPERTIES ..................................................................................................................................... 152
19.3 —CONCRETE DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 152
19.4 —GROUT DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 153

CHAPTER 20 —STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND EMBEDMENTS............. 158

20.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
20.2 —NONPRESTRESSED BARS AND WIRES ............................................................................................................................... 158
20.3 —PRESTRESSING STRANDS, WIRES, AND BARS...................................................................................................................... 159
20.4 —STRUCTURAL STEEL, PIPE, AND TUBING FOR COMPOSITE COLUMNS ....................................................................................... 160
20.5 —HEADED SHEAR STUD REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................................................................... 160
20.6 —PROVISIONS FOR DURABILITY OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT ..................................................................................................... 160
20.7 —EMBEDMENTS............................................................................................................................................................ 161

CHAPTER 21 —STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS ................................................................................. 168

21.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 168
21.2 —STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS ..................................................... 168

CHAPTER 22 —SECTIONAL STRENGTH .................................................................................................... 172

22.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 172
22.2 —DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS FOR MOMENT AND AXIAL STRENGTH ................................................................................................ 172
22.3 —FLEXURAL STRENGTH ................................................................................................................................................... 172
22.4 —AXIAL STRENGTH OR COMBINED FLEXURAL AND AXIAL STRENGTH ......................................................................................... 173
22.5 —ONE-WAY SHEAR STRENGTH ......................................................................................................................................... 173
22.6 —TWO-WAY SHEAR STRENGTH ......................................................................................................................................... 176
22.7 —TORSIONAL STRENGTH ................................................................................................................................................. 179
22.8 —BEARING................................................................................................................................................................... 180

SBC 304-CR-18 xiii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

22.9 —SHEAR FRICTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 180

CHAPTER 23 —STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS ................................................................................................. 188

23.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 188
23.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 188
23.3 —DESIGN STRENGTH ...................................................................................................................................................... 188
23.4 —STRENGTH OF STRUTS .................................................................................................................................................. 188
23.5 —REINFORCEMENT CROSSING BOTTLE-SHAPED STRUTS ......................................................................................................... 189
23.6 —STRUT REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ................................................................................................................................ 189
23.7 —STRENGTH OF TIES ...................................................................................................................................................... 189
23.8 —TIE REINFORCEMENT DETAILING ..................................................................................................................................... 189
23.9 —STRENGTH OF NODAL ZONES ......................................................................................................................................... 190

CHAPTER 24 —SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................. 193

24.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 193
24.2 —DEFLECTIONS DUE TO SERVICE-LEVEL GRAVITY LOADS ......................................................................................................... 193
24.3 —DISTRIBUTION OF FLEXURAL REINFORCEMENT IN ONE-WAY SLABS AND BEAMS ........................................................................ 194
24.4 —SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT ............................................................................................................. 194
24.5 —PERMISSIBLE STRESSES IN PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS ................................................................................ 195

CHAPTER 25 —REINFORCEMENT DETAILS .............................................................................................. 201

25.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 201
25.2 —MINIMUM SPACING OF REINFORCEMENT......................................................................................................................... 201
25.3 —STANDARD HOOKS, SEISMIC HOOKS, CROSSTIES, AND MINIMUM INSIDE BEND DIAMETERS ......................................................... 201
25.4 —DEVELOPMENT OF REINFORCEMENT ............................................................................................................................... 201
25.5 —SPLICES .................................................................................................................................................................... 204
25.6 —BUNDLED REINFORCEMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 205
25.7 —TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 206
25.8 —POST-TENSIONING ANCHORAGES AND COUPLERS .............................................................................................................. 207
25.9 —ANCHORAGE ZONES FOR POST-TENSIONED TENDONS ......................................................................................................... 208

CHAPTER 26 —CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION ........................................................ 217

26.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 217
26.2 —DESIGN CRITERIA ........................................................................................................................................................ 217
26.3 —MEMBER INFORMATION .............................................................................................................................................. 217
26.4 —CONCRETE MATERIALS AND MIXTURE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................ 217
26.5 —CONCRETE PRODUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................. 219
26.6 —REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 221
26.7 —ANCHORING TO CONCRETE ........................................................................................................................................... 222
26.8 —EMBEDMENTS............................................................................................................................................................ 223
26.9 —ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE ........................................................................................................ 223
26.10 —ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE................................................................................................ 223
26.11 —FORMWORK ............................................................................................................................................................ 224
26.12 —CONCRETE EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE .................................................................................................................... 225
26.13 —INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................................................. 226

CHAPTER 27 —STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES................................................ 230

27.1 —SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 230
27.2 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 230

SBC 304-CR-18 xiv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

27.3 —ANALYTICAL STRENGTH EVALUATION .............................................................................................................................. 230

27.4 —STRENGTH EVALUATION BY LOAD TEST ............................................................................................................................ 230
27.5 —REDUCED LOAD RATING ............................................................................................................................................... 231

SBC 304-CR-18 xv
 CHAPTER 1—GENERAL

CHAPTER 1—GENERAL

318.2, “Building Code Requirements for Concrete

1.1—Scope of SBC 304 Thin Shells.”
1.1.1 This chapter addresses (a) through (h): 1.4.4 This Code shall apply to the design of slabs
(a) General requirements of this Code cast on stay-in-place, noncomposite steel decks.
(b) Purpose of this Code
1.4.5 SBC 304 shall apply to the design and
(c) Applicability of this Code
construction of one- and two-family dwellings,
(d) Interpretation of this Code
multiple single-family dwellings, townhouses, and
(e) Definition and role of the building official accessory structures to these types of dwellings.
and the licensed design professional
(f) Construction documents 1.4.6 This Code does not apply to the design and
(g) Testing and inspection installation of concrete piles, drilled piers, and
(h) Approval of special systems of design, caissons embedded in ground, except as provided in
construction, or alternative construction (a) or (b):
materials (a) For portions in air or water, or in soil
1.2—General incapable of providing adequate lateral
restraint to prevent buckling throughout
1.2.1 SBC 304, “Building Code Requirements their length
for Concrete Structures,” is hereafter referred to as (b) For structures assigned to Seismic Design
“this Code.” Categories D, E, and F
1.2.2 This Code forms part of the Saudi Building 1.4.7 This Code does not apply to design and
Code. construction of slabs-on-ground, unless the slab
1.2.3 This Code provides minimum requirements transmits vertical loads or lateral forces from other
for the materials, design, construction, and strength portions of the structure to the soil.
evaluation of structural concrete members and 1.4.8 This Code does not apply to the design and
systems. construction of tanks and reservoirs.
1.3—Purpose 1.4.9 This Code does not apply to composite
1.3.1 The purpose of this Code is to provide for design slabs cast on stay-in-place composite steel
public health and safety by establishing minimum deck. Concrete used in the construction of such
requirements for strength, stability, serviceability, slabs shall be governed by this Code, where
durability, and integrity of concrete structures. applicable. Portions of such slabs designed as
reinforced concrete are governed by this Code.
1.3.2 This Code does not address all design
considerations. 1.5—Interpretation
1.3.3 Construction means and methods are not 1.5.1 The principles of interpretation in this
addressed in this Code. section shall apply to this Code as a whole unless
otherwise stated.
1.4—Applicability
1.5.2 This Code consists of chapters and
1.4.1 This Code shall apply to concrete structures appendixes, including text, headings, tables,
designed and constructed under the requirements of figures, footnotes to tables and figures, and
the Saudi Building Code. referenced standards.
1.4.2 Applicable provisions of this Code shall be 1.5.3 The Commentary consists of a preface,
permitted to be used for structures not governed by introduction, commentary text, tables, figures, and
the Saudi Building Code. cited publications. The Commentary is intended to
1.4.3 The design of thin shells and folded plate provide contextual information, but is not part of
concrete structures shall be in accordance with ACI this Code, does not provide binding requirements,

SBC 304-CR-18 1
 CHAPTER 1—GENERAL

and shall not be used to create a conflict with or person who is licensed and responsible for, and in
ambiguity in this Code. charge of, the structural design or inspection.
1.5.4 This Code shall be interpreted in a manner 1.8—Construction documents and
that avoids conflict between or among its design records
provisions. Specific provisions shall govern over
general provisions. 1.8.1 The licensed design professional shall
provide in the construction documents the
1.5.5 This Code shall be interpreted and applied information required in Chapter 26.
in accordance with the plain meaning of the words
and terms used. Specific definitions of words and 1.8.2 Calculations pertinent to design shall be
terms in this Code shall be used where provided and filed with the construction documents if required by
applicable, regardless of whether other materials, the building official. Analyses and designs using
standards, or resources outside of this Code provide computer programs shall be permitted provided
a different definition. design assumptions, user input, and computer-
generated output are submitted. Model analysis
1.5.6 The following words and terms in this Code shall be permitted to supplement calculations.
shall be interpreted in accordance with (a) through
(e): 1.9—Testing and inspection
(a) The word “shall” is always mandatory. 1.9.1 Concrete materials shall be tested in
(b) Provisions of this Code are mandatory even accordance with the requirements of Chapter 26.
if the word “shall” is not used. 1.9.2 Concrete construction shall be inspected in
(c) Words used in the present tense shall accordance with Chapter 17 and Chapter 26.
include the future.
(d) The word “and” indicates that all of the 1.9.3 Inspection records shall include
connected items, conditions, requirements, information required in Chapter 17 and Chapter 26.
or events shall apply. 1.10—Approval of special systems of
(e) The word “or” indicates that the connected design, construction, or alternative
items, conditions, requirements, or events
construction materials
are alternatives, at least one of which shall
be satisfied. 1.10.1 Sponsors of any system of design,
construction, or alternative construction materials
1.5.7 If conflicts occur between provisions of this
within the scope of this Code, the adequacy of
Code and those of standards and documents
which has been shown by successful use or by
referenced in Chapter 3, this Code shall apply.
analysis or test, but which does not conform to or is
1.6—Building official not covered by this Code, shall have the right to
present the data on which their design is based to
1.6.1 All references in this Code to the building the to a board of examiners appointed by the
official shall be understood to mean persons who building official. This board shall be composed of
administer and enforce this Code. competent engineers and shall have authority to
1.6.2 Actions and decisions by the building investigate the data so submitted, require tests, and
official do not change this Code. formulate rules governing design and construction
of such systems to meet the intent of this Code.
1.6.3 The building official shall have the right to
These rules, when approved by the SBCNC and
order testing of any materials used in concrete
promulgated, shall be of the same force and effect
construction to determine if materials are of the
as the provisions of this Code.
quality specified.
1.7—Licensed design professional
1.7.1 All references in this Code to the licensed
design professional shall be understood to mean the

SBC 304-CR-18 2
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 3
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

𝐴ℎ total area of shear reinforcement parallel to

2.1—Scope primary tension reinforcement in a corbel
2.2—Notation or bracket, mm2
𝐴𝑗 effective cross-sectional area within a joint
𝑎 depth of equivalent rectangular stress
in a plane parallel to plane of beam
block, mm
reinforcement generating shear in the joint,
𝑎𝑣 shear span, equal to distance from center of
mm2
concentrated load to either: (a) face of
𝐴𝑙 total area of longitudinal reinforcement to
support for continuous or cantilevered
resist torsion, mm2
members, or (b) center of support for
𝐴𝑙,𝑚𝑖𝑛 minimum area of longitudinal
simply supported members, mm
𝐴𝑏 area of an individual bar or wire, mm2 reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2
𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑔 net bearing area of the head of stud, anchor 𝐴𝑛 area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel
resisting factored tensile force 𝑁𝑢𝑐 , mm2
bolt, or headed deformed bar, mm2
𝐴𝑛𝑧 area of a face of a nodal zone or a section
𝐴𝑐 area of concrete section resisting shear
through a nodal zone, mm2
transfer, mm2
𝐴𝑁𝑎 projected influence area of a single
𝐴𝑐𝑓 greater gross cross-sectional area of the
adhesive anchor or group of adhesive
slab-beam strips of the two orthogonal anchors, for calculation of bond strength in
equivalent frames intersecting at a column tension, mm2
of a two-way slab, mm2 𝐴𝑁𝑎𝑜 projected influence area of a single
𝐴𝑐ℎ cross-sectional area of a member measured adhesive anchor, for calculation of bond
to the outside edges of transverse strength in tension if not limited by edge
reinforcement, mm2 distance or spacing, mm2
𝐴𝑐𝑝 area enclosed by outside perimeter of 𝐴𝑁𝑐 projected concrete failure area of a single
concrete cross section, mm2 anchor or group of anchors, for calculation
𝐴𝑐𝑠 cross-sectional area at one end of a strut in of strength in tension, mm2
a strut-and-tie model, taken perpendicular 𝐴𝑁𝑐𝑜 projected concrete failure area of a single
to the axis of the strut, mm2 anchor, for calculation of strength in
𝐴𝑐𝑡 area of that part of cross section between tension if not limited by edge distance or
the flexural tension face and centroid of spacing, mm2
gross section, mm2 𝐴𝑜 gross area enclosed by torsional shear flow
𝐴𝑐𝑣 gross area of concrete section bounded by path, mm2
web thickness and length of section in the 𝐴𝑜ℎ area enclosed by centerline of the
direction of shear force considered in the outermost closed transverse torsional
case of walls, and gross area of concrete reinforcement, mm2
section in the case of diaphragms, not to 𝐴𝑝𝑑 total area occupied by duct, sheathing, and
exceed the thickness times the width of the prestressing reinforcement, mm2
diaphragm, mm2
𝐴𝑝𝑠 area of prestressed longitudinal tension
𝐴𝑐𝑤 area of concrete section of an individual
reinforcement, mm2
pier, horizontal wall segment, or coupling
𝐴𝑝𝑡 total area of prestressing reinforcement,
beam resisting shear, mm2
𝐴𝑓 area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel mm2
𝐴𝑠 area of nonprestressed longitudinal tension
resisting design moment, mm2
reinforcement, mm2
𝐴𝑔 gross area of concrete section, mm2. For a
𝐴′𝑠 area of compression reinforcement, mm2
hollow section, 𝐴𝑔 is the area of the 𝐴𝑠𝑐 area of primary tension reinforcement in a
concrete only and does not include the area corbel or bracket, mm2
of the void(s) 𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑁 effective cross-sectional area of anchor in
tension, mm2

SBC 304-CR-18 4
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑉 effective cross-sectional area of anchor in tapered wedge shall be sloped one vertical
shear, mm2 to two horizontal, mm2
𝐴𝑠ℎ total cross-sectional area of transverse 𝑏 width of compression face of member, mm
reinforcement, including crossties, within 𝑏𝑐 cross-sectional dimension of member core
spacing 𝑠 and perpendicular to dimension measured to the outside edges of the
𝑏𝑐 , mm2 transverse reinforcement composing area
𝐴𝑠𝑖 total area of surface reinforcement at Ash, mm
spacing 𝑠𝑖 in the i-th layer crossing a strut, 𝑏𝑓 effective flange width of T section, mm
with reinforcement at an angle α𝑖 to the axis 𝑏𝑜 perimeter of critical section for two-way
of the strut, mm2 shear in slabs and footings, mm
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 minimum area of flexural reinforcement, 𝑏𝑠 width of strut, mm
mm2 𝑏𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏 effective slab width resisting γ𝑓 𝑀𝑠𝑐 , mm
𝐴𝑠𝑡 total area of nonprestressed longitudinal 𝑏𝑡 width of that part of cross section
reinforcement including bars or steel containing the closed stirrups resisting
shapes, and excluding prestressing torsion, mm
reinforcement, mm2 𝑏𝑣 width of cross section at contact surface
𝐴𝑠𝑥 area of steel shape, pipe, or tubing in a being investigated for horizontal shear, mm
composite section, mm2 𝑏𝑤 web width or diameter of circular section,
𝐴𝑡 area of one leg of a closed stirrup, hoop, or mm
tie resisting torsion within spacing s, mm2 𝑏1 dimension of the critical section 𝑏𝑜
𝐴𝑡𝑝 area of prestressing reinforcement in a tie, measured in the direction of the span for
mm2 which moments are determined, mm
𝐴𝑡𝑟 total cross-sectional area of all transverse 𝑏2 dimension of the critical section 𝑏𝑜
reinforcement within spacing 𝑠 that crosses measured in the direction perpendicular to
the potential plane of splitting through the b1, mm
reinforcement being developed, mm2 𝐵𝑛 nominal bearing strength, N
𝐴𝑡𝑠 area of nonprestressed reinforcement in a 𝐵𝑢 factored bearing load, N
tie, mm2 𝑐 distance from extreme compression fiber to
𝐴𝑣 area of shear reinforcement within spacing neutral axis, mm
𝑠, mm2 𝑐𝑎𝑐 critical edge distance required to develop
𝐴𝑣𝑑 total area of reinforcement in each group of the basic strength as controlled by concrete
diagonal bars in a diagonally reinforced breakout or bond of a post-installed anchor
coupling beam, mm2 in tension in uncracked concrete without
𝐴𝑣𝑓 area of shear-friction reinforcement, mm2 supplementary reinforcement to control
𝐴𝑣ℎ area of shear reinforcement parallel to splitting, mm
flexural tension reinforcement within 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑎𝑥 maximum distance from center of an
spacing 𝑠2 , mm2 anchor shaft to the edge of concrete, mm
𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 minimum area of shear reinforcement 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 minimum distance from center of an anchor
within spacing 𝑠, mm2 shaft to the edge of concrete, mm
𝐴𝑉𝑐 projected concrete failure area of a single 𝑐𝑎1 distance from the center of an anchor shaft
anchor or group of anchors, for calculation to the edge of concrete in one direction,
of strength in shear, mm2 mm. If shear is applied to anchor, 𝑐𝑎1 is
𝐴𝑉𝑐𝑜 projected concrete failure area of a single taken in the direction of the applied shear.
anchor, for calculation of strength in shear, If tension is applied to the anchor, 𝑐𝑎1 is the
if not limited by corner influences, spacing, minimum edge distance. Where anchors
or member thickness, mm2 subject to shear are located in narrow
𝐴1 loaded area for consideration of bearing sections of limited thickness, see 17.5.2.4
strength, mm2 𝑐𝑎2 distance from center of an anchor shaft to
𝐴2 area of the lower base of the largest frustum the edge of concrete in the direction
of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge perpendicular to 𝑐𝑎1 , mm
contained wholly within the support and 𝑐𝑏 lesser of: (a) the distance from center of a
having its upper base equal to the loaded bar or wire to nearest concrete surface, and
area. The sides of the pyramid, cone, or (b) one-half the center-to-center spacing of
bars or wires being developed, mm

SBC 304-CR-18 5
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

𝑐𝑐 clear cover of reinforcement, mm 𝐸𝑐𝑏 modulus of elasticity of beam concrete,

𝑐𝑁𝑎 projected distance from center of an anchor MPa
shaft on one side of the anchor required to 𝐸𝑐𝑠 modulus of elasticity of slab concrete, MPa
develop the full bond strength of a single 𝐸𝐼 flexural stiffness of member, N-mm2
adhesive anchor, mm (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓 effective flexural stiffness of member, N-
𝑐𝑡 distance from the interior face of the mm2
column to the slab edge measured parallel 𝐸𝑝 modulus of elasticity of prestressing
to 𝑐1 , but not exceeding 𝑐1 , mm reinforcement, MPa
𝑐1 dimension of rectangular or equivalent 𝐸𝑠 modulus of elasticity of reinforcement and
rectangular column, capital, or bracket structural steel, excluding prestressing
measured in the direction of the span for reinforcement, MPa
which moments are being determined, mm 𝑓𝑐′ specified compressive strength of concrete,
𝑐2 dimension of rectangular or equivalent MPa
rectangular column, capital, or bracket ′
√𝑓𝑐 square root of specified compressive
measured in the direction perpendicular to
strength of concrete, MPa
𝑐1 , mm
𝑓𝑐𝑖′ specified compressive strength of concrete
𝐶 cross-sectional constant to define torsional
at time of initial prestress, MPa
properties of slab and beam ′
𝐶𝑚 factor relating actual moment diagram to an √𝑓𝑐𝑖 square root of specified compressive
equivalent uniform moment diagram strength of concrete at time of initial
𝑑 distance from extreme compression fiber to prestress, MPa
centroid of longitudinal tension 𝑓𝑐𝑒 effective compressive strength of the
reinforcement, mm concrete in a strut or a nodal zone, MPa
𝑑′ distance from extreme compression fiber to 𝑓𝑐𝑚 measured average compressive strength of
centroid of longitudinal compression concrete, MPa
reinforcement, mm 𝑓𝑐𝑡 measured average splitting tensile strength
𝑑𝑎 outside diameter of anchor or shaft of concrete, MPa
diameter of headed stud, headed bolt, or 𝑓𝑑 stress due to unfactored dead load, at
hooked bolt, mm extreme fiber of section where tensile stress
𝑑 ′𝑎 value substituted for 𝑑𝑎 if an oversized is caused by externally applied loads, MPa
anchor is used, mm 𝑓𝑑𝑐 decompression stress; stress in the
𝑑𝑎𝑔𝑔 nominal maximum size of coarse prestressing reinforcement if stress is zero
in the concrete at the same level as the
aggregate, mm
centroid of the prestressing reinforcement,
𝑑𝑏 nominal diameter of bar, wire, or
MPa
prestressing strand, mm
𝑓𝑝𝑐 compressive stress in concrete, after
𝑑𝑝 distance from extreme compression fiber to
allowance for all prestress losses, at
centroid of prestressing reinforcement, mm
centroid of cross section resisting
𝑑𝑝𝑖𝑙𝑒 diameter of pile at footing base, mm externally applied loads or at junction of
𝐷 effect of service dead load web and flange where the centroid lies
𝑒ℎ distance from the inner surface of the shaft within the flange, MPa. In a composite
of a J- or L-bolt to the outer tip of the J- or member, 𝑓𝑝𝑐 is the resultant compressive
L-bolt, mm stress at centroid of composite section, or at
𝑒𝑁′ distance between resultant tension load on junction of web and flange where the
a group of anchors loaded in tension and the centroid lies within the flange, due to both
centroid of the group of anchors loaded in prestress and moments resisted by precast
tension, mm; 𝑒𝑁′ is always positive member acting alone
𝑒𝑉′ distance between resultant shear load on a 𝑓𝑝𝑒 compressive stress in concrete due only to
group of anchors loaded in shear in the
effective prestress forces, after allowance
same direction, and the centroid of the
for all prestress losses, at extreme fiber of
group of anchors loaded in shear in the
section if tensile stress is caused by
same direction, mm; 𝑒𝑉′ is always positive
externally applied loads, MPa
𝐸 effect of horizontal and vertical
𝑓𝑝𝑠 stress in prestressing reinforcement at
earthquake-induced forces
nominal flexural strength, MPa
𝐸𝑐 modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa

SBC 304-CR-18 6
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

𝑓𝑝𝑢 specified tensile strength of prestressing 𝐻 effect of service load due to lateral earth
reinforcement, MPa pressure, ground water pressure, or
𝑓𝑝𝑦 specified yield strength of prestressing pressure of bulk materials, N
reinforcement, MPa 𝐼 moment of inertia of section about
𝑓𝑟 modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa centroidal axis, mm4
𝑓𝑠 tensile stress in reinforcement at service 𝐼𝑏 moment of inertia of gross section of beam
loads, excluding prestressing about centroidal axis, mm4
reinforcement, MPa 𝐼𝑐𝑟 moment of inertia of cracked section
𝑓𝑠′ compressive stress in reinforcement under transformed to concrete, mm4
factored loads, excluding prestressing 𝐼𝑒 effective moment of inertia for calculation
reinforcement, MPa of deflection, mm4
𝑓𝑠𝑒 effective stress in prestressing 𝐼𝑔 moment of inertia of gross concrete section
reinforcement, after allowance for all about centroidal axis, neglecting
prestress losses, MPa reinforcement, mm4
𝑓𝑡 extreme fiber stress in the precompressed 𝐼𝑠 moment of inertia of gross section of slab
tension zone calculated at service loads about centroidal axis, mm4
using gross section properties after 𝐼𝑠𝑒 moment of inertia of reinforcement about
allowance of all prestress losses, MPa centroidal axis of member cross section,
𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 specified tensile strength of anchor steel, mm4
MPa 𝐼𝑠𝑥 moment of inertia of structural steel shape,
𝑓𝑦 specified yield strength for nonprestressed pipe, or tubing about centroidal axis of
reinforcement, MPa composite member cross section, mm4
𝑓𝑦𝑎 specified yield strength of anchor steel, 𝑘 effective length factor for compression
MPa members
𝑓𝑦𝑡 specified yield strength of transverse 𝑘𝑐 coefficient for basic concrete breakout
reinforcement, MPa strength in tension
𝐹 effect of service lateral load due to fluids 𝑘𝑐𝑝 coefficient for pryout strength
with well-defined pressures and maximum 𝑘𝑓 concrete strength factor
heights 𝑘𝑛 confinement effectiveness factor
𝐹𝑛𝑛 nominal strength at face of a nodal zone, N 𝐾𝑡𝑟 transverse reinforcement index, mm
𝐹𝑛𝑠 nominal strength of a strut, N 𝑙 span length of beam or one-way slab; clear
𝐹𝑛𝑡 nominal strength of a tie, N projection of cantilever, mm
𝐹𝑢𝑛 factored force on the face of a node, N 𝑙𝑎 additional embedment length beyond
𝐹𝑢𝑠 factored compressive force in a strut, N centerline of support or point of inflection,
𝐹𝑢𝑡 factored tensile force in a tie, N mm
ℎ overall thickness, height, or depth of 𝑙𝑐 length of compression member, measured
member, mm center- to-center of the joints, mm
ℎ𝑎 thickness of member in which an anchor is 𝑙𝑑 development length in tension of deformed
located, measured parallel to anchor axis, bar, deformed wire, plain and deformed
mm welded wire reinforcement, or pretensioned
ℎ𝑒𝑓 effective embedment depth of anchor, mm strand, mm
ℎ𝑠𝑥 story height for story x, mm 𝑙𝑑𝑐 development length in compression of
ℎ𝑢 laterally unsupported height at extreme deformed bars and deformed wire, mm
compression fiber of wall or wall pier, mm, 𝑙𝑑𝑏 debonded length of prestressed
equivalent to 𝑙𝑢 for compression members reinforcement at end of member, mm
ℎ𝑣 depth of shearhead cross section, mm 𝑙𝑑ℎ development length in tension of deformed
ℎ𝑤 height of entire wall from base to top, or bar or deformed wire with a standard hook,
clear height of wall segment or wall pier measured from outside end of hook, point
considered, mm of tangency, toward critical section, mm
ℎ𝑥 maximum center-to-center spacing of 𝑙𝑑𝑡 development length in tension of headed
longitudinal bars laterally supported by deformed bar, measured from the bearing
corners of crossties or hoop legs around the face of the head toward the critical section,
perimeter of the column, mm mm
𝑙𝑒 load bearing length of anchor for shear, mm

SBC 304-CR-18 7
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

𝑙𝑒𝑥𝑡 straight extension at the end of a standard 𝑀𝑜 total factored static moment, N-mm
hook, mm 𝑀𝑝 required plastic moment strength of shear-
𝑙𝑛 length of clear span measured face-to-face head cross section, N-mm
of supports, mm 𝑀𝑝𝑟 probable flexural strength of members,
𝑙𝑜 length, measured from joint face along axis with or without axial load, determined
of member, over which special transverse using the properties of the member at joint
reinforcement must be provided, mm faces assuming a tensile stress in the
𝑙𝑠𝑐 compression lap splice length, mm longitudinal bars of at least 1.25𝑓𝑦 and a
𝑙𝑠𝑡 tension lap splice length, mm strength reduction factor ϕ of 1.0, N-mm
𝑙𝑡 span of member under load test, taken as 𝑀𝑠𝑎 maximum moment in wall due to service
the shorter span for two-way slab systems, loads, excluding 𝑃∆ effects, N-mm
mm. Span is the lesser of: (a) distance 𝑀𝑠𝑐 factored slab moment that is resisted by the
between centers of supports, and (b) clear column at a joint, N-mm
distance between supports plus thickness ℎ 𝑀𝑢 factored moment at section, N-mm
of member. Span for a cantilever shall be 𝑀𝑢𝑎 moment at mid-height of wall due to
taken as twice the distance from face of factored lateral and eccentric vertical loads,
support to cantilever end not including 𝑃∆ effects, N-mm
𝑙𝑡𝑟 transfer length of prestressed 𝑀𝑣 moment resistance contributed by
reinforcement, mm shearhead reinforcement, N-mm
𝑙𝑢 unsupported length of column or wall, mm 𝑀1 lesser factored end moment on a
𝑙𝑣 length of shearhead arm from centroid of compression member, N-mm
concentrated load or reaction, mm 𝑀1𝑛𝑠 factored end moment on a compression
𝑙𝑤 length of entire wall, or length of wall member at the end at which 𝑀1 acts, due to
segment or wall pier considered in direction loads that cause no appreciable sidesway,
of shear force, mm calculated using a first-order elastic frame
𝑙1 length of span in direction that moments are analysis, N-mm
being determined, measured center-to- 𝑀1𝑠 factored end moment on compression
center of supports, mm member at the end at which 𝑀1 acts, due to
𝑙2 length of span in direction perpendicular to loads that cause appreciable sidesway,
𝑙1 , measured center-to-center of supports, calculated using a first-order elastic frame
mm analysis, N-mm
𝐿 effect of service live load 𝑀2 greater factored end moment on a
𝐿𝑟 effect of service roof live load compression member. If transverse loading
𝑀𝑎 maximum moment in member due to occurs between supports, 𝑀2 is taken as the
service loads at stage deflection is largest moment occurring in member.
calculated, N-mm Value of 𝑀2 is always positive, N-mm
𝑀𝑐 factored moment amplified for the effects 𝑀2,𝑚𝑖𝑛 minimum value of M2, N-mm
of member curvature used for design of
𝑀2𝑛𝑠 factored end moment on compression
compression member, N-mm
member at the end at which 𝑀2 acts, due to
𝑀𝑐𝑟 cracking moment, N-mm
loads that cause no appreciable sidesway,
𝑀𝑐𝑟𝑒 moment causing flexural cracking at
calculated using a first-order elastic frame
section due to externally applied loads, N-
analysis, N-mm
mm
𝑀2𝑠 factored end moment on compression
𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 maximum factored moment at section due
member at the end at which 𝑀2 acts, due to
to externally applied loads, N-mm
loads that cause appreciable sidesway,
𝑀𝑛 nominal flexural strength at section, N-mm
calculated using a first-order elastic frame
𝑀𝑛𝑏 nominal flexural strength of beam analysis, N-mm
including slab where in tension, framing
𝑛 number of items, such as, bars, wires,
into joint, N-mm
monostrand anchorage devices, anchors, or
𝑀𝑛𝑐 nominal flexural strength of column shearhead arms
framing into joint, calculated for factored
𝑛𝑙 number of longitudinal bars around the
axial force, consistent with the direction of
perimeter of a column core with rectilinear
lateral forces considered, resulting in
hoops that are laterally supported by the
lowest flexural strength, N-mm

SBC 304-CR-18 8
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

corner of hoops or by seismic hooks. A 𝑝ℎ perimeter of centerline of outermost closed

bundle of bars is counted as a single bar transverse torsional reinforcement, mm
𝑁𝑎 nominal bond strength in tension of a single 𝑃𝑐 critical buckling load, N
adhesive anchor, N 𝑃𝑛 nominal axial compressive strength of
𝑁𝑎𝑔 nominal bond strength in tension of a group member, N
of adhesive anchors, N 𝑃𝑛,𝑚𝑎𝑥 maximum nominal axial compressive
𝑁𝑏 basic concrete breakout strength in tension strength of a member, N
of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N 𝑃𝑛𝑡 nominal axial tensile strength of member,
𝑁𝑏𝑎 basic bond strength in tension of a single N
adhesive anchor, N 𝑃𝑛𝑡,𝑚𝑎𝑥 maximum nominal axial tensile strength of
𝑁𝑐 resultant tensile force acting on the portion member, N
of the concrete cross section that is 𝑃𝑜 nominal axial strength at zero eccentricity,
subjected to tensile stresses due to the N
combined effects of service loads and 𝑃𝑝𝑢 factored prestressing force at anchorage
effective prestress, N device, N
𝑁𝑐𝑏 nominal concrete breakout strength in 𝑃𝑠 unfactored axial load at the design,
tension of a single anchor, N midheight section including effects of self-
𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 nominal concrete breakout strength in weight, N
tension of a group of anchors, N 𝑃𝑢 factored axial force; to be taken as positive
𝑁𝑐𝑝 basic concrete pryout strength of a single for compression and negative for tension, N
anchor, N 𝑃∆ secondary moment due to lateral deflection,
𝑁𝑐𝑝𝑔 basic concrete pryout strength of a group of N-mm
anchors, N 𝑞𝐷𝑢 factored dead load per unit area, N/m2
𝑁𝑛 nominal strength in tension, N 𝑞𝐿𝑢 factored live load per unit area, N/m2
𝑁𝑝 pullout strength in tension of a single 𝑞𝑢 factored load per unit area, N/m2
anchor in cracked concrete, N 𝑄 stability index for a story
𝑁𝑝𝑛 nominal pullout strength in tension of a 𝑟 radius of gyration of cross section, mm
single anchor, N 𝑅 cumulative load effect of service rain load
𝑁𝑠𝑎 nominal strength of a single anchor or 𝑠 center-to-center spacing of items, such as
individual anchor in a group of anchors in longitudinal reinforcement, transverse
tension as governed by the steel strength, N reinforcement, tendons, or anchors, mm
𝑁𝑠𝑏 side-face blowout strength of a 𝑠𝑖 center-to-center spacing of reinforcement
single anchor, N in the i-th direction adjacent to the surface
𝑁𝑠𝑏𝑔 side-face blowout strength of a group of of the member, mm
anchors, N 𝑠𝑜 center-to-center spacing of transverse
𝑁𝑢 factored axial force normal to cross section reinforcement within the length 𝑙𝑜 , mm
occurring simultaneously with 𝑉𝑢 or 𝑇𝑢 ; to 𝑠𝑠 sample standard deviation, MPa
be taken as positive for compression and 𝑠𝑤 clear distance between adjacent webs, mm
negative for tension, N 𝑠2 center-to-center spacing of longitudinal
𝑁𝑢𝑎 factored tensile force applied to anchor or shear or torsional reinforcement, mm
individual anchor in a group of anchors, N 𝑆 effect of service snow load
𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑔 total factored tensile force applied to 𝑆𝑒 moment, shear, or axial force at connection
corresponding to development of probable
anchor group, N
strength at intended yield locations, based
𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑖 factored tensile force applied to most
on the governing mechanism of inelastic
highly stressed anchor in a group of
lateral deformation, considering both
anchors, N
gravity and earthquake effects
𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑠 factored sustained tension load, N
𝑆𝑚 elastic section modulus, mm3
𝑁𝑢𝑐 factored horizontal tensile force applied at 𝑆𝑛 nominal moment, shear, axial, torsional, or
top of bracket or corbel acting bearing strength
simultaneously with 𝑉𝑢 , to be taken as 𝑆𝑦 yield strength of connection, based on 𝑓𝑦 of
positive for tension, N
the connected part, for moment, shear, or
𝑝𝑐𝑝 outside perimeter of concrete cross section,
axial force, MPa
mm 𝑡 wall thickness of hollow section, mm

SBC 304-CR-18 9
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

𝑡𝑓 thickness of flange, mm 𝑉𝑛ℎ nominal horizontal shear strength, N

𝑇 cumulative effects of service temperature, 𝑉𝑝 vertical component of effective prestress
creep, shrinkage, differential settlement, force at section, N
and shrinkage-compensating concrete 𝑉𝑠 nominal shear strength provided by shear
𝑇𝑐𝑟 cracking torsional moment, N-mm reinforcement, N
𝑇𝑡 total test load, N 𝑉𝑠𝑎 nominal shear strength of a single anchor or
𝑇𝑡ℎ threshold torsional moment, N-mm individual anchor in a group of anchors as
𝑇𝑛 nominal torsional moment strength, N-mm governed by the steel strength, N
𝑇𝑢 factored torsional moment at section, N- 𝑉𝑢 factored shear force at section, N
mm 𝑉𝑢𝑎 factored shear force applied to a single
𝑈 strength of a member or cross section anchor or group of anchors, N
required to resist factored loads or related 𝑉𝑢𝑎,𝑔 total factored shear force applied to anchor
internal moments and forces in such group, N
combinations as stipulated in this Code 𝑉𝑢𝑎,𝑖 factored shear force applied to most highly
𝑣𝑐 stress corresponding to nominal two-way stressed anchor in a group of anchors, N
shear strength provided by concrete, MPa 𝑉𝑢ℎ factored shear force along contact surface
𝑣𝑛 equivalent concrete stress corresponding to in composite concrete flexural member, N
nominal two-way shear strength of slab or 𝑉𝑢𝑠 factored horizontal shear in a story, N
footing, MPa 𝑤𝑐 density, unit weight, of normalweight
𝑣𝑠 equivalent concrete stress corresponding to concrete or equilibrium density of
nominal two-way shear strength provided lightweight concrete, kg/m3
by reinforcement, MPa 𝑤𝑢 factored load per unit length of beam or
𝑣𝑢 maximum factored two-way shear stress one-way slab, N/mm
calculated around the perimeter of a given 𝑤/𝑐𝑚 water-cementitious material ratio
critical section, MPa 𝑊 effect of wind load
𝑣𝑢𝑔 factored shear stress on the slab critical 𝑥 shorter overall dimension of rectangular
section for two-way action due to gravity part of cross section, mm
loads without moment transfer, MPa 𝑦 longer overall dimension of rectangular
𝑉𝑏 basic concrete breakout strength in shear of part of cross section, mm
a single anchor in cracked concrete, N 𝑦𝑡 distance from centroidal axis of gross
𝑉𝑐 nominal shear strength provided by section, neglecting reinforcement, to
concrete, N tension face, mm
𝑉𝑐𝑏 nominal concrete breakout strength in shear α angle defining the orientation of
of a single anchor, N reinforcement
𝑉𝑐𝑏𝑔 nominal concrete breakout strength in shear αc coefficient defining the relative
of a group of anchors, N contribution of concrete strength to
𝑉𝑐𝑖 nominal shear strength provided by nominal wall shear strength
concrete where diagonal cracking results α𝑓 ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to
from combined shear and moment, N flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
𝑉𝑐𝑝 nominal concrete pryout strength of a laterally by centerlines of adjacent panels,
single anchor, N if any, on each side of the beam
𝑉𝑐𝑝𝑔 nominal concrete pryout strength of a group α𝑓𝑚 average value of α𝑓 for all beams on edges
of anchors, N of a panel
𝑉𝑐𝑤 nominal shear strength provided by α𝑓1 α𝑓 in direction of 𝑙1
concrete where diagonal cracking results α𝑓2 α𝑓 in direction of 𝑙2
from high principal tensile stress in web, N α𝑖 angle between the axis of a strut and the
𝑉𝑑 shear force at section due to unfactored bars in the i-th layer of reinforcement
dead load, N crossing that strut
𝑉𝑒 design shear force for load combinations α𝑠 constant used to calculate 𝑉𝑐 in slabs and
including earthquake effects, N footings
𝑉𝑖 factored shear force at section due to α𝑣 ratio of flexural stiffness of shearhead arm
externally applied loads occurring to that of the surrounding composite slab
simultaneously with 𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 , N section
𝑉𝑛 nominal shear strength, N

SBC 304-CR-18 10
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

α1 orientation of distributed reinforcement in ∆𝑛 calculated out-of-plane deflection at

a strut midheight of wall corresponding to
α2 orientation of reinforcement orthogonal to nominal flexural strength 𝑀𝑛 , mm
α1 in a strut ∆𝑜 relative lateral deflection between the top
β ratio of long to short dimensions: clear and bottom of a story due to 𝑉𝑢𝑠 , mm
spans for two-way slabs, sides of column, ∆𝑓𝑝 increase in stress in prestressing
concentrated load or reaction area; or sides reinforcement due to factored loads, MPa
of a footing ∆𝑓𝑝𝑠 stress in prestressing reinforcement at
β𝑏 ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total service loads less decompression stress,
area of tension reinforcement at section MPa
β𝑑𝑛𝑠 ratio used to account for reduction of ∆𝑟 residual deflection measured 24 hours after
stiffness of columns due to sustained axial removal of the test load. For the first load
loads test, residual deflection is measured relative
β𝑑𝑠 the ratio of maximum factored sustained to the position of the structure at the
shear within a story to the maximum beginning of the first load test. For the
factored shear in that story associated with second load test, residual deflection is
the same load combination measured relative to the position of the
β𝑛 factor used to account for the effect of the structure at the beginning of the second
anchorage of ties on the effective load test, mm
compressive strength of a nodal zone ∆𝑠 out-of-plane deflection due to service
β𝑠 factor used to account for the effect of loads, mm
cracking and confining reinforcement on ∆𝑢 calculated out-of-plane deflection at mid-
the effective compressive strength of the height of wall due to factored loads, mm
concrete in a strut ∆𝑥 design story drift of story 𝑥, mm
β𝑡 ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam ∆1 maximum deflection, during first load test,
section to flexural stiffness of a width of measured 24 hours after application of the
slab equal to span length of beam, center- full test load, mm
to-center of supports ∆2 maximum deflection, during second load
β1 factor relating depth of equivalent test, measured 24 hours after application of
rectangular compressive stress block to the full test load. Deflection is measured
depth of neutral axis relative to the position of the structure at the
γ𝑓 factor used to determine the fraction of 𝑀𝑠𝑐 beginning of the second load test, mm
transferred by slab flexure at slab-column ε𝑡 net tensile strain in extreme layer of
connections longitudinal tension reinforcement at
γ𝑝 factor used for type of prestressing nominal strength, excluding strains due to
reinforcement effective prestress, creep, shrinkage, and
γ𝑠 factor used to determine the portion of temperature
reinforcement located in center band of ε𝑡𝑦 value of net tensile strain in the extreme
footing layer of longitudinal tension reinforcement
γ𝑣 factor used to determine the fraction of 𝑀𝑠𝑐 used to define a compression-controlled
transferred by eccentricity of shear at slab- section
column connections θ angle between axis of strut, compression
δ moment magnification factor used to diagonal, or compression field and the
reflect effects of member curvature tension chord of the members
between ends of a compression member λ modification factor to reflect the reduced
δ𝑠 moment magnification factor used for mechanical properties of lightweight
frames not braced against sidesway, to concrete relative to normal weight concrete
reflect lateral drift resulting from lateral of the same compressive strength
and gravity loads λ𝑎 modification factor to reflect the reduced
δ𝑢 design displacement, mm mechanical properties of lightweight
∆𝑐𝑟 calculated out-of-plane deflection at concrete in certain concrete anchorage
midheight of wall corresponding to applications
cracking moment 𝑀𝑐𝑟 , mm λΔ multiplier used for additional deflection
due to long-term effects

SBC 304-CR-18 11
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

μ coefficient of friction ψ𝑒𝑐,𝑉 factor used to modify shear strength of

ξ time-dependent factor for sustained load anchors based on eccentricity of applied
ρ ratio of 𝐴𝑠 to 𝑏𝑑 loads
ρ′ ratio of 𝐴′𝑠 to 𝑏𝑑 ψ𝑒𝑑,𝑁 factor used to modify tensile strength of
ρ𝑙 ratio of area of distributed longitudinal anchors based on proximity to edges of
reinforcement to gross concrete area concrete member
perpendicular to that reinforcement ψ𝑒𝑑,𝑁𝑎 factor used to modify tensile strength of
ρ𝑝 ratio of 𝐴𝑝𝑠 to 𝑏𝑑𝑝 adhesive anchors based on proximity to
ρ𝑠 ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to edges of concrete member
total volume of core confined by the spiral, ψ𝑒𝑑,𝑉 factor used to modify shear strength of
measured out-to-out of spirals anchors based on proximity to edges of
ρ𝑡 ratio of area of distributed transverse concrete member
reinforcement to gross concrete area ψℎ,𝑉 factor used to modify shear strength of
perpendicular to that reinforcement anchors located in concrete members with
ρ𝑣 ratio of tie reinforcement area to area of ℎ𝑎 < 1.5𝑐𝑎1
contact surface ψ𝑟 factor used to modify development length
ρ𝑤 ratio of 𝐴𝑠 to 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 based on confining reinforcement
ϕ strength reduction factor ψ𝑠 factor used to modify development length
τ𝑐𝑟 characteristic bond stress of adhesive based on reinforcement size
anchor in cracked concrete, MPa ψ𝑡 factor used to modify development length
τ𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑟 characteristic bond stress of adhesive for casting location in tension
anchor in uncracked concrete, MPa ψ𝑤 factor used to modify development length
ψ𝑐 factor used to modify development length for welded deformed wire reinforcement in
based on cover tension
ψ𝑐,𝑁 factor used to modify tensile strength of Ω𝑜 amplification factor to account for over-
anchors based on presence or absence of strength of the seismic-force-resisting
cracks in concrete system determined in accordance with SBC
ψ𝑐,𝑃 factor used to modify pullout strength of 301
anchors based on presence or absence of
cracks in concrete
2.3—Terminology
ψ𝑐,𝑉 factor used to modify shear strength of adhesive—chemical components formulated from
anchors based on presence or absence of organic polymers, or a combination of
cracks in concrete and presence or absence organic polymers and inorganic materials
of supplementary reinforcement that cure if blended together.
ψ𝑐𝑃,𝑁 factor used to modify tensile strength of admixture—material other than water, aggregate,
post-installed anchors intended for use in or hydraulic cement, used as an ingredient
uncracked concrete without supplementary of concrete and added to concrete before or
reinforcement to account for the splitting during its mixing to modify its properties.
tensile stresses due to installation. aggregate—granular material, such as sand, gravel,
ψ𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 factor used to modify tensile strength of crushed stone, and iron blast-furnace slag,
adhesive anchors intended for use in used with a cementing medium to form
uncracked concrete without supplementary concrete or mortar.
reinforcement to account for the splitting aggregate, lightweight—aggregate meeting the
tensile stresses due to installation requirements of ASTM C330 and having a
ψ𝑒 factor used to modify development length loose bulk density of 1120 kg/m3 or less,
based on reinforcement coating determined in accordance with ASTM C29 .
ψ𝑒𝑐,𝑁 factor used to modify tensile strength of anchor—a steel element either cast into concrete or
anchors based on eccentricity of applied post-installed into a hardened concrete
loads member and used to transmit applied loads
ψ𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎 factor used to modify tensile strength of to the concrete.
anchor, adhesive—a post-installed anchor,
adhesive anchors based on eccentricity of
inserted into hardened concrete with an
applied loads
anchor hole diameter not greater than 1.5
times the anchor diameter, that transfers

SBC 304-CR-18 12
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

loads to the concrete by bond between the transferred to concrete and distributed more
anchor and the adhesive, and bond between uniformly across the section; its extent is
the adhesive and the concrete. equal to the largest dimension of the cross
anchor, cast-in—headed bolt, headed stud, or section; for anchorage devices located
hooked bolt installed before placing away from the end of a member, the
concrete. anchorage zone includes the disturbed
anchor, expansion—post-installed anchor, regions ahead of and behind the anchorage
inserted into hardened concrete that device.
transfers loads to or from the concrete by attachment—structural assembly, external to the
direct bearing or friction, or both. surface of the concrete, that transmits loads
anchor, horizontal or upwardly inclined— to or receives loads from the anchor.
anchor installed in a hole drilled B-region—portion of a member in which it is
horizontally or in a hole drilled at any reasonable to assume that strains due to
orientation above horizontal. flexure vary linearly through section.
anchor, post-installed—anchor installed in base of structure—level at which horizontal
hardened concrete; adhesive, expansion, earthquake ground motions are assumed to
and undercut anchors are examples of post- be imparted to a building. This level does
installed anchors. not necessarily coincide with the ground
anchor, undercut—post-installed anchor that level.
develops its tensile strength from the beam—member subjected primarily to flexure and
mechanical interlock provided by shear, with or without axial force or torsion;
undercutting of the concrete at the beams in a moment frame that forms part of
embedded end of the anchor. Undercutting the lateral-force-resisting system are
is achieved with a special drill before predominantly horizontal members; a
installing the anchor or alternatively by the girder is a beam.
anchor itself during its installation. boundary element—portion along wall and
anchor group—a number of similar anchors diaphragm edge, including edges of
having approximately equal effective openings, strengthened by longitudinal and
embedment depths with spacing 𝑠 between transverse reinforcement.
adjacent anchors such that the projected breakout strength, concrete—strength
areas overlap. corresponding to a volume of concrete
anchor pullout strength—the strength surrounding the anchor or group of anchors
corresponding to the anchoring device or a separating from the member.
major component of the device sliding out building official—term used to identify the
from the concrete without breaking out a Authority having jurisdiction or individual
substantial portion of the surrounding charged with administration and
concrete. enforcement of provisions of the building
anchorage device—in post-tensioned members, code. Such terms as building commissioner
the hardware used to transfer force from or building inspector are variations of the
prestressed reinforcement to the concrete. title, and the term “building official” as
anchorage device, basic monostrand—anchorage used in this Code, is intended to include
device used with any single strand or a those variations, as well as others that are
single 15 mm or smaller diameter bar that used in the same sense.
is in accordance with 25.8.1, 25.8.2, and cementitious materials—materials that have
25.9.3.1(a). cementing value if used in concrete either
anchorage device, basic multistrand—anchorage by themselves, such as portland cement,
device used with multiple strands, bars, or blended hydraulic cements, and expansive
wires, or with single bars larger than 15 mm cement; or such materials in combination
diameter that satisfies 25.8.1, 25.8.2 and with fly ash, other raw or calcined natural
25.9.3.1(b). pozzolans, silica fume, and slag cement.
anchorage device, special—anchorage device that collector—element that acts in axial tension or
satisfies tests required in 25.9.3.1(c). compression to transmit forces between a
anchorage zone—in post-tensioned members, diaphragm and a vertical element of the
portion of the member through which the lateral-force-resisting system.
concentrated prestressing force is

SBC 304-CR-18 13
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

column—member, usually vertical or concrete, precast—concrete element cast

predominantly vertical, used primarily to elsewhere than its final position in the
support axial compressive load, but that can structure.
also resist moment, shear, or torsion. concrete, prestressed—reinforced concrete in
Columns used as part of a lateral-force- which internal stresses have been
resisting system resist combined axial load, introduced by prestressed reinforcement to
moment, and shear. See also moment reduce potential tensile stresses in concrete
frame. resulting from loads, and for two-way
column capital—enlargement of the top of a slabs, with at least the minimum amount of
concrete column located directly below the prestressed reinforcement.
slab or drop panel that is cast concrete, reinforced—concrete reinforced with at
monolithically with the column. least the minimum amounts of
compliance requirements—construction-related nonprestressed or prestressed
code requirements directed to the reinforcement required by this Code.
contractor to be incorporated into concrete, sand-lightweight—lightweight concrete
construction documents by the licensed containing only normalweight fine
design professional, as applicable. aggregate that conforms to ASTM C33 and
composite concrete flexural members—concrete lightweight coarse aggregate that conforms
flexural members of precast or cast-in- to ASTM C330 .
place concrete elements, constructed in concrete, steel fiber-reinforced—concrete
separate placements but connected so that containing a prescribed amount of
all elements respond to loads as a unit. dispersed, randomly oriented,
compression-controlled section—cross section in discontinuous deformed steel fibers.
which the net tensile strain in the extreme concrete strength, specified compressive, (𝒇′𝒄 )—
tension reinforcement at nominal strength compressive strength of concrete used in
is less than or equal to the compression- design and evaluated in accordance with
controlled strain limit. provisions of this Code, MPa; wherever the
compression-controlled strain limit—net tensile quantity 𝑓𝑐′ is under a radical sign, the
strain at balanced strain conditions. square root of numerical value only is
concrete—mixture of portland cement or any other intended, and the result has units of MPa.
cementitious material, fine aggregate, connection—region of a structure that joins two or
coarse aggregate, and water, with or more members; a connection also refers to
without admixtures. a region that joins members of which one
concrete, all-lightweight—lightweight concrete or more is precast.
containing only lightweight coarse and fine connection, ductile—connection between one or
aggregates that conform to ASTM C330. more precast elements that experiences
concrete, lightweight—concrete containing yielding as a result of the earthquake design
lightweight aggregate and having an displacements.
equilibrium density, as determined by connection, strong—connection between one or
ASTM C567, between 1440 and 1840 more precast elements that remains elastic
kg/m3. while adjoining members experience
concrete, nonprestressed—reinforced concrete yielding as a result of earthquake design
with at least the minimum amount of displacements.
nonprestressed reinforcement and no construction documents—written and graphic
prestressed reinforcement; or for two-way documents and specifications prepared or
slabs, with less than the minimum amount assembled for describing the location,
of prestressed reinforcement. design, materials, and physical
concrete, normalweight—concrete containing characteristics of the elements of a project
only coarse and fine aggregates that necessary for obtaining a building permit
conform to ASTM C33. and construction of the project.
concrete, plain—concrete with no reinforcement contraction joint—formed, sawed, or tooled
or with reinforcement less than the groove in a concrete structure to create a
minimum amount specified for reinforced weakened plane and regulate the location of
concrete. cracking resulting from the dimensional
change of different parts of the structure.

SBC 304-CR-18 14
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

cover, specified concrete—distance between the edge distance—distance from the edge of the
outermost surface of embedded concrete surface to the center of the nearest
reinforcement and the closest outer surface anchor.
of the concrete. effective depth of section—distance measured
crosstie—a continuous reinforcing bar having a from extreme compression fiber to centroid
seismic hook at one end and a hook not less of longitudinal tension reinforcement.
than 90 degrees with at least a 6𝑑𝑏 effective embedment depth—overall depth
extension at the other end. The hooks shall through which the anchor transfers force to
engage peripheral longitudinal bars. The or from the surrounding concrete; effective
90-degree hooks of two successive embedment depth will normally be the
crossties engaging the same longitudinal depth of the concrete failure surface in
bars shall be alternated end for end. tension applications; for cast-in headed
D-region—portion of a member within a distance ℎ anchor bolts and headed studs, the effective
of a force discontinuity or a geometric embedment depth is measured from the
discontinuity. bearing contact surface of the head.
design displacement—total lateral displacement effective prestress—stress remaining in
expected for the design-basis earthquake, prestressed reinforcement after losses in
as specified by Section 12.8.6 of SBC 301. 20.3.2.6 have occurred.
design information—project-specific information embedments—items embedded in concrete,
to be incorporated into construction excluding reinforcement as defined in
documents by the licensed design Chapter 20 and anchors as defined in
professional, as applicable. Chapter 17. Reinforcement or anchors
design load combination—combination of welded, bolted or otherwise connected to
factored loads and forces. the embedded item to develop the strength
design story drift ratio—relative difference of of the assembly, are considered to be part
design displacement between the top and of the embedment.
bottom of a story, divided by the story embedments, pipe—embedded pipes, conduits,
height. and sleeves.
development length—length of embedded embedment length—length of embedded
reinforcement, including pretensioned reinforcement provided beyond a critical
strand, required to develop the design section.
strength of reinforcement at a critical equilibrium density—density of lightweight
section. concrete determined in accordance with
discontinuity—abrupt change in geometry or ASTM C567 after exposure to a relative
loading. humidity of 50 ± 5 percent and a
distance sleeve—sleeve that encases the center part temperature of 23 ± 2°C for a period of time
of an undercut anchor, a torque-controlled sufficient to reach constant density.
expansion anchor, or a displacement- expansion sleeve—outer part of an expansion
controlled expansion anchor, but does not anchor that is forced outward by the center
expand. part, either by applied torque or impact, to
drop panel—projection below the slab used to bear against the sides of the predrilled hole.
reduce the amount of negative See also anchor, expansion.
reinforcement over a column or the extreme tension reinforcement—layer of
minimum required slab thickness, and to prestressed or nonprestressed
increase the slab shear strength. reinforcement that is the farthest from the
duct—conduit, plain or corrugated, to extreme compression fiber.
accommodate prestressing reinforcement finite element analysis—a numerical modeling
for post-tensioning applications. technique in which a structure is divided
durability—ability of a structure or member to into a number of discrete elements for
resist deterioration that impairs analysis.
performance or limits service life of the five percent fractile—statistical term meaning 90
structure in the relevant environment percent confidence that there is 95 percent
considered in design. probability of the actual strength exceeding
the nominal strength.

SBC 304-CR-18 15
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

headed deformed bars—deformed bars with joint—portion of structure common to intersecting

heads attached at one or both ends. members.
headed bolt—cast-in steel anchor that develops its licensed design professional—an individual who
tensile strength from the mechanical is licensed to practice structural design as
interlock provided by either a head or nut at defined by the statutory requirements of the
the embedded end of the anchor. professional licensing laws of the country
headed stud—a steel anchor conforming to the or jurisdiction in which the project is to be
requirements of AWS D1.1 and affixed to a constructed, and who is in responsible
plate or similar steel attachment by the stud charge of the structural design.
arc welding process before casting; also load—forces or other actions that result from the
referred to as a welded headed stud. weight of all building materials, occupants,
headed shear stud reinforcement—reinforcement and their possessions, environmental
consisting of individual headed studs or effects, differential movement, and
groups of studs, with anchorage provided restrained dimensional changes; permanent
by a head at each end, or by a head at one loads are those loads in which variations
end and a common base rail consisting of a over time are rare or of small magnitude; all
steel plate or shape at the other end. other loads are variable loads.
hooked bolt—cast-in anchor anchored mainly by load, dead—(a) the weights of the members,
bearing of the 90-degree bend (L-bolt) or supported structure, and permanent
180-degree bend (J-bolt) against the attachments or accessories that are likely to
concrete, at its embedded end, and having a be present on a structure in service; or (b)
minimum 𝑒ℎ equal to 3𝑑𝑎 . loads meeting specific criteria available in
hoop—closed tie or continuously wound tie, made SBC 301; without load factors.
up of one or several reinforcement load, factored—load, multiplied by appropriate
elements, each having seismic hooks at load factors.
both ends. A closed tie shall not be made up load, live—(a) load that is not permanently applied
of interlocking headed deformed bars. See to a structure, but is likely to occur during
25.7.4. the service life of the structure (excluding
inspection—observation, verification, and required environmental loads); or (b) loads meeting
documentation of the materials, specific criteria available in SBC 301;
installation, fabrication, erection, or without load factors.
placement of components and connections load, roof live—a load on a roof produced: (a)
to determine compliance with construction during maintenance by workers,
documents and referenced standards. equipment, and materials, and (b) during
inspection, continuous—the full-time observation, the life of the structure by movable objects,
verification, and required documentation of such as planters or other similar small
work in the area where the work is being decorative appurtenances that are not
performed. occupancy related; or loads meeting
inspection, periodic—the part-time or intermittent specific criteria available in SBC 301;
observation, verification, and required without load factors.
documentation of work in the area where load, service—all loads, static or transitory,
the work is being performed. imposed on a structure or element thereof,
isolation joint—separation between adjoining during the operation of a facility, without
parts of a concrete structure, usually a load factors.
vertical plane at a designed location such as load path—sequence of members and connections
to interfere least with performance of the designed to transfer the factored loads and
structure, yet such as to allow relative forces in such combinations as are
movement in three directions and avoid stipulated in this Code, from the point of
formation of cracks elsewhere in the application or origination through the
concrete, and through which all or part of structure to the final support location or the
the bonded reinforcement is interrupted. foundation.
jacking force—in prestressed concrete, temporary Manufacturer’s Printed Installation
force exerted by a device that introduces Instructions (MPII)—published
tension into prestressing reinforcement. instructions for the correct installation of an
adhesive anchor under all covered

SBC 304-CR-18 16
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

installation conditions as supplied in the precompressed tension zone—portion of a

product packaging. prestressed member where flexural tension,
modulus of elasticity—ratio of normal stress to calculated using gross section properties,
corresponding strain for tensile or would occur under service loads if the
compressive stresses below proportional prestress force was not present.
limit of material. pretensioning—method of prestressing in which
moment frame—frame in which beams, slabs, prestressing reinforcement is tensioned
columns, and joints resist forces before concrete is cast.
predominantly through flexure, shear, and projected area—area on the free surface of the
axial force; beams or slabs are concrete member that is used to represent
predominantly horizontal or nearly the greater base of the assumed rectilinear
horizontal; columns are predominantly failure surface.
vertical or nearly vertical. projected influence area—rectilinear area on the
moment frame, intermediate—cast-in-place free surface of the concrete member that is
beam-column frame or two-way slab- used to calculate the bond strength of
column frame without beams complying adhesive anchors.
with 18.4. pryout strength, concrete—strength
moment frame, ordinary—cast-in-place or corresponding to formation of a concrete
precast concrete beam-column or slab- spall behind short, stiff anchors displaced
column frame complying with 18.3. in the direction opposite to the applied
moment frame, special—cast-in-place beam- shear force.
column frame complying with 18.2.3 reinforcement—steel element or elements
through 18.2.8; and 18.6 through 18.8. A embedded in concrete and conforming to
precast beam-column frame complying 20.2 through 20.5. Prestressed
with 18.2.3 through 18.2.8 and 18.9. reinforcement in external tendons is also
net tensile strain—the tensile strain at nominal considered reinforcement.
strength exclusive of strains due to reinforcement, anchor—reinforcement used to
effective prestress, creep, shrinkage, and transfer the design load from the anchors
temperature. into the structural member.
nodal zone—volume of concrete around a node reinforcement, bonded prestressed—
that is assumed to transfer strut-and-tie pretensioned reinforcement or prestressed
forces through the node. reinforcement in a bonded tendon.
node—point in a strut-and-tie model where the axes reinforcement, deformed—deformed bars,
of the struts, ties, and concentrated forces welded bar mats, deformed wire,
acting on the joint intersect. and welded wire reinforcement conforming
one-way construction—members designed to be to 20.2.1.3, 20.2.1.5, or 20.2.1.7
capable of supporting all loads through excluding plain wire.
bending in a single direction; see also two- reinforcement, nonprestressed—bonded
way construction. reinforcement that is not prestressed.
pedestal—member with a ratio of height-to-least reinforcement, plain—bars or wires conforming to
lateral dimension less than or equal to 3 20.2.1.4 or 20.2.1.7 that do not conform to
used primarily to support axial compressive definition of deformed reinforcement.
load; for a tapered member, the least lateral reinforcement, prestressed—prestressing
dimension is the average of the top and reinforcement that has been tensioned to
bottom dimensions of the smaller side. impart forces to concrete.
plastic hinge region—length of frame element reinforcement, prestressing—high-strength
over which flexural yielding is intended to reinforcement such as strand, wire, or bar
occur due to earthquake design conforming to 20.3.1.
displacements, extending not less than a reinforcement, supplementary—reinforcement
distance ℎ from the critical section where that acts to restrain the potential concrete
flexural yielding initiates. breakout but is not designed to transfer the
post-tensioning—method of prestressing in which design load from the anchors into the
prestressing reinforcement is tensioned structural member.
after concrete has hardened. reinforcement, welded deformed steel bar mat—
mat conforming to 20.2.1.5 consisting of

SBC 304-CR-18 17
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

two layers of deformed bars at right angles span length—distance between supports.
to each other welded at the intersections. special seismic systems—structural systems that
reinforcement, welded wire—plain or deformed use special moment frames, special
wire fabricated into sheets or rolls structural walls, or both.
conforming to 20.2.1.7. specialty insert—predesigned and prefabricated
Sabkha —a saline flat land underlain by sand, silt cast-in anchors specifically designed for
or clay which is often encrusted with salt. attachment of bolted or slotted connections.
These soils either border partially land- spiral reinforcement—continuously wound
locked seas or cover a number of reinforcement in the form of a cylindrical
continental depressions. Both of these types helix.
are usually formed in hot, arid climates and splitting tensile strength (𝑓𝑐𝑡 )—tensile strength of
are associated with shallow groundwater concrete determined in accordance with
table. The salinity of sabkha soil is three to ASTM C496 as described in ASTM C330.
five times that of seawater from the same steel element, brittle—element with a tensile test
vicinity. elongation of less than 14 percent, or
Seismic Design Category—classification assigned reduction in area of less than 30 percent at
to a structure based on its occupancy failure.
category and the severity of the design steel element, ductile—element with a tensile test
earthquake ground motion at the site, as elongation of at least 14 percent and
defined by SBC 301. Also denoted by the reduction in area of at least 30 percent; steel
abbreviation SDC. element meeting the requirements of
seismic-force-resisting system—portion of the ASTM A307 shall be considered ductile;
structure designed to resist earthquake except as modified by for earthquake
effects required by SBC 301 using the effects, deformed reinforcing bars meeting
applicable provisions and load the requirements of ASTM A615, A706, or
combinations. A955 shall be considered as ductile steel
seismic hook—hook on a stirrup, hoop, or crosstie elements.
having a bend not less than 135 degrees, stirrup—reinforcement used to resist shear and
except that circular hoops shall have a bend torsion forces in a member; typically
not less than 90 degrees; hooks shall have deformed bars, deformed wires, or welded
an extension of at least 6𝑑𝑏 , but not less wire reinforcement either single leg or bent
than 75 mm. The hooks shall engage the into L, U, or rectangular shapes and located
longitudinal reinforcement and the perpendicular to, or at an angle to,
extension shall project into the interior of longitudinal reinforcement. See also tie.
the stirrup or hoop. strength, design—nominal strength multiplied by
shear cap—projection below the slab used to a strength reduction factor ϕ.
increase the slab shear strength. strength, nominal—strength of a member or cross
sheathing—material encasing prestressing section calculated in accordance with
reinforcement to prevent bonding of the provisions and assumptions of the strength
prestressing reinforcement with the design method of this Code before
surrounding concrete, to provide corrosion application of any strength reduction
protection, and to contain the corrosion- factors.
inhibiting coating. strength, required—strength of a member or cross
side-face blowout strength, concrete—strength of section required to resist factored loads or
anchors with deep embedment and thin related internal moments and forces in such
side-face cover such that spalling occurs on combinations as stipulated in this Code.
the side face around the embedded head stretch length—length of anchor, extending
without breakout occurring at the top beyond concrete in which it is anchored,
concrete surface. subject to full tensile load applied to
spacing—center-to-center distance between anchor, and for which cross-sectional area
adjacent items, such as longitudinal is minimum and constant.
reinforcement, transverse reinforcement, structural concrete—concrete used for structural
prestressing reinforcement, or anchors. purposes, including plain and reinforced
spacing, clear—least dimension between the concrete.
outermost surfaces of adjacent items.

SBC 304-CR-18 18
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

structural diaphragm—member, such as a floor strut, bottle-shaped—strut that is wider at mid-

or roof slab, that transmits forces acting in length than at its ends.
the plane of the member to vertical strut-and-tie model—truss model of a member or
elements of the lateral-force-resisting of a D-region in such a member, made up
system. A structural diaphragm may of struts and ties connected at nodes and
include chords and collectors as part of the capable of transferring the factored loads to
diaphragm. the supports or to adjacent B-regions.
structural integrity—ability of a structure through tendon—in post-tensioned members, a tendon is a
strength, redundancy, ductility, and complete assembly consisting of
detailing of reinforcement to redistribute anchorages, prestressing reinforcement,
stresses and maintain overall stability if and sheathing with coating for unbonded
localized damage or significant overstress applications or ducts filled with grout for
occurs. bonded applications.
structural system—interconnected members tendon, bonded—tendon in which prestressed
designed to meet performance reinforcement is continuously bonded to
requirements. the concrete through grouting of ducts
structural truss—assemblage of reinforced embedded within the concrete cross
concrete members subjected primarily to section.
axial forces. tendon, external—a tendon external to the member
structural wall—wall proportioned to resist concrete cross section in post-tensioned
combinations of shears, moments, and axial applications.
forces in the plane of the wall; a shear wall tendon, unbonded—tendon in which prestressed
is a structural wall. reinforcement is prevented from bonding to
structural wall, ordinary reinforced concrete— the concrete. The prestressing force is
A cast-in-place wall complying with the permanently transferred to the concrete at
requirements of Chapter 1 through Chapter the tendon ends by the anchorages only.
13, Chapter 15, Chapter 16 and Chapter 19 tension-controlled section—a cross section in
through Chapter 26. which the net tensile strain in the extreme
structural wall, ordinary plain concrete—A wall tension steel at nominal strength is greater
complying with the requirements of than or equal to 0.005.
Chapter 14, excluding 14.6.2. tie—(a) loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing
structural wall, detailed plain concrete—a wall longitudinal reinforcement; a continuously
complying with the requirements of wound transverse bar or wire in the form of
Chapter 14, including 14.6.2. a circle, rectangle, or other polygonal shape
structural wall, ordinary precast— A precast without reentrant corners enclosing
wall complying with the requirements of longitudinal reinforcement; see also
Chapter 1 through Chapter 13, Chapter 15, stirrup, hoop; (b) tension element in a
Chapter 16 and Chapter 19 through Chapter strut-and-tie model.
26. transfer—act of transferring stress in prestressing
structural wall, intermediate precast—a wall reinforcement from jacks or pretensioning
complying with 18.5. bed to concrete member.
structural wall, special—A cast-in-place or transfer length—length of embedded pretensioned
precast wall complying with the reinforcement required to transfer the
requirements of 18.2.4 through 18.2.8, effective prestress to the concrete.
18.10 and 18.11, as applicable, in addition two-way construction—members designed to be
to the requirements for ordinary reinforced capable of supporting loads through
concrete structural walls or ordinary bending in two directions; some slabs and
precast structural walls, as applicable. foundations are considered two-way
Where SBC 301 refers to a “special construction. See also one-way
reinforced concrete structural wall,” it shall construction.
be deemed to mean a “special structural wall—a vertical element designed to resist axial
wall.” load, lateral load, or both, with a horizontal
strut—compression member in a strut-and-tie length-to-thickness ratio greater than 3,
model representing the resultant of a used to enclose or separate spaces.
parallel or a fan-shaped compression field.

SBC 304-CR-18 19
 CHAPTER 2—NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY

wall segment—portion of wall bounded by vertical water-cementitious materials ratio—ratio of

or horizontal openings or edges. mass of water, excluding that absorbed by
wall segment, horizontal—segment of a structural the aggregate, to the mass of cementitious
wall, bounded vertically by two openings materials in a mixture, stated as a decimal.
or by an opening and an edge. work—the entire construction or separately
wall segment, vertical—segment of a structural identifiable parts thereof that are required
wall, bounded horizontally by two to be furnished under the construction
openings or by an opening and an edge; documents.
wall piers are vertical wall segments. yield strength—specified minimum yield strength
wall pier—a vertical wall segment within a or yield point of reinforcement; yield
structural wall, bounded horizontally by strength or yield point shall be determined
two openings or by an opening and an edge, in tension according to applicable ASTM
with ratio of horizontal length to wall standards as modified by this Code.
thickness (𝑙𝑤 /𝑏𝑤 ) less than or equal to 6.0,
and ratio of clear height to horizontal length
(ℎ𝑤 /𝑙𝑤 ) greater than or equal to 2.0.

SBC 304-CR-18 20
 CHAPTER 3—REFERENCED STANDARDS

CHAPTER 3—REFERENCED STANDARDS

This chapter lists the standards that are referenced in various sections of this document. The
standards are listed herein by the promulgating agency of the standard, the standard identification,
the effective date and title, and the section or sections of this document that reference the standard.
These standards are listed here for guidance; however, for enforcement, they shall be adopted and/or
approved by the appropriate governmental authority (SASO or SBCNC) as per their mandates,
before being considered part of this code.

Acceptance Criteria for Moment Frames Based on

3.1—Scope
Structural Testing
3.1.1 Standards, or specific sections thereof, 423.7-14—Specification for Unbonded Single-
cited in this Code, including Annex, Appendixes, or
Strand Tendon Materials
Supplements where prescribed, are referenced
without exception in this Code, unless specifically 550.3-13—Design Specification for Unbonded
noted. Cited standards are listed in the following Post-Tensioned Precast Concrete Special
with their serial designations, including year of Moment Frames Satisfying ACI 374.1 and
adoption or revision. Commentary
3.2—Referenced standards ITG-5.1-07—Acceptance Criteria for Special
3.2.1 American Association of State Unbonded Post-Tensioned Precast Structural
Highway and Transportation Officials Walls Based on Validation Testing
(AASHTO) ITG-5.2-09—Requirements for Design of a Special
LRFDUS-6—LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Unbonded Post-Tensioned Precast Wall
6th Edition, 2012, Articles 5.10.9.6, 5.10.9.7.2, Satisfying ACI ITG-5.1 and Commentary
and 5.10.9.7.3. 3.2.3 American Society of Civil Engineers
LRFDCONS-3—LRFD Bridge Construction (ASCE)
Specifications, 3rd Edition, 2010, Article None.
10.3.2.3
3.2.4 ASTM International
3.2.2 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
A36/A36M-12—Standard Specification for Carbon
301-10—Specifications for Structural Concrete, Structural Steel
Article 4.2.3 A53/A53M-12—Standard Specification for Pipe,
318-14—Building Code Requirements for Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Structural Concrete and Commentary Welded and Seamless
318.2-14—Building Code Requirements for Al84/A184M-06(2011)—Standard Specification
Concrete Thin Shells and Commentary for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
332-14—Residential Code Requirements for Concrete Reinforcement
Structural Concrete and Commentary A242/A242M-13—Standard Specification for
355.2-07—Qualification of Post-Installed High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and A307-12—Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
Commentary Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60000 psi
355.4-11—Qualification of Post-Installed Tensile Strength
Adhesive Anchors in Concrete A370-14—Standard Test Methods and Definitions
374.1-05 for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products

SBC 304-CR-18 21
 CHAPTER 3—REFERENCED STANDARDS

A416/A416M-12a—Standard Specification for A970/A970M-13a—Standard Specification for

Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Headed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,
Prestressed Concrete including Annex A1 Requirements for Class HA
A421/A421M-10—Standard Specification for Head Dimensions
Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for A992/A992M-11—Standard Specification for
Prestressed Concrete, including Supplementary Structural Steel Shapes
Requirement SI, Low-Relaxation Wire and Al022/A1022M-14—Standard Specification for
Relaxation Testing Deformed and Plain Stainless Steel Wire and
A500/A500M-13—Standard Specification for Welded Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon A1035/A1035M-14—Standard Specification for
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes Deformed and Plain, Low-Carbon, Chromium,
A501-07—Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural A1044/A1044M-05(2010)—Standard
Tubing Specification for Steel Stud Assemblies for
A572/A572M-13a—Standard Specification for Shear Reinforcement of Concrete
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- A1055/A1055M-10ε1—Standard Specification for
Vanadium Structural Steel Zinc and Epoxy Dual-Coated Steel Reinforcing
A588/A588M-l0—Standard Specification for Bars
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to A1060/A1060M-14—Standard Specification for
50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Welded Wire
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for
A615/A615M-14—Standard Specification for Concrete
Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for A1064/A1064M-13—Standard Specification for
Concrete Reinforcement Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
A706/A706M-14—Standard Specification for Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for
Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for Concrete
Concrete Reinforcement A1085-13—Standard Specification for Cold-
A722/A722M-12—Standard Specification for Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural
Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars for Sections (HSS)
Prestressing Concrete C29/C29M-09—Standard Test Method for Bulk
A767/A767M-09—Standard Specification for Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Aggregate
Concrete Reinforcement C31/C31M-12—Standard Practice for Making and
A775/A775M-07b(2014) —Standard Specification Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars C33/C33M-13—Standard Specification for
A820/A820M-II—Standard Specification for Steel Concrete Aggregates
Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete C39/C39M-14a—Standard Test Method for
A884/A884M-14—Standard Specification for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Specimens
Reinforcement C42/C42M-13—Standard Test Method for
A934/A934M-13—Standard Specification for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Beams of Concrete
Bars C94/C94M-14—Standard Specification for Ready-
A955/A955M-14—Standard Specification for Mixed Concrete
Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel Bars for C144-11—Standard Specification for Aggregate
Concrete Reinforcement for Masonry Mortar

SBC 304-CR-18 22
 CHAPTER 3—REFERENCED STANDARDS

C150/C150M-12—Standard Specification for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing

Portland Cement Agency Evaluation
C172/C172M-14—Standard Practice for Sampling C1116/C1116M-10a—Standard Specification for
Freshly Mixed Concrete Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
C173/C173M-14—Standard Test Method for Air C1157/C1157M-11—Standard Performance
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Specification for Hydraulic Cement
Volumetric Method C1218/C1218M-99(2008) —Standard Test Method
C231/C231M-14—Standard Test Method for Air for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Concrete
Pressure Method C1240-14—Standard Specification for Silica Fume
C260/C260M-10a—Standard Specificationfor Air Used in Cementitious Mixtures
Entraining Admixtures for Concrete C1580-09εl—Standard Test for Water-Soluble
C330/C330M-14—Standard Specification for Sulfate in Soil
Light-weight Aggregates for Structural C1582/C1582M-11—Standard Specification for
Concrete Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-Induced
C494/C494M-13—Standard Specification for Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C1602/C1602M-12—Standard Specification for
C496/C496M-11—Standard Test Method for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Hydraulic Cement Concrete
Concrete Specimens C1609/C1609M-12—Standard Test Method for
C567/C567M-14—Standard Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber-Reinforced
Determining Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete (Using Beam with Third-Point
Concrete Loading)
C618-12a—Standard Specification for Coal Fly D516-11—Standard Test Method for Sulfate Ion in
Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Water
Use in Concrete D4130-08—Standard Test Method for Sulfate Ion
C685/C685M-11—Standard Specification for in Brackish Water, Seawater, and Brines
Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
3.2.5 American Welding Society (AWS)
Continuous Mixing
Dl.1/Dl.1M: 2010—Structural Welding Code Steel
C845/C845M-12—Standard Specification for
D1.4/D1.4M: 2011—Structural Welding Code
Expansive Hydraulic Cement
Reinforcing Steel
C989/C989M-13—Standard Specification for Slag
Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars 3.2.6 Saudi Building Codes
C1012/C1012M-13—Standard Test Method for 201-18—Saudi Building Code-General
Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars 301-18— Saudi Building Code for Loading and
Exposed to a Sulfate Solution Forces.
C1017/C1017M-13—Standard Specification for 303-18— Saudi Building Code for Soils &
Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Foundations.
Flowing Concrete 306-18— Saudi Steel Structures Code.
C1077-14—Standard Practice for Laboratories 305-18— Saudi Masonry Code.
Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for

SBC 304-CR-18 23
CHAPTER 3—REFERENCED STANDARDS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 24
 CHAPTER 4—STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

CHAPTER 4—STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

4.1—Scope 4.4.5 Structural systems shall be designed to

accommodate anticipated volume change and
4.1.1 This chapter shall apply to design of differential settlement.
structural concrete in structures or portions of
structures defined in Chapter 1. 4.4.6 Seismic-force-resisting system
4.2—Materials 4.4.6.1 Every structure shall be assigned to a
Seismic Design Category in accordance with SBC
4.2.1 Design properties of concrete shall be 301.
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19.
4.4.6.2 Structural systems designated as part of the
4.2.2 Design properties of reinforcement shall be seismic-force-resisting system shall be restricted to
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 20. those systems designated by SBC 301.
4.3—Design loads 4.4.6.3 Structural systems assigned to Seismic
4.3.1 Loads and load combinations considered in Design Category A shall satisfy the applicable
design shall be in accordance with Chapter 5. requirements of this Code. Structures assigned to
Seismic Design Category A are not required to be
4.4—Structural system and load paths designed in accordance with Chapter 18.
4.4.1 The structural system shall include (a) 4.4.6.4 Structural systems assigned to Seismic
through (g), as applicable: Design Category B, C, D, E, or F shall satisfy the
(a) Floor construction and roof construction, requirements of Chapter 18 in addition to
including one-way and two-way slabs applicable requirements of other chapters of this
(b) Beams and joists code.
(c) Columns 4.4.6.5 Structural members assumed not to be part
(d) Walls of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be
(e) Diaphragms permitted, subject to the requirements of 4.4.6.5.1
(f) Foundations and 4.4.6.5.2.
(g) Joints, connections, and anchors as
required to transmit forces from one 4.4.6.5.1 In structures assigned to Seismic Design
component to another Category B, C, D, E, or F, the effects of those
structural members on the response of the system
4.4.2 Design of structural members including shall be considered and accommodated in the
joints and connections given in 4.4.1 shall be in structural design.
accordance with Chapter 7 through Chapter 18.
4.4.6.5.2 In structures assigned to Seismic Design
4.4.3 It shall be permitted to design a structural Category B, C, D, E, or F, the consequences of
system comprising structural members not in damage to those structural members shall be
accordance with 4.4.1 and 4.4.2, provided the considered.
structural system is approved in accordance with
1.10.1. 4.4.6.5.3 In structures assigned to Seismic Design
Category D, E, or F, structural members not
4.4.4 The structural system shall be designed to considered part of the seismic-force-resisting
resist the factored loads in load combinations given system shall meet the applicable requirements in
in 4.3 without exceeding the appropriate member Chapter 18.
design strengths, considering one or more
continuous load paths from the point of load 4.4.6.6 Effects of nonstructural members shall be
application or origination to the final point of accounted for as described in 18.2.2.1 and
resistance. consequences of damage to nonstructural members
shall be considered.
4.4.7 Diaphragms

SBC 304-CR-18 25
 CHAPTER 4—STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

4.4.7.1 Diaphragms, such as floor or roof slabs, 4.7.2 For structures, structural members, and
shall be designed to resist simultaneously both out- their connections, the requirements of 4.7.1 shall be
of-plane gravity loads and in-plane lateral forces in deemed to be satisfied if designed in accordance
load combinations given in 4.3. with the provisions of the applicable member
chapters.
4.4.7.2 Diaphragms and their connections to
framing members shall be designed to transfer 4.8—Durability
forces between the diaphragm and framing
4.8.1 Concrete mixtures shall be designed in
members.
accordance with the requirements of 19.3.2 and
4.4.7.3 Diaphragms and their connections shall be 26.4, considering applicable environmental
designed to provide lateral support to vertical, exposure to provide required durability.
horizontal, and inclined elements.
4.8.2 Reinforcement shall be protected from
4.4.7.4 Diaphragms shall be designed to resist corrosion in accordance with 20.6.
applicable lateral loads from soil and hydrostatic
pressure and other loads assigned to the diaphragm 4.9—Sustainability
by structural analysis. 4.9.1 The licensed design professional shall be
4.4.7.5 Collectors shall be provided where required permitted to specify in the construction documents
to transmit forces between diaphragms and vertical sustainability requirements in addition to strength,
elements. serviceability, and durability requirements of this
Code.
4.4.7.6 Diaphragms that are part of the seismic-
force-resisting system shall be designed for the 4.9.2 The strength, serviceability, and durability
applied forces. In structures assigned to Seismic requirements of this Code shall take precedence
Design Category D, E, and F, the diaphragm design over sustainability considerations.
shall be in accordance with Chapter 18. 4.10—Structural integrity
4.5—Structural analysis 4.10.1 General
4.5.1 Analytical procedures shall satisfy 4.10.1.1 Reinforcement and connections shall be
compatibility of deformations and equilibrium of detailed to tie the structure together effectively and
forces. to improve overall structural integrity.
4.5.2 The methods of analysis given in Chapter 4.10.2 Minimum requirements for structural
6 shall be permitted. integrity
4.6—Strength 4.10.2.1 Structural members and their connections
shall be in accordance with structural integrity
4.6.1 Design strength of a member and its joints
requirements in Table 4.10.2.1.
and connections, in terms of moment, axial force,
shear, torsion, and bearing, shall be taken as the 4.11—Fire resistance
nominal strength 𝑆𝑛 multiplied by the applicable
strength reduction factor . 4.11.1 Structural concrete members shall satisfy
the fire protection requirements of SBC-201.
4.6.2 Structures and structural members shall
4.11.2 Where the relevant codes require a
have design strength at all sections, 𝑆𝑛 , greater
thickness of concrete cover for fire protection
than or equal to the required strength 𝑈 calculated
greater than the concrete cover specified in 20.6.1,
for the factored loads and forces in such
such greater thickness shall govern.
combinations as required by this Code or SBC 301.
4.7—Serviceability
4.7.1 Evaluation of performance at service load 4.12—Requirements for specific types
conditions shall consider reactions, moments, of construction
torsions, shears, and axial forces induced by 4.12.1 Precast concrete systems
prestressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature change,
axial deformation, restraint of attached structural 4.12.1.1 Design of precast concrete members and
members, and foundation settlement. connections shall include loading and restraint
conditions from initial fabrication to end use in the

SBC 304-CR-18 26
 CHAPTER 4—STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

structure, including form removal, storage, 4.12.2.5 Post-tensioning tendons shall be permitted
transportation, and erection. to be external to any concrete section of a member.
Strength and serviceability design requirements of
4.12.1.2 Design, fabrication, and construction of
this Code shall be used to evaluate the effects of
precast members and their connections shall include
external tendon forces on the concrete structure.
the effects of tolerances.
4.12.3 Composite concrete flexural members
4.12.1.3 When precast members are incorporated
into a structural system, the forces and deformations 4.12.3.1 This Code shall apply to composite
occurring in and adjacent to connections shall be concrete flexural members as defined in Chapter 2.
included in the design.
4.12.3.2 Individual members shall be designed for
4.12.1.4 Where system behavior requires in-plane all critical stages of loading.
loads to be transferred between the members of a
4.12.3.3 Members shall be designed to support all
precast floor or wall system, (a) and (b) shall be
loads introduced prior to full development of design
satisfied:
strength of composite members.
(a) In-plane load paths shall be continuous
4.12.3.4 Reinforcement shall be detailed to
through both connections and members.
minimize cracking and to prevent separation of
(b) Where tension loads occur, a load path of
individual components of composite members.
steel or steel reinforcement, with or without
splices, shall be provided. 4.12.4 Composite steel and concrete
construction
4.12.1.5 Distribution of forces that act
perpendicular to the plane of precast members shall 4.12.4.1 Composite compression members shall
be established by analysis or test. include all members reinforced longitudinally with
structural steel shapes, pipe, or tubing with or
4.12.2 Prestressed concrete systems
without longitudinal bars.
4.12.2.1 Design of prestressed members and
4.12.4.2 The design of composite compression
systems shall be based on strength and on behavior
members shall be in accordance with Chapter 10.
at service conditions at all critical stages during the
life of the structure from the time prestress is first 4.12.5 Structural plain concrete systems
applied. 4.12.5.1 The design of structural plain concrete
4.12.2.2 Provisions shall be made for effects on members, both cast-in-place and precast, shall be in
adjoining construction of elastic and plastic accordance with Chapter 14.
deformations, deflections, changes in length, and
4.13—Construction and inspection
rotations due to prestressing. Effects of temperature
change, restraint of attached structural members, 4.13.1 Specifications for construction execution
foundation settlement, creep, and shrinkage shall shall be in accordance with Chapter 26.
also be considered.
4.13.2 Inspection during construction shall be in
4.12.2.3 Stress concentrations due to prestressing accordance with Chapter 26.
shall be considered in design.
4.14—Strength evaluation of existing
4.12.2.4 Effect of loss of area due to open ducts structures
shall be considered in computing section properties
before grout in post-tensioning ducts has attained 4.14.1 Strength evaluation of existing structures
design strength. shall be in accordance with Chapter 27.

SBC 304-CR-18 27
CHAPTER 4—STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 4

Table 4.10.2.1— Minimum requirements for structural integrity

Member type Section

Nonprestressed two-way slabs 8.7.4.2

Prestressed two-way slabs 8.7.5.6
Nonprestressed two-way joist systems 8.8.1.6
Cast-in-place beam 9.7.7
Nonprestressed one-way joist system 9.8.1.6
Precast joints and connections 16.2.1.8

SBC 304-CR-18 28
CHAPTER 4—STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 29
 CHAPTER 5—LOADS

CHAPTER 5—LOADS

with other loads if the effects of 𝑇 can adversely

5.1—Scope affect structural safety or performance. The load
5.1.1 This chapter shall apply to selection of load factor for 𝑇 shall be established considering the
factors and combinations used in design, except as uncertainty associated with the likely magnitude of
permitted in Chapter 27. 𝑇, the probability that the maximum effect of 𝑇 will
occur simultaneously with other applied loads, and
5.2—General
the potential adverse consequences if the effect of 𝑇
5.2.1 Loads shall include self-weight; applied is greater than assumed. The load factor on 𝑇 shall
loads; and effects of prestressing, earthquakes, not have a value less than 1.0.
restraint of volume change, and differential
5.3.7 If fluid load 𝐹 is present, it shall be
settlement.
included in the load combination equations of 5.3.1
5.2.2 Loads and Seismic Design Categories in accordance with (a), (b), (c) or (d):
(SDCs) shall be in accordance with SBC 301.
(a) If 𝐹 acts alone or adds to the effects of 𝐷, it
5.2.3 Live load reductions shall be permitted in shall be included with a load factor of 1.4
accordance with SBC 301. in Eq. (5.3.1a)
(b) If 𝐹 adds to the primary load, it shall be
5.3—Load factors and combinations
included with a load factor of 1.2 in Eq.
5.3.1 Required strength 𝑈 shall be at least equal (5.3.1b) through (5.3.1e)
to the effects of factored loads in Table 5.3.1, with (c) If the effect of 𝐹 is permanent and
exceptions and additions in 5.3.3 through 5.3.12. counteracts the primary load, it shall be
included with a load factor of 0.9 in Eq.
5.3.2 The effect of one or more loads not acting
(5.3.1g).
simultaneously shall be investigated.
(d) If the effect of 𝐹 is not permanent but, when
5.3.3 The load factor on live load 𝐿 in Eq. present, counteracts the primary load, 𝐹
(5.3.1c), (5.3.1d), and (5.3.1e) shall be permitted shall not be included in Eq. (5.3.1a)
to be reduced to 0.5 except for (a), (b), or (c). through (5.3.1g).
(a) Garages 5.3.8 If lateral earth pressure 𝐻 is present, it shall
(b) Areas occupied as places of public be included in the load combination equations of
assembly 5.3.1 in accordance with (a), (b), or (c):
(c) Areas where 𝐿 is greater than 5 kN/m2.
(a) If 𝐻 acts alone or adds to the primary load
5.3.4 If applicable, 𝐿 shall include (a) through (f): effect, it shall be included with a load factor
(a) Concentrated live loads of 1.6.
(b) Vehicular loads (b) If the effect of 𝐻 is permanent and
(c) Crane loads counteracts the primary load effect, it shall
(d) Loads on hand rails, guardrails, and be included with a load factor of 0.9.
vehicular barrier systems (c) If the effect of 𝐻 is not permanent but,
(e) Impact effects when present, counteracts the primary load
(f) Vibration effects effect, 𝐻 shall not be included.

5.3.5 If wind load 𝑊 is based on service-level 5.3.9 If a structure is in a flood zone, the flood
loads, 1.6𝑊 shall be used in place of 1.0𝑊 in Eq. loads and the appropriate load factors and
combinations of SBC 301 shall be used.
(5.3.1d) and (5.3.1f), and 0.8𝑊 shall be used in
place of 0.5𝑊 in Eq. (5.3.1c). 5.3.10 Not applicable in the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia.
5.3.6 The structural effects of forces due to
restraint of volume change and differential
settlement 𝑇 shall be considered in combination

SBC 304-CR-18 30
 CHAPTER 5—LOADS

5.3.11 Required strength 𝑈 shall include internal 5.3.12 For post-tensioned anchorage zone design,
load effects due to reactions induced by prestressing a load factor of 1.2 shall be applied to the maximum
with a load factor of 1.0. prestressing reinforcement jacking force.

SBC 304-CR-18 31
CHAPTER 5—LOADS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 5

Table 5.3.1—Load combinations

Load combinations Equation Primary Load

𝑈 = 1.4𝐷 (5.3.1a) 𝐷
[1]
𝑈 = 1.4𝐷 + 1.7𝐿 + 0.5(𝐿𝑟 𝑜𝑟 𝑅) (5.3.1b) 𝐿
𝑈 = 1.2𝐷 + 1.6(𝐿𝑟 or 𝑅) + (1.0𝐿 𝑜𝑟 0.5𝑊) (5.3.1c) 𝐿𝑟 or 𝑅
𝑈 = 1.2𝐷 + 1.0𝑊 + 1.0𝐿 + 0.5(𝐿𝑟 or 𝑅) (5.3.1d) 𝑊
𝑈 = 1.2𝐷 + 1.0𝐸 + 1.0𝐿 (5.3.1e) 𝐸
𝑈 = 0.9𝐷 + 1.0𝑊 (5.3.1f) 𝑊
𝑈 = 0.9𝐷 + 1.0𝐸 (5.3.1g) 𝐸
[1]
In the combination (5.3.1b), the load factor on 𝐷 and 𝐿 may be reduced to 1.2𝐷 and 1.6𝐿 respectively, when special
inspection professional is employed and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

Table R5.2.2—Correlation between seismic-related terminology in model codes

Code, standard, or resource Level of seismic risk or assigned seismic performance or design
document and edition categories as defined in the code
ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11, ACI 318-14;
IBC of 2000, 2003, 2006, 2009, 2012;
SDC [1] SDC SDC
NFPA 5000 of 2003, 2006, 2009, 2012;
A, B C D, E, F
ASCE 7-98, 7-02, 7-05, 7-10; NEHRP
1997,2000,2003,2009
Moderate/intermediate
ACI 318-05 and previous editions Low seismic risk High seismic risk
seismic risk
BOCA National Building Code 1993,
1996, 1999; Standard Building Code SPC[2] SPC SPC
1994, 1997, 1999; ASCE 7-93, 7-95; A, B C D, E
NEHRP 1991, 1994
Uniform Building Code 1991, 1994, Seismic Seismic Seismic Zone
1997 Zone 0, 1 Zone 2 3, 4
[1]
SDC = seismic design category as defined in code, standard, or resource document.
[2]
SPC = seismic performance category as defined in code, standard, or resource document.

SBC 304-CR-18 32
CHAPTER 5—LOADS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 33
 CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

6.1—Scope 𝑘𝑙𝑢 𝑀1
≤ 34 + 12 ( ) (6.2.5b)
6.1.1 This chapter shall apply to methods of 𝑟 𝑀2
analysis, modeling of members and structural
and
systems, and calculation of load effects.
6.2—General 𝑘𝑙𝑢
≤ 40 (6.2.5c)
6.2.1 Members and structural systems shall be 𝑟
permitted to be modeled in accordance with 6.3. where 𝑀1 ⁄𝑀2 is negative if the column is bent in
6.2.2 All members and structural systems shall single curvature, and positive for double curvature.
be analyzed for the maximum effects of loads If bracing elements resisting lateral movement of a
including the arrangements of live load in story have a total stiffness of at least 12 times the
accordance with 6.4. gross lateral stiffness of the columns in the direction
6.2.3 Methods of analysis permitted by this considered, it shall be permitted to consider
chapter shall be (a) through (e): columns within the story to be braced against
sidesway.
(a) The simplified method for analysis of
continuous beams and one-way slabs for 6.2.5.1 The radius of gyration, 𝑟, shall be permitted
gravity loads in 6.5 to be calculated by (a), (b), or (c):
(b) First-order in 6.6
(c) Elastic second-order in 6.7 𝐼𝑔
(d) Inelastic second-order in 6.8 (a) 𝑟=√ (6.2.5.1)
𝐴𝑔
(e) Finite element in 6.9
6.2.4 Additional analysis methods that are (b) 0.30 times the dimension in the direction
permitted include 6.2.4.1 through 6.2.4.4. stability is being considered for rectangular
columns.
6.2.4.1 Two-way slabs shall be permitted to be
(c) 0.25 times the diameter of circular columns
analyzed for gravity loads in accordance with (a) or
(b): 6.2.5.2 For composite columns, the radius of
gyration, r, shall not be taken greater than:
(a) Direct design method in 8.10
(b) Equivalent frame method in 8.11
(𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑔 ⁄5) + 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠𝑥
6.2.4.2 Slender walls shall be permitted to be 𝑟=√ (6.2.5.2)
analyzed in accordance with 11.8 for out-of-plane (𝐸𝑐 𝐴𝑔 ⁄5) + 𝐸𝑠 𝐴𝑠𝑥
effects.
Longitudinal bars located within a concrete core
6.2.4.3 Diaphragms shall be permitted to be
encased by structural steel or within transverse
analyzed in accordance with 12.4.2.
reinforcement surrounding a structural steel core
6.2.4.4 A member or region shall be permitted to be shall be permitted to be used in calculating 𝐴𝑠𝑥 and
analyzed and designed using the strut-and-tie 𝐼𝑠𝑥 .
method in accordance with Chapter 23.
6.2.6 Unless slenderness effects are neglected as
6.2.5 Slenderness effects shall be permitted to be permitted by 6.2.5, the design of columns,
neglected if (a) or (b) is satisfied: restraining beams, and other supporting members
(a) For columns not braced against sidesway shall be based on the factored forces and moments
considering second-order effects in accordance
𝑘𝑙𝑢 with 6.6.4, 6.7, or 6.8. 𝑀𝑢 including second-order
≤ 22 (6.2.5a)
𝑟 effects shall not exceed 1.4𝑀𝑢 due to first-order
(b) For columns braced against sidesway effects.

SBC 304-CR-18 34
 CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

6.3—Modeling assumptions 6.4.3.1 If the arrangement of 𝐿 is known, the slab

system shall be analyzed for that arrangement.
6.3.1 General
6.4.3.2 If 𝐿 is variable and does not exceed 0.75𝐷,
6.3.1.1 Relative stiffnesses of members within
or the nature of Lis such that all panels will be
structural systems shall be based on reasonable and
loaded simultaneously, it shall be permitted to
consistent assumptions.
assume that maximum 𝑀𝑢 at all sections occurs
6.3.1.2 To calculate moments and shears caused by with factored 𝐿 applied simultaneously to all panels.
gravity loads in columns, beams, and slabs, it shall
6.4.3.3 For loading conditions other than those
be permitted to use a model limited to the members
defined in 6.4.3.1 or 6.4.3.2, it shall be permitted to
in the level being considered and the columns above
assume (a) and (b):
and below that level. It shall be permitted to assume
far ends of columns built integrally with the (a) Maximum positive 𝑀𝑢 near midspan of
structure to be fixed. panel occurs with 75 percent of factored 𝐿
on the panel and alternate panels.
6.3.1.3 The analysis model shall consider the
effects of variation of member cross-sectional (b) Maximum negative 𝑀𝑢 at a support occurs
properties, such as that due to haunches. with 75 percent of factored 𝐿 on adjacent
panels only.
6.3.2 T-beam geometry
6.5—Simplified method of analysis for
6.3.2.1 For nonprestressed T-beams supporting nonprestressed continuous beams and
monolithic or composite slabs, the effective flange one-way slabs
width 𝑏𝑓 shall include the beam web width 𝑏𝑤 plus
an effective overhanging flange width in 6.5.1 It shall be permitted to calculate 𝑀𝑢 and 𝑉𝑢
accordance with Table 6.3.2.1, where ℎ is the slab due to gravity loads in accordance with this section
thickness and 𝑠𝑤 is the clear distance to the adjacent for continuous beams and one-way slabs satisfying
web. (a) through (e):

6.3.2.2 Isolated nonprestressed T-beams in which (a) Members are prismatic

the flange is used to provide additional compression (b) Loads are uniformly distributed
area shall have a flange thickness greater than or (c) 𝐿 ≤ 3𝐷
equal to 0.5𝑏𝑤 and an effective flange width less (d) There are at least two spans
than or equal to 4𝑏𝑤 . (e) The longer of two adjacent spans does not
exceed the shorter by more than 20 percent
6.3.2.3 For prestressed T-beams, it shall be
permitted to use the geometry provided by 6.5.2 𝑀𝑢 due to gravity loads shall be calculated
6.3.2.1and 6.3.2.2. in accordance with Table 6.5.2.

6.4—Arrangement of live load 6.5.3 Moments calculated in accordance with

6.5.2 shall not be redistributed.
6.4.1 For the design of floors or roofs to resist
gravity loads, it shall be permitted to assume that 6.5.4 𝑉𝑢 due to gravity loads shall be calculated
live load is applied only to the level under in accordance with Table 6.5.4 .
consideration. 6.5.5 Floor or roof level moments shall be
6.4.2 For one-way slabs and beams, it shall be resisted by distributing the moment between
permitted to assume (a) and (b): columns immediately above and below the given
floor in proportion to the relative column stiffnesses
(a) Maximum positive 𝑀𝑢 near midspan considering conditions of restraint.
occurs with factored 𝐿 on the span and on
alternate spans 6.6—First-order analysis
(b) Maximum negative 𝑀𝑢 at a support occurs 6.6.1 General
with factored 𝐿 on adjacent spans only
6.6.1.1 Slenderness effects shall be considered in
6.4.3 For two-way slab systems, factored accordance with 6.6.4, unless they are allowed to be
moments shall be calculated in accordance with neglected by 6.2.5.
6.4.3.1, 6.4.3.2, or 6.4.3.3, and shall be at least the
moments resulting from factored L applied
simultaneously to all panels.

SBC 304-CR-18 35
 CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

6.6.1.2 Redistribution of moments calculated by an frame members shall be in accordance with

elastic first-order analysis shall be permitted in 6.6.3.1.1 and 6.6.3.1.2.
accordance with 6.6.5.
6.6.3.2 Service load analysis
6.6.2 Modeling of members and structural
6.6.3.2.1 Immediate and time-dependent
systems
deflections due to gravity loads shall be calculated
6.6.2.1 Floor or roof level moments shall be resisted in accordance with 24.2.
by distributing the moment between columns
6.6.3.2.2 It shall be permitted to calculate
immediately above and below the given floor in
immediate lateral deflections using a moment of
proportion to the relative column stiffnesses and
inertia of 1.4 times 𝐼 defined in 6.6.3.1, or using a
considering conditions of restraint.
more detailed analysis, but the value shall not
6.6.2.2 For frames or continuous construction, exceed 𝐼𝑔 .
consideration shall be given to the effect of floor
and roof load patterns on transfer of moment to 6.6.4 Slenderness effects, moment
exterior and interior columns, and of eccentric magnification method
loading due to other causes. 6.6.4.1 Unless 6.2.5 is satisfied, columns and
6.6.2.3 It shall be permitted to simplify the analysis stories in structures shall be designated as being
model by the assumptions of (a), (b), or both: nonsway or sway. Analysis of columns in nonsway
frames or stories shall be in accordance with
(a) Solid slabs or one-way joist systems built 6.6.4.5. Analysis of columns in sway frames or
integrally with supports, with clear spans stories shall be in accordance with 6.6.4.6.
not more than 3 m, shall be permitted to be
analyzed as continuous members on knife- 6.6.4.2 The cross-sectional dimensions of each
edge supports with spans equal to the clear member used in an analysis shall be within 10
spans of the member and width of support percent of the specified member dimensions in
beams otherwise neglected. construction documents or the analysis shall be
(b) For frames or continuous construction, it repeated. If the stiffnesses of Table 6.6.3.1.1(b) are
shall be permitted to assume the used in an analysis, the assumed member
intersecting member regions are rigid. reinforcement ratio shall also be within 10 percent
of the specified member reinforcement in
6.6.3 Section properties construction documents.
6.6.3.1 Factored load analysis 6.6.4.3 It shall be permitted to analyze columns and
6.6.3.1.1 Moment of inertia and cross-sectional stories in structures as nonsway frames if (a) or (b)
area of members shall be calculated in accordance is satisfied:
with Table 6.6.3.1.1(a) or Table 6.6.3.1.1(b), (a) The increase in column end moments due
unless a more rigorous analysis is used. If sustained to second-order effects does not exceed 5
lateral loads are present, 𝐼 for columns and walls percent of the first-order end moments
shall be divided by (1 + β𝑑𝑠 ), where β𝑑𝑠 is the (b) 𝑄 in accordance with 6.6.4.4.1does not
ratio of maximum factored sustained shear within a exceed 0.05
story to the maximum factored shear in that story
6.6.4.4 Stability properties
associated with the same load combination.
6.6.3.1.2 For factored lateral load analysis, it shall 6.6.4.4.1 The stability index for a story, 𝑄, shall be
calculated by:
be permitted to assume 𝐼 = 0.5𝐼𝑔 for all members
or to calculate 𝐼 by a more detailed analysis, ∑ 𝑃𝑢 ∆0
considering the reduced stiffness of all members 𝑄= (6.6.4.4.1)
under the loading conditions. 𝑉𝑢𝑠 𝐼𝑐

6.6.3.1.3 For factored lateral load analysis of two- where ∑ 𝑃𝑢 and 𝑉𝑢𝑠 are the total factored vertical
way slab systems without beams, which are load and horizontal story shear, respectively, in the
designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting story being evaluated, and ∆0 is the first-order
system, 𝐼 for slab members shall be defined by a relative lateral deflection between the top and the
model that is in substantial agreement with results bottom of that story due to 𝑉𝑢𝑠 .
of comprehensive tests and analysis and 𝐼 of other

SBC 304-CR-18 36
 CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

6.6.4.4.2 The critical buckling load 𝑃𝑐 shall be 𝐶𝑚

calculated by: δ= ≥1
𝑃𝑢 (6.6.4.5.2)
1−
0.75𝑃𝑐
𝜋 2 (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝑃𝑐 = (6.6.4.4.2)
(𝑘𝑙𝑢 )2 6.6.4.5.3 Cm shall be in accordance with (a) or (b):

6.6.4.4.3 The effective length factor 𝑘 shall be (a) For columns without transverse loads
calculated using 𝐸𝑐 in accordance with 19.2.2 and applied between supports
𝐼 in accordance with 6.6.3.1.1. For nonsway 𝑀1
members, 𝑘 shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0, 𝐶𝑚 = 0.6 − 0.4 (6.6.4.5.3a)
𝑀2
and for sway members, 𝑘 shall be at least 1.0
6.6.4.4.4 For noncomposite columns, (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓 shall where 𝑀1 /𝑀2 is negative if the column is bent in
single curvature, and positive if bent in double
be calculated in accordance with (a), (b), or (c):
curvature. 𝑀1 corresponds to the end moment with
0.4𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑔 the lesser absolute value.
(a) (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓 = (6.6.4.4.4a)
1 + β𝑑𝑛𝑠 (b) For columns with transverse loads applied
between supports.
(𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝐶𝑚 = 1.0 (6.6.4.5.3b)
(b) (0.2𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑔 + 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠𝑒 ) (6.6.4.4.4b)
=
1 + β𝑑𝑛𝑠 6.6.4.5.4 𝑀2 in Eq. (6.6.4.5.1) shall be at least
𝑀2,𝑚𝑖𝑛 calculated according to Eq. (6.6.4.5.4)
𝐸𝑐 𝐼
(c) (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓 = (6.6.4.4.4c) about each axis separately.
1 + β𝑑𝑛𝑠
𝑀2,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑃𝑢 (15 + 0.03ℎ) (6.6.4.5.4)
where β𝑑𝑛𝑠 shall be the ratio of maximum factored
sustained axial load to maximum factored axial load If 𝑀2,𝑚𝑖𝑛 exceeds 𝑀2 , 𝐶𝑚 shall be taken equal to 1.0
associated with the same load combination and 𝐼 in or calculated based on the ratio of the calculated end
Eq. (6.6.4.4.4c) is calculated according to Table moments 𝑀1 /𝑀2 , using Eq. (6.6.4.5.3a).
6.6.3.1.1(b) for columns and walls.
6.6.4.6 Moment magnification method: Sway
6.6.4.4.5 For composite columns, (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓 shall be frames
calculated by Eq. (6.6.4.4.4b), Eq. (6.6.4.4.5), or
from a more detailed analysis. 6.6.4.6.1 Moments 𝑀1 and 𝑀2 at the ends of an
individual column shall be calculated by (a) and (b).

(0.2𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑔 ) (a) 𝑀1 = 𝑀1𝑛𝑠 + δ𝑠 𝑀1𝑠 (6.6.4.6.1a)

(𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓 = + 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠𝑥 (6.6.4.4.5)
1 + β𝑑𝑛𝑠
(b) 𝑀2 = 𝑀2𝑛𝑠 + δ𝑠 𝑀2𝑠 (6.6.4.6.1b)
6.6.4.5 Moment magnification method:
6.6.4.6.2 The moment magnifier δ𝑠 shall be
Nonsway frames
calculated by (a), (b), or (c). If δ𝑠 exceeds 1.5, only
6.6.4.5.1 The factored moment used for design of (b) or (c) shall be permitted:
columns and walls, 𝑀𝑐 , shall be the first-order
factored moment 𝑀2 amplified for the effects of 1
(a) δ𝑠 = ≥1 (6.6.4.6.2a)
member curvature. 1−𝑄

1
𝑀𝑐 = δ𝑀2 (6.6.4.5.1) δ𝑠 = ≥1
(b) ∑ 𝑃𝑢 (6.6.4.6.2b)
1−
0.75 ∑ 𝑃𝑐
6.6.4.5.2 Magnification factor δ shall be calculated
by: (c) Second-order elastic analysis
where ∑ 𝑃𝑢 is the summation of all the factored
vertical loads in a story and ∑ 𝑃𝑐 is the summation
for all sway-resisting columns in a story. 𝑃𝑐 is

SBC 304-CR-18 37
 CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

calculated using Eq. (6.6.4.4.2) with 𝑘 determined are satisfied using the cross-sectional proper ties
for sway members from 6.6.4.4.3 and (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓 from defined in 6.7.2.
6.6.4.4.4 or 6.6.4.4.5 as appropriate with 6.7.1.2 Slenderness effects along the length of a
β𝑑𝑠 substituted for β𝑑𝑛𝑠 . column shall be considered. It shall be permitted to
6.6.4.6.3 Flexural members shall be designed for calculate these effects using 6.6.4.5.
the total magnified end moments of the columns at 6.7.1.3 The cross-sectional dimensions of each
the joint. member used in an analysis to calculate slenderness
6.6.4.6.4 Second-order effects shall be considered effects shall be within 10 percent of the specified
along the length of columns in sway frames. It shall member dimensions in construction documents or
be permitted to account for these effects using the analysis shall be repeated.
6.6.4.5, where 𝐶𝑚 is calculated using 𝑀1 and 𝑀2 6.7.1.4 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
from 6.6.4.6.1. elastic second-order analysis shall be permitted in
6.6.5 Redistribution of moments in continuous accordance with 6.6.5.
flexural members 6.7.2 Section properties
6.6.5.1 Except where approximate values for 6.7.2.1 Factored load analysis
moments are used in accordance with 6.5, where
moments have been calculated in accordance with 6.7.2.1.1 It shall be permitted to use section
6.8, or where moments in two-way slabs are properties calculated in accordance with 6.6.3.1.
determined using pattern loading specified in 6.7.2.2 Service load analysis
6.4.3.3, reduction of moments at sections of
maximum negative or maximum positive moment 6.7.2.2.1 Immediate and time-dependent
calculated by elastic theory shall be permitted for deflections due to gravity loads shall be calculated
any assumed loading arrangement if (a) and (b) are in accordance with 24.2.
satisfied: 6.7.2.2.2 Alternatively, it shall be permitted to
(a) Flexural members are continuous calculate immediate deflections using a moment of
(b) 𝜀𝑡 ≥ 0.0075 at the section at which inertia of 1.4 times 𝐼 given in 6.6.3.1, or calculated
moment is reduced using a more detailed analysis, but the value shall
not exceed 𝐼𝑔 ·
6.6.5.2 For prestressed members, moments include
those due to factored loads and those due to 6.8—Inelastic second-order analysis
reactions induced by prestressing. 6.8.1 General
6.6.5.3 At the section where the moment is reduced, 6.8.1.1 An inelastic second-order analysis shall
redistribution shall not exceed the lesser of 1000𝜀𝑡 consider material nonlinearity, member curvature
percent and 20 percent. and lateral drift, duration of loads, shrinkage and
6.6.5.4 The reduced moment shall be used to creep, and interaction with the supporting
calculate redistributed moments at all other sections foundation.
within the spans such that static equilibrium is 6.8.1.2 An inelastic second-order analysis
maintained after redistribution of moments for each procedure shall have been shown to result in
loading arrangement. prediction of strength in substantial agreement with
6.6.5.5 Shears and support reactions shall be results of comprehensive tests of statically
calculated in accordance with static equilibrium indeterminate reinforced concrete structures.
considering the redistributed moments for each 6.8.1.3 Slenderness effects along the length of a
loading arrangement. column shall be considered. It shall be permitted to
6.7—Elastic second-order analysis calculate these effects using 6.6.4.5.
6.7.1 General 6.8.1.4 The cross-sectional dimensions of each
member used in an analysis to calculate slenderness
6.7.1.1 An elastic second-order analysis shall effects shall be within 10 percent of the specified
consider the influence of axial loads, presence of member dimensions in construction documents or
cracked regions along the length of the member, the analysis shall be repeated.
and effects of load duration. These considerations

SBC 304-CR-18 38
 CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

6.8.1.5 Redistribution of moments calculated by an 6.9.4 The licensed design professional shall
inelastic second-order analysis shall not be confirm that the results are appropriate for the
permitted. purposes of the analysis.
6.9—Acceptability of finite element 6.9.5 The cross-sectional dimensions of each
analysis member used in an analysis shall be within 10
percent of the specified member dimensions in
6.9.1 Finite element analysis to determine load construction documents or the analysis shall be
effects shall be permitted. repeated.
6.9.2 The finite element model shall be 6.9.6 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
appropriate for its intended purpose. inelastic analysis shall not be permitted.
6.9.3 For inelastic analysis, a separate analysis
shall be performed for each factored load
combination.

SBC 304-CR-18 39
CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 6

Table 6.3.2.1—Dimensional limits for effective overhanging flange width for T-beams

Flange location Effective overhanging flange width, beyond face of web

8ℎ

Each side of web Least of: 𝑠𝑤 ⁄2

𝑙𝑛 ⁄8

6ℎ

One side of web Least of: 𝑠𝑤 ⁄2

𝑙𝑛 ⁄12

Table 6.5.2—Approximate moments for nonprestressed continuous beams and one-way slabs

Moment Location Condition Mu

Discontinuous end integral with

𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄14
End span support
Positive
Discontinuous end unrestrained 𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄11

Interior spans All 𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄16

Member built integrally with

𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄24
Interior face of supporting spandrel beam
exterior support Member built integrally with
𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄16
supporting column

Exterior face of Two spans 𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄9

first interior
support More than two spans 𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄10
Negative[1]
Face of other
All 𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄11
supports

(a) slabs with spans not exceeding

Face of all
3m
supports
(b) beams where ratio of sum of 𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛2 ⁄12
satisfying (a) or
column stiffnesses to beam stiffness
(b)
exceeds 8 at each end of span
[1]
To calculate negative moments, 𝑙𝑛 shall be the average of the adjacent clear span lengths.

SBC 304-CR-18 40
CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

Table 6.5.4—Approximate shears for nonprestressed continuous beams and one-way slabs

Location 𝑽𝒖

Exterior face of first interior support 1.15𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛 ⁄2

Face of all other supports 𝑤𝑢 𝑙𝑛 ⁄2

Table 6.6.3.1.1(a)—Moment of inertia and cross-sectional area permitted for elastic analysis at
factored load level

Moment of
Member and condition Cross-sectional area
Inertia

Columns 0.70𝐼𝑔

Uncracked 0.70𝐼𝑔
Walls
Cracked 0.35𝐼𝑔 1.0𝐴𝑔

Beams 0.35𝐼𝑔

Flat plates and flat slabs 0.25𝐼𝑔

Table 6.6.3.1.1(b)—Alternative moments of inertia for elastic analysis at factored load

Alternative value of I for elastic analysis

Member
Minimum 𝐼 Maximum

𝐴𝑠𝑡 𝑀𝑢 𝑃𝑢
Columns and walls 0.35𝐼𝑔 (0.80 + 25 ) (1 − − 0.5 ) 𝐼𝑔 0.875𝐼𝑔
𝐴𝑔 𝑃𝑢 ℎ 𝑃𝑜

Beams, flat plates, and 𝑏𝑤

0.25𝐼𝑔 (0.10 + 25ρ) (1.2 − 0.2 )𝐼 0.5𝐼𝑔
flat slabs 𝑑 𝑔

Notes: For continuous flexural members, 𝐼 shall be permitted to be taken as the average of values obtained
for the critical positive and negative moment sections. 𝑃𝑢 and 𝑀𝑢 shall be calculated from the load
combination under consideration, or the combination of 𝑃𝑢 and 𝑀𝑢 that produces the least value of 𝐼 .

SBC 304-CR-18 41
CHAPTER 6—STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 42
 CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

7.3.1.1.2 For nonprestressed slabs made of

7.1—Scope lightweight concrete having 𝑤𝑐 in the range of 1440
7.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of to 1840 kg/m3, the expressions in Table 7.3.1.1 shall
nonprestressed and prestressed slabs reinforced for be multiplied by the greater of (a) and (b):
flexure in one direction, including:
(a) 1.65 − 0.0003𝑤𝑐
(a) Solid slabs (b) 1.09
(b) Slabs cast on stay-in-place, noncomposite
7.3.1.1.3 For nonprestressed composite slabs made
steel deck
of a combination of lightweight and normalweight
(c) Composite slabs of concrete elements
concrete, shored during construction, and where the
constructed in separate placements but
lightweight concrete is in compression, the modifier
connected so that all elements resist loads
of 7.3.1.1.2 shall apply.
as a unit
(d) Precast, prestressed hollow-core slabs 7.3.1.2 The thickness of a concrete floor finish shall
be permitted to be included in ℎ if it is placed
7.2—General monolithically with the floor slab or if the floor
7.2.1 The effects of concentrated loads and finish is designed to be composite with the floor
openings shall be considered in design. slab in accordance with 16.4.
7.2.2 Materials 7.3.2 Calculated deflection limits
7.2.2.1 Design properties for concrete shall be 7.3.2.1 For nonprestressed slabs not satisfying 7.3.1
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19. and for prestressed slabs, immediate and time-
dependent deflections shall be calculated in
7.2.2.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement
accordance with 24.2 and shall not exceed the limits
shall be selected to be in accordance with Chapter
in 24.2.2 .
20.
7.3.2.2 For nonprestressed composite concrete
7.2.2.3 Materials, design, and detailing
slabs satisfying 7.3.1, deflections occurring after
requirements for embedments in concrete shall be
the member becomes composite need not be
in accordance with 20.7.
calculated. Deflections occurring before the
7.2.3 Connection to other members member becomes composite shall be investigated,
unless the precomposite thickness also satisfies
7.2.3.1 For cast-in-place construction, beam-
7.3.1.
column and slab-column joints shall satisfy Chapter
15. 7.3.3 Reinforcement strain limit in
nonprestressed slabs
7.2.3.2 For precast construction, connections shall
satisfy the force transfer requirements of 16.2. 7.3.3.1 For nonprestressed slabs, 𝑡 shall be at least
0.004.
7.3—Design limits
7.3.4 Stress limits in prestressed slabs
7.3.1 Minimum slab thickness
7.3.4.1 Prestressed slabs shall be classified as Class
7.3.1.1 For solid nonprestressed slabs not
U, T, or C in accordance with 24.5.2.
supporting or attached to partitions or other
construction likely to be damaged by large 7.3.4.2 Stresses in prestressed slabs immediately
deflections, overall slab thickness h shall not be less after transfer and at service loads shall not exceed
than the limits in Table 7.3.1.1 , unless the calculated the permissible stresses in 24.5.3 and 24.5.4.
deflection limits of 7.3.2 are satisfied.
7.4—Required strength
7.3.1.1.1 For 𝑓𝑦 other than 420 MPa, the
7.4.1 General
expressions in Table 7.3.1.1 shall be multiplied by
(0.4 + 𝑓𝑦 ⁄700).

SBC 304-CR-18 43
 CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

7.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in effectively bonded to the concrete section along the
accordance with the factored load combinations in entire length.
Chapter 5.
7.5.2.3 If primary flexural reinforcement in a slab
7.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in that is considered to be a T-beam flange is parallel
accordance with the analysis procedures in Chapter to the longitudinal axis of the beam, reinforcement
6. perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam
shall be provided in the top of the slab in accordance
7.4.1.3 For prestressed slabs, effects of reactions
with (a) and (b). This provision does not apply to
induced by prestressing shall be considered in
joist construction.
accordance with 5.3.11.
(a) Slab reinforcement perpendicular to the
7.4.2 Factored moment
beam shall be designed to resist the factored
7.4.2.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, 𝑀𝑢 load on the overhanging slab width
at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at assumed to act as a cantilever.
the face of support. (b) Only the effective overhanging slab width
in accordance with 6.3.2 need be
7.4.3 Factored shear
considered.
7.4.3.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, 𝑉𝑢
7.5.3 Shear
at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at
the face of support. 7.5.3.1 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with
22.5 .
7.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
critical section located 𝑑 from the face of support 7.5.3.2 For composite concrete slabs, horizontal
for nonprestressed slabs or ℎ⁄2 from the face of shear strength 𝑉𝑛ℎ shall be calculated in accordance
support for prestressed slabs shall be permitted to with 16.4.
be designed for 𝑉𝑢 at that critical section if (a)
through (c) are satisfied:
7.6—Reinforcement limits
7.6.1 Minimum flexural reinforcement in
(a) Support reaction, in direction of applied
nonprestressed slabs
shear, introduces compression into the end
region of the slab 7.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement,
(b) Loads are applied at or near the top surface 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be provided in accordance with Table
of the slab 7.6.1.1 .
(c) No concentrated load occurs between the
face of support and critical section 7.6.2 Minimum flexural reinforcement in
prestressed slabs
7.5—Design strength
7.6.2.1 For slabs with bonded prestressed
7.5.1 General reinforcement, total quantity of 𝐴𝑠 and 𝐴𝑝𝑠 shall be
7.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2
combination, design strength at all sections shall times the cracking load calculated on the basis of 𝑓𝑟
satisfy 𝑆𝑛 ≥ 𝑈 including (a) and (b). Interaction as given in 19.2.3.
between load effects shall be considered. 7.6.2.2 For slabs with both flexural and shear
(a) 𝑀𝑛 ≥ 𝑀𝑢 design strength at least twice the required strength,
(b) 𝑉𝑛 ≥ 𝑉𝑢 7.6.2.1 need not be satisfied.

7.5.1.2  shall be determined in accordance with 7.6.2.3 For slabs with unbonded tendons, the
21.2 .
minimum area of bonded deformed longitudinal
reinforcement, 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be:
7.5.2 Moment
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≥ 0.004𝐴𝑐𝑡 (7.6.2.3)
7.5.2.1 𝑀𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with
22.3 . where 𝐴𝑐𝑡 is the area of that part of the cross section
between the flexural tension face and the centroid
7.5.2.2 For prestressed slabs, external tendons shall of the gross section.
be considered as unbonded tendons in calculating
flexural strength, unless the external tendons are 7.6.3 Minimum shear reinforcement

SBC 304-CR-18 44
 CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

7.6.3.1 A minimum area of shear 7.7.2 Reinforcement spacing

reinforcement, 𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be provided in all
7.7.2.1 Minimum spacing 𝑠 shall be in accordance
regions where 𝑉𝑢 > 𝑉𝑐 . For precast prestressed with 25.2
hollow-core slabs with untopped ℎ > 315 mm,
𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 shall be provided in all regions where 𝑉𝑢 > 7.7.2.2 For nonprestressed and Class C prestressed
0.5𝑉𝑐𝑤 slabs, spacing of bonded longitudinal reinforcement
closest to the tension face shall not exceed 𝑠 given
7.6.3.2 If shown by testing that the required 𝑀𝑛 and in 24.3.
𝑉𝑛 can be developed, 7.6.3.1 need not be satisfied.
Such tests shall simulate effects of differential 7.7.2.3 Maximum spacing 𝑠 of deformed
settlement, creep, shrinkage, and temperature reinforcement shall be the lesser of 3ℎ and 450 mm.
change, based on a realistic assessment of these 7.7.2.4 Spacing of reinforcement required by
effects occurring in service. 7.7.2.3 shall not exceed the lesser of 5ℎ and 450
7.6.3.3 If shear reinforcement is required, 𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 mm.
shall be in accordance with 9.6.3.3 . 7.7.3 Flexural reinforcement in
7.6.4 Minimum shrinkage and temperature nonprestressed slabs
reinforcement 7.7.3.1 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
7.6.4.1 Reinforcement shall be provided to resist reinforcement at each section of the slab shall be
shrinkage and temperature stresses in accordance developed on each side of that section.
with 24.4. 7.7.3.2 Critical locations for development of
7.6.4.2 If prestressed shrinkage and temperature reinforcement are points of maximum stress and
reinforcement in accordance with 24.4.4 is used, points along the span where bent or terminated
7.6.4.2.1 through 7.6.4.2.3 shall apply. tension reinforcement is no longer required to resist
flexure.
7.6.4.2.1 For monolithic, cast-in-place, post-
tensioned beam-and-slab construction, gross 7.7.3.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the
concrete area shall consist of the total beam area point at which it is no longer required to resist
including the slab thickness and the slab area within flexure for a distance at least the greater of 𝑑 and
half the clear distance to adjacent beam webs. It 12𝑑𝑏 , except at supports of simply-supported spans
shall be permitted to include the effective force in and at free ends of cantilevers.
beam tendons in the calculation of total prestress 7.7.3.4 Continuing flexural tension reinforcement
force acting on gross concrete area. shall have an embedment length at least 𝑙𝑑 beyond
7.6.4.2.2 If slabs are supported on walls or not cast the point where bent or terminated tension
monolithically with beams, gross concrete area is reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure.
the slab section tributary to the tendon or tendon 7.7.3.5 Flexural tension reinforcement shall not be
group. terminated in a tension zone unless (a), (b), or (c) is
7.6.4.2.3 At least one tendon is required in the slab satisfied:
between faces of adjacent beams or walls. 2
(a) 𝑉𝑢  ( ) 𝑉𝑛 at the cutoff point.
3
7.7—Reinforcement detailing (b) For Dia 36 bars and smaller, continuing
7.7.1 General reinforcement provides double the area
required for flexure at the cutoff point and
7.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in 3
𝑉𝑢  ( ) 𝑉𝑛 .
accordance with 20.6.1. 4
(c) Stirrup area in excess of that required for
7.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and shear is provided along each terminated bar
prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance or wire over a distance ¾𝑑 from the
with 25.4. termination point. Excess stirrup area shall
7.7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be be not less than 0.41𝑏𝑤 𝑠⁄𝑓𝑦 𝑡· Spacing 𝑠
in accordance with 25.5. shall not exceed 𝑑 ⁄8𝑏 .
7.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with 7.7.3.6 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for
25.6 . tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is

SBC 304-CR-18 45
 CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

not directly proportional to moment, such as in eccentricity between the tendons and the concrete
sloped, stepped, or tapered slabs, or where tension centroid through the full range of anticipated
reinforcement is not parallel to the compression member deflections.
face.
7.7.4.2 If nonprestressed reinforcement is required
7.7.3.7 In slabs with spans not exceeding 3 m, to satisfy flexural strength, the detailing
welded wire reinforcement, with wire size not requirements of 7.7.3 shall be satisfied.
exceeding MW30 or MD30, shall be permitted to
7.7.4.3 Termination of prestressed
be curved from a point near the top of slab over the
reinforcement
support to a point near the bottom of slab at
midspan, provided such reinforcement is 7.7.4.3.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be
continuous over, or developed at, the support. designed and detailed in accordance with 25.9.
7.7.3.8 Termination of reinforcement 7.7.4.3.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with
7.7.3.8.1 At simple supports, at least one-third of
25.8 .
the maximum positive moment reinforcement shall
extend along the slab bottom into the support, 7.7.4.4 Termination of deformed reinforcement
except for precast slabs where such reinforcement in slabs with unbonded tendons
shall extend at least to the center of the bearing 7.7.4.4.1 Length of deformed reinforcement
length. required by 7.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a)
7.7.3.8.2 At other supports, at least one-fourth of and (b):
the maximum positive moment reinforcement shall
(a) At least 𝑙𝑛 /3 in positive moment areas and
extend along the slab bottom into the support at
be centered in those areas
least 150 mm.
(b) At least 𝑙𝑛 /6 on each side of the face of
7.7.3.8.3 At simple supports and points of support
inflection, 𝑑𝑏 for positive moment tension
7.7.5 Shear reinforcement
reinforcement shall be limited such that 𝑙𝑑 for that
reinforcement satisfies (a) or (b). If reinforcement 7.7.5.1 If shear reinforcement is required,
terminates beyond the centerline of supports by a transverse reinforcement shall be detailed
standard hook or a mechanical anchorage at least according to 9.7.6.2 .
equivalent to a standard hook, (a) or (b) need not be 7.7.6 Shrinkage and temperature
satisfied. reinforcement
(a) 𝑙𝑑  (1.3 𝑀𝑛 ⁄𝑉𝑢 + 𝑙𝑎 ) if end of 7.7.6.1 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement in
reinforcement is confined by a compressive accordance with 7.6.4 shall be placed perpendicular
reaction to flexural reinforcement.
(b) 𝑙𝑑  (𝑀𝑛 ⁄𝑉𝑢 + 𝑙𝑎 ) if end of reinforcement
is not confined by a compressive reaction 7.7.6.2 Nonprestressed reinforcement
𝑀𝑛 is calculated assuming all reinforcement at the 7.7.6.2.1 Spacing of deformed shrinkage and
section is stressed to 𝑓𝑦 and 𝑉𝑢 is calculated at the temperature reinforcement shall not exceed the
section. At a support, 𝑙𝑎 is the embedment length lesser of 5ℎ and 450 mm.
beyond the center of the support. At a point of 7.7.6.3 Prestressed reinforcement
inflection, 𝑙𝑎 is the embedment length beyond the
point of inflection, limited to the greater of 𝑑 and 7.7.6.3.1 Spacing of slab tendons required by
7.6.4.2 and the distance between face of beam or
12𝑑𝑏 .
wall to the nearest slab tendon shall not exceed 1.8
7.7.3.8.4 At least one-third of the negative moment m.
reinforcement at a support shall have an embedment
7.7.6.3.2 If spacing of slab tendons exceeds 1.4 m,
length beyond the point of inflection at least the
additional deformed shrinkage and temperature
greatest of 𝑑, 12𝑑𝑏 , and 𝑙𝑛 ⁄16.
reinforcement conforming to 24.4.3 shall be
7.7.4 Flexural reinforcement in prestressed provided parallel to the tendons, except 24.4.3.4
slabs need not be satisfied. In calculating the area of
7.7.4.1 External tendons shall be attached to the additional reinforcement, it shall be permitted to
member in a manner that maintains the specified take the gross concrete area in Table 24.4.3.2 as the

SBC 304-CR-18 46
 CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

slab area between faces of beams. This shrinkage

and temperature reinforcement shall extend from
the slab edge for a distance not less than the slab
tendon spacing.

SBC 304-CR-18 47
 CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 7

Table 7.3.1.1—Minimum thickness of solid nonprestressed one-way slabs

Support condition Minimum h[1]

Simply supported 𝑙 ⁄20
One end continuous 𝑙 ⁄24
Both ends continuous 𝑙 ⁄28
Cantilever 𝑙 ⁄10
[1]
Expression applicable for normal weight concrete and 𝑓𝑦 = 420 MPa. For other cases, minimum ℎ shall be
modified in accordance with 7.3.1.1.1 through 7.3.1.1.3, as appropriate

Table 7.6.1.1—𝑨𝒔,𝒎𝒊𝒏 for nonprestressed one-way slabs

Reinforcement type 𝒇𝒚 , MPa 𝑨𝒔,𝒎𝒊𝒏

Deformed bars < 420 0.0020𝐴𝑔

0.0018 × 420
𝐴𝑔
Deformed bars or welded wire 𝑓𝑦
≥ 420 Greater of:
reinforcement
0.0014𝐴𝑔

SBC 304-CR-18 48
CHAPTER 7—ONE-WAY SLABS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 49
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

from the face of the column a distance at least equal

8.1—Scope to the thickness of the projection below the slab
8.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of soffit.
nonprestressed and prestressed slabs reinforced for
8.2.6 Materials
flexure in two directions, with or without beams
between supports, including (a) through (d): 8.2.6.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19.
(a) Solid slabs
(b) Slabs cast on stay-in-place, noncomposite 8.2.6.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement
steel deck shall be selected to be in accordance with Chapter
(c) Composite slabs of concrete elements 20.
constructed in separate placements but 8.2.6.3 Materials, design, and detailing
connected so that all elements resist loads requirements for embedments in concrete shall be
as a unit in accordance with 20.7.
(d) Two-way joist systems in accordance with 8.8 8.2.7 Connections to other members
8.2—General 8.2.7.1 Beam-column and slab-column joints shall
8.2.1 A slab system shall be permitted to be satisfy Chapter 15.
designed by any procedure satisfying equilibrium 8.3—Design limits
and geometric compatibility, provided that design
strength at every section is at least equal to required 8.3.1 Minimum slab thickness
strength, and all serviceability requirements are 8.3.1.1 For nonprestressed slabs without interior
satisfied. The direct design method of 8.10 or the beams spanning between supports on all sides,
equivalent frame method of 8.11 is permitted for having a maximum ratio of long-to-short span of 2,
design where applicable. overall slab thickness h shall not be less than the
8.2.2 The effects of concentrated loads and limits in Table 8.3.1.1 , and shall be at least the value
openings shall be considered in design. in (a) or (b), unless the calculated deflection limits
of 8.3.2 are satisfied:
8.2.3 Slabs prestressed with an average effective
compressive stress less than 0.9 MPa shall be (a) Slabs without drop panels as given in 8.2.4
designed as nonprestressed slabs. .................. 125 mm
(b) Slabs with drop panels as given in
8.2.4 A drop panel in a nonprestressed slab, 8.2.4.......... 100 mm
where used to reduce the minimum required
thickness in accordance with 8.3.1.1 or the quantity 8.3.1.2 For nonprestressed slabs with beams
of deformed negative moment reinforcement at a spanning between supports on all sides, overall slab
support in accordance with 8.5.2.2, shall satisfy (a) thickness ℎ shall satisfy the limits in Table 8.3.1.2 ,
and (b): unless the calculated deflection limits of 8.3.2 are
satisfied.
(a) The drop panel shall project below the slab
at least one-fourth of the adjacent slab 8.3.1.2.1 At discontinuous edges of slabs
thickness. conforming to 8.3.1.2, an edge beam with 𝑓 ≥
(b) The drop panel shall extend in each 0.80 shall be provided, or the minimum thickness
direction from the centerline of support a required by (b) or (d) of Table 8.3.1.2 shall be
distance not less than one-sixth the span increased by at least 10 percent in the panel with a
length measured from center-to-center of discontinuous edge.
supports in that direction.
8.3.1.3 The thickness of a concrete floor finish shall
8.2.5 A shear cap, where used to increase the be permitted to be included in ℎ if it is placed
critical section for shear at a slab-column joint, shall monolithically with the floor slab, or if the floor
project below the slab soffit and extend horizontally

SBC 304-CR-18 50
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

finish is designed to be composite with the floor 8.4.1.3 For prestressed slabs, effects of reactions
slab in accordance with 16.4. induced by prestressing shall be considered in
accordance with 5.3.11.
8.3.1.4 If single- or multiple-leg stirrups are used as
shear reinforcement, the slab thickness shall be 8.4.1.4 For a slab system supported by columns or
sufficient to satisfy the requirements for 𝑑 in walls, dimensions 𝑐1 , 𝑐2 , and 𝑙𝑛 shall be based on
22.6.7.1 . an effective support area. The effective support area
is the intersection of the bottom surface of the slab,
8.3.2 Calculated deflection limits
or drop panel or shear cap if present, with the largest
8.3.2.1 Immediate and time-dependent deflections right circular cone, right pyramid, or tapered wedge
shall be calculated in accordance with 24.2 and shall whose surfaces are located within the column and
not exceed the limits in 24.2.2 for two-way slabs the capital or bracket and are oriented no greater
given in (a) through (c): than 45 degrees to the axis of the column.
(a) Nonprestressed slabs not satisfying 8.3.1 8.4.1.5 A column strip is a design strip with a width
(b) Nonprestressed slabs without interior on each side of a column centerline equal to the
beams spanning between the supports on all lesser of 0.25𝑙2 and 0.25𝑙1 . A column strip shall
sides and having a ratio of long-to-short include beams within the strip, if present.
span exceeding 2.0
8.4.1.6 A middle strip is a design strip bounded by
(c) Prestressed slabs
two column strips.
8.3.2.2 For nonprestressed composite concrete
8.4.1.7 A panel is bounded by column, beam, or
slabs satisfying 8.3.1.1 or 8.3.1.2, deflections
wall centerlines on all sides.
occurring after the member becomes composite
need not be calculated. Deflections occurring 8.4.1.8 For monolithic or fully composite
before the member becomes composite shall be construction supporting two-way slabs, a beam
investigated, unless the precomposite thickness also includes that portion of slab, on each side of the
satisfies 8.3.1.1 or 8.3.1.2. beam extending a distance equal to the projection of
the beam above or below the slab, whichever is
8.3.3 Reinforcement strain limit in
greater, but not greater than four times the slab
nonprestressed slabs
thickness.
8.3.3.1 For nonprestressed slabs, 𝑡 shall be at least
8.4.1.9 Combining the results of a gravity load
0.004.
analysis with the results of a lateral load analysis
8.3.4 Stress limits in prestressed slabs shall be permitted.
8.3.4.1 Prestressed slabs shall be designed as Class 8.4.2 Factored moment
U with 𝑓𝑡 ≤ 0.5√𝑓𝑐′ . Other stresses in prestressed 8.4.2.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, 𝑀𝑢
slabs immediately after transfer and at service loads at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at
shall not exceed the permissible stresses in 24.5.3 the face of support, except if analyzed in accordance
and 24.5.4. with 8.4.2.2.
8.4—Required strength 8.4.2.2 For slabs analyzed using the direct design
8.4.1 General method or the equivalent frame method, 𝑀𝑢 at the
support shall be located in accordance with 8.10 or
8.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in 8.11, respectively.
accordance with the factored load combinations in
Chapter 5. 8.4.2.3 Factored slab moment resisted by the
column
8.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in
accordance with the analysis procedures given in 8.4.2.3.1 If gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other
Chapter 6 . Alternatively, the provisions of 8.10 for effects cause a transfer of moment between the slab
the direct design method shall be permitted for the and column, a fraction of 𝑀𝑠𝑐 , the factored slab
analysis of nonprestressed slabs and the provisions moment resisted by the column at a joint, shall be
of 8.11 for the equivalent frame method shall be transferred by flexure in accordance with 8.4.2.3.2
permitted for the analysis of nonprestressed and through 8.4.2.3.5.
prestressed slabs, except 8.11.6.5 and 8.11.6.6 shall 8.4.2.3.2 The fraction of factored slab moment
not apply to prestressed slabs. resisted by the column, γ𝑓 𝑀𝑠𝑐 , shall be assumed to

SBC 304-CR-18 51
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

be transferred by flexure, where γ𝑓 shall be reaction areas at critical sections in accordance with
calculated by: 22.6.4.
1 8.4.4.1.2 Slabs reinforced with stirrups or headed
γ𝑓 =
2 𝑏 (8.4.2.3.2) shear stud reinforcement shall be evaluated for two-
1 + ( )√ 1 way shear at critical sections in accordance with
3 𝑏2
22.6.4.2 .
8.4.2.3.3 The effective slab width 𝑏𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏 for resisting
γ𝑓 𝑀𝑠𝑐 shall be the width of column or capital plus 8.4.4.1.3 Slabs reinforced with shearheads shall be
evaluated for two-way shear at critical sections in
1.5ℎ of slab or drop panel on either side of column
accordance with 22.6.9.8 .
or capital.
8.4.4.2 Factored two-way shear stress due to shear
8.4.2.3.4 For nonprestressed slabs, where the
and factored slab moment resisted by the column
limitations on 𝑣𝑢𝑔 and 𝑡 in Table 8.4.2.3.4 are
satisfied, γ𝑓 shall be permitted to be increased to the 8.4.4.2.1 For two-way shear with factored slab
maximum modified values provided in Table moment resisted by the column, factored shear
8.4.2.3.4 , where 𝑣𝑐 is calculated in accordance with stress 𝑣𝑢 shall be calculated at critical sections in
22.6.5, and 𝑣𝑢𝑔 is the factored shear stress on the accordance with 8.4.4.1. Factored shear stress vu
slab critical section for two-way action due to corresponds to a combination of 𝑣𝑢𝑔 and the shear
gravity loads without moment transfer. stress produced by 𝑣 𝑀𝑠𝑐 , where 𝑣 is given in
8.4.4.2.2 and 𝑀𝑠𝑐 is given in 8.4.2.3.1.
8.4.2.3.5 Concentration of reinforcement over the
column by closer spacing or additional 8.4.4.2.2 The fraction of 𝑀𝑠𝑐 transferred by
reinforcement shall be used to resist moment on the eccentricity of shear, 𝑣 𝑀𝑠𝑐 , shall be applied at the
effective slab width defined in 8.4.2.3.2 and centroid of the critical section in accordance with
8.4.2.3.3. 8.4.4.1, where:
8.4.2.3.6 The fraction of 𝑀𝑠𝑐 not calculated to be
resisted by flexure shall be assumed to be resisted γ𝑣=1− γ𝑓 (8.4.4.2.2)
by eccentricity of shear in accordance with 8.4.4.2.
8.4.4.2.3 The factored shear stress resulting from
8.4.3 Factored one-way shear 𝑣 𝑀𝑠𝑐 shall be assumed to vary linearly about the
8.4.3.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, 𝑉𝑢 centroid of the critical section in accordance with
at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at 8.4.4.1.
the face of support. 8.5—Design strength
8.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a 8.5.1 General
critical section located 𝑑 from the face of support
for nonprestressed slabs and ℎ⁄2 from the face of 8.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load
support for prestressed slabs shall be permitted to combination, design strength shall satisfy 𝑆𝑛  𝑈,
be designed for 𝑉𝑢 at that critical section if (a) including (a) through (d). Interaction between load
through (c) are satisfied: effects shall be considered.
(a) Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, (a) 𝑀𝑛  𝑀𝑢 at all sections along the span in
introduces compression into the end regions of the each direction
slab. (b) 𝑀𝑛  𝑓 𝑀𝑠𝑐 within 𝑏𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏 as defined in
(b) Loads are applied at or near the top surface of 8.4.2.3.3
the slab. (c) 𝑉𝑛  𝑉𝑢 at all sections along the span in
each direction for one-way shear
(c) No concentrated load occurs between the face of (d) 𝑛  𝑢 at the critical sections defined in
support and critical section. 8.4.4.1 for two-way shear
8.4.4 Factored two-way shear 8.5.1.2  shall be in accordance with 21.2.
8.4.4.1 Critical section 8.5.1.3 If shearheads are provided, 22.6.9 and
8.4.4.1.1 Slabs shall be evaluated for two-way shear 8.5.1.1(a) shall be satisfied in the vicinity of the
in the vicinity of columns, concentrated loads, and column. Beyond each arm of the shear head,
8.5.1.1(a) through (d) shall apply.

SBC 304-CR-18 52
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

8.5.2 Moment reinforcement at least equal to that

interrupted by an opening shall be added on
8.5.2.1 𝑀𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with
the sides of the opening.
22.3 .
(d) If an opening is located within a column
8.5.2.2 In calculating 𝑀𝑛 for nonprestressed slabs strip or closer than 10ℎ from a concentrated
with a drop panel, the thickness of the drop panel load or reaction area, 22.6.4.3 for slabs
below the slab shall not be assumed to be greater without shearheads or 22.6.9.9 for slabs
than one-fourth the distance from the edge of drop with shearheads shall be satisfied.
panel to the face of column or column capital.
8.6—Reinforcement limits
8.5.2.3 In calculating 𝑀𝑛 for prestressed slabs,
external tendons shall be considered as unbonded 8.6.1 Minimum flexural reinforcement in
unless the external tendons are effectively bonded nonprestressed slabs
to the slab along its entire length. 8.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement,
8.5.3 Shear 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be provided near the tension face in the
direction of the span under consideration in
8.5.3.1 Design shear strength of slabs in the vicinity accordance with Table 8.6.1.1 .
of columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas
shall be the more severe of 8.5.3.1.1 and 8.5.3.1.2. 8.6.2 Minimum flexural reinforcement in
prestressed slabs
8.5.3.1.1 For one-way shear, where each critical
section to be investigated extends in a plane across 8.6.2.1 For prestressed slabs, the effective prestress
the entire slab width, 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in force 𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑠𝑒 shall provide a minimum average
accordance with 22.5. compressive stress of 0.9 MPa on the slab section
tributary to the tendon or tendon group. For slabs
8.5.3.1.2 For two-way shear, 𝑛 shall be calculated with varying cross section along the slab span,
in accordance with 22.6. either parallel or perpendicular to the tendon or
8.5.3.2 For composite concrete slabs, horizontal tendon group, the minimum average effective
shear strength 𝑉𝑛ℎ shall be calculated in accordance prestress of 0.9 MPa is required at every cross
with 16.4. section tributary to the tendon or tendon group
along the span.
8.5.4 Openings in slab systems
8.6.2.2 For slabs with bonded prestressed
8.5.4.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in reinforcement, total quantity of 𝐴𝑠 and 𝐴𝑝𝑠 shall be
slab systems if shown by analysis that all strength adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2
and serviceability requirements, including the limits
times the cracking load calculated on the basis of 𝑓𝑟 ,
on deflections, are satisfied.
defined in 19.2.3.
8.5.4.2 As an alternative to 8.5.4.1, openings shall
8.6.2.2.1 For slabs with both flexural and shear
be permitted in slab systems without beams in
design strength at least twice the required strength,
accordance with (a) through (d).
8.6.2.2 need not be satisfied.
(a) Openings of any size shall be permitted in
8.6.2.3 For prestressed slabs, a minimum area of
the area common to intersecting middle
bonded deformed longitudinal reinforcement,
strips, but the total quantity of
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be provided in the precompressed
reinforcement in the panel shall be at least
tension zone in the direction of the span under
that required for the panel without the
consideration in accordance with Table 8.6.2.3 .
opening.
(b) At two intersecting column strips, not more 8.7—Reinforcement detailing
than one-eighth the width of column strip in
either span shall be interrupted by 8.7.1 General
openings. A quantity of reinforcement at 8.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in
least equal to that interrupted by an opening accordance with 20.6.1.
shall be added on the sides of the opening.
8.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
(c) At the intersection of one column strip and
prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance
one middle strip, not more than one-fourth
with 25.4.
of the reinforcement in either strip shall be
interrupted by openings. A quantity of

SBC 304-CR-18 53
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

8.7.1.3 Splice lengths of deformed reinforcement (a) Positive moment reinforcement shall
shall be in accordance with 25.5. extend to the edge of slab and have
embedment, straight or hooked, at least 150
8.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be detailed in accordance
mm into spandrel beams, columns, or
with 25.6.
walls.
8.7.2 Flexural reinforcement spacing (b) Negative moment reinforcement shall be
bent, hooked, or otherwise anchored into
8.7.2.1 Minimum spacing 𝑠 shall be in accordance
spandrel beams, columns, or walls, and
with 25.2.
shall be developed at the face of support.
8.7.2.2 For nonprestressed solid slabs, maximum
8.7.4.1.2 Where a slab is not supported by a
spacing 𝑠 of deformed longitudinal reinforcement
spandrel beam or wall at a discontinuous edge, or
shall be the lesser of 2ℎ and 450 mm at critical
where a slab cantilevers beyond the support,
sections, and the lesser of 3ℎ and 450 mm at other
anchorage of reinforcement shall be permitted
sections.
within the slab.
8.7.2.3 For prestressed slabs with uniformly
8.7.4.1.3 For slabs without beams, reinforcement
distributed loads maximum spacing 𝑠 of tendons or
extensions shall be in accordance with (a) through
groups of tendons in at least one direction shall be
(c):
the lesser of 8ℎ and 1.5 m.
(a) Reinforcement lengths shall be at least in
8.7.2.4 Concentrated loads and openings shall be
accordance with Fig. R8.7.4.1.3a , and if
considered in determining tendon spacing.
slabs act as primary members resisting
8.7.3 Corner restraint in slabs lateral loads, reinforcement lengths shall be
at least those required by analysis.
8.7.3.1 At exterior corners of slabs supported by
(b) If adjacent spans are unequal, extensions of
edge walls or where one or more edge beams have
negative moment reinforcement beyond the
a value of 𝑓 greater than 1.0, reinforcement at top
face of support in accordance with Fig.
and bottom of slab shall be designed to resist 𝑀𝑢 R8.7.4.1.3a shall be based on the longer
per unit width due to corner effects equal to the span.
maximum positive 𝑀𝑢 per unit width in the slab (c) Bent bars shall be permitted only where the
panel. depth-to-span ratio permits use of bends of
8.7.3.1.1 Factored moment due to corner effects, 45 degrees or less.
𝑀𝑢 , shall be assumed to be about an axis 8.7.4.2 Structural integrity
perpendicular to the diagonal from the corner in the
top of the slab and about an axis parallel to the 8.7.4.2.1 All bottom deformed bars or deformed
diagonal from the corner in the bottom of the slab. wires within the column strip, in each direction,
shall be continuous or spliced with full mechanical,
8.7.3.1.2 Reinforcement shall be provided for a full welded, or Class B tension splices. Splices shall
distance in each direction from the corner equal to be located in accordance with Fig. R8.7.4.1.3a .
one-fifth the longer span.
8.7.4.2.2 At least two of the column strip bottom
8.7.3.1.3 Reinforcement shall be placed parallel to bars or wires in each direction shall pass within the
the diagonal in the top of the slab and perpendicular region bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement
to the diagonal in the bottom of the slab. of the column and shall be anchored at exterior
Alternatively, reinforcement shall be placed in two supports.
layers parallel to the sides of the slab in both the top
and bottom of the slab. 8.7.4.2.3 In slabs with shearheads where it is not
practical to pass the bottom bars through the column
8.7.4 Flexural reinforcement in in accordance with 8.7.4.2.2, at least two bottom
nonprestressed slabs bars or wires in each direction shall pass through the
8.7.4.1 Termination of reinforcement shearhead as close to the column as practicable and
be continuous or spliced with full mechanical, full
8.7.4.1.1 Where a slab is supported on spandrel welded, or Class B tension splices. At exterior
beams, columns, or walls, anchorage of columns, the bars or wires shall be anchored at the
reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous shearhead.
edge shall satisfy (a) and (b):

SBC 304-CR-18 54
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

8.7.5 Flexural reinforcement in prestressed (a) Tendons shall pass through the region
slabs bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement
of the column.
8.7.5.1 External tendons shall be attached to the
(b) Tendons shall be anchored within the
slab in a manner that maintains the specified
region bounded by the longitudinal
eccentricity between the tendons and the concrete
reinforcement of the column, and the
centroid through the full range of anticipated
anchorage shall be located beyond the
member deflections.
column centroid and away from the
8.7.5.2 If bonded deformed longitudinal anchored span.
reinforcement is required to satisfy flexural strength
8.7.5.6.2 Outside of the column and shear cap faces,
or for tensile stress conditions in accordance with
the two structural integrity tendons required by
Eq. (8.6.2.3 (b)), the detailing requirements of 7.7.3
8.7.5.6.1 shall pass under any orthogonal tendons in
shall be satisfied.
adjacent spans.
8.7.5.3 Bonded longitudinal reinforcement required
8.7.5.6.3 Slabs with tendons not satisfying 8.7.5.6.1
by Eq. (8.6.2.3(c) ) shall be placed in the top of the
shall be permitted if bonded bottom deformed
slab, and shall be in accordance with (a) through (c):
reinforcement is provided in each direction in
(a) Reinforcement shall be distributed between accordance with 8.7.5.6.3.1 through 8.7.5.6.3.3.
lines that are 1.5h outside opposite faces of
8.7.5.6.3.1 Minimum bottom deformed
the column support.
reinforcement 𝐴𝑠 in each direction shall be the
(b) At least four deformed bars, deformed
greater of (a) and (b):
wires, or bonded strands shall be provided
in each direction. 0.37√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
(c) Maximum spacing s between bonded (a) 𝐴𝑠 = (8.7.5.6.3.1a)
longitudinal reinforcement shall not exceed 𝑓𝑦
300 mm. 2.1𝑏𝑤 𝑑
(b) 𝐴𝑠 = (8.7.5.6.3.1b)
8.7.5.4 Termination of prestressed 𝑓𝑦
reinforcement where 𝑏𝑤 is the width of the column face through
8.7.5.4.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be which the reinforcement passes.
designed and detailed in accordance with 25.9. 8.7.5.6.3.2 Bottom deformed reinforcement
8.7.5.4.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers calculated in 8.7.5.6.3.1 shall pass within the region
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the
25.8 . column and shall be anchored at exterior supports.
8.7.5.5 Termination of deformed reinforcement in 8.7.5.6.3.3 Bottom deformed reinforcement shall
slabs with unhanded tendons be anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 beyond the column or
shear cap face.
8.7.5.5.1 Length of deformed reinforcement
required by 8.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a) 8.7.6 Shear reinforcement–stirrups
and (b): 8.7.6.1 Single-leg, simple-U, multiple-U, and
(a) In positive moment areas, length of closed stirrups shall be permitted as shear
reinforcement shall be at least 𝑙𝑛 /3 and be reinforcement.
centered in those areas 8.7.6.2 Stirrup anchorage and geometry shall be in
(b) In negative moment areas, reinforcement accordance with 25.7.1.
shall extend at least 𝑙𝑛 /6 on each side of the
face of support 8.7.6.3 If stirrups are provided, location and
spacing shall be in accordance with Table 8.7.6.3 .
8.7.5.6 Structural integrity
8.7.7 Shear reinforcement–headed studs
8.7.5.6.1 Except as permitted in 8.7.5.6.3, at least
two tendons with 12.7 mm diameter or larger strand 8.7.7.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement shall be
shall be placed in each direction at columns in permitted if placed perpendicular to the plane of the
accordance with (a) or (b): slab.

SBC 304-CR-18 55
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

8.7.7.1.1 The overall height of the shear stud vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs.
assembly shall be at least the thickness of the slab Other portions of fillers shall not be included in
minus the sum of (a) through (c): strength calculations.
(a) Concrete cover on the top flexural 8.8.3 Joist systems with other fillers
reinforcement
8.8.3.1 If fillers not complying with 8.8.2.1 or
(b) Concrete cover on the base rail
removable forms are used, slab thickness shall be at
(c) One-half the bar diameter of the flexural
least the greater of one-twelfth the clear distance
tension reinforcement
between ribs and 50 mm.
8.7.7.1.2 Headed shear stud reinforcement location
and spacing shall be in accordance with Table
8.9—Lift-slab construction
8.7.7.1.2 . 8.9.1 In slabs constructed with lift-slab methods
where it is impractical to pass the tendons required
8.8—Nonprestressed two-way joist
by 8.7.5.6.1 or the bottom bars required by 8.7.4.2
systems or 8.7.5.6.3 through the column, at least two post-
8.8.1 General tensioned tendons or two bonded bottom bars or
wires in each direction shall pass through the lifting
8.8.1.1 Nonprestressed two-way joist construction collar as close to the column as practicable, and be
consists of a monolithic combination of regularly continuous or spliced with full mechanical, full
spaced ribs and a top slab designed to span in two
welded, or Class B tension splices. At exterior
orthogonal directions.
columns, the reinforcement shall be anchored at the
8.8.1.2 Width of ribs shall be at least 100 mm at any lifting collar.
location along the depth.
8.10—Direct design method
8.8.1.3 Overall depth of ribs shall not exceed 3.5
8.10.1 General
times the minimum width.
8.10.1.1 Two-way slabs satisfying the limits in
8.8.1.4 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
8.10.2 shall be permitted to be designed in
750 mm.
accordance with this section.
8.8.1.5 𝑉𝑐 shall be permitted to be taken as 1.1 times
8.10.1.2 Variations from the limitations in 8.10.2
the values calculated in 22.5.
shall be permitted if demonstrated by analysis that
8.8.1.6 For structural integrity, at least one bottom equilibrium and geometric compatibility are
bar in each joist shall be continuous and shall be satisfied, the design strength at every section is at
anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 at the face of supports. least equal to the required strength, and
serviceability conditions, including limits on
8.8.1.7 Reinforcement area perpendicular to the deflection, are met.
ribs shall satisfy slab moment strength
requirements, considering load concentrations, and 8.10.1.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped
shall be at least the shrinkage and temperature supports shall be treated as square supports with the
reinforcement area in accordance with 24.4. same area.
8.8.1.8 Two-way joist construction not satisfying 8.10.2 Limitations for use of direct design
the limitations of 8.8.1.1 through 8.8.1.4 shall be method
designed as slabs and beams. 8.10.2.1 There shall be at least three continuous
8.8.2 Joist systems with structural fillers spans in each direction.
8.8.2.1 If permanent burned clay or concrete tile 8.10.2.2 Successive span lengths measured center-
fillers of material having a unit compressive to-center of supports in each direction shall not
strength at least equal to 𝑓𝑐′ in the joists are used, differ by more than one-third the longer span.
8.8.2.1.1 and 8.8.2.1.2 shall apply. 8.10.2.3 Panels shall be rectangular, with the ratio
8.8.2.1.1 Slab thickness over fillers shall be at least of longer to shorter panel dimensions, measured
the greater of one-twelfth the clear distance center-to-center of supports, not to exceed 2.
between ribs and 40 mm. 8.10.2.4 Column offset shall not exceed 10 percent
8.8.2.1.2 For calculation of shear and negative of the span in direction of offset from either axis
moment strength, it shall be permitted to include the between centerlines of successive columns.

SBC 304-CR-18 56
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

8.10.2.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and panel, 𝑀𝑜 , in the direction considered is at least that
uniformly distributed over an entire panel. calculated by Eq. (8.10.3.2 ). Moment redistribution
in accordance with 6.6.5 is not permitted.
8.10.2.6 Unfactored live load shall not exceed two
times the unfactored dead load. 8.10.4.4 Critical section for negative 𝑀𝑢 shall be at
the face of rectangular supports.
8.10.2.7 For a panel with beams between supports
on all sides, Eq. (8.10.2.7a) shall be satisfied for 8.10.4.5 Negative 𝑀𝑢 shall be the greater of the two
beams in the two perpendicular directions. interior negative 𝑀𝑢 calculated for spans framing
into a common support unless an analysis is made
α𝑓1 𝑙22 to distribute the unbalanced moment in accordance
0.2 ≤ ≤ 5.0 (8.10.2.7a) with stiffnesses of adjoining elements.
α𝑓2 𝑙12
8.10.4.6 Edge beams or edges of slabs shall be
where α𝑓1 and α𝑓2 are calculated by: designed to resist in torsion their share of exterior
negative 𝑀𝑢 .
𝐸𝑐𝑏 𝐼𝑏
α𝑓 = (8.10.2.7b) 8.10.5 Factored moments in column strips
𝐸𝑐𝑠 𝐼𝑠
8.10.5.1 The column strip shall resist the portion of
8.10.3 Total factored static moment for a span interior negative 𝑀𝑢 in accordance with Table
8.10.5.1 .
8.10.3.1 Total factored static moment 𝑀𝑜 for a span
shall be calculated for a strip bounded laterally by 8.10.5.2 The column strip shall resist the portion of
the panel centerline on each side of the centerline of exterior negative 𝑀𝑢 in accordance with Table
supports. 8.10.5.2 .
8.10.3.2 The absolute sum of positive and average 𝐸𝑐𝑏 𝐶
negative 𝑀𝑢 in each direction shall be at least: β𝑡 = (8.10.5.2a)
2𝐸𝑐𝑠 𝐼𝑠
𝑥 𝑥3𝑦
𝑞𝑢 𝑙2 𝑙𝑛2 𝐶 = ∑ (1 − 0.63 ) (8.10.5.2b)
𝑀𝑜 = (8.10.3.2) 𝑦 3
8
8.10.5.3 For T- or L-sections, it shall be permitted
8.10.3.2.1 In Eq. (8.10.3.2 ), 𝑙𝑛 is the clear span to calculate the constant 𝐶 in Eq. (8.10.5.2b ) by
length in the direction that moments are considered, dividing the section, as given in 8.4.1.8, into
shall extend from face to face of columns, capitals, separate rectangular parts and summing the values
brackets, or walls, and shall be at least 0.65𝑙1 . of 𝐶 for each part.
8.10.3.2.2 In Eq. (8.10.3.2 ), if the transverse span of 8.10.5.4 If the width of the column or wall is at least
panels on either side of the centerline of supports (3⁄4)𝑙2 , negative 𝑀𝑢 shall be uniformly distributed
varies, 𝑙2 shall be taken as the average of adjacent across 𝑙2 .
transverse spans. 8.10.5.5 The column strip shall resist the portion of
8.10.3.2.3 In Eq. (8.10.3.2 ), if the span adjacent and positive 𝑀𝑢 in accordance with Table 8.10.5.5 .
parallel to a slab edge is being considered, the 8.10.5.6 For slabs with beams between supports,
distance from edge to panel centerline shall be the slab portion of column strips shall resist column
substituted for 𝑙2 . strip moments not resisted by beams.
8.10.4 Distribution of total factored static 8.10.5.7 Factored moments in beams
moment
8.10.5.7.1 Beams between supports shall resist the
8.10.4.1 In an interior span, 𝑀𝑜 shall be distributed portion of column strip 𝑀𝑢 in accordance with
as follows: 0.65𝑀𝑜 to negative moment and Table 8.10.5.7.1 .
0.35𝑀𝑜 to positive moment.
8.10.5.7.2 In addition to moments calculated
8.10.4.2 In an end span, 𝑀𝑜 shall be distributed in according to 8.10.5.7.1, beams shall resist moments
accordance with Table 8.10.4.2 . caused by factored loads applied directly to the
8.10.4.3 Modification of negative and positive beams, including the weight of the beam stem
factored moments by up to 10 percent shall be above and below the slab.
permitted if the total factored static moment for a 8.10.6 Factored moments in middle strips

SBC 304-CR-18 57
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

8.10.6.1 That portion of negative and positive 8.11.1.2 Live load shall be arranged in accordance
factored moments not resisted by column strips with 6.4.3 .
shall be proportionately assigned to corresponding
8.11.1.3 It shall be permitted to account for the
half middle strips.
contribution of metal column capitals to stiffness,
8.10.6.2 Each middle strip shall resist the sum of resistance to moment, and resistance to shear.
the moments assigned to its two half middle strips.
8.11.1.4 It shall be permitted to neglect the change
8.10.6.3 A middle strip adjacent and parallel to a in length of columns and slabs due to direct stress,
wall- supported edge shall resist twice the moment and deflections due to shear.
assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to
8.11.2 Equivalent frames
the first row of interior supports.
8.11.2.1 The structure shall be modeled by
8.10.7 Factored moments in columns and walls
equivalent frames on column lines taken
8.10.7.1 Columns and walls built integrally with a longitudinally and transversely through the
slab system shall resist moments caused by factored building.
loads on the slab system.
8.11.2.2 Each equivalent frame shall consist of a
8.10.7.2 At an interior support, columns or walls row of columns or supports and slab-beam strips
above and below the slab shall resist the factored bounded laterally by the panel centerline on each
moment calculated by Eq. (8.10.7.2) in direct side of the centerline of columns or supports.
proportion to their stiffnesses unless a general
8.11.2.3 Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge
analysis is made.
shall be bounded by that edge and the centerline of
′
𝑀𝑠𝑐 = 0.07[(𝑞𝐷𝑢 + 0.5𝑞𝐿𝑢 )𝑙2 𝑙𝑛2 − 𝑞𝐷𝑢 𝑙2′ (𝑙𝑛′ )2 ] (8.10.7.2) the adjacent panel.
′
where 𝑞𝐷𝑢 , 𝑙2′ , and 𝑙𝑛′ refer to the shorter span. 8.11.2.4 Columns or supports shall be assumed to
be attached to slab-beam strips by torsional
8.10.7.3 The gravity load moment to be transferred
members transverse to the direction of the span for
between slab and edge column in accordance with
which moments are being calculated and extending
8.4.2.3 shall not be less than 0.3𝑀𝑜 .
to the panel centerlines on each side of a column.
8.10.8 Factored shear in slab systems with
8.11.2.5 Analysis of each equivalent frame in its
beams
entirety shall be permitted. Alternatively, for
8.10.8.1 Beams between supports shall resist the gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
portion of shear in accordance with Table 8.10.8.1 roof with the far ends of columns considered fixed
caused by factored loads on tributary areas in is permitted.
accordance with Fig. 8.10.8.1 .
8.11.2.6 If slab-beams are analyzed separately, it
8.10.8.2 In addition to shears calculated according shall be permitted to calculate the moment at a
to 8.10.8.1, beams shall resist shears caused by given support by assuming that the slab-beam is
factored loads applied directly to the beams, fixed at supports two or more panels away,
including the weight of the beam stem above and provided the slab continues beyond the assumed
below the slab. fixed supports.
8.10.8.3 Calculation of required slab shear strength 8.11.3 Slab-beams
based on the assumption that load is distributed to
8.11.3.1 The moment of inertia of slab-beams from
supporting beams in accordance with 8.10.8.1 shall
the center of the column to the face of the column,
be permitted. Shear resistance to total 𝑉𝑢 occurring
bracket, or capital shall be assumed equal to the
on a panel shall be provided.
moment of inertia of the slab-beam at the face of the
8.11—Equivalent frame method column, bracket, or capital divided by the quantity
(1 − 𝑐2 /𝑙2 )2 , where 𝑐2 and 𝑙2 are measured
8.11.1 General
transverse to the direction of the span for which
8.11.1.1 All sections of slabs and supporting moments are being determined.
members in two-way slab systems designed by the
8.11.3.2 Variation in moment of inertia along the
equivalent frame method shall resist moments and
axis of slab-beams shall be taken into account.
shears obtained from an analysis in accordance with
8.11.2 through 8.11.6.

SBC 304-CR-18 58
 CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

8.11.3.3 It shall be permitted to use the gross cross- 8.11.6 Factored moments
sectional area of concrete to determine the moment
8.11.6.1 At interior supports, the critical section for
of inertia of slab-beams at any cross section outside
negative 𝑀𝑢 in both column and middle strips shall
of joints or column capitals.
be taken at the face of rectilinear supports, but not
8.11.4 Columns farther away than 0.175𝑙1 from the center of a
column.
8.11.4.1 The moment of inertia of columns from top
to bottom of the slab-beam at a joint shall be 8.11.6.2 At exterior supports without brackets or
assumed to be infinite. capitals, the critical section for negative 𝑀𝑢 in the
8.11.4.2 Variation in moment of inertia along the span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at the
axis of columns shall be taken into account. face of the supporting element.

8.11.4.3 It shall be permitted to use the gross 8.11.6.3 At exterior supports with brackets or
cross-sectional area of concrete to determine the capitals, the critical section for negative 𝑀𝑢 in the
moment of inertia of columns at any cross section span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a
outside of joints or column capitals. distance from the face of the supporting element not
exceeding one-half the projection of the bracket or
8.11.5 Torsional members capital beyond the face of the supporting element.
8.11.5.1 Torsional members shall be assumed to 8.11.6.4 Circular or regular polygon-shaped
have a constant cross section throughout their supports shall be assumed to be square supports
length consisting of the greatest of (a) through (c): with the same area for location of critical section for
(a) A portion of slab having a width equal to negative design moment.
that of the column, bracket, or capital in the 8.11.6.5 Where slab systems within limitations of
direction of the span for which moments are 8.10.2 are analyzed by the equivalent frame
being determined. method, it shall be permitted to reduce the
(b) For monolithic or fully composite calculated moments in such proportion that the
construction, the portion of slab specified absolute sum of the positive and average negative
in (a) plus that part of the transverse beam design moments need not exceed the value obtained
above and below the slab. from Eq. (8.10.3.2 ).
(c) The transverse beam in accordance with
8.4.1.8. 8.11.6.6 It shall be permitted to distribute moments
at critical sections to column strips, beams, and
8.11.5.2 Where beams frame into columns in the middle strips in accordance with the direct design
direction of the span for which moments are being method in 8.10, provided that Eq. (8.10.2.7a) is
calculated, the torsional stiffness shall be multiplied satisfied.
by the ratio of the moment of inertia of the slab with
such a beam to the moment of inertia of the slab
without such a beam.

SBC 304-CR-18 59
CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 8

Table 8.3.1.1—Minimum thickness of nonprestressed two-way slabs without interior beams (mm)[1].

Without drop panels[3] With drop panels[3]

Interior Interior
𝒇𝒚 , Exterior panels Exterior panels
panels panels
MPa[2]
Without edge With edge Without With edge
beams beams[4] edge beams beams[4]

280 𝑙𝑛 ⁄33 𝑙𝑛 ⁄36 𝑙𝑛 ⁄36 𝑙𝑛 ⁄36 𝑙𝑛 ⁄40 𝑙𝑛 ⁄40

420 𝑙𝑛 ⁄30 𝑙𝑛 ⁄33 𝑙𝑛 ⁄33 𝑙𝑛 ⁄33 𝑙𝑛 ⁄36 𝑙𝑛 ⁄36

520 𝑙𝑛 ⁄28 𝑙𝑛 ⁄31 𝑙𝑛 ⁄31 𝑙𝑛 ⁄31 𝑙𝑛 ⁄34 𝑙𝑛 ⁄34

[1]
𝑙𝑛 is the clear span in the long direction, measured face-to-face of supports (mm).
[2]
For 𝑓𝑦 between the values given in the table, minimum thickness shall be calculated by linear interpolation.
[3]
Drop panels as given in 8.2.4.
[4]
Slabs with beams between columns along exterior edges. Exterior panels shall be considered to be without edge
beams if 𝑓 is less than 0.8. The value of 𝑓 for the edge beam shall be calculated in accordance with 8.10.2.7.

Table 8.3.1.2—Minimum thickness of nonprestressed two-way slabs with beams spanning between
supports on all sides

𝒇𝒎 [1] Minimum 𝒉, mm

𝑓𝑚 ≤ 0.2 8.3.1.1 applies (a)

𝑓𝑦
𝑙𝑛 (0.8 +)
1400 (b)[2],[3]
Greater ℎ=
0.2 < 𝑓𝑚 ≤ 2.0 36 + 5β(𝑓𝑚 − 0.2)
of:
125 (c)

𝑓𝑦
Greater 𝑙𝑛 (0.8 + )
1400 (d)[2] [3]
𝑓𝑚 > 2.0 ℎ=
of: 36 + 9β

90 (e)
[1]
𝑓𝑚 is the average value of 𝑓 for all beams on edges of a panel and 𝑓 shall be calculated in accordance with 8.10.2.7.
[2]
𝑙𝑛 is the clear span in the long direction, measured face-to-face of beams (mm).
[3]
 is the ratio of clear spans in long to short directions of slab.

SBC 304-CR-18 60
CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

Table 8.4.2.3.4—Maximum modified values of 𝛄𝒇 for nonprestressed two-way slabs

Column
Span direction 𝒗𝒖𝒈 𝒕 (within 𝒃𝒔𝒍𝒂𝒃 ) Maximum modified 𝛄𝒇
location

Corner column Either direction  0.5𝑐  0.004 1.0

Perpendicular to
 0.75𝑐  0.004 1.0
the edge
Edge column 1.25
Parallel to the ≤ 1.0
 0.4𝑐  0.010 2 𝑏
edge 1 + ( )√ 1
3 𝑏2

1.25
≤ 1.0
Interior column Either direction  0.4𝑐  0.010 2 𝑏
1 + ( )√ 1
3 𝑏2

Table 8.6.1.1—𝑨𝒔,𝒎𝒊𝒏 for nonprestressed two-way slabs

Reinforcement type 𝒇𝒚 , MPa 𝑨𝒔,𝒎𝒊𝒏 mm2

Deformed bars < 420 0.0020𝐴𝑔

0.0018 × 420
𝐴𝑔
Deformed bars or welded wire 𝑓𝑦
 420 Greater of:
reinforcement
0.0014𝐴𝑔

SBC 304-CR-18 61
CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

Table 8.6.2.3—Minimum bonded deformed longitudinal reinforcement 𝑨𝒔,𝒎𝒊𝒏 in two-way slabs with
bonded or unbonded tendons

Calculated 𝒇𝒕 after all losses,

Region 𝑨𝒔,𝒎𝒊𝒏 , mm2
MPa

𝑓𝑡 ≤ 0.17√𝑓𝑐′
Not required (a)
Positive moment
0.17√𝑓𝑐′ < 𝑓𝑡 ≤ 0.50√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑁𝑐
(b)[1], [2], [4]
0.5𝑓𝑦

Negative moment at
𝑓𝑡 ≤ 0.50√𝑓𝑐′ 0.00075𝐴𝑐𝑓 (c)[3],[4]
columns
[1]
The value of 𝑓𝑦 shall not exceed 420 MPa.
[2]
𝑁𝑐 is the resultant tensile force acting on the portion of the concrete cross section that is subjected to tensile
stresses due to the combined effects of service loads and effective prestress.
[3]
𝐴𝑐𝑓 is the greater gross cross-sectional area of the slab-beam strips of the two orthogonal equivalent frames
intersecting at a column of a two-way slab.
[4]
For slabs with bonded tendons, it shall be permitted to reduce 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 by the area of the bonded prestressed
reinforcement located within the area used to determine 𝑁𝑐 for positive moment, or within the width of slab
defined in 8.7.5.3(a) for negative moment.

Table 8.7.6.3—First stirrup location and spacing limits

Direction of Maximum distance or spacing,

Description of measurement
measurement mm

Perpendicular to column Distance from column face to first stirrup 𝑑 ⁄2

face Spacing between stirrups 𝑑 ⁄2

Parallel to column face Spacing between vertical legs of stirrups 2𝑑

SBC 304-CR-18 62
CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

Table 8.7.7.1.2—Shear stud location and spacing limits

Maximum
Direction of Description of
Condition distance or
measurement measurement
spacing, mm

Distance from column face

to first peripheral line of All 𝑑 ⁄2
shear studs

Nonprestressed
Perpendicular to 𝑣𝑢 ≤ ϕ0.5√𝑓𝑐′ 3𝑑 ⁄4
slab with
column face Constant spacing between
Nonprestressed
peripheral lines of shear 𝑣𝑢 > ϕ0.5√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑑/2
slab with
studs
Prestressed slabs conforming to
3𝑑/4
22.6.5.4

Spacing between adjacent

Parallel to column
shear studs on peripheral All 2𝑑
face
line nearest to column face

Table 8.10.4.2—Distribution coefficients for end spans

Slab without beams

between interior
Slab with beams supports
Exterior edge Exterior edge
between all
unrestrained Without fully restrained
supports With edge
edge
beam
beam

Interior negative 0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65

Positive 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35

Exterior negative 0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65

Table 8.10.5.1—Portion of interior negative 𝑴𝒖 in column strip

𝒍𝟐 ⁄ 𝒍𝟏
𝛂𝒇𝟏 𝒍𝟐 ⁄𝒍𝟏
0.5 1.0 2.0

0 0.75 0.75 0.75

1.0 0.90 0.75 0.45

Note: Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.

SBC 304-CR-18 63
CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

Table 8.10.5.2—Portion of exterior negative 𝑴𝒖 in column strip

𝒍𝟐 ⁄ 𝒍𝟏
𝛂𝒇𝟏 𝒍𝟐 ⁄𝒍𝟏 𝒕
0.5 1.0 2.0

0 1.0 1.0 1.0

0
 2.5 0.75 0.75 0.75

0 1.0 1.0 1.0

 1.0
 2.5 0.90 0.75 0.45

Note: Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown. 𝑡 is calculated using Eq. (8.10.5.2a),
where 𝐶 is calculated using Eq. (8.10.5.2b).

Table 8.10.5.5—Portion of positive 𝑴𝒖 in column strip

𝒍𝟐 ⁄ 𝒍𝟏
𝛂𝒇𝟏 𝒍𝟐 ⁄𝒍𝟏
0.5 1.0 2.0

0 0.60 0.60 0.60

 1.0 0.90 0.75 0.45

Note: Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.

Table 8.10.5.7.1—Portion of column strip 𝑴𝒖 in beams

𝛂𝒇𝟏 𝒍𝟐 ⁄𝒍𝟏 Distribution coefficient
0 0
 1.0 0.85
Note: Linear interpolation shall be made between values shown.

Table 8.10.8.1—Portion of shear resisted by beam

𝛂𝒇𝟏 𝒍𝟐 ⁄𝒍𝟏 Distribution coefficient

0 0

 1.0 1.0

Note: Linear interpolation shall be made between values shown.

SBC 304-CR-18 64
CHAPTER 8—TWO-WAY SLABS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 65
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

9.2.4.1 In T-beam construction, flange and web

9.1—Scope concrete shall be placed monolithically or made
9.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of composite in accordance with 16.4.
nonprestressed and prestressed beams, including:
9.2.4.2 Effective flange width shall be in
(a) Composite beams of concrete elements accordance with 6.3.2.
constructed in separate placements but connected so
9.2.4.3 For T-beam flanges where the primary
that all elements resist loads as a unit
flexural slab reinforcement is parallel to the
(b) One-way joist systems in accordance with 9.8 longitudinal axis of the beam, reinforcement in the
flange perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
(c) Deep beams in accordance with 9.9
beam shall be in accordance with 7.5.2.3.
9.2—General 9.2.4.4 For torsional design according to 22.7, the
9.2.1 Materials over-hanging flange width used to calculate 𝐴𝑐𝑝 ,
9.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be 𝐴𝑔 , and 𝑝𝑐𝑝 shall be in accordance with (a) and (b):
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19. (a) The overhanging flange width shall include
9.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement that portion of slab on each side of the beam
shall be selected to be in accordance with Chapter extending a distance equal to the projection
20. of the beam above or below the slab,
whichever is greater, but not greater than
9.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing four times the slab thickness.
requirements for embedments in concrete shall be (b) The overhanging flanges shall be neglected
in accordance with 20.7. in cases where the parameter 𝐴2𝑐𝑝 ⁄𝑝𝑐𝑝 for
9.2.2 Connection to other members solid sections or 𝐴𝑔2 ⁄𝑝𝑐𝑝 for hollow
9.2.2.1 For cast-in-place construction, beam- sections calculated for a beam with flanges
column and slab-column joints shall satisfy Chapter is less than that calculated for the same
15. beam ignoring the flanges.

9.2.2.2 For precast construction, connections shall 9.3—Design limits

satisfy the force transfer requirements of 16.2. 9.3.1 Minimum beam depth
9.2.3 Stability 9.3.1.1 For nonprestressed beams not supporting or
9.2.3.1 If a beam is not continuously laterally attached to partitions or other construction likely to
braced, (a) and (b) shall be satisfied: be damaged by large deflections, overall beam
depth ℎ shall satisfy the limits in Table 9.3.1.1 ,
(a) Spacing of lateral bracing shall not exceed unless the calculated deflection limits of 9.3.2 are
50 times the least width of compression satisfied.
flange or face.
(b) Spacing of lateral bracing shall take into 9.3.1.1.1 For 𝑓𝑦 other than 420 MPa, the
account effects of eccentric loads. expressions in Table 9.3.1.1 shall be multiplied by
(0.4 + 𝑓𝑦 /700).
9.2.3.2 In prestressed beams, buckling of thin webs
and flanges shall be considered. If there is 9.3.1.1.2 For nonprestressed beams made of
intermittent contact between prestressed lightweight concrete having 𝑤𝑐 , in the range of
reinforcement and an oversize duct, member 1440 to 1840 kg/m3, the expressions in Table
buckling between contact points shall be 9.3.1.1 shall be multiplied by the greater of (a) and
considered. (b):
9.2.4 T-beam construction (a) 1.65 – 0.0003𝑤𝑐
(b) 1.09

SBC 304-CR-18 66
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

9.3.1.1.3 For nonprestressed composite beams 9.4.3 Factored shear

made of a combination of lightweight and normal-
9.4.3.1 For beams built integrally with supports, 𝑉𝑢
weight concrete, shored during construction, and
at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at
where the lightweight concrete is in compression,
the face of support.
the modifier of 9.3.1.1.2 shall apply.
9.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
9.3.1.2 The thickness of a concrete floor finish shall
critical section located at 𝑑 from the face of support
be permitted to be included in ℎ if it is placed
for nonprestressed beams and ℎ/2 from the face of
monolithically with the beam or if the floor finish is
support for prestressed beams shall be permitted to
designed to be composite with the beam in
be designed for 𝑉𝑢 at that critical section if (a)
accordance with 16.4.
through (c) are satisfied:
9.3.2 Calculated deflection limits
(a) Support reaction, in direction of applied
9.3.2.1 For nonprestressed beams not satisfying shear, introduces compression into the end
9.3.1 and for prestressed beams, immediate and region of the beam
time-dependent deflections shall be calculated in (b) Loads are applied at or near the top surface
accordance with 24.2 and shall not exceed the limits of the beam
in 24.2.2. (c) No concentrated load occurs between the
9.3.2.2 For nonprestressed composite concrete face of support and critical section
beams satisfying 9.3.1, deflections occurring after 9.4.4 Factored torsion
the member becomes composite need not be
9.4.4.1 Unless determined by a more detailed
calculated. Deflections occurring before the
analysis, it shall be permitted to take the torsional
member becomes composite shall be investigated
loading from a slab as uniformly distributed along
unless the precomposite depth also satisfies 9.3.1.
the beam.
9.3.3 Reinforcement strain limit in
9.4.4.2 For beams built integrally with supports, 𝑇𝑢
nonprestressed beams
at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at
9.3.3.1 For nonprestressed beams with 𝑃𝑢 < the face of support.
0.10 𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑔 , 𝑡 shall be at least 0.004.
9.4.4.3 Sections between the face of support and a
9.3.4 Stress limits in prestressed beams critical section located at d from the face of support
for nonprestressed beams or ℎ/2 from the face of
9.3.4.1 Prestressed beams shall be classified as
support for prestressed beams shall be permitted to
Class U, T, or C in accordance with 24.5.2.
be designed for 𝑇𝑢 at that critical section unless a
9.3.4.2 Stresses in prestressed beams immediately concentrated torsional moment occurs within this
after transfer and at service loads shall not exceed distance. In that case, the critical section shall be
permissible stresses in 24.5.3 and 24.5.4. taken at the face of the support.
9.4—Required strength 9.4.4.4 It shall be permitted to reduce 𝑇𝑢 in
accordance with 22.7.3.
9.4.1 General
9.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in
9.5—Design strength
accordance with the factored load combinations in 9.5.1 General
Chapter 5.
9.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load
9.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in combination, design strength at all sections shall
accordance with the analysis procedures in Chapter satisfy 𝑆𝑛 ≥ 𝑈 including (a) through (d).
6. Interaction between load effects shall be
9.4.1.3 For prestressed beams, effects of reactions considered.
induced by prestressing shall be considered in (a) 𝑀𝑛 ≥ 𝑀𝑢
accordance with 5.3.11. (b) 𝑉𝑛 ≥ 𝑉𝑢
9.4.2 Factored moment (c) 𝑇𝑛 ≥ 𝑇𝑢
(d) 𝑃𝑛 ≥ 𝑃𝑢
9.4.2.1 For beams built integrally with supports, 𝑀𝑢
at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at 9.5.1.2  shall be determined in accordance with
the face of support. 21.2 .

SBC 304-CR-18 67
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

9.5.2 Moment 9.5.4.7 For solid precast sections with an aspect

ratio ℎ/𝑏𝑡 ≥ 4.5, it shall be permitted to use an
9.5.2.1 If 𝑃𝑢 < 0.10 𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑔 , 𝑀𝑛 shall be calculated in
alternative design procedure and open web
accordance with 22.3. reinforcement, provided the adequacy of the
9.5.2.2 If 𝑃𝑢 ≥ 0.10 𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑔 , 𝑀𝑛 shall be calculated in procedure and reinforcement have been shown by
accordance with 22.4. analysis and substantial agreement with results of
comprehensive tests. The minimum reinforcement
9.5.2.3 For prestressed beams, external tendons requirements of 9.6.4 and detailing requirements of
shall be considered as unbonded tendons in 9.7.5 and 9.7.6.3 need not be satisfied.
calculating flexural strength, unless the external
tendons are effectively bonded to the concrete along 9.6—Reinforcement limits
the entire length. 9.6.1 Minimum flexural reinforcement in
9.5.3 Shear nonprestressed beams
9.5.3.1 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with 9.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement,
22.5 . 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be provided at every section where
tension reinforcement is required by analysis.
9.5.3.2 For composite concrete beams, horizontal
shear strength 𝑉𝑛ℎ shall be calculated in accordance 9.6.1.2 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 shall be the greater of (a) and (b),
with 16.4. except as provided in 9.6.1.3. For a statically
9.5.4 Torsion determinate beam with a flange in tension, the value
of 𝑏𝑤 shall be the lesser of 𝑏𝑓 and 2𝑏𝑤 .
9.5.4.1 If 𝑇𝑢 < 𝑇𝑡ℎ , where 𝑇𝑡ℎ is given in 22.7, it
shall be permitted to neglect torsional effects. The 0.25√𝑓𝑐′
minimum reinforcement requirements of 9.6.4 and (a) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
𝑓𝑦
the detailing requirements of 9.7.5 and 9.7.6.3 need 1.4
(b) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
not be satisfied. 𝑓𝑦

9.5.4.2 𝑇𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with 9.6.1.3 If 𝐴𝑠 provided at every section is at least
22.7 . one-third greater than 𝐴𝑠 required by analysis,
9.6.1.1 and 9.6.1.2 need not be satisfied.
9.5.4.3 Longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
required for torsion shall be added to that required 9.6.2 Minimum flexural reinforcement in
for the 𝑉𝑢 , 𝑀𝑢 and 𝑃𝑢 that act in combination with prestressed beams
the torsion.
9.6.2.1 For beams with bonded prestressed
9.5.4.4 For prestressed beams, the total area of reinforcement, total quantity of 𝐴𝑠 and 𝐴𝑝𝑠 shall
longitudinal reinforcement, 𝐴𝑠 and 𝐴𝑝𝑠 , at each be adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2
section shall be designed to resist 𝑀𝑢 at that section, times the cracking load calculated on the basis of
plus an additional concentric longitudinal tensile 𝑓𝑟 , defined in 19.2.3.
force equal to 𝐴𝑙 𝑓𝑦 based on 𝑇𝑢 at that section. 9.6.2.2 For beams with both flexural and shear
9.5.4.5 It shall be permitted to reduce the area of design strength at least twice the required strength,
longitudinal torsional reinforcement in the flexural 9.6.2.1 need not be satisfied.
compression zone by an amount equal to 𝑀𝑢 / 9.6.2.3 For beams with unbonded tendons, the
(0.9𝑑𝑓𝑦 ), where 𝑀𝑢 occurs simultaneously with 𝑇𝑢 minimum area of bonded deformed longitudinal
at that section, except that the longitudinal reinforcement 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 shall be:
reinforcement area shall not be less than the
minimum required in 9.6.4. 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.004𝐴𝑐𝑡 (9.6.2.3)
9.5.4.6 For solid sections with an aspect ratio where 𝐴𝑐𝑡 is the area of that part of the cross section
ℎ/𝑏𝑡 ≥ 3, it shall be permitted to use an alternative between the flexural tension face and the centroid
design procedure, provided the adequacy of the of the gross section.
procedure has been shown by analysis and 9.6.3 Minimum shear reinforcement
substantial agreement with results of
comprehensive tests. The minimum reinforcement 9.6.3.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement,
requirements of 9.6.4 need not be satisfied, but the 𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be provided in all regions where 𝑉𝑢 >
detailing requirements of 9.7.5 and 9.7.6.3 apply. 0.5𝑉𝑐 except for the cases in Table 9.6.3.1 . For

SBC 304-CR-18 68
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

these cases, at least 𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 shall be provided where reinforcement closest to the tension face shall not
𝑉𝑢 > 𝑉𝑐 . exceed 𝑠 given in 24.3.
9.6.3.2 If shown by testing that the required 𝑀𝑛 and 9.7.2.3 For nonprestressed and Class C prestressed
𝑉𝑛 can be developed, 9.6.3.1 need not be satisfied. beams with ℎ exceeding 900 mm, longitudinal skin
Such tests shall simulate effects of differential reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed on
settlement, creep, shrinkage, and temperature both side faces of the beam for a distance ℎ/2 from
change, based on a realistic assessment of these the tension face. Spacing of skin reinforcement
effects occurring in service. shall not exceed s given in 24.3.2, where 𝑐𝑐 is the
clear cover from the skin reinforcement to the side
9.6.3.3 If shear reinforcement is required and
face. It shall be permitted to include skin
torsional effects can be neglected according to
reinforcement in strength calculations if a strain
9.5.4.1, 𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 shall be in accordance with Table
compatibility analysis is made.
9.6.3.3 .
9.7.3 Flexural reinforcement in
9.6.4 Minimum torsional reinforcement nonprestressed beams
9.6.4.1 A minimum area of torsional reinforcement 9.7.3.1 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
shall be provided in all regions where 𝑇𝑢 ≥ 𝑇𝑡ℎ in reinforcement at each section of the beam shall be
accordance with 22.7. developed on each side of that section.
9.6.4.2 If torsional reinforcement is required, 9.7.3.2 Critical locations for development of
minimum transverse reinforcement (𝐴 + reinforcement are points of maximum stress and
2𝐴𝑡 )𝑚𝑖𝑛 /𝑠 shall be the greater of (a) and (b): points along the span where bent or terminated
(a) 0.062√𝑓𝑐′
𝑏𝑤 tension reinforcement is no longer required to resist
𝑓𝑦𝑡 flexure.
𝑏𝑤
(b) 0.35 9.7.3.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the
𝑓𝑦𝑡
point at which it is no longer required to resist
9.6.4.3 If torsional reinforcement is required, flexure for a distance equal to the greater of 𝑑 and
minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement 𝐴𝑙,𝑚𝑖𝑛 12𝑑𝑏 , except at supports of simply-supported spans
shall be the lesser of (a) and (b): and at free ends of cantilevers.
𝐴𝑐𝑝 𝐴 𝑓𝑦𝑡
(a) 0.42√𝑓𝑐′ − ( 𝑡 ) 𝑝ℎ 9.7.3.4 Continuing flexural tension reinforcement
𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝑠 𝑓𝑦
𝐴 0.175𝑏𝑤 𝑓𝑦𝑡
shall have an embedment length at least 𝑙𝑑 beyond
𝑐𝑝
(b) 0.42√𝑓𝑐′ −( ) 𝑝ℎ the point where bent or terminated tension
𝑓 𝑦𝑡 𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝑓𝑦
reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure.
9.7—Reinforcement detailing
9.7.3.5 Flexural tension reinforcement shall not be
9.7.1 General terminated in a tension zone unless (a), (b), or (c) is
9.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in satisfied:
accordance with 20.6.1. (a) 𝑉𝑢 ≤ (2/3)𝑉𝑛 at the cutoff point
9.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and (b) For Dia 36 bars and smaller, continuing
prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance reinforcement provides double the area
with 25.4. required for flexure at the cutoff point and
𝑉𝑢 ≤ (3/4)𝑉𝑛
9.7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be (c) Stirrup or hoop area in excess of that
in accordance with 25.5. required for shear and torsion is provided
9.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with along each terminated bar or wire over a
25.6 . distance 3/4𝑑 from the termination point.
Excess stirrup or hoop area shall be at least
9.7.2 Reinforcement spacing 0.41𝑏𝑤 𝑠/𝑓𝑦𝑡 . Spacing 𝑠 shall not exceed
9.7.2.1 Minimum spacing 𝑠 shall be in accordance 𝑑/(8𝑏 )
with 25.2.
9.7.3.6 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for
9.7.2.2 For nonprestressed and Class C prestressed tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is
beams, spacing of bonded longitudinal not directly proportional to moment, such as in
sloped, stepped, or tapered beams, or where tension

SBC 304-CR-18 69
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

reinforcement is not parallel to the compression centroid through the full range of anticipated
face. member deflections.
9.7.3.7 Development of tension reinforcement by 9.7.4.2 If nonprestressed reinforcement is required
bending across the web to be anchored or made to satisfy flexural strength, the detailing
continuous with reinforcement on the opposite face requirements of 9.7.3 shall be satisfied.
of beam shall be permitted.
9.7.4.3 Termination of prestressed
9.7.3.8 Termination of reinforcement reinforcement
9.7.3.8.1 At simple supports, at least one-third of 9.7.4.3.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be
the maximum positive moment reinforcement shall designed and detailed in accordance with 25.9.
extend along the beam bottom into the support at
9.7.4.3.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers
least 150 mm, except for precast beams where such
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with
reinforcement shall extend at least to the center of
25.8 .
the bearing length.
9.7.4.4 Termination of deformed reinforcement
9.7.3.8.2 At other supports, at least one-fourth of
in beams with unbonded tendons
the maximum positive moment reinforcement shall
extend along the beam bottom into the support at 9.7.4.4.1 Length of deformed reinforcement
least 150 mm and, if the beam is part of the primary required by 9.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a)
lateral-load-resisting system, shall be anchored to and (b):
develop 𝑓𝑦 at the face of the support. (a) At least 𝑙𝑛 /3 in positive moment areas and
9.7.3.8.3 At simple supports and points of be centered in those areas
inflection, 𝑑𝑏 for positive moment tension (b) At least 𝑙𝑛 /6 on each side of the face of
reinforcement shall be limited such that 𝑙𝑑 for that support in negative moment areas
reinforcement satisfies (a) or (b). If reinforcement 9.7.5 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement
terminates beyond the centerline of supports by a
standard hook or a mechanical anchorage at least 9.7.5.1 If torsional reinforcement is required,
equivalent to a standard hook, (a) or (b) need not be longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be
satisfied. distributed around the perimeter of closed stirrups
that satisfy 25.7.1.6 or hoops with a spacing not
(a) 𝑙𝑑 ≤ (1.3𝑀𝑛 /𝑉𝑢 + 𝑙𝑎 ) if end of greater than 300 mm. The longitudinal
reinforcement is confined by a compressive reinforcement shall be inside the stirrup or hoop,
reaction and at least one longitudinal bar or tendon shall be
𝑀
(b) 𝑙𝑑 ≤ ( 𝑛 + 𝑙𝑎 )if end of reinforcement is placed in each corner.
𝑉𝑢
not confined by a compressive reaction 9.7.5.2 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall
𝑀𝑛 is calculated assuming all reinforcement at the have a diameter at least 0.042 times the transverse
section is stressed to 𝑓𝑦 and 𝑉𝑢 is calculated at the reinforcement spacing, but not less than 10 mm.
section. At a support, 𝑙𝑎 is the embedment length 9.7.5.3 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall
beyond the center of the support. At a point of extend for a distance of at least (𝑏𝑡 + 𝑑) beyond the
inflection, 𝑙𝑎 is the embedment length beyond the point required by analysis.
point of inflection limited to the greater of 𝑑 and 9.7.5.4 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall
12𝑑𝑏 . be developed at the face of the support at both ends
9.7.3.8.4 At least one-third of the negative moment of the beam.
reinforcement at a support shall have an embedment 9.7.6 Transverse reinforcement
length beyond the point of inflection at least the
greatest of 𝑑, 12𝑑𝑏 ,and 𝑙𝑛 /16. 9.7.6.1 General
9.7.4 Flexural reinforcement in prestressed 9.7.6.1.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be in
beams accordance with this section. The most restrictive
requirements shall apply.
9.7.4.1 External tendons shall be attached to the
member in a manner that maintains the specified 9.7.6.1.2 Details of transverse reinforcement shall
eccentricity between the tendons and the concrete be in accordance with 25.7.
9.7.6.2 Shear

SBC 304-CR-18 70
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

9.7.6.2.1 If required, shear reinforcement shall be (a) 16𝑑𝑏 of longitudinal reinforcement

provided using stirrups, hoops, or longitudinal bent (b) 48𝑑𝑏 of transverse reinforcement
bars. (c) Least dimension of beam
9.7.6.2.2 Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement 9.7.6.4.4 Longitudinal compression reinforcement
shall be in accordance with Table 9.7.6.2.2 . shall be arranged such that every corner and
alternate compression bar shall be enclosed by the
9.7.6.2.3 Inclined stirrups and longitudinal bars
corner of the transverse reinforcement with an
bent to act as shear reinforcement shall be spaced so
included angle of not more than 135 degrees, and
that every 45-degree line, extending 𝑑/2 toward the
no bar shall be farther than 150 mm clear on each
reaction from mid- depth of member to longitudinal
side along the transverse reinforcement from such
tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least
an enclosed bar.
one line of shear reinforcement.
9.7.7 Structural integrity reinforcement in
9.7.6.2.4 Longitudinal bars bent to act as shear
cast-in-place beams
reinforcement, if extended into a region of tension,
shall be continuous with longitudinal reinforcement 9.7.7.1 For beams along the perimeter of the
and, if extended into a region of compression, shall structure, structural integrity reinforcement shall be
be anchored 𝑑/2 beyond mid- depth of member. in accordance with (a) through (c):
9.7.6.3 Torsion (a) At least one-quarter of the maximum
positive moment reinforcement, but not
9.7.6.3.1 If required, transverse torsional
less than two bars or strands, shall be
reinforcement shall be closed stirrups satisfying
continuous
25.7.1.6 or hoops.
(b) At least one-sixth of the negative moment
9.7.6.3.2 Transverse torsional reinforcement shall reinforcement at the support, but not less
extend a distance of at least (𝑏𝑡 + 𝑑) beyond the than two bars or strands, shall be
point required by analysis. continuous
(c) Longitudinal structural integrity
9.7.6.3.3 Spacing of transverse torsional
reinforcement shall be enclosed by closed
reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of 𝑝ℎ /8
stirrups in accordance with 25.7.1.6 or
and 300 mm.
hoops along the clear span of the beam
9.7.6.3.4 For hollow sections, the distance from the
9.7.7.2 For other than perimeter beams, structural
centerline of the transverse torsional reinforcement
integrity reinforcement shall be in accordance with
to the inside face of the wall of the hollow section
(a) or (b):
shall be at least 0.5𝐴𝑜ℎ /𝑝ℎ .
(a) At least one-quarter of the maximum
9.7.6.4 Lateral support of compression
positive moment reinforcement, but not
reinforcement
less than two bars or strands, shall be
9.7.6.4.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be continuous.
provided throughout the distance where (b) Longitudinal reinforcement shall be
longitudinal compression reinforcement is required. enclosed by closed stirrups in accordance
Lateral support of longitudinal compression with 25.7.1.6 or hoops along the clear span
reinforcement shall be provided by closed stirrups of the beam.
or hoops in accordance with 9.7.6.4.2 through
9.7.7.3 Longitudinal structural integrity
9.7.6.4.4.
reinforcement shall pass through the region
9.7.6.4.2 Size of transverse reinforcement shall be bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the
at least (a) or (b). Deformed wire or welded wire column.
reinforcement of equivalent area shall be permitted.
9.7.7.4 Longitudinal structural integrity
(a) Dia 10 for longitudinal bars Dia 32 and reinforcement at non-continuous supports shall be
smaller anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 at the face of the support.
(b) Dia 12 mm for longitudinal bars Dia 36 and
larger and for longitudinal bundled bars 9.7.7.5 If splices are necessary in continuous
structural integrity reinforcement, the
9.7.6.4.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall reinforcement shall be spliced in accordance with
not exceed the least of (a) through (c): (a) and (b):

SBC 304-CR-18 71
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

(a) Positive moment reinforcement shall be 9.8.3.1 If fillers not complying with 9.8.2.1 or
spliced at or near the support removable forms are used, slab thickness shall be at
(b) Negative moment reinforcement shall be least the greater of one-twelfth the clear distance
spliced at or near midspan between ribs and 50 mm.
9.7.7.6 Splices shall be full mechanical, full 9.9—Deep beams
welded, or Class B tension lap splices.
9.9.1 General
9.8—Nonprestressed one-way joist
9.9.1.1 Deep beams are members that are loaded on
systems one face and supported on the opposite face such
9.8.1 General that strut-like compression elements can develop
between the loads and supports and that satisfy (a)
9.8.1.1 Nonprestressed one-way joist construction or (b):
consists of a monolithic combination of regularly
spaced ribs and a top slab designed to span in one (a) Clear span does not exceed four times the
direction. overall member depth ℎ
(b) Concentrated loads exist within a distance
9.8.1.2 Width of ribs shall be at least 100 mm at any
2ℎ from the face of the support
location along the depth.
9.9.1.2 Deep beams shall be designed taking into
9.8.1.3 Overall depth of ribs shall not exceed 3.5
account nonlinear distribution of longitudinal strain
times the minimum width.
over the depth of the beam.
9.8.1.4 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
9.9.1.3 Strut-and-tie models in accordance with
750 mm.
Chapter 23 are deemed to satisfy 9.9.1.2.
9.8.1.5 𝑉𝑐 shall be permitted to be taken as 1.1 times
9.9.2 Dimensional limits
the value calculated in 22.5.
9.9.2.1 Deep beam dimensions shall be selected
9.8.1.6 For structural integrity, at least one bottom
such that:
bar in each joist shall be continuous and shall be
anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 at the face of supports. 𝑉𝑢 ≤ 0.83√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (9.9.2.1)
9.8.1.7 Reinforcement perpendicular to the ribs 9.9.3 Reinforcement limits
shall be provided in the slab as required for flexure,
considering load concentrations, and shall be at 9.9.3.1 Distributed reinforcement along the side
least that required for shrinkage and temperature in faces of deep beams shall be at least that required in
accordance with 24.4. (a) and (b):

9.8.1.8 One-way joist construction not satisfying (a) The area of distributed reinforcement
the limitations of 9.8.1.1 through 9.8.1.4 shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
designed as slabs and beams. beam, 𝐴𝑣 , shall be at least 0.0025𝑏𝑤 𝑠,
where 𝑠 is the spacing of the distributed
9.8.2 Joist systems with structural fillers transverse reinforcement.
9.8.2.1 If permanent burned clay or concrete tile (b) The area of distributed reinforcement
fillers of material having a unit compressive parallel to the longitudinal axis of the beam,
strength at least equal to 𝑓𝑐′ in the joists are used, 𝐴𝑣ℎ , shall be at least 0.0025𝑏𝑤 𝑠2 , where 𝑠2
9.8.2.1.1 and 9.8.2.1.2 shall apply. is the spacing of the distributed longitudinal
reinforcement.
9.8.2.1.1 Slab thickness over fillers shall be at least
the greater of one-twelfth the clear distance 9.9.3.2 The minimum area of flexural tension
between ribs and 40 mm. reinforcement, 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be determined in
accordance with 9.6.1.
9.8.2.1.2 For calculation of shear and negative
moment strength, it shall be permitted to include the 9.9.4 Reinforcement detailing
vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs. 9.9.4.1 Concrete cover shall be in accordance with
Other portions of fillers shall not be included in 20.6.1.
strength calculations.
9.9.4.2 Minimum spacing for longitudinal
9.8.3 Joist systems with other fillers reinforcement shall be in accordance with 25.2.

SBC 304-CR-18 72
 CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

9.9.4.3 Spacing of distributed reinforcement tension reinforcement shall be anchored in

required in 9.9.3.1 shall not exceed the lesser of 𝑑/5 accordance with 23.8.2 and 23.8.3.
and 300 mm.
9.9.4.6 At interior supports, (a) and (b) shall be
9.9.4.4 Development of tension reinforcement shall satisfied:
account for distribution of stress in reinforcement
(a) Negative moment tension reinforcement
that is not directly proportional to the bending
shall be continuous with that of the adjacent
moment.
spans.
9.9.4.5 At simple supports, positive moment (b) Positive moment tension reinforcement
tension reinforcement shall be anchored to develop shall be continuous or spliced with that of
𝑓𝑦 at the face of the support. If a deep beam is the adjacent spans.
designed using Chapter 23 , the positive moment

SBC 304-CR-18 73
CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 9

Table 9.3.1.1—Minimum depth of nonprestressed beams

Support condition Minimum 𝒉[1]

Simply supported 𝑙 ⁄16

One end continuous 𝑙 ⁄18.5

Both ends continuous 𝑙 ⁄21

Cantilever 𝑙 ⁄8
[1]
Expressions applicable for normalweight concrete and Grade 420 reinforcement. For other cases, minimum
ℎ shall be modified in accordance with 9.3.1.1.1 through 9.3.1.1.3, as appropriate.

Table 9.6.3.1—Cases where 𝑨𝒗,𝒎𝒊𝒏 is not required if 𝟎. 𝟓𝑽𝒄 < 𝑽𝒖 ≤ 𝑽𝒄

Beam type Conditions

Shallow depth ℎ ≤ 250 mm

ℎ ≤ greater of 2.5𝑡𝑓 or 0.5bw

Integral with slab and
ℎ ≤ 600 mm

Constructed with steel fiber-reinforced normal-weight concrete ℎ ≤ 600 𝑚𝑚

conforming to 26.4.1.5.1(a), 26.4.2.2(d), and 26.12.5.1(a) and and
with 𝑓𝑐′  40 MPa 𝑉𝑢 ≤ 0.17√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑

One-way joist system In accordance with 9.8

SBC 304-CR-18 74
CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

Table 9.6.3.3—Required 𝑨𝒗,𝒎𝒊𝒏

Beam type 𝑨𝒗,𝒎𝒊𝒏 /𝒔

𝑏𝑤
0.062√𝑓𝑐′ (a)
Nonprestressed and prestressed with 𝑓𝑦𝑡
Greater of:
𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑠𝑒 < 0.4(𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑝𝑢 + 𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦 ) 𝑏𝑤
0.35 (b)
𝑓𝑦𝑡

𝑏𝑤
0.062√𝑓𝑐′ (c)
𝑓𝑦𝑡
Greater of:
𝑏𝑤
Prestressed with 0.35 (d)
Lesser of: 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑠𝑒 ≥ 0.4(𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑝𝑢 + 𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦 )

𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑝𝑢 𝑑
√ (e)
80𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝑑 𝑏𝑤

Table 9.7.6.2.2—Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement

Maximum 𝒔, mm
𝑽𝒔
Nonprestressed beam Prestressed beam

𝑑/2 3ℎ/4
Lesser of:
≤ 0.33√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 600

𝑑/4 3ℎ/8
>0.33√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 Lesser of:
300

SBC 304-CR-18 75
CHAPTER 9—BEAMS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 76
 CHAPTER 10—COLUMNS

CHAPTER 10—COLUMNS

effective area, not less than one-half the total area.

10.1—Scope This provision shall not apply to columns in special
10.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of moment frames or columns not part of the seismic-
nonprestressed, prestressed and composite force-resisting system required to be designed in
columns, including reinforced concrete pedestals. accordance with Chapter 18.
10.1.2 Design of plain concrete pedestals shall be 10.3.1.3 For columns built monolithically with a
in accordance with Chapter 14. concrete wall, the outer limits of the effective cross
section of the column shall not be taken greater than
10.2—General 40 mm outside the transverse reinforcement.
10.2.1 Materials 10.3.1.4 For columns with two or more interlocking
10.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be spirals, outer limits of the effective cross section
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19. shall be taken at a distance outside the spirals equal
to the minimum required concrete cover.
10.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement
and structural steel used in composite columns shall 10.3.1.5 If a reduced effective area is considered
be selected to be in accordance with Chapter 20. according to 10.3.1.1 through 10.3.1.4, structural
analysis and design of other parts of the structure
10.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing
that interact with the column shall be based on the
requirements for embedments in concrete shall be
actual cross section.
in accordance with 20.7.
10.3.1.6 For composite columns with a concrete
10.2.2 Composite columns
core encased by structural steel, the thickness of the
10.2.2.1 If a structural steel shape, pipe, or tubing is steel encasement shall be at least (a) or (b):
used as longitudinal reinforcement, the column
𝑓𝑦
shall be designed as a composite column. (a) 𝑏√ for each of width 𝑏
3𝐸𝑠
10.2.3 Connection to other members 𝑓𝑦
(b) ℎ√ for circular sections of diameter ℎ
8𝐸𝑠
10.2.3.1 For cast-in-place construction, beam-
column and slab-column joints shall satisfy Chapter 10.4—Required strength
15.
10.4.1 General
10.2.3.2 For precast construction, connections shall
satisfy the force transfer requirements of 16.2. 10.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in
accordance with the factored load combinations in
10.2.3.3 Connections of columns to foundations Chapter 5.
shall satisfy 16.3.
10.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in
10.3—Design limits accordance with the analysis procedures in Chapter
10.3.1 Dimensional limits 6.

10.3.1.1 For columns with a square, octagonal, or 10.4.2 Factored axial force and moment
other shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to 10.4.2.1 𝑃𝑢 and 𝑀𝑢 occurring simultaneously for
base gross area considered, required reinforcement, each applicable factored load combination shall be
and design strength on a circular section with a considered.
diameter equal to the least lateral dimension of the
actual shape. 10.5—Design strength
10.3.1.2 For columns with cross sections larger 10.5.1 General
than required by considerations of loading, it shall 10.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load
be permitted to base gross area considered, required combination, design strength at all sections shall
reinforcement, and design strength on a reduced satisfy 𝑆𝑛 ≥ 𝑈, including (a) through (d).

SBC 304-CR-18 77
 CHAPTER 10—COLUMNS

Interaction between load effects shall be 10.7—Reinforcement detailing

considered.
10.7.1 General
(a) 𝑃𝑛 ≥ 𝑃𝑢
10.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be
(b) 𝑀𝑛 ≥ 𝑀𝑢
in accordance with 20.6.1.
(c) 𝑉𝑛 ≥ 𝑉𝑢
(d) 𝑇𝑛 ≥ 𝑇𝑢 10.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance
10.5.1.2  shall be determined in accordance with
with 25.4.
21.2 .
10.7.1.3 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with
10.5.2 Axial force and moment
25.6 .
10.5.2.1 𝑃𝑛 and 𝑀𝑛 shall be calculated in
10.7.2 Reinforcement spacing
accordance with 22.4.
10.7.2.1 Minimum spacing 𝑠 shall be in accordance
10.5.2.2 For composite columns, forces shall be
with 25.2.
transferred between the steel section and concrete
by direct bearing, shear connectors, or bond in 10.7.3 Longitudinal reinforcement
accordance to the axial strength assigned to each 10.7.3.1 For nonprestressed columns and for
component.
prestressed columns with average 𝑓𝑝𝑒 < 1.6 MPa,
10.5.3 Shear the minimum number of longitudinal bars shall be
10.5.3.1 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with (a) Three within triangular ties
22.5 . (b) Four within rectangular or circular ties
10.5.4 Torsion (c) Six enclosed by spirals or for columns of
special moment frames enclosed by
10.5.4.1 If 𝑇𝑢 ≥ 𝑇𝑡ℎ , where 𝑇𝑡ℎ is given in 22.7, circular hoops
torsion shall be considered in accordance with
Chapter 9. 10.7.3.2 For composite columns with structural
steel cores, a longitudinal bar shall be located at
10.6—Reinforcement limits every corner of a rectangular cross section, with
10.6.1 Minimum and maximum longitudinal other longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than
reinforcement one-half the least side dimension of the composite
column.
10.6.1.1 For nonprestressed columns and for
prestressed columns with average 𝑓𝑝𝑒 < 1.6 MPa, 10.7.4 Offset bent longitudinal reinforcement
area of longitudinal reinforcement shall be at least 10.7.4.1 The slope of the inclined portion of an
0.01𝐴𝑔 but shall not exceed 0.08𝐴𝑔 . offset bent longitudinal bar relative to the
longitudinal axis of the column shall not exceed 1
10.6.1.2 For composite columns with a structural in 6. Portions of bar above and below an offset shall
steel core, area of longitudinal bars located within be parallel to axis of column.
the transverse reinforcement shall be at least
0.01(𝐴𝑔 – 𝐴𝑠𝑥 ), but shall not exceed 10.7.4.2 If the column face is offset 75 mm or more,
0.08(𝐴𝑔 – 𝐴𝑠𝑥 ). longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent and
separate dowels, lap spliced with the longitudinal
10.6.2 Minimum shear reinforcement bars adjacent to the offset column faces, shall be
10.6.2.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement, provided.
𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be provided in all regions where 10.7.5 Splices of longitudinal reinforcement
𝑉𝑢 > 0.5𝑉𝑐 .
10.7.5.1 General
10.6.2.2 If shear reinforcement is required, 𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛 ,
10.7.5.1.1 Lap splices, mechanical splices, butt-
shall be the greater of (a) and (b): welded splices, and end-bearing splices shall be
𝑏𝑤 𝑠 permitted.
(a) 0.062√𝑓𝑐′
𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑏𝑤 𝑠 10.7.5.1.2 Splices shall satisfy requirements for all
(b) 0.35 factored load combinations.
𝑓𝑦𝑡

SBC 304-CR-18 78
 CHAPTER 10—COLUMNS

10.7.5.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall 10.7.6.1.3 For prestressed columns with average
be in accordance with 25.5 and shall satisfy the 𝑓𝑝𝑒 ≥ 1.6 MPa, transverse ties or hoops need not
requirements of 10.7.5.2 for lap splices or 10.7.5.3 satisfy the 16𝑑𝑏 spacing requirements of 25.7.2.1.
for end-bearing splices.
10.7.6.1.4 For composite columns with a structural
10.7.5.2 Lap splices steel core, transverse ties or hoops shall have a
10.7.5.2.1 If the bar force due to factored loads is minimum 𝑑𝑏 of 0.02 times the greater side
compressive, compression lap splices shall be dimension of the composite column, but shall be at
permitted. It shall be permitted to decrease the least Dia 10 and need not be larger than Dia 16.
compression lap splice length in accordance with Spacing shall satisfy 25.7.2.1 ., but not exceed 0.5
(a) or (b), but the lap splice length shall be at least times the least dimension of the composite column.
300 mm. Deformed wire or welded wire reinforcement of
equivalent area shall be permitted.
(a) For tied columns, where ties throughout the
lap splice length have an effective area not 10.7.6.1.5 Longitudinal reinforcement shall be
less than 0.0015ℎ𝑠 in both directions, lap laterally supported using ties or hoops in
splice length shall be permitted to be accordance with 10.7.6.2 or spirals in accordance
multiplied by 0.83. Tie legs perpendicular with 10.7.6.3, unless tests and structural analyses
to dimension ℎ shall be considered in demonstrate adequate strength and feasibility of
calculating effective area. construction.
(b) For spiral columns, where spirals 10.7.6.1.6 If anchor bolts are placed in the top of
throughout the lap splice length satisfy column or pedestal, the bolts shall be enclosed by
25.7.3, lap splice length shall be permitted transverse reinforcement that also surrounds at least
to be multiplied by 0.75. four longitudinal bars within the column or
10.7.5.2.2 If the bar force due to factored loads is pedestal. The transverse reinforcement shall be
tensile, tension lap splices shall be in accordance distributed within 125 mm of the top of the column
with Table 10.7.5.2.2 . or pedestal, and shall consist of at least two Dia 14
or three Dia 10 bars. In structures assigned to
10.7.5.3 End-bearing splices Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F, the ties shall
10.7.5.3.1 If the bar force due to factored loads is have a hook on each free end that complies with
compressive, end-bearing splices shall be permitted 25.3.4.
provided the splices are staggered or additional bars 10.7.6.2 Lateral support of longitudinal bars
are provided at splice locations. The continuing bars using ties or hoops
in each face of the column shall have a tensile
strength at least 0.25𝑓𝑦 times the area of the vertical 10.7.6.2.1 In any story, the bottom tie or hoop shall
be located not more than one-half the tie or hoop
reinforcement along that face.
spacing above the top of footing or slab.
10.7.5.3.2 For composite columns, ends of
10.7.6.2.2 In any story, the top tie or hoop shall be
structural steel cores shall be accurately finished to
located not more than one-half the tie or hoop
bear at end-bearing splices, with positive provision
spacing below the lowest horizontal reinforcement
for alignment of one core above the other in
in the slab, drop panel, or shear cap. If beams or
concentric contact. Bearing shall be considered
brackets frame into all sides of the column, the top
effective to transfer not greater than 50 percent of
tie or hoop shall be located not more than 75 mm
the total compressive force in the steel core.
below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in the
10.7.6 Transverse reinforcement shallowest beam or bracket.
10.7.6.1 General 10.7.6.3 Lateral support of longitudinal bars
10.7.6.1.1 Transverse reinforcement shall satisfy using spirals
the most restrictive requirements for reinforcing 10.7.6.3.1 In any story, the bottom of the spiral
spacing. shall be located at the top of footing or slab.
10.7.6.1.2 Details of transverse reinforcement shall 10.7.6.3.2 In any story, the top of the spiral shall be
be in accordance with 25.7.2 for ties, 25.7.3 for located in accordance with Table 10.7.6.3.2 .
spirals, or 25.7.4 for hoops.
10.7.6.4 Lateral support of offset bent longitudinal
bars

SBC 304-CR-18 79
 CHAPTER 10—COLUMNS

10.7.6.4.1 Where longitudinal bars are offset, hoops, or spirals shall be placed not more than 150
horizontal support shall be provided by ties, hoops, mm from points of bend.
spirals, or parts of the floor construction and shall
10.7.6.5 Shear
be designed to resist 1.5 times the horizontal
component of the computed force in the inclined 10.7.6.5.1 If required, shear reinforcement shall be
portion of the offset bar. provided using ties, hoops, or spirals.
10.7.6.4.2 If transverse reinforcement is provided 10.7.6.5.2 Maximum spacing of shear
to resist forces that result from offset bends, ties, reinforcement shall be in accordance with Table
10.7.6.5.2 .

SBC 304-CR-18 80
CHAPTER 10—COLUMNS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 10

Table 10.7.5.2.2—Tension lap splice class

Tensile bar stress Splice details Splice type

 50 % bars spliced at any section and lap

Class A
≤ 0.5𝑓𝑦 splices on adjacent bars staggered by at least 𝑙𝑑

Other Class B
> 0.5𝑓𝑦 All cases Class B

Table 10.7.6.3.2—Spiral extension requirements at top of column

Framing at column end Extension requirements
Beams or brackets frame into all sides of Extend to the level of the lowest horizontal reinforcement in
the column members supported above.
Extend to the level of the lowest horizontal reinforcement in
Beams or brackets do not frame into all members supported above.
sides of the column Additional column ties shall extend above termination of spiral to
bottom of slab, drop panel, or shear cap.
Extend to the level at which the diameter or width of capital is
Columns with capitals twice that of the column.

Table 10.7.6.5.2—Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement

Maximum s, mm
𝑽𝒔
Nonprestressed column Prestressed column
𝑑/2 3h/4
≤ (1/3 √𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 Lesser of:
600
𝑑/4 3ℎ/4
> (1/3 √𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 Lesser of:
300

SBC 304-CR-18 81
CHAPTER 10—COLUMNS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 82
 CHAPTER 11—WALLS

CHAPTER 11—WALLS

wall joints unless design provides for transfer of

11.1—Scope forces across the joints.
11.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of
11.2.4 Intersecting elements
nonprestressed and prestressed walls including (a)
through (c): 11.2.4.1 Walls shall be anchored to intersecting
elements, such as floors and roofs; columns,
(a) Cast-in-place
pilasters, buttresses, or intersecting walls; and to
(b) Precast in-plant
footings.
(c) Precast on-site including tilt-up
11.3—Design limits
11.1.2 Design of special structural walls shall be
in accordance with Chapter 18. 11.3.1 Minimum wall thickness
11.1.3 Design of plain concrete walls shall be in 11.3.1.1 Minimum wall thicknesses shall be in
accordance with Chapter 14. accordance with Table 11.3.1.1 . Thinner walls are
permitted if adequate strength and stability can be
11.1.4 Design of cantilever retaining walls shall be
demonstrated by structural analysis.
in accordance with 22.2 through 22.4, with
minimum horizontal reinforcement in accordance 11.4—Required strength
with 11.6.
11.4.1 General
11.1.5 Design of walls as grade beams shall be in
11.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in
accordance with 13.3.5.
accordance with the factored load combinations in
11.2—General Chapter 5.
11.2.1 Materials 11.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in
accordance with the analysis procedures in Chapter
11.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
6.
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19.
11.4.1.3 Slenderness effects shall be calculated in
11.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement
accordance with 6.6.4, 6.7, or 6.8. Alternatively, out
shall be selected to be in accordance with Chapter
of plane slenderness analysis shall be permitted
20.
using 11.8 for walls meeting the requirements of
11.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing that section.
requirements for embedments in concrete shall be
11.4.1.4 Walls shall be designed for eccentric axial
in accordance with 20.7.
loads and any lateral or other loads to which they
11.2.2 Connection to other members are subjected.
11.2.2.1 For precast walls, connections shall be 11.4.2 Factored axial force and moment
designed in accordance with 16.2.
11.4.2.1 Walls shall be designed for the maximum
11.2.2.2 Connections of walls to foundations shall factored moment 𝑀𝑢 that can accompany the
satisfy 16.3. factored axial force for each applicable load
11.2.3 Load distribution combination. The factored axial force 𝑃𝑢 at given
eccentricity shall not exceed 𝑃𝑛,𝑚𝑎𝑥 , where 𝑃𝑛,𝑚𝑎𝑥
11.2.3.1 Unless otherwise demonstrated by an shall be as given in 22.4.2.1 and strength reduction
analysis, the horizontal length of wall considered as factor  shall be that for compression-controlled
effective for resisting each concentrated load shall sections in 21.2.2. The maximum factored moment
not exceed the lesser of the center-to-center 𝑀𝑢 shall be magnified for slenderness effects in
distance between loads, and the bearing width plus accordance with 6.6.4, 6.7, or 6.8.
four times the wall thickness. Effective horizontal
length for bearing shall not extend beyond vertical 11.4.3 Factored shear

SBC 304-CR-18 83
 CHAPTER 11—WALLS

11.4.3.1 Walls shall be designed for the maximum 11.5.4.2 For in-plane shear design, ℎ is thickness of
in-plane 𝑉𝑢 and out-of-plane 𝑉𝑢 . wall and 𝑑 shall be taken equal to 0.8𝑙𝑤 . A larger
value of 𝑑, equal to the distance from extreme
11.5—Design strength
compression fiber to center of force of all
11.5.1 General reinforcement in tension, shall be permitted if the
center of tension is calculated by a strain
11.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load
compatibility analysis.
combination, design strength at all sections shall
satisfy 𝑆𝑛 ≥ 𝑈, including (a) through (c). 11.5.4.3 𝑉𝑛 at any horizontal section shall not
Interaction between axial load and moment shall be exceed 0.83√𝑓𝑐′ ℎ𝑑.
considered.
11.5.4.4 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated by:
(a) 𝑃𝑛 ≥ 𝑃𝑢
(b) 𝑀𝑛 ≥ 𝑀𝑢 𝑉𝑛 = 𝑉𝑐 + 𝑉𝑠 (11.5.4.4)
(c) 𝑉𝑛 ≥ 𝑉𝑢
11.5.1.2  shall be determined in accordance with 11.5.4.5 Unless a more detailed calculation is made
21.2. in accordance with 11.5.4.6, 𝑉𝑐 shall not exceed
0.17λ√𝑓𝑐′ ℎ𝑑 for walls subject to axial compression
11.5.2 Axial load and in-plane or out-of-plane
or exceed the value given in 22.5.7 for walls subject
flexure
to axial tension.
11.5.2.1 For bearing walls, 𝑃𝑛 and 𝑀𝑛 (in-plane or
11.5.4.6 It shall be permitted to calculate 𝑉𝑐 in
out-of-plane) shall be calculated in accordance with
accordance with Table 11.5.4.6 , where 𝑁𝑢 is
22.4. Alternatively, axial load and out-of-plane
positive for compression and negative for tension,
flexure shall be permitted to be considered in
and the quantity 𝑁𝑢 /𝐴𝑔 is expressed in MPa.
accordance with 11.5.3.
11.5.2.2 For nonbearing walls, 𝑀𝑛 shall be 11.5.4.7 Sections located closer to wall base than a
calculated in accordance with 22.3. distance 𝑙𝑤 /2 or one-half the wall height,
whichever is less, shall be permitted to be designed
11.5.3 Axial load and out-of-plane flexure – for 𝑉𝑐 calculated using the detailed calculation
simplified design method options in Table 11.5.4.6 at a distance above the
11.5.3.1 If the resultant of all factored loads is base of 𝑙𝑤 /2 or one-half the wall height, whichever
located within the middle third of the thickness of a is less.
solid wall with a rectangular cross section, 𝑃𝑛 shall 11.5.4.8 𝑉𝑠 shall be provided by transverse shear
be permitted to be calculated by: reinforcement and shall be calculated by:
𝑘𝑙𝑐 2 𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝑑
𝑃𝑛 = 0.55𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑔 [1 − ( ) ] (11.5.3.1)
𝑉𝑠 = (11.5.4.8)
32ℎ 𝑠
11.5.3.2 Effective length factor k for use with Eq.
(11.5.3.1) shall be in accordance with Table 11.5.5 Out-of-plane shear
11.5.3.2 . 11.5.5.1 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with
11.5.3.3 𝑃𝑛 from Eq. (11.5.3.1 ) shall be reduced by 22.5.
 for compression-controlled sections in 21.2.2. 11.6—Reinforcement limits
11.5.3.4 Wall reinforcement shall be at least that 11.6.1 If in-plane 𝑉𝑢 ≤ 0.5𝑉𝑐 , minimum ρ𝑙 and
required by 11.6. minimum ρ𝑡 shall be in accordance with Table
11.5.4 In-plane shear 11.6.1. These limits need not be satisfied if adequate
strength and stability can be demonstrated by
11.5.4.1 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with structural analysis.
11.5.4.2 through 11.5.4.8. Alternatively, for walls
with ℎ𝑤 ≤ 2𝑙𝑤 it shall be permitted to design for in- 11.6.2 If in-plane 𝑉𝑢 ≥ 0.5𝑉𝑐 , (a) and (b) shall be
plane shear in accordance with the strut-and-tie satisfied:
method of Chapter 23. In all cases, reinforcement (a) 𝜌𝑙 shall be at least the greater of the value
shall satisfy the limits of 11.6, 11.7.2, and 11.7.3. calculated by Eq. (11.6.2) and 0.0025, but

SBC 304-CR-18 84
 CHAPTER 11—WALLS

need not exceed 𝜌𝑡 in accordance with 11.7.3.1 Spacing 𝑠 of transverse reinforcement in

Table 11.6.1 . cast-in-place walls shall not exceed the lesser of 3ℎ
ℎ𝑤 and 450 mm. If shear reinforcement is required for
𝜌𝑙 ≥ 0.0025 + 0.5 (2.5 − ) (𝜌𝑡 − 0.0025) (11.6.2) in-plane strength, 𝑠 shall not exceed 𝑙𝑤 /5.
𝑙𝑤
(b) 𝜌𝑡 shall be at least 0.0025. 11.7.3.2 Spacing s of transverse bars in precast
walls shall not exceed the lesser of (a) and (b):
11.7—Reinforcement detailing
(a) 5ℎ
11.7.1 General (b) 450 mm for exterior walls or 750 mm for
interior walls
11.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be
in accordance with 20.6.1. If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane
11.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and strength, 𝑠 shall not exceed the least of 3ℎ, 450 mm,
prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance and 𝑙𝑤 /5.
with 25.4. 11.7.4 Lateral support of longitudinal
11.7.1.3 Splice lengths of deformed reinforcement reinforcement
shall be in accordance with 25.5. 11.7.4.1 If longitudinal reinforcement is required
11.7.2 Spacing of longitudinal reinforcement for axial strength or if 𝐴𝑠𝑡 exceeds 0.01𝐴𝑔 ,
longitudinal reinforcement shall be laterally
11.7.2.1 Spacing 𝑠 of longitudinal bars in cast-in- supported by transverse ties.
place walls shall not exceed the lesser of 3ℎ and 450
mm. If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane 11.7.5 Reinforcement around openings
strength, spacing of longitudinal reinforcement 11.7.5.1 In addition to the minimum reinforcement
shall not exceed 𝑙𝑤 /3. required by 11.6, at least two Dia 16 bars in walls
11.7.2.2 Spacing 𝑠 of longitudinal bars in precast having two layers of reinforcement in both
walls shall not exceed the lesser of (a) and (b): directions and one Dia 16 bar in walls having a
single layer of reinforcement in both directions
(a) 5ℎ shall be provided around window, door, and
(b) 450 mm for exterior walls or 750 mm for similarly sized openings. Such bars shall be
interior walls anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 in tension at the corners of
If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane the openings.
strength, s shall not exceed the smallest of 3ℎ, 450 11.8—Alternative method for out-of-
mm, and 𝑙𝑤 /3. plane slender wall analysis
11.7.2.3 For walls with ℎ greater than 250 mm, 11.8.1 General
except basement walls and cantilever retaining
walls, distributed reinforcement for each direction 11.8.1.1 It shall be permitted to analyze out-of-
shall be placed in two layers parallel with wall faces plane slender effects in accordance with this section
in accordance with (a) and (b): for walls satisfying (a) through (e):
(a) One layer consisting of at least one-half and (a) Cross section is constant over the height of
not exceeding two-thirds of total the wall
reinforcement required for each direction (b) Wall is tension-controlled for out-of-plane
shall be placed at least 50 mm but not moment effect
exceeding ℎ/3, from the exterior surface. (c) 𝑀𝑛 is at least 𝑀𝑐𝑟 , where 𝑀𝑐𝑟 is calculated
(b) The other layer consisting of the balance of using 𝑓𝑟 as provided in 19.2.3
required reinforcement in that direction, (d) 𝑃𝑢 at the midheight section does not exceed
shall be placed at least 20 mm, but not 0.06𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑔
greater than ℎ/3, from the interior surface. (e) Calculated out-of-plane deflection due to
11.7.2.4 Flexural tension reinforcement shall be service loads, Δ𝑠 , including 𝑃Δ effects,
well distributed and placed as close as practicable does not exceed 𝑙𝑐 /150
to the tension face. 11.8.2 Modeling
11.7.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement 11.8.2.1 The wall shall be analyzed as a simply
supported, axially loaded member subject to an out-

SBC 304-CR-18 85
 CHAPTER 11—WALLS

of-plane uniformly distributed lateral load, with 𝐸𝑠 𝑃𝑢 ℎ 𝑙𝑤 𝑐 3

maximum moments and deflections occurring at 𝐼𝑐𝑟 = (𝐴𝑠 + ) (𝑑 − 𝑐)2 + (11.8.3.1c)
𝐸𝑐 𝑓𝑦 2𝑑 3
midheight.
11.8.2.2 Concentrated gravity loads applied to the and the value of 𝐸𝑠 ⁄𝐸𝑐 shall be at least 6.
wall above any section shall be assumed to be
distributed over a width equal to the bearing width, (b) By direct calculation using:
plus a width on each side that increases at a slope of 𝑀𝑢𝑎
2 vertical to 1 horizontal, but not extending beyond 𝑀𝑢 =
5𝑃𝑢 𝑙𝑐2 (11.8.3.1d)
(a) or (b): (1 − )
(0.75)48𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑐𝑟
(a) The spacing of the concentrated loads
(b) The edges of the wall panel 11.8.4 Out-of-plane deflection—service loads

11.8.3 Factored moment 11.8.4.1 Out-of-plane deflection due to service

loads, Δ𝑠 , shall be calculated in accordance with
11.8.3.1 𝑀𝑢 at midheight of wall due to combined Table 11.8.4.1 , where 𝑀𝑎 is calculated by 11.8.4.2.
flexure and axial loads shall include the effects of
wall deflection in accordance with (a) or (b): 11.8.4.2 The maximum moment 𝑀𝑎 at midheight of
wall due to service lateral and eccentric vertical
(a) By iterative calculation using loads, including 𝑃𝑠 Δ𝑠 effects, shall be calculated by
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑀𝑢𝑎 + 𝑃𝑢 ∆𝑢 (11.8.3.1a) Eq. (11.8.4.2 ) with iteration of deflections.

where 𝑀𝑢𝑎 is the maximum factored moment at 𝑀𝑎 = 𝑀𝑠𝑎 + 𝑃𝑠 ∆𝑠 (11.8.4.2)

midheight of wall due to lateral and eccentric
vertical loads, not including 𝑃∆ effects. 11.8.4.3 Δ𝑐𝑟 and Δ𝑛 shall be calculated by (a) and
(b):
∆𝑢 shall be calculated by:
5𝑀𝑐𝑟 𝑙𝑐2
5𝑀𝑢 𝑙𝑐2 (a) Δ𝑐𝑟 = (11.8.4.3a)
∆𝑢 = (11.8.3.1b) 48𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑔
(0.75)48𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑐𝑟
5𝑀𝑛 𝑙𝑐2
Where 𝐼𝑐𝑟 shall be calculated by: (b) Δ𝑛 = (11.8.4.3b)
48𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑐𝑟

11.8.4.4 𝐼𝑐𝑟 shall be calculated by Eq. (11.8.3.1c).

SBC 304-CR-18 86
 CHAPTER 11—WALLS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 11

Table 11.3.1.1—Minimum wall thickness, 𝒉

Wall type Minimum thickness, 𝒉
100 mm (a)
[1]
Bearing Greater of: 1/25 the lesser of unsupported length and unsupported
(b)
height
100 mm (c)
Nonbearing Greater of: 1/30 the lesser of unsupported length and unsupported
(d)
height
Exterior basement and
190 mm (e)
foundation
[1]
Only applies to walls designed in accordance with the simplified design method of 11.5.3.

Table 11.5.3.2—Effective length factor k for walls

Boundary conditions k

Walls braced top and bottom against lateral translation and:

(a) Restrained against rotation at one or both ends (top, bottom, or both) 0.8

(b) Unrestrained against rotation at both ends 1.0

Walls not braced against lateral translation 2.0

Table 11.5.4.6—𝑽𝒄 : Nonprestressed and prestressed walls

Calculation
Axial force 𝑽𝒄
option
Compression 0.17λ√𝑓𝑐′ ℎ𝑑 (a)
0.29𝑁𝑢
Simplified Greater 0.17 (1 + ) λ√𝑓𝑐′ ℎ𝑑 (b)
Tension 𝐴𝑔
of:
0 (c)
𝑁𝑢 𝑑
0.27λ√𝑓𝑐′ ℎ𝑑 + (d)
4𝑙𝑤
𝑁
𝑙𝑤 (0.1λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 0.2 𝑢 )
Tension or 𝑙 𝑤ℎ
Detailed Lesser of: [0.05λ√𝑓𝑐′ + ] ℎ𝑑
compression 𝑀𝑢 𝑙𝑤
− (e)
𝑉𝑢 2
Equation shall not apply if (𝑀𝑢 ⁄𝑉𝑢 − 𝑙𝑤 ⁄2) is
negative.

SBC 304-CR-18 87
 CHAPTER 11—WALLS

Table 11.6.1—Minimum reinforcement for walls with in-plane 𝑽𝒖 ≤ 𝟎. 𝟓𝑽𝒄

Type of
Minimum Minimum
Wall type nonprestressed Bar/wire size 𝒇𝒚 , MPa [1]
longitudinal , 𝛒𝒍 transverse, 𝛒𝒕
reinforcement
≥ 420 0.0012 0.0020
≤ 16 mm
Deformed bars < 420 0.0015 0.0025
Cast-in-place > 16 mm Any 0.0015 0.0025

Welded-wire ≤ MW200 or MD
Any 0.0012 0.0020
reinforcement 200
Precast[2] Deformed bars Any Any 0.0010 0.0010
[1]
Prestressed walls with an average effective compressive stress of at least 1.6 MPa need not meet the
requirement for minimum longitudinal reinforcement ρ𝑙 .
[2]
In one-way precast, prestressed walls not wider than 3.7 m and not mechanically connected to cause restraint
in the transverse direction, the minimum reinforcement requirement in the direction normal to the flexural
reinforcement need not be satisfied.

Table 11.8.4.1—Calculation of 𝚫𝒔

𝑴𝒂 𝚫𝒔

𝑀𝑎
≤ (2⁄3)𝑀𝑐𝑟 Δ𝑠 = ( )Δ (a)
𝑀𝑐𝑟 𝑐𝑟

(𝑀𝑎 − (2⁄3)𝑀𝑐𝑟 )
Δ𝑠 = (2⁄3)Δ𝑐𝑟 + (Δ − (2⁄3) Δ𝑐𝑟 )
> (2⁄3)𝑀𝑐𝑟 (𝑀𝑛 − (2⁄3)𝑀𝑐𝑟 ) 𝑛 (b)

SBC 304-CR-18 88
CHAPTER 11—WALLS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 89
 CHAPTER 12—DIAPHRAGMS

CHAPTER 12—DIAPHRAGMS

12.3.1.2 Floor and roof diaphragms shall have a

12.1—Scope thickness not less than that required for floor and
12.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of roof elements in other parts of this Code.
nonprestressed and prestressed diaphragms,
12.4—Required strength
including (a) through (d):
12.4.1 General
(a) Diaphragms that are cast-in-place slabs
(b) Diaphragms that comprise a cast-in-place 12.4.1.1 Required strength of diaphragms,
topping slab on precast elements collectors, and their connections shall be calculated
(c) Diaphragms that comprise precast elements in accordance with the factored load combinations
with end strips formed by either a cast-in- in Chapter 5.
place concrete topping slab or edge beams
12.4.1.2 Required strength of diaphragms that are
(d) Diaphragms of interconnected precast
part of floor or roof construction shall include
elements without cast-in-place concrete
effects of out-of-plane loads simultaneous with
topping
other applicable loads.
12.1.2 Diaphragms in structures assigned to
12.4.2 Diaphragm modeling and analysis
Seismic Design Category D, E, or F shall also
satisfy requirements of 18.12. 12.4.2.1 Diaphragm modeling and analysis
requirements of SBC 301 shall govern where
12.2—General applicable. Otherwise, diaphragm modeling and
12.2.1 Design shall consider (a) through (e): analysis shall be in accordance with 12.4.2.2
through 12.4.2.4.
(a) Diaphragm in-plane forces due to lateral
loads acting on the building 12.4.2.2 Modeling and analysis procedures shall
(b) Diaphragm transfer forces satisfy requirements of Chapter 6.
(c) Connection forces between the diaphragm 12.4.2.3 Any set of reasonable and consistent
and vertical framing or nonstructural assumptions for diaphragm stiffness shall be
elements permitted.
(d) Forces resulting from bracing vertical or
sloped building elements 12.4.2.4 Calculation of diaphragm in-plane design
(e) Diaphragm out-of-plane forces due to moments, shears, and axial forces shall be
gravity and other loads applied to the consistent with requirements of equilibrium and
diaphragm surface with design boundary conditions. It shall be
permitted to calculate design moments, shears, and
12.2.2 Materials axial forces in accordance with one of (a) through
12.2.2.1 Design properties for concrete shall be (e):
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19. (a) A rigid diaphragm model if the diaphragm
12.2.2.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement can be idealized as rigid.
shall be selected to be in accordance with Chapter (b) A flexible diaphragm model if the
20. diaphragm can be idealized as flexible.
(c) A bounding analysis in which the design
12.3—Design limits values are the envelope of values obtained
12.3.1 Minimum diaphragm thickness by assuming upper bound and lower bound
in-plane stiffnesses for the diaphragm in
12.3.1.1 Diaphragms shall have thickness as two or more separate analyses.
required for stability, strength, and stiffness under (d) A finite element model considering
factored load combinations. diaphragm flexibility.
(e) A strut-and-tie model in accordance with
23.2 .

SBC 304-CR-18 90
 CHAPTER 12—DIAPHRAGMS

12.5—Design strength (a) Deformed bars conforming to 20.2.1.

(b) Strands or bars conforming to 20.3.1, either
12.5.1 General prestressed or nonprestressed.
12.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load (c) Mechanical connectors crossing joints
combination, design strengths of diaphragms and between precast elements.
connections shall satisfy 𝑆𝑛 ≥ 𝑈. Interaction (d) Precompression from prestressed
between load effects shall be considered. reinforcement.
12.5.1.2  shall be determined in accordance with 12.5.2.3 Nonprestressed reinforcement and
21.2 . mechanical connectors resisting tension due to
moment shall be located within ℎ/4 of the tension
12.5.1.3 Design strengths shall be in accordance
edge of the diaphragm, where ℎ is diaphragm depth
with (a), (b), (c), or (d):
measured in the plane of the diaphragm at that
(a) For a diaphragm idealized as a beam whose location. Where diaphragm depth changes along the
depth is equal to the full diaphragm depth, span, it shall be permitted to develop reinforcement
with moment resisted by boundary into adjacent diaphragm segments that are not
reinforcement concentrated at the within the ℎ/4 limit.
diaphragm edges, design strengths shall be
12.5.2.4 Mechanical connectors crossing joints
in accordance with 12.5.2 through 12.5.4.
between precast elements shall be designed to resist
(b) For a diaphragm or a diaphragm segment
required tension under the anticipated joint
modeled as a strut-and-tie system, design
opening.
strengths shall be in accordance with 23.3.
(c) For a diaphragm idealized with a finite- 12.5.3 Shear
element model, design strengths shall be in
12.5.3.1 This section shall apply to diaphragm in-
accordance with Chapter 22 . Non-uniform
plane shear strength.
shear distributions shall be considered in
design for shear. Collectors in such designs 12.5.3.2  shall be 0.75, unless a lesser value is
shall be provided to transfer diaphragm required by 21.2.4.
shears to the vertical elements of the lateral- 12.5.3.3 For a diaphragm that is entirely cast-in-
force-resisting system.
place, 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated by Eq. (12.5.3.3 ).
(d) For a diaphragm designed by alternative
methods, such methods shall satisfy the
requirements of equilibrium and shall 𝑉𝑛 = 𝐴𝑐𝑣 (0.17λ √𝑓𝑐′ ) + ρ𝑡 𝑓𝑦 ) (12.5.3.3)
provide design strengths at least equal to
required strengths for all elements in the where 𝐴𝑐𝑣 is the gross area of concrete bounded by
load path. diaphragm web thickness and depth, reduced by
void areas if present; the value of √𝑓𝑐′ used to
12.5.1.4 It shall be permitted to use precompression calculate 𝑉𝑛 shall not exceed 8.3 MPa; and 𝜌𝑡 is
from prestressed reinforcement to resist diaphragm distributed reinforcement oriented parallel to the in-
forces. plane shear.
12.5.1.5 If nonprestressed, bonded prestressing 12.5.3.4 For a diaphragm that is entirely cast-in-
reinforcement is designed to resist collector forces, place, cross-sectional dimensions shall be selected
diaphragm shear, or tension due to in-plane to satisfy Eq. (12.5.3.4 ).
moment, the value of steel stress used to calculate
resistance shall not exceed the lesser of the
specified yield strength and 420 MPa. 𝑉𝑛 ≤ 0.66𝐴𝑐𝑣 √𝑓𝑐′ (12.5.3.4)

12.5.2 Moment and axial force where the value of √𝑓𝑐′ used to calculate 𝑉𝑛 shall
12.5.2.1 It shall be permitted to design a diaphragm not exceed 8.3 MPa.
to resist in-plane moment and axial force in 12.5.3.5 For diaphragms that are cast-in-place
accordance with 22.3 and 22.4. concrete topping slabs on precast elements, (a) and
12.5.2.2 It shall be permitted to resist tension due to (b) shall be satisfied:
moment by (a), (b), (c), or (d), or those methods in (a) 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with
combination: Eq. (12.5.3.3 ), and cross-sectional

SBC 304-CR-18 91
 CHAPTER 12—DIAPHRAGMS

dimensions shall be selected to satisfy Eq. all or part of the diaphragm depth as required to
(12.5.3.4 ). 𝐴𝑐𝑣 shall be calculated using the transfer shear from the diaphragm to the vertical
thickness of the topping slab for element. It shall be permitted to discontinue a
noncomposite topping slab diaphragms and collector along lengths of vertical elements of the
the combined thickness of cast-in-place and lateral-force-resisting system where transfer of
precast elements for composite topping design collector forces is not required.
slab diaphragms. For composite topping
12.5.4.2 Collectors shall be designed as tension
slab diaphragms, the value of 𝑓𝑐′ in Eq.
members, compression members, or both, in
(12.5.3.3 ) and (12.5.3.4 ) shall not exceed
accordance with 22.4.
the lesser of 𝑓𝑐′ for the precast members and
𝑓𝑐′ for the topping slab. 12.5.4.3 Where a collector is designed to transfer
(b) 𝑉𝑛 shall not exceed the value calculated in forces to a vertical element, collector reinforcement
accordance with the shear-friction shall extend along the vertical element at least the
provisions of 22.9 considering the greater of (a) and (b):
thickness of the topping slab above joints (a) The length required to develop the
between precast elements in noncomposite reinforcement in tension.
and composite topping slab diaphragms (b) The length required to transmit the design
and the reinforcement crossing the joints forces to the vertical element through
between the precast members. shear-friction in accordance with 22.9,
12.5.3.6 For diaphragms that are interconnected through mechanical connectors, or through
precast elements without a concrete topping, and for other force transfer mechanisms.
diaphragms that are precast elements with end strips 12.6—Reinforcement limits
formed by either a cast-in-place concrete topping
slab or edge beams, it shall be permitted to design 12.6.1 Reinforcement to resist shrinkage and
for shear in accordance with (a), (b), or both. temperature stresses shall be in accordance with
24.4.
(a) The nominal strength of grouted joints shall
not exceed 0.55 MPa. Reinforcement shall 12.6.2 Except for slabs-on-ground, diaphragms
be designed to resist shear through shear- that are part of floor or roof construction shall
friction in accordance with 22.9. Shear- satisfy reinforcement limits for one-way slabs in
friction reinforcement shall be in addition accordance with 7.6 or two-way slabs in accordance
to reinforcement designed to resist tension with 8.6, as applicable.
due to moment and axial force. 12.6.3 Reinforcement designed to resist
(b) Mechanical connectors crossing joints diaphragm in-plane forces shall be in addition to
between precast elements shall be designed reinforcement designed to resist other load effects,
to resist required shear under anticipated except reinforcement designed to resist shrinkage
joint opening. and temperature effects shall be permitted to also
12.5.3.7 For any diaphragm, where shear is resist diaphragm in-plane forces.
transferred from the diaphragm to a collector, or
12.7—Reinforcement detailing
from the diaphragm or collector to a vertical
element of the lateral-force-resisting system, (a) or 12.7.1 General
(b) shall apply: 12.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be
(a) Where shear is transferred through in accordance with 20.6.1.
concrete, the shear-friction provisions of 12.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
22.9 shall be satisfied. prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance
(b) Where shear is transferred through with 25.4, unless longer lengths are required by
mechanical connectors or dowels, effects of CHAPTER 18.
uplift and rotation of the vertical element of
the lateral-force-resisting system shall be 12.7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be
considered. in accordance with 25.5.
12.5.4 Collectors 12.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with
25.6.
12.5.4.1 Collectors shall extend from the vertical
elements of the lateral-force-resisting system across 12.7.2 Reinforcement spacing

SBC 304-CR-18 92
 CHAPTER 12—DIAPHRAGMS

12.7.2.1 Minimum spacing 𝑠 of reinforcement shall 12.7.3.2 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
be in accordance with 25.2. reinforcement at each section of the diaphragm or
collector shall be developed on each side of that
12.7.2.2 Maximum spacing 𝑠 of deformed
section.
reinforcement shall be the lesser of five times the
diaphragm thickness and 450 mm. 12.7.3.3 Reinforcement provided to resist tension
shall extend beyond the point at which it is no
12.7.3 Diaphragm and collector reinforcement
longer required to resist tension at least 𝑙𝑑 , except at
12.7.3.1 Except for slabs-on-ground, diaphragms diaphragm edges and at expansion joints.
that are part of floor or roof construction shall
satisfy reinforcement detailing of one-way slabs in
accordance with 7.7 or two-way slabs in accordance
with 8.7, as applicable.

SBC 304-CR-18 93
CHAPTER 12—DIAPHRAGMS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 94
 CHAPTER 13—FOUNDATIONS

CHAPTER 13—FOUNDATIONS

13.2.4 Slabs-on-ground
13.1—Scope
13.2.4.1 Slabs-on-ground that transmit vertical
13.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of loads or lateral forces from other parts of the
nonprestressed and prestressed foundations,
structure to the ground shall be designed and
including shallow foundations (a) through (e) and,
detailed in accordance with applicable provisions of
where applicable, deep foundations (f) through (i):
this Code.
(a) Strip footings
13.2.4.2 Slabs-on-ground that transmit lateral
(b) Isolated footings forces as part of the seismic-force-resisting system
(c) Combined footings shall be designed in accordance with 18.13.
(d) Mat foundations
(e) Grade beams 13.2.5 Plain concrete
(f) Pile caps 13.2.5.1 Plain concrete foundations shall be
(g) Piles designed in accordance with Chapter 14.
(h) Drilled piers
(i) Caissons 13.2.6 Design criteria
13.1.2 Foundations excluded by 1.4.6 are 13.2.6.1 Foundations shall be proportioned to resist
excluded from this chapter. factored loads and induced reactions.
13.2—General 13.2.6.2 Foundation systems shall be permitted to
be designed by any procedure satisfying
13.2.1 Materials equilibrium and geometric compatibility.
13.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be 13.2.6.3 Foundation design in accordance with
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19. strut-and-tie modeling, Chapter 23 shall be
13.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement permitted.
shall be selected to be in accordance with Chapter 13.2.6.4 External moment on any section of a strip
20. footing, isolated footing, or pile cap shall be
13.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing calculated by passing a vertical plane through the
requirements for embedments in concrete shall be member and calculating the moment of the forces
in accordance with 20.7. acting over the entire area of member on one side of
that vertical plane.
13.2.2 Connection to other members
13.2.7 Critical sections for shallow foundations
13.2.2.1 Design and detailing of cast-in-place and and pile caps
precast column, pedestal, and wall connections to
foundations shall be in accordance with 16.3. 13.2.7.1 𝑀𝑢 at the supported member shall be
permitted to be calculated at the critical section
13.2.3 Earthquake effects defined in accordance with Table 13.2.7.1 .
13.2.3.1 Structural members extending below the 13.2.7.2 The location of critical section for factored
base of the structure that are required to transmit shear in accordance with 7.4.3 and 8.4.3 for one-
forces resulting from earthquake effects to the way shear or 8.4.4.1 for two-way shear shall be
foundation shall be designed in accordance with measured from the location of the critical section
18.2.2.3 . for 𝑀𝑢 in 13.2.7.1.
13.2.3.2 For structures assigned to Seismic Design 13.2.7.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped
Category (SDC) D, E, or F, shallow and deep concrete columns or pedestals shall be permitted to
foundations resisting earthquake-induced forces or be treated as square members of equivalent area
transferring earthquake-induced forces between when locating critical sections for moment, shear,
structure and ground shall be designed in and development of reinforcement.
accordance with 18.13.

SBC 304-CR-18 95
 CHAPTER 13—FOUNDATIONS

13.2.8 Development of reinforcement in 13.3.3.2 In square two-way footings, reinforcement

shallow foundations and pile caps shall be distributed uniformly across entire width of
footing in both directions.
13.2.8.1 Development of reinforcement shall be in
accordance with Chapter 25. 13.3.3.3 In rectangular footings, reinforcement
shall be distributed in accordance with (a) and (b):
13.2.8.2 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
reinforcement at each section shall be developed on (a) Reinforcement in the long direction shall be
each side of that section. distributed uniformly across entire width of footing.
13.2.8.3 Critical sections for development of (b) For reinforcement in the short direction, a
reinforcement shall be assumed at the same portion of the total reinforcement, 𝑠 𝐴𝑠 , shall be
locations as given in 13.2.7.1 for maximum factored distributed uniformly over a band width equal to the
moment and at all other vertical planes where length of short side of footing, centered on
changes of section or reinforcement occur. centerline of column or pedestal. Remainder of
13.2.8.4 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for reinforcement required in the short direction, (1 −
tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is 𝑠 )𝐴𝑠 , shall be distributed uniformly outside the
not directly proportional to moment, such as in center band width of footing, where 𝑠 is calculated
sloped, stepped, or tapered foundations; or where by:
tension reinforcement is not parallel to the
2
compression face. 𝑠 = (13.3.3.3)
(β + 1)
13.3—Shallow foundations
where  is the ratio of long to short side of footing.
13.3.1 General
13.3.4 Two-way combined footings and mat
13.3.1.1 Minimum base area of foundation shall be foundations
calculated from unfactored forces and moments
transmitted by foundation to soil or rock and 13.3.4.1 The design and detailing of combined
permissible bearing pressure selected through footings and mat foundations shall be in accordance
principles of soil or rock mechanics. with this section and the applicable provisions of
Chapter 8.
13.3.1.2 Overall depth of foundation shall be
selected such that the effective depth of bottom 13.3.4.2 The direct design method of 8.10 shall not
reinforcement is at least 150 mm. be used to design combined footings and mat
foundations.
13.3.1.3 In sloped, stepped, or tapered foundations,
depth and location of steps or angle of slope shall 13.3.4.3 Distribution of bearing pressure under
be such that design requirements are satisfied at combined footings and mat foundations shall be
every section. consistent with properties of the soil or rock and the
structure, and with established principles of soil or
13.3.2 One-way shallow foundations rock mechanics.
13.3.2.1 The design and detailing of one-way 13.3.4.4 Minimum reinforcement in nonprestressed
shallow foundations, including strip footings, mat foundations shall be in accordance with 8.6.1.1 .
combined footings, and grade beams, shall be in
accordance with this section and the applicable 13.3.5 Walls as grade beams
provisions of Chapter 7 and Chapter 9. 13.3.5.1 The design of walls as grade beams shall
13.3.2.2 Reinforcement shall be distributed be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
uniformly across entire width of one-way footings. Chapter 9.

13.3.3 Two-way isolated footings 13.3.5.2 If a grade beam wall is considered a deep
beam in accordance with 9.9.1.1 , design shall
13.3.3.1 The design and detailing of two-way satisfy the requirements of 9.9.
isolated footings shall be in accordance with this
section and the applicable provisions of Chapter 7 13.3.5.3 Grade beam walls shall satisfy the
and Chapter 8. minimum reinforcement requirements of 11.6.
13.4—Deep foundations
13.4.1 General

SBC 304-CR-18 96
 CHAPTER 13—FOUNDATIONS

13.4.1.1 Number and arrangement of piles, drilled the effective concrete compressive strength of the
piers, and caissons shall be determined from struts, 𝑓𝑐𝑒 , shall be calculated in accordance with
unfactored forces and moments transmitted to these 23.4.3, where s = 0.60, and  is in accordance
members and permissible member capacity selected with 19.2.4 .
through principles of soil or rock mechanics.
13.4.2.5 Calculation of factored shear on any
13.4.2 Pile caps section through a pile cap shall be in accordance
13.4.2.1 Overall depth of pile cap shall be selected with (a) through (c):
such that the effective depth of bottom (a) Entire reaction from any pile with its center
reinforcement is at least 300 mm. located 𝑑𝑝𝑖𝑙𝑒 ⁄2 or more outside the section
13.4.2.2 Factored moments and shears shall be shall be considered as producing shear on
permitted to be calculated with the reaction from that section.
any pile assumed to be concentrated at the centroid (b) Reaction from any pile with its center
of the pile section. located 𝑑𝑝𝑖𝑙𝑒 ⁄2 or more inside the section
shall be considered as producing no shear
13.4.2.3 Except for pile caps designed in
on that section.
accordance with 13.2.6.3, the pile cap shall be
(c) For intermediate positions of pile center,
designed such that (a) is satisfied for one-way
the portion of the pile reaction to be
foundations and (a) and (b) are satisfied for two-
considered as producing shear on the
way foundations.
section shall be based on a linear
(a) 𝑉𝑛  𝑉𝑢 , where 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in interpolation between full value at 𝑑𝑝𝑖𝑙𝑒 ⁄2
accordance with 22.5 for one-way shear, 𝑉𝑢 outside the section and zero value at
shall be calculated in accordance with 𝑑𝑝𝑖𝑙𝑒 ⁄2 inside the section.
13.4.2.5, and  shall be in accordance with
21.2 . 13.4.3 Deep foundation members
(b) 𝑣𝑛  𝑣𝑢 , where 𝑣𝑛 shall be calculated in 13.4.3.1 Portions of deep foundation members in
accordance with 22.6 for two-way shear, 𝑣𝑢 air, water, or soils not capable of providing
shall be calculated in accordance with adequate restraint throughout the member length to
13.4.2.5, and  shall be in accordance with prevent lateral buckling shall be designed as
21.2 . columns in accordance with the applicable
13.4.2.4 If the pile cap is designed in accordance provisions of Chapter 10.
with strut-and-tie modeling as permitted in 13.2.6.3,

SBC 304-CR-18 97
CHAPTER 13—FOUNDATIONS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 13

Table 13.2.7.1—Location of critical section for 𝑴𝒖

Supported member Location of critical section

Column or pedestal Face of column or pedestal

Column with steel base plate Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base plate

Concrete wall Face of wall

Masonry wall Halfway between center and face of masonry wall

SBC 304-CR-18 98
CHAPTER 13—FOUNDATIONS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 99
 CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

projection of the footing beyond the face of the

14.1—Scope supported member is permitted to exceed the
14.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of footing thickness.
plain concrete members, including (a) and (b):
(c) Plain concrete footings supporting walls
(a) Members in building structures are permitted, provided the footings have at
(b) Members in non-building structures such as least two continuous longitudinal
arches, underground utility structures, reinforcing bars. Bars shall not be smaller
gravity walls, and shielding walls than Dia 14 and shall have a total area of
not less than 0.002 times the gross cross-
14.1.2 This chapter shall not govern the design of
sectional area of the footing. For footings
cast-in-place concrete piles and piers embedded in
that exceed 200 mm in thickness, a
ground.
minimum of one bar shall be provided at
14.1.3 Plain concrete shall be permitted only in the top and bottom of the footing.
cases (a) through (d): Continuity of reinforcement shall be
provided at corners and intersections.
(a) Members that are continuously supported
by soil or supported by other structural Exceptions:
members capable of providing continuous
(1) In Seismic Design Categories A, B and
vertical support
C, detached one- and two-family
(b) Members for which arch action provides
dwellings three stories or less in height
compression under all conditions of
constructed with stud-bearing walls are
loading
permitted to have plain concrete
(c) Walls
footings without longitudinal
(d) Pedestals
reinforcement.
14.1.4 Structures assigned to Seismic Design (2) For foundation systems consisting of a
Category C, D, E or F shall not have elements of plain concrete footing and a plain
structural plain concrete, except as follows. concrete stem wall, a minimum of one
bar shall be provided at the top of the
(a) Structural plain concrete basement,
stem wall and at the bottom of the
foundation or other walls below the base as
footing.
defined in SBC 301 are permitted in
(3) Where a slab on ground is cast
detached one- and two-family dwellings
monolithically with the footing, one
three stories or less in height constructed
Dia 16 bar is permitted to be located at
with stud bearing walls. In dwellings
either the top of the slab or bottom of
assigned to Seismic Design Category D or
the footing.
E, the height of the wall shall not exceed
2.4 m (2400 mm), the thickness shall be not 14.1.5 Plain concrete shall not be permitted for
less than 190 mm, and the wall shall retain columns and pile caps.
no more than 1.2 m (1200 mm) of
unbalanced fill. Walls shall have 14.2—General
reinforcement in accordance with 14.6.1. 14.2.1 Materials
(b) Isolated footings of plain concrete
14.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
supporting pedestals or columns are
selected to be in accordance with Chapter 19.
permitted, provided the projection of the
footing beyond the face of the supported 14.2.1.2 Steel reinforcement, if required, shall be
member does not exceed the footing selected to be in accordance with Chapter 20.
thickness.
14.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing
Exception: In detached one- and two-family requirements for embedments in concrete shall be
dwellings three stories or less in height, the in accordance with 20.7.

SBC 304-CR-18 100

 CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

14.2.2 Connection to other members 14.4—Required strength

14.2.2.1 Tension shall not be transmitted through 14.4.1 General
outside edges, construction joints, contraction
joints, or isolation joints of an individual plain 14.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in
concrete element. accordance with the factored load combinations
defined in Chapter 5.
14.2.2.2 Walls shall be braced against lateral
14.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in
translation.
accordance with the analysis procedures in Chapter
14.2.3 Precast 6.
14.2.3.1 Design of precast members shall consider 14.4.1.3 No flexural continuity due to tension shall
all loading conditions from initial fabrication to be assumed between adjacent structural plain
completion of the structure, including form concrete elements.
removal, storage, transportation, and erection.
14.4.2 Walls
14.2.3.2 Precast members shall be connected to
14.4.2.1 Walls shall be designed for an eccentricity
transfer lateral forces into a structural system
capable of resisting such forces. corresponding to the maximum moment that can
accompany the axial load but not less than 0.10h,
14.3—Design limits where h is the wall thickness.
14.3.1 Bearing walls 14.4.3 Footings
14.3.1.1 Minimum bearing wall thickness shall be 14.4.3.1 General
in accordance with Table 14.3.1.1 .
14.4.3.1.1 For footings supporting circular or
14.3.2 Footings regular polygon-shaped concrete columns or
pedestals, it shall be permitted to assume a square
14.3.2.1 Footing thickness shall be at least 200 mm.
section of equivalent area for determining critical
14.3.2.2 Base area of footing shall be determined sections.
from unfactored forces and moments transmitted by
14.4.3.2 Factored moment
footing to soil and permissible soil pressure selected
through principles of soil mechanics. 14.4.3.2.1 The critical section for 𝑀𝑢 shall be
located in accordance with Table 14.4.3.2.1 .
14.3.3 Pedestals
14.4.3.3 Factored one-way shear
14.3.3.1 Ratio of unsupported height to average
least lateral dimension shall not exceed 3. 14.4.3.3.1 For one-way shear, critical sections shall
be located ℎ from (a) and (b), where ℎ is the footing
14.3.4 Contraction and isolation joints
thickness.
14.3.4.1 Contraction or isolation joints shall be
(a) Location defined in Table 14.4.3.2.1
provided to divide structural plain concrete
members into flexurally discontinuous elements. (b) Face of concentrated loads or reaction areas
The size of each element shall be selected to limit 14.4.3.3.2 Sections between (a) or (b) of 14.4.3.3.1
stress caused by restraint to movements from creep, and the critical section for shear shall be permitted
shrinkage, and temperature effects. to be designed for 𝑉𝑢 at the critical section for shear.
14.3.4.2 The number and location of contraction or 14.4.3.4 Factored two-way shear
isolation joints shall be determined considering (a)
14.4.3.4.1 For two-way shear, critical sections shall
through (f):
be located so that the perimeter 𝑏𝑜 is a minimum but
(a) Influence of climatic conditions need not be closer than ℎ/2 to (a) through (c):
(b) Selection and proportioning of materials
(c) Mixing, placing, and curing of concrete (a) Location defined in Table 14.4.3.2.1
(d) Degree of restraint to movement (b) Face of concentrated loads or reaction areas
(e) Stresses due to loads to which an element is (c) Changes in footing thickness
subjected 14.4.3.4.2 For square or rectangular columns,
(f) Construction techniques concentrated loads, or reaction areas, the critical

SBC 304-CR-18 101

 CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

section for two-way shear shall be permitted to be 14.5.3.1 𝑃𝑛 shall be calculated by:
calculated assuming straight sides.
𝑙𝑐 2
14.5—Design strength 𝑃𝑛 = 0.60𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑔 [1 − ( ) ] (14.5.3.1)
32 ℎ
14.5.1 General
14.5.4 Flexure and axial compression
14.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load
combination, design strength at all sections shall 14.5.4.1 Unless permitted by 14.5.4.2, member
satisfy 𝑆𝑛  𝑈, including (a) through (d). dimensions shall be proportioned to be in
Interaction between load effects shall be accordance with Table 14.5.4.1 , where 𝑀𝑛 is
considered. calculated in accordance with 14.5.2.1(b) and 𝑃𝑛 is
calculated in accordance with 14.5.3.1.
(a) 𝑀𝑛  𝑀𝑢
14.5.4.2 For walls of solid rectangular cross section
(b) 𝑃𝑛  𝑃𝑢
(c) 𝑉𝑛  𝑉𝑢 where 𝑀𝑢  𝑃𝑢 (ℎ/6), 𝑀𝑢 need not be considered in
(d) 𝐵𝑛  𝐵𝑢 design and 𝑃𝑛 is calculated by:

14.5.1.2  shall be determined in accordance with 𝑙𝑐 2

𝑃𝑛 = 0.45𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑔 [1 − ( ) ] (14.5.4.2)
21.2. 32 ℎ
14.5.1.3 Tensile strength of concrete shall be 14.5.5 Shear
permitted to be considered in design.
14.5.5.1 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with
14.5.1.4 Flexure and axial strength calculations Table 14.5.5.1 .
shall be based on a linear stress-strain relationship
14.5.6 Bearing
in both tension and compression.
14.5.6.1 𝐵𝑛 shall be calculated in accordance with
14.5.1.5  for lightweight concrete shall be in
Table 14.5.6.1 .
accordance with 19.2.4.
14.5.1.6 No strength shall be assigned to steel 14.6—Reinforcement detailing
reinforcement. 14.6.1 At least two Dia 16 bars shall be provided
14.5.1.7 When calculating member strength in around all window and door openings. Such bars
flexure, combined flexure and axial load, or shear, shall extend at least 600 mm beyond the corners of
the entire cross section shall be considered in openings.
design, except for concrete cast against soil where 14.6.2 Detailed plain concrete structural walls.
overall thickness ℎ shall be taken as 50 mm less
14.6.2.1 Detailed plain concrete structural walls are
than the specified thickness.
walls conforming to the requirements of ordinary
14.5.1.8 Unless demonstrated by analysis, structural plain concrete walls and 14.6.2.2.
horizontal length of wall to be considered effective
14.6.2.2 Reinforcement shall be provided as
for resisting each vertical concentrated load shall
follows:
not exceed center-to-center distance between loads,
or bearing width plus four times the wall thickness. (a) Vertical reinforcement of at least 130 mm2
in cross-sectional area shall be provided
14.5.2 Flexure
continuously from support to support at
14.5.2.1 𝑀𝑛 shall be the lesser of Eq. (14.5.2.1a) each corner, at each side of each opening
calculated at the tension face and Eq. (14.5.2.1b) and at the ends of walls. The continuous
calculated at the compression face: vertical bar required beside an opening is
permitted to substitute for one of the two
𝑀𝑛 = 0.42√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑆𝑚 (14.5.2.1a) Dia 16 bars required by 14.6.1.
(b) Horizontal reinforcement at least 130 mm2
𝑀𝑛 = 0.42𝑓𝑐′ 𝑆𝑚 (14.5.2.1b) in cross-sectional area shall be provided:
(1) Continuously at structurally connected
where 𝑆𝑚 is the corresponding elastic section roof and floor levels and at the top of
modulus. walls;
14.5.3 Axial compression

SBC 304-CR-18 102

CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

(2) At the bottom of load-bearing walls or Reinforcement at the top and bottom of openings,
in the top of foundations where where used in determining the maximum spacing
doweled to the wall; and specified in Item 3 above, shall be continuous in the
(3) At a maximum spacing of 3000 mm. wall.

SBC 304-CR-18 103

CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

TABLES OF CHAPTER 14

Table 14.3.1.1—Minimum thickness of bearing walls

Wall type Minimum thickness
140 mm
General Greater of: 1/24 the lesser of unsupported length and
unsupported height
Exterior basement 190 mm
Foundation 190 mm

Table 14.4.3.2.1—Location of critical section for 𝑴𝒖

Supported member Location of critical section

Column or pedestal Face of column or pedestal

Column with steel base plate Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base plate

Concrete wall Face of wall

Masonry wall Halfway between center and face of masonry wall

Table 14.5.4.1—Combined flexure and axial compression

Location Interaction equation

𝑀𝑢 𝑃𝑢
Tension face − ≤ 0.42√𝑓𝑐′ (a)
𝑆𝑚 𝐴𝑔

𝑀𝑢 𝑃𝑢
Compression face + ≤ 1.0 (b)
𝑀𝑛 𝑃𝑛

Table 14.5.5.1—Nominal shear strength

Shear action Nominal shear strength 𝑽𝒏

One-way 0.11√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 ℎ (a)

[1]
2 ′
(1 + ) (0.11√𝑓𝑐 𝑏𝑜 ℎ) (b)
β
Two-way Lesser of:
2 (0.11√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑜 ℎ) (c)

 is the ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
[1]

SBC 304-CR-18 104

CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

Table 14.5.6.1—Nominal bearing strength

Relative geometric conditions 𝐵𝑛

𝐴2
Supporting surface is wider on all sides than √ (0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 ) (a)
Lesser of: 𝐴1
the loaded area
2(0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 ) (b)

Other 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 (c)

SBC 304-CR-18 105

CHAPTER 14—PLAIN CONCRETE

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 106

 CHAPTER 15—BEAM-COLUMN AND SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS

CHAPTER 15—BEAM-COLUMN AND SLAB-COLUMN

JOINTS

(b) Design strength of a column through a floor

15.1—Scope system shall be calculated using the lower
15.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design and value of concrete strength with vertical
detailing of cast-in-place beam-column and slab- dowels and spirals as required to achieve
column joints. adequate strength.
(c) For beam-column and slab-column joints
15.2—General that are restrained in accordance with
15.2.1 Beam-column and slab-column joints shall 15.2.4 or 15.2.5, respectively, it shall be
satisfy 15.3 for transfer of column axial force permitted to calculate the design strength of
through the floor system. the column on an assumed concrete
strength in the column joint equal to 75
15.2.2 If gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other
percent of column concrete strength plus 35
lateral forces cause transfer of moment at beam-
percent of floor concrete strength, where
column or slab-column joints, the shear resulting
the value of column concrete strength shall
from moment transfer shall be considered in the
not exceed 2.5 times the floor concrete
design of the joint.
strength.
15.2.3 Beam-Column and slab-column joints that
15.4—Detailing of joints
transfer moment to columns shall satisfy the
detailing provisions in 15.4 Beam-column joints 15.4.1 Beam-column and slab-column joints that
within special moment frames, slab-column joints are restrained in accordance with 15.2.4 or 15.2.5,
within intermediate moment frames, and beam- respectively, and are not part of a seismic-force-
column and slab column joints in frames not resisting system need not satisfy the provisions for
designed as part of the seismic-force-resisting transverse reinforcement of 15.4.2.
systems in structures assigned to Seismic Design
15.4.2 The area of all legs of transverse
Categories D, E, or F, shall satisfy Chapter 18.
reinforcement in each principal direction of beam-
15.2.4 A beam-column joint shall be considered to column and slab-column joints shall be at least the
be restrained if the joint is laterally supported on greater of (a) and (b):
four sides by beams of approximately equal depth. 𝑏𝑠
(a) 0.062√𝑓𝑐′
15.2.5 A slab-column joint shall be considered to 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑏𝑠
be restrained if the joint is laterally supported on (b) 0.35
𝑓𝑦𝑡
four sides by the slab.
where 𝑏 is the dimension of the column section
15.3—Transfer of column axial force perpendicular to the direction under consideration.
through the floor system
15.4.2.1 At beam-column and slab-column joints,
15.3.1 If 𝑓𝑐′ of a column is greater than 1.4 times an area of transverse reinforcement calculated in
that of the floor system, transmission of axial force accordance with 15.4.2 shall be distributed within
through the floor system shall be in accordance with the column height not less than the deepest beam or
(a), (b), or (c): slab element framing into the column.
(a) Concrete of compressive strength specified 15.4.2.2 For beam-column joints, the spacing of
for the column shall be placed in the floor transverse reinforcement 𝑠 shall not exceed one-
at the column location. Column concrete half the depth of the shallowest beam.
shall extend outward at least 600 mm into
the floor slab from face of column for the 15.4.3 If longitudinal beam or column
full depth of the slab and be integrated with reinforcement is spliced or terminated in a joint,
floor concrete. closed transverse reinforcement in accordance with
10.7.6 shall be provided in the joint, unless the joint

SBC 304-CR-18 107

 CHAPTER 15—BEAM-COLUMN AND SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS

region is restrained in accordance with 15.2.4 or

15.2.5.
15.4.4 Development of longitudinal reinforcement
terminating in the joint shall be in accordance with
25.4.

SBC 304-CR-18 108

CHAPTER 15—BEAM-COLUMN AND SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 109

 CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

16.2.2.1 Required strength of connections and

16.1—Scope adjacent regions shall be calculated in accordance
16.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of with the factored load combinations in Chapter 5.
joints and connections at the intersection of
16.2.2.2 Required strength of connections and
concrete members and for load transfer between
adjacent regions shall be calculated in accordance
concrete surfaces, including (a) through (d):
with the analysis procedures in Chapter 6.
(a) Connections of precast members
16.2.3 Design strength
(b) Connections between foundations and
either cast-in-place or precast members 16.2.3.1 For each applicable load combination,
(c) Horizontal shear strength of composite design strengths of precast member connections
concrete flexural members shall satisfy
(d) Brackets and corbels
𝑆𝑛  𝑈 (16.2.3.1)
16.2—Connections of precast members 16.2.3.2  shall be determined in accordance with
16.2.1 General 21.2 .
16.2.1.1 Transfer of forces by means of grouted 16.2.3.3 At the contact surface between supported
joints, shear keys, bearing, anchors, mechanical and supporting members, or between a supported or
connectors, steel reinforcement, reinforced topping, supporting member and an intermediate bearing
or a combination of these, shall be permitted. element, nominal bearing strength for concrete
surfaces, 𝐵𝑛 , shall be calculated in accordance with
16.2.1.2 Adequacy of connections shall be verified
22.8. 𝐵𝑛 shall be the lesser of the nominal concrete
by analysis or test.
bearing strengths for the supported or supporting
16.2.1.3 Connection details that rely solely on member surface, and shall not exceed the strength
friction caused by gravity loads shall not be of intermediate bearing elements, if present.
permitted.
16.2.3.4 If shear is the primary result of imposed
16.2.1.4 Connections, and regions of members loading and shear transfer occurs across a given
adjacent to connections, shall be designed to resist plane, it shall be permitted to calculate 𝑉𝑛 in
forces and accommodate deformations due to all accordance with the shear friction provisions in
load effects in the precast structural system. 22.9 .
16.2.1.5 Design of connections shall consider 16.2.4 Minimum connection strength and
structural effects of restraint of volume change in integrity tie requirements
accordance with 5.3.6.
16.2.4.1 Except where the provisions of 16.2.5
16.2.1.6 Design of connections shall consider the govern, longitudinal and transverse integrity ties
effects of tolerances specified for fabrication and shall connect precast members to a lateral-force-
erection of precast members. resisting system, and vertical integrity ties shall be
16.2.1.7 Design of a connection with multiple provided in accordance with 16.2.4.3 to connect
components shall consider the differences in adjacent floor and roof levels.
stiffness, strength, and ductility of the components. 16.2.4.2 Where precast members form floor or roof
16.2.1.8 Integrity ties shall be provided in the diaphragms, the connections between the
vertical, longitudinal, and transverse directions and diaphragm and those members being laterally
around the perimeter of a structure in accordance supported by the diaphragm shall have a nominal
with 16.2.4 or 16.2.5. tensile strength of not less than 4.4 kN per linear
meter.
16.2.2 Required strength
16.2.4.3 Vertical integrity ties shall be provided at
horizontal joints between all vertical precast

SBC 304-CR-18 110

 CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

structural members, except cladding, and shall (b) Integrity ties shall provide a nominal tensile
satisfy (a) or (b): strength of at least 44 kN per horizontal
meter of wall.
(a) Connections between precast columns shall
(c) At least two integrity ties shall be provided
have vertical integrity ties, with a nominal
in each wall panel.
tensile strength of at least 1.4𝐴𝑔 in N,
where 𝐴𝑔 is the gross area of the column. 16.2.6 Minimum dimensions at bearing
For columns with a larger cross section than connections
required by consideration of loading, a 16.2.6.1 Dimensions of bearing connections shall
reduced effective area based on the cross satisfy 16.2.6.2 or 16.2.6.3 unless shown by
section required shall be permitted. The analysis or test that lesser dimensions will not
reduced effective area shall be at least one- impair performance.
half the gross area of the column.
(b) Connections between precast wall panels 16.2.6.2 For precast slabs, beams, or stemmed
shall have at least two vertical integrity ties, members, minimum design dimensions from the
with a nominal tensile strength of at least face of support to end of precast member in the
44 kN per tie. direction of the span, considering specified
tolerances, shall be in accordance with Table
16.2.5 Integrity tie requirements for precast 16.2.6.2 .
concrete bearing wall structures three stories or
more in height 16.2.6.3 Bearing pads adjacent to unarmored faces
shall be set back from the face of the support and
16.2.5.1 Integrity ties in floor and roof systems the end of the supported member a distance not less
shall satisfy (a) through (f): than 13 mm or the chamfer dimension at a
(a) Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties chamfered face.
shall be provided in floor and roof systems 16.3—Connections to foundations
to provide a nominal tensile strength of at
least 22 kN per meter of width or length. 16.3.1 General
(b) Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties 16.3.1.1 Factored forces and moments at base of
shall be provided over interior wall columns, walls, or pedestals shall be transferred to
supports and between the floor or roof supporting foundations by bearing on concrete and
system and exterior walls. by reinforcement, dowels, anchor bolts, or
(c) Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties mechanical connectors.
shall be positioned in or within 600 mm of
the plane of the floor or roof system. 16.3.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical
(d) Longitudinal integrity ties shall be oriented connectors between a supported member and
parallel to floor or roof slab spans and shall foundation shall be designed to transfer (a) and (b):
be spaced not greater than 3 m on center. (a) Compressive forces that exceed the lesser
Provisions shall be made to transfer forces of the concrete bearing strengths of either
around openings. the supported member or the foundation,
(e) Transverse integrity ties shall be oriented calculated in accordance with 22.8.
perpendicular to floor or roof slab spans (b) Any calculated tensile force across the
and shall be spaced not greater than the interface.
bearing wall spacing.
(f) Integrity ties at the perimeter of each floor 16.3.1.3 At the base of a composite column with a
and roof, within 1.2 m of the edge, shall structural steel core, (a) or (b) shall be satisfied:
provide a nominal tensile strength of at (a) Base of structural steel section shall be
least 71 kN. designed to transfer the total factored forces
16.2.5.2 Vertical integrity ties shall satisfy (a) from the entire composite member to the
through (c): foundation.
(b) Base of structural steel section shall be
(a) Integrity ties shall be provided in all wall designed to transfer the factored forces
panels and shall be continuous over the from the steel core only, and the remainder
height of the building. of the total factored forces shall be
transferred to the foundation by

SBC 304-CR-18 111

 CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

compression in the concrete and by 16.3.4.1 For connections between a cast-in-place

reinforcement. column or pedestal and foundation, 𝐴𝑠 crossing the
interface shall be at least 0.005𝐴𝑔 , where 𝐴𝑔 is the
16.3.2 Required strength
gross area of the supported member.
16.3.2.1 Factored forces and moments transferred
to foundations shall be calculated in accordance 16.3.4.2 For connections between a cast-in-place
with the factored load combinations in Chapter 5 wall and foundation, area of vertical reinforcement
and analysis procedures in Chapter 6. crossing the interface shall satisfy 11.6.1.

16.3.3 Design strength 16.3.5 Details for connections between cast-in-

place members and foundation
16.3.3.1 Design strengths of connections between
columns, walls, or pedestals and foundations shall 16.3.5.1 At the base of a cast-in-place column,
satisfy Eq. (16.3.3.1 ) for each applicable load pedestal, or wall, reinforcement required to satisfy
combination. For connections between precast 16.3.3 and 16.3.4 shall be provided either by
members and foundations, requirements for vertical extending longitudinal bars into supporting
integrity ties in 16.2.4.3 or 16.2.5.2 shall be foundation or by dowels.
satisfied. 16.3.5.2 Where moments are transferred to the
foundation, reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical
𝑆𝑛  𝑈 (16.3.3.1)
connectors shall satisfy 10.7.5 for splices.
where 𝑆𝑛 is the nominal flexural, shear, axial,
16.3.5.3 If a pinned or rocker connection is used at
torsional, or bearing strength of the connection.
the base of a cast-in-place column or pedestal, the
16.3.3.2  shall be determined in accordance with connection to foundation shall satisfy 16.3.3.
21.2 .
16.3.5.4 At footings, it shall be permitted to lap
16.3.3.3 Combined moment and axial strength of splice Dia 45 and Dia 50 longitudinal bars, in
connections shall be calculated in accordance with compression only, with dowels to satisfy 16.3.3.1.
22.4 . Dowels shall satisfy (a) through (c):
16.3.3.4 At the contact surface between a supported (a) Dowels shall not be larger than Dia 36 bar
member and foundation, or between a supported (b) Dowels shall extend into supported
member or foundation and an intermediate bearing member at least the greater of the
element, nominal bearing strength 𝐵𝑛 shall be development length of the longitudinal bars
calculated in accordance with 22.8 for concrete in compression, 𝑙𝑑𝑐 , and the compression
surfaces. 𝐵𝑛 shall be the lesser of the nominal lap splice length of the dowels, 𝑙𝑠𝑐
concrete bearing strengths for the supported (c) Dowels shall extend into the footing at least
member or foundation surface, and shall not exceed 𝑙𝑑𝑐 of the dowels
the strength of intermediate bearing elements, if
16.3.6 Details for connections between precast
present.
members and foundation
16.3.3.5 At the contact surface between supported
16.3.6.1 At the base of a precast column, pedestal,
member and foundation, 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated in or wall, the connection to the foundation shall
accordance with the shear-friction provisions in satisfy 16.2.4.3 or 16.2.5.2.
22.9 or by other appropriate means.
16.3.6.2 If the applicable load combinations of
16.3.3.6 At the base of a precast column, pedestal, l6.3.3 result in no tension at the base of precast
or wall, anchor bolts and anchors for mechanical walls, vertical integrity ties required by 16.2.4.3(b)
connections shall be designed in accordance with shall be permitted to be developed into an
Chapter 17 . Forces developed during erection shall
adequately reinforced concrete slab-on-ground.
be considered.
16.4—Horizontal shear transfer in
16.3.3.7 At the base of a precast column, pedestal,
or wall, mechanical connectors shall be designed to composite concrete flexural members
reach their design strength before anchorage failure 16.4.1 General
or failure of surrounding concrete.
16.4.1.1 In a composite concrete flexural member,
16.3.4 Minimum reinforcement for connections full transfer of horizontal shear forces shall be
between cast-in-place members and foundation

SBC 304-CR-18 112

 CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

provided at contact surfaces of interconnected interface shall be permitted to be included as ties for
elements. calculation of 𝑉𝑛ℎ .
16.4.1.2 Where tension exists across any contact 16.4.5 Alternative method for calculating
surface between interconnected concrete elements, design horizontal shear strength
horizontal shear transfer by contact shall be
16.4.5.1 As an alternative to 16.4.3.1, factored
permitted only where transverse reinforcement is
horizontal shear 𝑉𝑛ℎ shall be calculated from the
provided in accordance with 16.4.6 and 16.4.7.
change in flexural compressive or tensile force in
16.4.1.3 Surface preparation assumed for design any segment of the composite concrete member,
shall be specified in the construction documents. and Eq. (16.4.5.1 ) shall be satisfied at all locations
along the contact surface:
16.4.2 Required strength
16.4.2.1 Factored forces transferred along the 𝑉𝑛ℎ  𝑉𝑢ℎ (16.4.5.1)
contact surface in composite concrete flexural Nominal horizontal shear strength 𝑉𝑛ℎ shall be
members shall be calculated in accordance with the calculated in accordance with 16.4.4.1 or 16.4.4.2,
factored load combinations in Chapter 5. where area of contact surface shall be substituted
16.4.2.2 Required strength shall be calculated in for 𝑏 𝑑 and 𝑉𝑢ℎ shall be substituted for 𝑉𝑢 .
accordance with the analysis procedures in Chapter Provisions shall be made to transfer the change in
6. compressive or tensile force as horizontal shear
force across the interface.
16.4.3 Design strength
16.4.5.2 Where shear transfer reinforcement is
16.4.3.1 Design strength for horizontal shear designed to resist horizontal shear to satisfy Eq.
transfer shall satisfy Eq. (16.4.3.1 ) at all locations (16.4.5.1 ), the tie area to tie spacing ratio along the
along the contact surface in a composite concrete member shall approximately reflect the distribution
flexural member, unless 16.4.5 is satisfied: of interface shear forces in the composite concrete
𝑉𝑛ℎ  𝑉𝑢 (16.4.3.1) flexural member.

where nominal horizontal shear strength 𝑉𝑛ℎ is 16.4.5.3 Transverse reinforcement in a previously
calculated in accordance with 16.4.4. cast section that extends into the cast-in-place
section and is anchored on both sides of the
16.4.3.2  shall be determined in accordance with interface shall be permitted to be included as ties for
21.2 . calculation of 𝑉𝑛ℎ ·
16.4.4 Nominal horizontal shear strength 16.4.6 Minimum reinforcement for horizontal
16.4.4.1 If 𝑉𝑢 > (3.5𝑏𝑣 𝑑), 𝑉𝑛ℎ shall be taken as shear transfer
𝑉𝑛 calculated in accordance with 22.9, where 𝑏𝑣 is 16.4.6.1 Where shear transfer reinforcement is
the width of the contact surface, and 𝑑 is in designed to resist horizontal shear, 𝐴,𝑚𝑖𝑛 shall be
accordance with 16.4.4.3. the greater of (a) and (b):
16.4.4.2 If 𝑉𝑢 ≤ (3.5𝑏𝑣 𝑑), 𝑉𝑛ℎ shall be calculated (a) 0.062√𝑓𝑐′
𝑏𝑤 𝑠
in accordance with Table 16.4.4.2 , where 𝐴,𝑚𝑖𝑛 is 𝑓𝑦
𝑏 𝑠
in accordance with 16.4.6, 𝑏𝑣 is the width of the (b) 0.35√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑤
𝑓𝑦
contact surface, and 𝑑 is in accordance with
16.4.4.3. 16.4.7 Reinforcement detailing for horizontal
shear transfer
16.4.4.3 In Table 16.4.4.2 , 𝑑 shall be the distance
from extreme compression fiber for the entire 16.4.7.1 Shear transfer reinforcement shall consist
composite section to the centroid of prestressed and of single bars or wire, multiple leg stirrups, or
nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement, vertical legs of welded wire reinforcement.
if any, but need not be taken less than 0.80ℎ for 16.4.7.2 Where shear transfer reinforcement is
prestressed concrete members. designed to resist horizontal shear, longitudinal
16.4.4.4 Transverse reinforcement in the previously spacing of shear transfer reinforcement shall not
cast concrete that extends into the cast-in-place exceed the lesser of 600 mm and four times the least
concrete and is anchored on both sides of the dimension of the supported element.

SBC 304-CR-18 113

 CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

16.4.7.3 Shear transfer reinforcement shall be 16.5.3.3 Required strength shall be calculated in
developed in interconnected elements in accordance with the analysis procedures in Chapter
accordance with 25.7.1. 6, and the requirements in this section.
16.5—Brackets and corbels 16.5.3.4 Horizontal tensile force acting on a bracket
or corbel shall be treated as a live load when
16.5.1 General
calculating 𝑁𝑢𝑐 , even if the tension results from
16.5.1.1 Brackets and corbels with shear span-to- restraint of creep, shrinkage, or temperature change.
depth ratio 𝑎𝑣 /𝑑  1.0 and with factored horizontal
16.5.3.5 Unless tensile forces are prevented from
tensile force 𝑁𝑢𝑐  𝑉𝑢 shall be permitted to be being applied to the bracket or corbel, Nuc shall be
designed in accordance with 16.5. at least 0.2𝑉𝑢 .
16.5.2 Dimensional limits 16.5.4 Design strength
16.5.2.1 Effective depth 𝑑 for a bracket or corbel 16.5.4.1 Design strength at all sections shall satisfy
shall be calculated at the face of the support.
𝑆𝑛  𝑈, including (a) through (c). Interaction
16.5.2.2 Overall depth of bracket or corbel at the between load effects shall be considered.
outside edge of the bearing area shall be at least
(a) 𝑁𝑛  𝑁𝑢𝑐
0.5𝑑.
(b) 𝑉𝑛  𝑉𝑢
16.5.2.3 No part of the bearing area on a bracket or (c) 𝑀𝑛  𝑀𝑢
corbel shall project farther from the face of support
16.5.4.2  shall be determined in accordance with
than (a) or (b): 21.2.
(a) End of the straight portion of the primary 16.5.4.3 Nominal tensile strength 𝑁𝑛 provided by
tension reinforcement
𝐴𝑛 shall be calculated by
(b) Interior face of the transverse anchor bar, if
one is provided 𝑁𝑛 = 𝐴𝑛 𝑓𝑦 (16.5.4.3)
16.5.2.4 For normal-weight concrete, the bracket or
16.5.4.4 Nominal shear strength 𝑉𝑛 provided by 𝐴𝑣𝑓
corbel dimensions shall be selected such that 𝑉𝑢 /
shall not exceed the least of (a) through (c): shall be calculated in accordance with provisions
for shear-friction in 22.9, where 𝐴𝑣𝑓 is the area of
(a) 0.2𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 reinforcement that crosses the assumed shear plane.
(b) (3.3 + 0.08 𝑓𝑐′ )𝑏𝑤 𝑑
(c) 11𝑏𝑤 𝑑 16.5.4.5 Nominal flexural strength 𝑀𝑛 provided by
𝐴𝑓 shall be calculated in accordance with the design
16.5.2.5 For all-lightweight or sand-lightweight assumptions in 22.2.
concrete, the bracket or corbel dimensions shall be
selected such that 𝑉𝑢 / shall not exceed the lesser 16.5.5 Reinforcement limits
of (a) and (b): 16.5.5.1 Area of primary tension reinforcement,
𝑎𝑣
(a) (0.2 − 0.07 ) 𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 𝐴𝑠𝑐 , shall be at least the greatest of (a) through (c):
𝑑
𝑎𝑣 (a) 𝐴𝑓 + 𝐴𝑛
(b) (5.5 − 1.9 ) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
𝑑 (b) (2/3)𝐴𝑣𝑓 + 𝐴𝑛
16.5.3 Required strength (c) 0.04(𝑓𝑐′ /𝑓𝑦 )(𝑏𝑤 𝑑)
16.5.3.1 The section at the face of the support shall 16.5.5.2 Total area of closed stirrups or ties parallel
be designed to resist simultaneously the factored to primary tension reinforcement, 𝐴ℎ , shall be at
shear 𝑉𝑢 , the factored horizontal tensile force 𝑁𝑢𝑐 least:
and the factored moment 𝑀𝑢 given by [𝑉𝑢 𝑎𝑣 +
𝑁𝑢𝑐 (ℎ − 𝑑)]. 𝐴ℎ = 0.5(𝐴𝑠𝑐 – 𝐴𝑛 ) (16.5.5.2)
16.5.3.2 Factored tensile force, 𝑁𝑢𝑐 , and shear, 𝑉𝑢 , 16.5.6 Reinforcement detailing
shall be the maximum values calculated in
accordance with the factored load combinations in 16.5.6.1 Concrete cover shall be in accordance
Chapter 5. with 20.6.1.3 .
16.5.6.2 Minimum spacing for deformed
reinforcement shall be in accordance with 25.2.

SBC 304-CR-18 114

 CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

16.5.6.3 At the front face of a bracket or corbel, 16.5.6.4 Primary tension reinforcement shall be
primary tension reinforcement shall be anchored by developed at the face of the support.
(a), (b), or (c):
16.5.6.5 Development of tension reinforcement
(a) A weld to a transverse bar of at least equal shall account for distribution of stress in
size that is designed to develop 𝑓𝑦 of reinforcement that is not directly proportional to the
primary tension reinforcement bending moment.
(b) Bending the primary tension reinforcement 16.5.6.6 Closed stirrups or ties shall be spaced such
back to form a horizontal loop that 𝐴ℎ is uniformly distributed within (2/3)𝑑
(c) Other means of anchorage that develops 𝑓𝑦 measured from the primary tension reinforcement.

SBC 304-CR-18 115

CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 16

Table 16.2.6.2—Minimum design dimensions from face of support to end of precast member
Member type Minimum distance, mm
𝑙𝑛 /180
Solid or hollow-core slab Greater of:
50
𝑙𝑛 /180
Beam or stemmed member Greater of:
75

Table 16.4.4.2—Nominal horizontal shear strength

Shear transfer
Contact surface preparation[1] 𝑽𝒏𝒉 , N
reinforcement

Concrete placed against hardened 𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑦𝑡

 (1.8 + 0.6 ) 𝑏𝑣 𝑑 (a)
concrete intentionally roughened to Lesser 𝑏𝑣 𝑠
a full amplitude of approximately 6 of:
mm 3.5𝑏𝑣 𝑑 (b)
𝐴𝑣  𝐴𝑣,𝑚𝑖𝑛
Concrete placed against hardened
concrete not intentionally 0.55𝑏𝑣 𝑑 (c)
roughened

Concrete placed against hardened

Other cases 0.55𝑏𝑣 𝑑 (d)
concrete intentionally roughened
[1]
Concrete contact surface shall be clean and free of laitance.

SBC 304-CR-18 116

CHAPTER 16—CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 117

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

17.2—General
17.1—Scope
17.2.1 Anchors and anchor groups shall be
17.1.1 This chapter provides design requirements
designed for critical effects of factored loads as
for anchors in concrete used to transmit structural
determined by elastic analysis. Plastic analysis
loads by means of tension, shear, or a combination
approaches are permitted where nominal strength is
of tension and shear between: (a) connected
controlled by ductile steel elements, provided that
structural elements; or (b) safety-related
deformational compatibility is taken into account.
attachments and structural elements. Safety levels
specified are intended for in-service conditions, 17.2.1.1 Anchor group effects shall be considered
rather than for short-term handling and construction wherever two or more anchors have spacing less
conditions. than the critical spacing as follows:
17.1.2 This chapter applies to cast-in anchors and
to post-installed expansion (torque-controlled and Failure mode under Critical
displacement-controlled), undercut, and adhesive investigation spacing
anchors. Adhesive anchors shall be installed in
concrete having a minimum age of 21 days at time
Concrete breakout in tension 3ℎ𝑒𝑓
of anchor installation. Specialty inserts, through-
bolts, multiple anchors connected to a single steel
plate at the embedded end of the anchors, grouted Bond strength in tension 2𝑐𝑁𝑎
anchors, and direct anchors such as powder or
pneumatic actuated nails or bolts are not included in
the provisions of this chapter. Reinforcement used Concrete breakout in shear 3𝑐𝑎1
as part of the embedment shall be designed in
accordance with other parts of this Code. Only those anchors susceptible to the particular
17.1.3 Design provisions are included for the failure mode under investigation shall be included
following types of anchors: in the group.
(a) Headed studs and headed bolts having a 17.2.2 The design strength of anchors shall equal
geometry that has been demonstrated to or exceed the largest required strength calculated
result in a pullout strength in uncracked from the applicable load combinations in 5.3.
concrete equal to or exceeding 1.4𝑁𝑃 , 17.2.3 Seismic design
where 𝑁𝑃 is given in Eq. (17.4.3.4 ).
(b) Hooked bolts having a geometry that has 17.2.3.1 Anchors in structures assigned to Seismic
been demonstrated to result in a pullout Design Category (SDC) C, D, E, or F shall satisfy
strength without the benefit of friction in the additional requirements of 17.2.3.2 through
uncracked concrete equal to or exceeding 17.2.3.7.
1.4𝑁𝑃 , where 𝑁𝑃 is given in Eq. (17.4.3.5 ). 17.2.3.2 The provisions of this chapter do not apply
(c) Post-installed expansion and undercut to the design of anchors in plastic hinge zones of
anchors that meet the assessment criteria of concrete structures under earthquake forces.
ACI 355.2.
(d) Adhesive anchors that meet the assessment 17.2.3.3 Post-installed anchors shall be qualified
criteria of ACI 355.4. for earthquake loading in accordance with ACI
355.2 or ACI 355.4. The pullout strength 𝑁𝑃 and
17.1.4 Load applications that are predominantly steel strength in shear 𝑉𝑠𝑎 of expansion and
high cycle fatigue or impact loads are not covered undercut anchors shall be based on the results of the
in this chapter. ACI 355.2 Simulated Seismic Tests. For adhesive
anchors, the steel strength in shear, 𝑉𝑠𝑎 , and the
characteristic bond stresses, 𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑟 , and 𝑐𝑟 , shall be

SBC 304-CR-18 118

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

based on results of the ACI 355.4 Simulated eight anchor diameters unless
Seismic Tests. otherwise determined by analysis.
(iv) Where anchors are subject to load
17.2.3.4 Requirements for tensile loading
reversals, the anchor shall be
17.2.3.4.1 Where the tensile component of the protected against buckling.
strength-level earthquake force applied to a single (v) Where connections are threaded
anchor or group of anchors is equal to or less than and the ductile steel elements are
20 percent of the total factored anchor tensile force not threaded over their entire
associated with the same load combination, it shall length, the ratio of 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 /𝑓𝑦𝑎 shall
be permitted to design a single anchor or group of not be less than 1.3 unless the
anchors to satisfy 17.4 and the tensile strength threaded portions are upset. The
requirements of 17.3.1.1. upset portions shall not be included
17.2.3.4.2 Where the tensile component of the in the stretch length.
strength-level earthquake force applied to anchors (vi) Deformed reinforcing bars used as
exceeds 20 percent of the total factored anchor ductile steel elements to resist
tensile force associated with the same load earthquake effects shall be limited
combination, anchors and their attachments shall be to ASTM A615 Grades 280 and 420
designed in accordance with 17.2.3.4.3. The anchor satisfying the requirements of
design tensile strength shall be determined in 20.2.2.5 or ASTM A706 Grade 420.
accordance with 17.2.3.4.4. (b) The anchor or group of anchors shall be
designed for the maximum tension that can
Exception: Anchors designed to resist wall out-of- be transmitted to the anchor or group of
plane forces with design strengths equal to or anchors based on the development of a
greater than the force determined in accordance ductile yield mechanism in the attachment
with SBC 301 Equation 12.11-1 or 12.14-10 shall be in tension, flexure, shear, or bearing, or a
deemed to satisfy 17.2.3.4.3(d). combination of those conditions, and
17.2.3.4.3 Anchors and their attachments shall considering both material overstrength and
satisfy one of options (a) through (d): strain hardening effects for the attachment.
The anchor design tensile strength shall be
(a) For single anchors, the concrete-governed calculated from 17.2.3.4.4.
strength shall be greater than the steel (c) The anchor or group of anchors shall be
strength of the anchor. For anchor groups, designed for the maximum tension that can
the ratio of the tensile load on the most be transmitted to the anchors by a non-
highly stressed anchor to the steel strength yielding attachment. The anchor design
of that anchor shall be equal to or greater tensile strength shall be calculated from
than the ratio of the tensile load on tension 17.2.3.4.4.
loaded anchors to the concrete-governed (d) The anchor or group of anchors shall be
strength of those anchors. In each case: designed for the maximum tension
(i) The steel strength shall be taken as obtained from design load combinations
1.2 times the nominal steel strength that include 𝐸, with 𝐸 increased by 𝑜 . The
of the anchor. anchor design tensile strength shall be
(ii) The concrete-governed strength calculated from 17.2.3.4.4.
shall be taken as the nominal
strength considering pullout, side- 17.2.3.4.4 The anchor design tensile strength for
face blowout, concrete breakout, resisting earthquake forces shall be determined
and bond strength as applicable. from consideration of (a) through (e) for the failure
For consideration of pullout in modes given in Table 17.3.1.1 assuming the
groups, the ratio shall be calculated concrete is cracked unless it can be demonstrated
for the most highly stressed anchor. that the concrete remains uncracked:
In addition, the following shall be satisfied: (a) 𝑁𝑠𝑎 for a single anchor, or for the most
highly stressed individual anchor in a group
(iii) Anchors shall transmit tensile of anchors.
loads via a ductile steel element (b) 0.75𝑁𝑐𝑏 or 0.75 𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 . except that 𝑁𝑐𝑏 or
with a stretch length of at least
𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 need not be calculated where anchor

SBC 304-CR-18 119

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

reinforcement satisfying 17.4.2.9 is (iv) Anchor bolts are located a

provided. minimum of 45 mm from the edge
(c) 0.75𝑁𝑝𝑛 for a single anchor, or for the of the concrete parallel to the
most highly stressed individual anchor in a length of the wood sill plate.
group of anchors (v) Anchor bolts are located a
minimum of 15 anchor diameters
(d) 0.75𝑁𝑠𝑏 or 0.75 𝑁𝑠𝑏𝑔
from the edge of the concrete
(e) 0.75𝑁𝑎 or 0.75𝑁𝑎𝑔 perpendicular to the length of the
where  is in accordance with 17.3.3. wood sill plate.
(vi) The sill plate is 50 mm or 75 mm
17.2.3.4.5 Where anchor reinforcement is provided nominal thickness.
in accordance with 17.4.2.9, no reduction in design (2) For the calculation of the in-plane shear
tensile strength beyond that specified in 17.4.2.9 strength of anchor bolts attaching cold-
shall be required. formed steel track of bearing or
17.2.3.5 Requirements for shear loading nonbearing walls of light-frame
construction to foundations or
17.2.3.5.1 Where the shear component of the foundation stem walls, the in-plane
strength-level earthquake force applied to the shear strength in accordance with
anchor or group of anchors is equal to or less than 17.5.2 and 17.5.3 need not be computed
20 percent of the total factored anchor shear force and 17.2.3.5.3 shall be deemed to be
associated with the same load combination, it shall satisfied provided all of the following
be permitted to design the anchor or group of are met:
anchors to satisfy 17.5 and the shear strength (i) The maximum anchor nominal
requirements of 17.3.1.1. diameter is 16 mm.
17.2.3.5.2 Where the shear component of the (ii) Anchors are embedded into
strength-level earthquake force applied to anchors concrete a minimum of 180 mm.
exceeds 20 percent of the total factored anchor (iii) Anchors are located a minimum of
shear force associated with the same load 45 mm from the edge of the
combination, anchors and their attachments shall be concrete parallel to the length of
designed in accordance with 17.2.3.5.3. The anchor the track.
design shear strength for resisting earthquake forces (iv) Anchors are located a minimum of
shall be determined in accordance with 17.5. 15 anchor diameters from the edge
of the concrete perpendicular to the
Exceptions:
length of the track.
(1) For the calculation of the in-plane shear (v) The track is 33 to 68 mil (0.84 mm
strength of anchor bolts attaching wood to 1.73 mm) designation thickness.
sill plates of bearing or nonbearing
Allowable in-plane shear strength of exempt
walls of light-frame wood structures to
anchors, parallel to the edge of concrete, shall be
foundations or foundation stem walls,
permitted to be determined in accordance with AISI
the in-plane shear strength in
S100 Section E3.3.1.
accordance with 17.5.2 and 17.5.3 need
not be computed and 17.2.3.5.3 shall be (3) In light-frame construction bearing or
deemed to be satisfied provided all of nonbearing walls, shear strength of
the following are met: concrete anchors less than or equal to
(i) The allowable in-plane shear 25 mm in diameter attaching sill plate
strength of the anchor is or track to foundation or foundation
determined in accordance with stem wall need not satisfy 17.2.3.5.3(a)
ANSI/AWC NDS Table 11E for through (c) when the design strength of
lateral design values parallel to the anchors is determined in
grain. accordance with 17.5.2.1(c).
(ii) The maximum anchor nominal 17.2.3.5.3 Anchors and their attachments shall be
diameter is 16 mm. designed using one of options (a) through (c):
(iii) Anchor bolts are embedded into
concrete a minimum of 180 mm. (a) The anchor or group of anchors shall be
designed for the maximum shear that can be

SBC 304-CR-18 120

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

transmitted to the anchor or group of Adhesive anchor bond failure per Eq. (17.4.5.2 )
anchors based on the development of a ….0.6
ductile yield mechanism in the attachment
where  is determined in accordance with 19.2.4. It
in flexure, shear, or bearing, or a
shall be permitted to use an alternative value of
combination of those conditions, and
𝑎 where tests have been performed and evaluated
considering both material overstrength and
in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4 .
strain hardening effects in the attachment.
(b) The anchor or group of anchors shall be 17.2.7 The values of 𝑓𝑐′ used for calculation
designed for the maximum shear that can be purposes in this chapter shall not exceed 70 MPa for
transmitted to the anchors by a non- cast-in anchors, and 55 MPa for post-installed
yielding attachment. anchors. Testing is required for post-installed
(c) The anchor or group of anchors shall be anchors when used in concrete with 𝑓𝑐′ greater than
designed for the maximum shear obtained 55 MPa.
from design load combinations that include
𝐸, with the horizontal component of 𝐸 17.3—General requirements for
increased by 𝑜 . The anchor design shear strength of anchors
strength shall satisfy the shear strength 17.3.1 Strength design of anchors shall be based
requirements of 17.3.1.1. either on computation using design models that
17.2.3.5.4 Where anchor reinforcement is provided satisfy the requirements of 17.3.2, or on test
in accordance with 17.5.2.9, no reduction in design evaluation using the 5 percent fractile of applicable
shear strength beyond that specified in 17.5.2.9 test results for the following:
shall be required. (a) Steel strength of anchor in tension (17.4.1)
17.2.3.6 Single anchors or groups of anchors that (b) Concrete breakout strength of anchor in
are subjected to both tension and shear forces shall tension (17.4.2)
be designed to satisfy the requirements of 17.6, with (c) Pullout strength cast-in, post-installed
the anchor design tensile strength calculated from expansion, or undercut anchor in tension
17.2.3.4.4. (17.4.3)
(d) Concrete side-face blowout strength of
17.2.3.7 Anchor reinforcement used in structures headed anchor in tension (17.4.4)
assigned to SDC C, D, E, or F shall be deformed (e) Bond strength of adhesive anchor in tension
reinforcement and shall be limited to ASTM A615 (17.4.5)
Grades 280 and 420 satisfying the requirements of (f) Steel strength of anchor in shear (17.5.1)
20.2.2.5 (i) and (ii) or ASTM A706 Grade 420. (g) Concrete breakout strength of anchor in
17.2.4 Adhesive anchors installed horizontally or shear (17.5.2)
upwardly inclined shall be qualified in accordance (h) Concrete pryout strength of anchor in shear
with ACI 355.4 requirements for sensitivity to (17.5.3)
installation direction. In addition, anchors shall satisfy the required edge
17.2.5 For adhesive anchors subjected to sustained distances, spacings, and thicknesses to preclude
tension loading, 17.3.1.2 shall be satisfied. For splitting failure, as required in 17.7.
groups of adhesive anchors, Eq. (17.3.1.2) shall be 17.3.1.1 The design of anchors shall be in
satisfied for the anchor that resists the highest accordance with Table 17.3.1.1 . In addition, the
sustained tension load. Installer certification and design of anchors shall satisfy 17.2.3 for earthquake
inspection requirements for horizontal and loading and 17.3.1.2 for adhesive anchors subject to
upwardly inclined adhesive anchors subjected to sustained tensile loading.
sustained tension loading shall be in accordance
with 17.8.2.2 through 17.8.2.4. 17.3.1.2 For the design of adhesive anchors to resist
sustained tension loads, in addition to 17.3.1.1, Eq.
17.2.6 Modification factor 𝑎 for lightweight (17.3.1.2) shall be satisfied.
concrete shall be taken as:
0.55𝑁𝑏𝑎 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑠 (17.3.1.2)
Cast-in and undercut anchor concrete failure…1.0
Expansion and adhesive anchor concrete failure where 𝑁𝑏𝑎 is determined in accordance with
….0.8 17.4.5.2.

SBC 304-CR-18 121

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

17.3.1.3 When both 𝑁𝑢𝑎 and 𝑉𝑢𝑎 are present, (c) Anchor governed by concrete breakout, side-
interaction effects shall be considered using an face blowout, pullout, or pryout strength
interaction expression that results in computation of
Condition A Condition B
strength in substantial agreement with results of
comprehensive tests. This requirement shall be (i) Shear loads 0.75 ...................0.70
considered satisfied by 17.6. (ii) Tension loads
17.3.2 The nominal strength for any anchor or Cast-in headed studs, headed bolts, or hooked
group of anchors shall be based on design models
that result in predictions of strength in substantial bolts…………....0.75……………0.70
agreement with results of comprehensive tests. The Post-installed anchors with category as determined
materials used in the tests shall be compatible with from ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4
the materials used in the structure. The nominal
strength shall be based on the 5 percent fractile of Condition A Condition B
the basic individual anchor strength. For nominal Category 1.…………...0.75………….…..0.65
strengths related to concrete strength, modifications
for size effects, the number of anchors, the effects (Low sensitivity to installation and high reliability)
of close spacing of anchors, proximity to edges, Category 2.…………...0.65………….…..0.55
depth of the concrete member, eccentric loadings of
anchor groups, and presence or absence of cracking (Medium sensitivity to installation and medium
shall be taken into account. Limits on edge reliability)
distances and anchor spacing in the design models Category 3.…………...0.55………….…..0.45
shall be consistent with the tests that verified the
model. (High sensitivity to installation and lower
reliability)
17.3.2.1 The effect of reinforcement provided to
restrain the concrete breakout shall be permitted to Condition A applies where supplementary
be included in the design models used to satisfy reinforcement is present except for pullout and
17.3.2. Where anchor reinforcement is provided in pryout strengths.
accordance with 17.4.2.9 and 17.5.2.9, calculation Condition B applies where supplementary
of the concrete breakout strength in accordance reinforcement is not present, and for pullout or
with 17.4.2 and 17.5.2 is not required. pryout strength.
17.3.2.2 For anchors with diameters not exceeding 17.4—Design requirements for tensile
100 mm, the concrete breakout strength loading
requirements shall be considered satisfied by the
design procedure of 17.4.2 and 17.5.2. 17.4.1 Steel strength of anchor in tension
17.3.2.3 For adhesive anchors with embedment 17.4.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in
depths 4𝑑𝑎 ≤ ℎ𝑒𝑓 ≤ 20𝑑𝑎 , the bond strength tension as governed by the steel, 𝑁𝑠𝑎 , shall be
requirements shall be considered satisfied by the evaluated by calculations based on the properties of
design procedure of 17.4.5. the anchor material and the physical dimensions of
the anchor.
17.3.3 Strength reduction factor  for anchors in
concrete shall be as follows when the load 17.4.1.2 The nominal strength of an anchor in
combinations of 5.3 are used: tension, 𝑁𝑠𝑎 , shall not exceed

(a) Anchor governed by strength of a ductile steel 𝑁𝑠𝑎 = 𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑁 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 (17.4.1.2)
element
where 𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑁 is the effective cross-sectional area of
(i) Tension loads.............................0.75 an anchor in tension, mm2, and 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 shall not be
(ii) Shear loads ...............................0.65 taken greater than the smaller of 1.9𝑓𝑦𝑎 and 860
MPa.
(b) Anchor governed by strength of a brittle steel
element 17.4.2 Concrete breakout strength of anchor in
tension
(i) Tension loads.............................0.65
(ii) Shear loads ...............................0.60

SBC 304-CR-18 122

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

17.4.2.1 The nominal concrete breakout strength in 𝑠/3, where 𝑠 is the maximum spacing between
tension, 𝑁𝑐𝑏 of a single anchor or 𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 of a group anchors within the group.
of anchors, shall not exceed: 17.4.2.4 The modification factor for anchor groups
(a) For a single anchor loaded eccentrically in tension, 𝑒𝑐,𝑁 , shall be
𝐴𝑁𝑐 calculated as
𝑁𝑐𝑏 = ψ ψ ψ 𝑁 (17.4.2.1a)
𝐴𝑁𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑑,𝑁 𝑐,𝑁 𝑐𝑝,𝑁 𝑏 1
𝑒𝑐,𝑁 =
2𝑒 ′ (17.4.2.4)
(b) For a group of anchors (1 + 𝑁 )
3ℎ𝑒𝑓
𝐴𝑁𝑐
𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 = ψ ψ ψ ψ 𝑁 (17.4.2.1b)
𝐴𝑁𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑐,𝑁 𝑒𝑑,𝑁 𝑐,𝑁 𝑐𝑝,𝑁 𝑏 but 𝑒𝑐,𝑁 shall not be taken greater than 1.0. If the
loading on an anchor group is such that only some
Factors ψ𝑒𝑐,𝑁 , ψ𝑒𝑑,𝑁 , ψ𝑐,𝑁 and ψ𝑐𝑝,𝑁 are defined in anchors are in tension, only those anchors that are
17.4.2.4, 17.4.2.5, 17.4.2.6, and 17.4.2.7, in tension shall be considered when determining the
respectively. 𝐴𝑁𝑐 is the projected concrete failure eccentricity 𝑒𝑁′ for use in Eq. (17.4.2.4) and for the
area of a single anchor or group of anchors that shall calculation of 𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 according to Eq. (17.4.2.1b).
be approximated as the base of the rectilinear In the case where eccentric loading exists about two
geometrical figure that results from projecting the axes, the modification factor 𝑒𝑐,𝑁 shall be
failure surface outward 1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 from the centerlines
calculated for each axis individually and the
of the anchor, or in the case of a group of anchors,
product of these factors used as 𝑒𝑐,𝑁 in Eq.
from a line through a row of adjacent anchors. 𝐴𝑁𝑐
shall not exceed 𝑛𝐴𝑁𝑐𝑜 , where 𝑛 is the number of (17.4.2.1b).
anchors in the group that resist tension. 𝐴𝑁𝑐𝑜 is the 17.4.2.5 The modification factor for edge effects
projected concrete failure area of a single anchor for single anchors or anchor groups loaded in
with an edge distance equal to or greater than tension, 𝑒𝑑,𝑁 , shall be calculated as
1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 .
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛  1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 then 𝑒𝑑,𝑁 = 1.0 (17.4.2.5a)
2
𝐴𝑁𝑐𝑜 = 9ℎ𝑒𝑓 (17.4.2.1c)
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 < 1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 then
𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 (17.4.2.5b)
17.4.2.2 The basic concrete breakout strength of a 𝑒𝑑,𝑁 = 0.7 + 0.3
single anchor in tension in cracked concrete, 𝑁𝑏 , 1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓
shall not exceed

𝑁𝑏 = 𝑘𝑐 𝑎 √𝑓𝑐′ ℎ1.5
𝑒𝑓 (17.4.2.2a) 17.4.2.6 For anchors located in a region of a
concrete member where analysis indicates no
where 𝑘𝑐 = 10 for cast-in anchors and 7 for post- cracking at service load levels, the following
installed anchors. modification factor shall be permitted:
The value of 𝑘𝑐 for post-installed anchors shall be (a) 𝑐,𝑁 = 1.25 for cast-in anchors.
permitted to be increased above 7 based on ACI (b) 𝑐,𝑁 = 1.4 for post-installed anchors,
355.2 or ACI 355.4 product-specific tests, but shall where the value of 𝑘𝑐 used in Eq.
not exceed 10. (17.4.2.2a) is 7
Alternatively, for cast-in headed studs and headed Where the value of 𝑘𝑐 used in Eq. (17.4.2.2a) is
bolts with 280 𝑚𝑚  ℎ𝑒𝑓  635 𝑚𝑚, 𝑁𝑏 shall not taken from the ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4 product
exceed evaluation report for post-installed anchors
qualified for use in both cracked and uncracked
5/3
𝑁𝑏 = 3.9 𝑎 √𝑓𝑐′ ℎ𝑒𝑓 (17.4.2.2b) concrete, the values of 𝑘𝑐 and 𝑐,𝑁 shall be based
on the ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4 product evaluation
17.4.2.3 Where anchors are located less than 1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 report.
from three or more edges, the value of ℎ𝑒𝑓 used for
Where the value of 𝑘𝑐 used in Eq. (17.4.2.2a) is
the calculation of 𝐴𝑁𝑐 in accordance with 17.4.2.1, taken from the ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4 product
as well as for the equations in 17.4.2.1 through evaluation report for post-installed anchors
17.4.2.5, shall be the larger of (𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑎𝑥 )/1.5 and

SBC 304-CR-18 123

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

qualified for use in uncracked concrete, 𝑐,𝑁 shall 𝑁𝑝𝑛 =  𝑁 (17.4.3.1)

𝑐,𝑝 𝑝
be taken as 1.0.
When analysis indicates cracking at service load where 𝑐,𝑃 is defined in 17.4.3.6.
levels, 𝑐,𝑁 , shall be taken as 1.0 for both cast-in 17.4.3.2 For post-installed expansion and undercut
anchors and post-installed anchors. Post-installed anchors, the values of 𝑁𝑝 , shall be based on the 5
anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked percent fractile of results of tests performed and
concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI evaluated according to ACI 355.2. It is not
355.4. The cracking in the concrete shall be permissible to calculate the pullout strength in
controlled by flexural reinforcement distributed in tension for such anchors.
accordance with 24.3.2, or equivalent crack control
shall be provided by confining reinforcement. 17.4.3.3 For single cast-in headed studs and headed
bolts, it shall be permitted to evaluate the pullout
17.4.2.7 The modification factor for post-installed strength in tension using 17.4.3.4. For single J- or
anchors designed for uncracked concrete in L-bolts, it shall be permitted to evaluate the pullout
accordance with 17.4.2.6 without supplementary strength in tension using 17.4.3.5. Alternatively, it
reinforcement to control splitting, 𝑐𝑝,𝑁 , shall be shall be permitted to use values of 𝑁𝑝 based on the
calculated as follows using the critical distance 𝑐𝑎𝑐 5 percent fractile of tests performed and evaluated
as defined in 17.7.6. in the same manner as the ACI 355.2 procedures
but without the benefit of friction.
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛  𝑐𝑎𝑐 , then 𝑐𝑝,𝑁
(17.4.2.7a) 17.4.3.4 The pullout strength in tension of a single
= 1.0
headed stud or headed bolt, 𝑁𝑃 , for use in Eq.
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 < 𝑐𝑎𝑐 , then 𝑐𝑝,𝑁
(17.4.3.1 ), shall not exceed
𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 (17.4.2.7b)
= 𝑁𝑝 = 8𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
𝑐𝑎𝑐 (17.4.3.4)
but 𝑐𝑝,𝑁 determined from Eq. (17.4.2.7b) shall not 17.4.3.5 The pullout strength in tension of a single
be taken less than 1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 /𝑐𝑎𝑐 , where the critical hooked bolt, 𝑁𝑃 , for use in Eq. (17.4.3.1 ) shall not
distance 𝑐𝑎𝑐 is defined in 17.7.6. exceed

For all other cases, including cast-in anchors, 𝑐𝑝,𝑁 𝑁𝑝 = 0.9𝑓𝑐′ 𝑒ℎ 𝑑𝑎 (17.4.3.5)
shall be taken as 1.0. where 3𝑑𝑎  𝑒ℎ  4.5𝑑𝑎 .
17.4.2.8 Where an additional plate or washer is 17.4.3.6 For an anchor located in a region of a
added at the head of the anchor, it shall be permitted concrete member where analysis indicates no
to calculate the projected area of the failure surface cracking at service load levels, the following
by projecting the failure surface outward 1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 modification factor shall be permitted
from the effective perimeter of the plate or washer.
The effective perimeter shall not exceed the value 𝑐,𝑃 = 1.4
at a section projected outward more than the Where analysis indicates cracking at service load
thickness of the washer or plate from the outer edge levels, 𝑐,𝑃 shall be taken as 1.0.
of the head of the anchor.
17.4.2.9 Where anchor reinforcement is developed 17.4.4 Concrete side-face blowout strength of a
in accordance with Chapter 25 on both sides of the headed anchor in tension
breakout surface, the design strength of the anchor 17.4.4.1 For a single headed anchor with deep
reinforcement shall be permitted to be used instead embedment close to an edge (ℎ𝑒𝑓 > 2.5𝑐𝑎1 ), the
of the concrete breakout strength in determining nominal side-face blowout strength, 𝑁𝑠𝑏 , shall not
𝑁𝑛 . A strength reduction factor of 0.75 shall be exceed
used in the design of the anchor reinforcement.
17.4.3 Pullout strength of cast-in, post-installed 𝑁𝑠𝑏 = 13𝑐𝑎1 √𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑔 𝑎 √𝑓𝑐′ (17.4.4.1)
expansion and undercut anchors in tension
If 𝑐𝑎2 for the single headed anchor is less than 3𝑐𝑎1 ,
17.4.3.1 The nominal pullout strength of a single the value of 𝑁𝑠𝑏 shall be multiplied by the factor
cast-in, post-installed expansion, and post-installed (1 + 𝑐𝑎2 /𝑐𝑎1 )/4, where 1.0  𝑐𝑎2 /𝑐𝑎1  3.0.
undercut anchor in tension, 𝑁𝑝𝑛 , shall not exceed

SBC 304-CR-18 124

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

17.4.4.2 For multiple headed anchors with deep The characteristic bond stress τ𝑐𝑟 shall be taken as
embedment close to an edge (ℎ𝑒𝑓 > 2.5𝑐𝑎1 ) and the 5 percent fractile of results of tests performed
anchor spacing less than 6𝑐𝑎1 , nominal strength of and evaluated according to ACI 355.4.
those anchors susceptible to a side-face blowout Where analysis indicates cracking at service load
failure 𝑁𝑠𝑏𝑔 shall not exceed levels, adhesive anchors shall be qualified for use in
𝑠 cracked concrete in accordance with ACI 355.4.
𝑁𝑠𝑏𝑔 = (1 + )𝑁 (17.4.4.2)
6𝑐𝑎1 𝑠𝑏 For adhesive anchors located in a region of a
where 𝑠 is the distance between the outer anchors concrete member where analysis indicates no
along the edge, and 𝑁𝑠𝑏 is obtained from Eq. cracking at service load levels, 𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑟 shall be
(17.4.4.1) without modification for a perpendicular permitted to be used in place of 𝑐𝑟 in Eq. (17.4.5.2)
edge distance. and shall be taken as the 5 percent fractile of results
of tests performed and evaluated according to ACI
17.4.5 Bond strength of adhesive anchor in 355.4.
tension
It shall be permitted to use the minimum
17.4.5.1 The nominal bond strength in tension, 𝑁𝑎 characteristic bond stress values in Table 17.4.5.2,
of a single adhesive anchor or 𝑁𝑎𝑔 of a group of provided (a) through (e) are satisfied:
adhesive anchors, shall not exceed
(a) Anchors shall meet the requirements of
(a) For a single adhesive anchor: ACI 355.4
𝐴𝑁𝑎 (b) Anchors shall be installed in holes drilled
𝑁𝑎 = ψ ψ 𝑁 (17.4.5.1a) with a rotary impact drill or rock drill
𝐴𝑁𝑎𝑜 𝑒𝑑,𝑁𝑎 𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 𝑏𝑎
(c) Concrete at time of anchor installation shall
(b) For a group of adhesive anchors: have a minimum compressive strength of
𝐴𝑁𝑎 17 MPa
𝑁𝑎𝑔 = ψ ψ ψ 𝑁 (17.4.5.1b) (d) Concrete at time of anchor installation shall
𝐴𝑁𝑎𝑜 𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎 𝑒𝑑,𝑁𝑎 𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 𝑏𝑎 have a minimum age of 21 days
(e) Concrete temperature at time of anchor
Factors ψ𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎 ψ𝑒𝑑,𝑁𝑎 and ψ𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 are defined in installation shall be at least 10° C
17.4.5.3, 17.4.5.4, and 17.4.5.5, respectively. 𝐴𝑁𝑎
is the projected influence area of a single adhesive 17.4.5.3 The modification factor for adhesive
anchor or group of adhesive anchors that shall be anchor groups loaded eccentrically in tension,
approximated as a rectilinear area that projects 𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎 , shall be calculated as:
outward a distance cNa from the centerline of the 1
adhesive anchor, or in the case of a group of 𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎 =
adhesive anchors, from a line through a row of 𝑒𝑁′ (17.4.5.3)
(1 + )
𝑐𝑁𝑎
adjacent adhesive anchors. 𝐴𝑁𝑎 shall not exceed
𝑛𝐴𝑁𝑎𝑜 , where n is the number of adhesive anchors but 𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎 shall not be taken greater than 1.0.
in the group that resist tension loads. 𝐴𝑁𝑎𝑜 is the
projected influence area of a single adhesive anchor If the loading on an adhesive anchor group is such
with an edge distance equal to or greater than 𝑐𝑁𝑎 : that only some adhesive anchors are in tension, only
those adhesive anchors that are in tension shall be
𝐴𝑁𝑎𝑜 = (2𝑐𝑁𝑎 )2 (17.4.5.1c) considered when determining the eccentricity 𝑒𝑁′
for use in Eq. (17.4.5.3) and for the calculation of
where 𝑁𝑎𝑔 according to Eq. (17.4.5.1b).
In the case where eccentric loading exists about two
τ𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑟
𝑐𝑁𝑎 = 10𝑑𝑎 √ (17.4.5.1d) orthogonal axes, the modification factor 𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎
7.6 shall be calculated for each axis individually and the
and constant 7.6 carries the unit of MPa. product of these factors used as 𝑒𝑐,𝑁𝑎 in Eq.
(17.4.5.1b).
17.4.5.2 The basic bond strength of a single
adhesive anchor in tension in cracked concrete, 17.4.5.4 The modification factor for edge effects
𝑁𝑏𝑎 , shall not exceed for single adhesive anchors or adhesive anchor
𝑁𝑏𝑎 = 𝑎 τ𝑐𝑟 π𝑑𝑎 ℎ𝑒𝑓 (17.4.5.2)

SBC 304-CR-18 125

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

groups loaded in tension, 𝑒𝑑,𝑁𝑎 shall be calculated where 𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑉 is the effective cross-sectional area of
as an anchor in shear, mm2 and 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 shall not be taken
greater than the smaller of 1.9𝑓𝑦𝑎 and 860 MPa.
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛  𝑐𝑁𝑎 , then 𝑒𝑑,𝑁𝑎 (c) For post-installed anchors where sleeves
(17.4.5.4a)
= 1.0 extend through the shear plane, 𝑉𝑠𝑎 shall be
based on the results of tests performed and
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 < 𝑐𝑁𝑎 , then evaluated according to ACI 355.2.
𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 (17.4.5.4b) Alternatively, Eq. (17.5.1.2b) shall be
𝑒𝑑,𝑁𝑎 = 0.7 + 0.3
𝑐𝑁𝑎 permitted to be used.
17.4.5.5 The modification factor for adhesive 17.5.2 Concrete breakout strength of anchor in
anchors designed for uncracked concrete in shear
accordance with 17.4.5.2 without supplementary
reinforcement to control splitting, 𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 , shall be 17.5.2.1 The nominal concrete breakout strength in
shear, 𝑉𝑐𝑏 of a single anchor or 𝑉𝑐𝑏𝑔 of a group of
calculated as:
anchors, shall not exceed:
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛  𝑐𝑎𝑐 , then 𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 = 1.0 (17.4.5.5a)
(a) For shear force perpendicular to the edge on
a single anchor
If 𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 < 𝑐𝑎𝑐 , then 𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎
𝐴𝑉𝑐
𝑐𝑎,𝑚𝑖𝑛 (17.4.5.5b) 𝑉𝑐𝑏 = ψ ψ ψ 𝑉 (17.5.2.1a)
= 𝐴𝑉𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑑,𝑉 𝑐,𝑉 ℎ,𝑉 𝑏
𝑐𝑁𝑎
(b) For shear force perpendicular to the edge
but 𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 determined from Eq. (17.4.5.5b) shall
on a group of anchors
not be taken less than 𝑐𝑁𝑎 /𝑐𝑎𝑐 , where the critical
edge distance 𝑐𝑎𝑐 is defined in 17.7.6. For all other 𝐴𝑉𝑐
𝑉𝑐𝑏𝑔 = ψ ψ ψ ψ 𝑉 (17.5.2.1b)
cases, 𝑐𝑝,𝑁𝑎 shall be taken as 1.0. 𝐴𝑉𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑐,𝑉 𝑒𝑑,𝑉 𝑐,𝑉 ℎ,𝑉 𝑏
(c) For shear force parallel to an edge, 𝑉𝑐𝑏 or
17.5—Design requirements for shear
𝑉𝑐𝑏𝑔 shall be permitted to be twice the
loading
value of the shear force determined from
17.5.1 Steel strength of anchor in shear Eq. (17.5.1.2a) or (17.5.2.1b), respectively,
17.5.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in shear with the shear force assumed to act
as governed by steel, 𝑉𝑠𝑎 , shall be evaluated by perpendicular to the edge and with ψ𝑒𝑑,𝑉
calculations based on the properties of the anchor taken equal to 1.0.
material and the physical dimensions of the anchor. (d) For anchors located at a corner, the limiting
Where concrete breakout is a potential failure nominal concrete breakout strength shall be
mode, the required steel shear strength shall be determined for each edge, and the
consistent with the assumed breakout surface. minimum value shall be used.

17.5.1.2 The nominal strength of an anchor in Factors ψ𝑒𝑐,𝑉 ψ𝑒𝑑,𝑉 ψ𝑐,𝑉 and ψℎ,𝑉 are defined in
shear, 𝑉𝑠𝑎 , shall not exceed (a) through (c): 17.5.2.5, 17.5.2.6, 17.5.2.7, and 17.5.2.8,
respectively. 𝑉𝑏 is the basic concrete breakout
(a) For cast-in headed stud anchor strength value for a single anchor. 𝐴𝑉𝑐 is the
𝑉𝑠𝑎 = 𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑉 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 (17.5.1.2a) projected area of the failure surface on the side of
the concrete member at its edge for a single anchor
where 𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑉 is the effective cross-sectional area of or a group of anchors. It shall be permitted to
an anchor in shear, mm2 and 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 shall not be taken evaluate 𝐴𝑉𝑐 as the base of a truncated half-pyramid
greater than the smaller of 1.9𝑓𝑦𝑎 and 860 MPa. projected on the side face of the member where the
top of the half-pyramid is given by the axis of the
(b) For cast-in headed bolt and hooked bolt anchor row selected as critical. The value of ca1
anchors and for post-installed anchors shall be taken as the distance from the edge to this
where sleeves do not extend through the axis. 𝐴𝑉𝑐 shall not exceed 𝑛𝐴𝑉𝑐𝑜 , where 𝑛 is the
shear plane number of anchors in the group.
𝑉𝑠𝑎 = 0.6𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑉 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 (17.5.1.2b) 𝐴𝑉𝑐𝑜 is the projected area for a single anchor in a
deep member with a distance from edges equal or

SBC 304-CR-18 126

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

greater than 1.5𝑐𝑎1 in the direction perpendicular to (b) Anchor spacing s is not less than 65 mm
the shear force. It shall be permitted to evaluate (c) Reinforcement is provided at the corners if
𝐴𝑉𝑐𝑜 as the base of a half-pyramid with a side length 𝑐𝑎2 ≤ 1.5ℎ𝑒𝑓
parallel to the edge of 3𝑐𝑎1 and a depth of 1.5𝑐𝑎1 .
17.5.2.4 Where anchors are located in narrow
sections of limited thickness such that both edge
𝐴𝑉𝑐𝑜 = 4.5(𝑐𝑎1 )2 (17.5.2.1c)
distances 𝑐𝑎2 and thickness ℎ𝑎 are less than
Where anchors are located at varying distances 1.5𝑐𝑎1 ,the value of 𝑐𝑎1 used for the calculation of
from the edge and the anchors are welded to the 𝐴𝑉𝑐 in accordance with 17.5.2.1 as well as for the
attachment so as to distribute the force to all equations in 17.5.2.1 through 17.5.2.8 shall not
anchors, it shall be permitted to evaluate the exceed the largest of:
strength based on the distance to the farthest row of (a) 𝑐𝑎2 /1.5, where 𝑐𝑎2 is the largest edge
anchors from the edge. In this case, it shall be distance
permitted to base the value of ca1 on the distance (b) ℎ𝑎 /1.5
from the edge to the axis of the farthest anchor row (c) 𝑠/3, where 𝑠 is the maximum spacing
that is selected as critical, and all of the shear shall perpendicular to direction of shear,
be assumed to be carried by this critical anchor row between anchors within a group
alone.
17.5.2.5 The modification factor for anchor groups
17.5.2.2 The basic concrete breakout strength in loaded eccentrically in shear, ec,V, shall be
shear of a single anchor in cracked concrete, 𝑉𝑏 , calculated as
shall be the smaller of (a) and (b):
1
𝑙𝑒 0.2 𝑒𝑐,𝑉 =
(a) 𝑉𝑏 = [0.6 ( ) √𝑑𝑎 ] a √𝑓𝑐′ (𝑐𝑎1 )1.5 (17.5.2.2a) 2𝑒 ′ (17.5.2.5)
𝑑𝑎 (1 + 𝑉 )
3𝑐𝑎1
where 𝑙𝑒 is the load-bearing length of the anchor for but 𝑒𝑐,𝑉 shall not be taken greater than 1.0.
shear: 𝑙𝑒 = ℎ𝑒𝑓 for anchors with a constant
stiffness over the full length of embedded section, If the loading on an anchor group is such that only
such as headed studs and post-installed anchors some anchors are loaded in shear in the same
with one tubular shell over full length of the direction, only those anchors that are loaded in
embedment depth; shear in the same direction shall be considered
when determining the eccentricity of 𝑒𝑉′ for use in
𝑙𝑒 = 2𝑑𝑎 for torque-controlled expansion anchors Eq. (17.5.2.5) and for the calculation of 𝑉𝑐𝑏𝑔
with a distance sleeve separated from expansion
according to Eq. (17.5.2.1b).
sleeve, and 𝑙𝑒 ≤ 8 𝑑𝑎 in all cases.
17.5.2.6 The modification factor for edge effect for
(b) 𝑉𝑏 = 3.7a √𝑓𝑐′ (𝑐𝑎1 )1.5 (17.5.2.2b) a single anchor or group of anchors loaded in shear,
𝑒𝑑,𝑉 , shall be calculated as follows using the
17.5.2.3 For cast-in headed studs, headed bolts, or smaller value of 𝑐𝑎2 .
hooked bolts that are continuously welded to steel If 𝑐𝑎2  1.5𝑐𝑎1 , then 𝑒𝑑,𝑉 = 1.0 (17.5.2.6a)
attachments having a minimum thickness equal to
the greater of 10 mm and half of the anchor If 𝑐𝑎2 < 1.5𝑐𝑎1 , then
diameter, the basic concrete breakout strength in 𝑐𝑎2 (17.5.2.6b)
𝑒𝑑,𝑉 = 0.7 + 0.3
shear of a single anchor in cracked concrete, 𝑉𝑏 , 1.5𝑐𝑎1
shall be the smaller of Eq. (17.5.2.2b) and Eq.
(17.5.2.3) 17.5.2.7 For anchors located in a region of a
concrete member where analysis indicates no
𝑙𝑒 0.2 cracking at service loads, the following
𝑉𝑏 = [0.66 ( ) √𝑑𝑎 ] a √𝑓𝑐′ (𝑐𝑎1 )1.5 (17.5.2.3) modification factor shall be permitted
𝑑𝑎
𝑐,𝑉 = 1.4
where 𝑙𝑒 is defined in 17.5.2.2 provided that:
For anchors located in a region of a concrete
(a) For groups of anchors, the strength is
member where analysis indicates cracking at
determined based on the strength of the row
service load levels, the following modification
of anchors farthest from the edge
factors shall be permitted:

SBC 304-CR-18 127

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

𝑐𝑉 = 1.0 for anchors in cracked concrete without the lesser of 𝑁𝑎𝑔 determined from Eq. (17.4.5.1b)
supplementary reinforcement or with edge and 𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 determined from Eq. (17.4.2.1b).
reinforcement smaller than a Dia 12 bar.
In Eq. (17.5.3.1a) and (17.5.3.1b), 𝑘𝑐𝑝 =
𝑐,𝑉 = 1.2 for anchors in cracked concrete with 1.0 for ℎ𝑒𝑓 < 65 𝑚𝑚; and 𝑘𝑐𝑝 = 2.0 for ℎ𝑒𝑓 ≥
reinforcement of a Dia 12 bar or greater between the 65 𝑚𝑚.
anchor and the edge.
17.6—Interaction of tensile and shear
𝑐,𝑉 = 1.4 for anchors in cracked concrete with forces
reinforcement of a Dia 12 bar or greater between the
Unless determined in accordance with 17.3.1.3,
anchor and the edge, and with the reinforcement
anchors or groups of anchors that are subjected to
enclosed within stirrups spaced at not more than
both shear and axial loads shall be designed to
100 mm.
satisfy the requirements of 17.6.1 through 17.6.3.
17.5.2.8 The modification factor for anchors The values of 𝑁𝑛 and 𝑉𝑛 shall be the required
located in a concrete member where ℎ𝑎 < 1.5𝑐𝑎1 strengths as determined from 17.3.1.1 or from
ℎ,𝑉 shall be calculated as 17.2.3.
17.6.1 If 𝑉𝑢𝑎 /(𝑉𝑛 ) ≤ 0.2 for the governing
1.5𝑐𝑎1 strength in shear, then full strength in tension shall
ℎ,𝑉 =√ (17.5.2.8) be permitted: 𝑁𝑛 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎 .
ℎ𝑎
17.6.2 If 𝑁𝑢𝑎 /(𝑁𝑛 ) ≤ 0.2 for the governing
but ℎ,𝑉 shall not be taken less than 1.0. strength in tension, then full strength in shear shall
be permitted: 𝑉𝑛 ≥ 𝑉𝑢𝑎 .
17.5.2.9 Where anchor reinforcement is either
developed in accordance with Chapter 25 on both 17.6.3 If 𝑉𝑢𝑎 /(𝑉𝑛 ) > 0.2 for the governing
sides of the breakout surface, or encloses the anchor strength in shear and 𝑁𝑢𝑎 /(𝑁𝑛 ) > 0.2 for the
and is developed beyond the breakout surface, the governing strength in tension, then
design strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be 𝑁𝑢𝑎 𝑉𝑢𝑎
permitted to be used instead of the concrete + ≤ 1.2 (17.6.3)
𝑁𝑛 𝑉𝑛
breakout strength in determining 𝑉𝑛 . A strength
reduction factor of 0.75 shall be used in the design 17.7—Required edge distances,
of the anchor reinforcement. spacings, and thicknesses to preclude
17.5.3 Concrete pryout strength of anchor in
splitting failure
shear Minimum spacings and edge distances for anchors
and minimum thicknesses of members shall
17.5.3.1 The nominal pryout strength, 𝑉𝑐𝑝 for a
conform to 17.7.1 through 17.7.6, unless
single anchor or 𝑉𝑐𝑝𝑔 for a group of anchors, shall supplementary reinforcement is provided to control
not exceed: splitting. Lesser values from product-specific tests
(a) For a single anchor performed in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI
355.4 shall be permitted.
𝑉𝑐𝑝 = 𝑘𝑐𝑝 𝑁𝑐𝑝 (17.5.3.1a)
17.7.1 Unless determined in accordance with
For cast-in, expansion, and undercut anchors, 𝑁𝑐𝑝 17.7.4, minimum center-to-center spacing of
shall be taken as 𝑁𝑐𝑏 determined from Eq. anchors shall be 4𝑑𝑎 for cast-in anchors that will
(17.4.2.1a), and for adhesive anchors, 𝑁𝑐𝑝 shall be not be torqued, and 6𝑑𝑎 for torqued cast-in anchors
and post-installed anchors.
the lesser of 𝑁𝑎 determined from Eq. (17.4.5.1a)
and 𝑁𝑐𝑏 determined from Eq. (17.4.2.1a). 17.7.2 Unless determined in accordance with
17.7.4, minimum edge distances for cast-in anchors
(b) For a group of anchors
that will not be torqued shall be based on specified
𝑉𝑐𝑝𝑔 = 𝑘𝑐𝑝 𝑁𝑐𝑝𝑔 (17.5.3.1b) cover requirements for reinforcement in 20.6.1. For
cast-in anchors that will be torqued, the minimum
For cast-in, expansion, and undercut anchors, 𝑁𝑐𝑝𝑔 edge distances shall be 6𝑑𝑎 .
shall be taken as 𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 determined from Eq. 17.7.3 Unless determined in accordance with
(17.4.2.1b), and for adhesive anchors, 𝑁𝑐𝑝𝑔 shall be 17.7.4, minimum edge distances for post-installed

SBC 304-CR-18 128

 CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

anchors shall be based on the greater of specified of adhesive anchors shall be performed by
cover requirements for reinforcement in 20.6.1, or personnel trained to install adhesive anchors.
minimum edge distance requirements for the
17.8.2 Installation of anchors shall be inspected in
products as determined by tests in accordance with
accordance with 1.9. Adhesive anchors shall be also
ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4, and shall not be less than
subject to 17.8.2.1 through 17.8.2.4.
twice the maximum aggregate size. In the absence
of product-specific ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4 test 17.8.2.1 For adhesive anchors, the construction
information, the minimum edge distance shall not documents shall specify proof loading where
be less than: required in accordance with ACI 355.4. The
construction documents shall also specify all
Adhesive anchors........................................6𝑑𝑎
parameters associated with the characteristic bond
Undercut anchors........................................6𝑑𝑎 stress used for the design according to 17.4.5,
including minimum age of concrete; concrete
Torque-controlled anchors..........................8𝑑𝑎
temperature range; moisture condition of concrete
Displacement-controlled anchors..............10𝑑𝑎 at time of installation; type of lightweight concrete,
if applicable; and requirements for hole drilling and
17.7.4 For anchors where installation does not
preparation.
produce a splitting force and that will not be
torqued, if the edge distance or spacing is less than 17.8.2.2 Installation of adhesive anchors
those specified in 17.7.1 to 17.7.3, calculations shall horizontally or upwardly inclined to support
be performed by substituting for 𝑑𝑎 a smaller value sustained tension loads shall be performed by
𝑑𝑎′ that meets the requirements of 17.7.1 to 17.7.3. personnel certified by an applicable certification
Calculated forces applied to the anchor shall be program. Certification shall include written and
limited to the values corresponding to an anchor performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRSI
having a diameter of 𝑑𝑎′ . Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or
equivalent. The sensitivity of adhesive anchors to
17.7.5 Unless determined from tests in accordance
installation orientation combined with sustained
with ACI 355.2, the value of ℎ𝑒𝑓 for an expansion tension loading warrants installer certification.
or undercut post-installed anchor shall not exceed Certification may also be appropriate for other
the greater of 2/3 of the member thickness, ℎ𝑎 , and safety-related applications. Certification is
the member thickness minus 100 mm established through an independent assessment
17.7.6 Unless determined from tension tests in such as the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation
accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4, the Certification Program, or similar program with
critical edge distance 𝑐𝑎𝑐 shall not be taken less equivalent requirements. In addition, installers
than: should obtain instruction through product-specific
training offered by manufacturers of qualified
Adhesive anchors..........................................2ℎ𝑒𝑓 adhesive anchor systems.
Undercut anchors.......................................2.5ℎ𝑒𝑓 17.8.2.3 The acceptability of certification other
Torque-controlled expansion anchors...........4ℎ𝑒𝑓 than the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer
Certification shall be the responsibility of the
Displacement-controlled expansion anchors.4ℎ𝑒𝑓 licensed design professional.
17.7.7 Construction documents shall specify use 17.8.2.4 Adhesive anchors installed in horizontal or
of anchors with a minimum edge distance as upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained
assumed in design. tension loads shall be continuously inspected during
installation by an inspector specially approved for
17.8—Installation and inspection of that purpose by the building official. The special
anchors inspector shall furnish a report to the licensed
17.8.1 Anchors shall be installed by qualified design professional and building official that the
personnel in accordance with the construction work covered by the report has been performed and
documents and, where applicable, manufacturer's that the materials used and the installation
instructions. The construction documents shall procedures used conform with the approved
require installation of post-installed adhesive construction documents and the Manufacturer's
anchors in accordance with the Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions (MPII).
Printed Installation Instructions (MPII). Installation

SBC 304-CR-18 129

CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

TABLES OF CHAPTER 17

Table 17.3.1.1—Required strength of anchors, except as noted in 17.2.3

Anchor group[1]
Failure mode Single anchor
Individual anchor in Anchors as a
a group group

Steel strength in tension (17.4.1) 𝑁𝑠𝑎 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎 𝑁𝑠𝑎 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑖

Concrete breakout strength in tension

𝑁𝑐𝑏 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎 𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑔
(17.4.2)

Pullout strength in tension

𝑁𝑝𝑛 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎 𝑁𝑝𝑛 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑖
(17.4.3)

Concrete side-face blowout strength in

𝑁𝑠𝑏 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎 𝑁𝑠𝑏𝑔 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑔
tension (17.4.4)

Bond strength of adhesive anchor in

𝑁𝑎 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎 𝑁𝑎𝑔 ≥ 𝑁𝑢𝑎,𝑔
tension (17.4.5)

Steel strength in shear

𝑉𝑠𝑎 ≥ 𝑉𝑢𝑎 𝑉𝑠𝑎 ≥ 𝑉𝑢𝑎,𝑖
(17.5.1)

Concrete breakout strength in shear

𝑉𝑐𝑏 ≥ 𝑉𝑢𝑎 𝑁𝑐𝑏𝑔 ≥ 𝑉𝑢𝑎,𝑔
(17.5.2)

Concrete pryout strength in shear

𝑉𝑐𝑝 ≥ 𝑉𝑢𝑎 𝑉𝑐𝑝𝑔 ≥ 𝑉𝑢𝑎,𝑔
(17.5.3)
[1]
Required strengths for steel and pullout failure modes shall be calculated for the most highly stressed
anchor in the group.

Table 17.4.5.2—Minimum characteristic bond stresses[1] [2]

Installation and Peak in service

Moisture content of concrete 𝒄𝒓 , 𝒖𝒏𝒄𝒓 ,
service temperature of concrete,
at time of anchor installation MPa MPa
environment °C

Outdoor Dry to fully saturated 79 1.4 4.5

Indoor Dry 43 2.1 7.0

Where anchor design includes sustained tension loading, multiply values of 𝑐𝑟 and 𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑟 by 0.4.
[1]

[2]
Where anchor design includes earthquake loads for structures assigned to SDC C, D, E, or F, multiply values
of 𝑐𝑟 by 0.8 and 𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑟 , by 0.4.

SBC 304-CR-18 130

CHAPTER 17—ANCHORING TO CONCRETE

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 131

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

apply, the following provisions shall be satisfied for

18.1—Scope each structural system designated as part of the
18.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of seismic force-resisting system, regardless of the
nonprestressed and prestressed concrete structures seismic design category:
assigned to Seismic Design Categories (SDC) B
(a) Ordinary moment frames shall satisfy 18.3.
through F, including, where applicable:
(b) Ordinary reinforced concrete structural
(a) Structural systems designated as part of the walls and ordinary precast structural walls
seismic-force-resisting system, including need not satisfy any provisions in Chapter
diaphragms, moment frames, structural 18.
walls, and foundations (c) Intermediate moment frames shall satisfy
(b) Members not designated as part of the 18.4.
seismic-force-resisting system but required (d) Intermediate precast structural walls shall
to support other loads while undergoing satisfy 18.5.
deformations associated with earthquake (e) Special moment frames shall satisfy 18.6
effects through 18.9.
(f) Special structural walls shall satisfy 18.10.
18.1.2 Structures designed according to the
(g) Special structural walls constructed using
provisions of this chapter are intended to resist
precast concrete shall satisfy 18.11.
earthquake motions through ductile inelastic
response of selected members. All special moment frames and special structural
walls shall also satisfy 18.2.4 through 18.2.8.
18.2—General
18.2.1.7 A reinforced concrete structural system not
18.2.1 Structural systems satisfying this chapter shall be permitted if it is
18.2.1.1 All structures shall be assigned to a SDC demonstrated by experimental evidence and
in accordance with 4.4.6.1. analysis that the proposed system will have strength
and toughness equal to or exceeding those provided
18.2.1.2 Structures assigned to Seismic Design
by a comparable reinforced concrete structure
Category A shall satisfy requirements of Chapter 1
satisfying this chapter.
through Chapter 17 and Chapter 19 through 26;
Chapter 18 does not apply. Structures assigned to 18.2.2 Analysis and proportioning of structural
Seismic Design Category B, C, D, E or F also shall members
satisfy 18.2.1.3 through 18.2.1.7, as applicable. 18.2.2.1 The interaction of all structural and
Except for structural elements of plain concrete nonstructural members that affect the linear and
complying with Section 14.1.4, structural elements nonlinear response of the structure to earthquake
of plain concrete are prohibited in structures motions shall be considered in the analysis.
assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F.
18.2.2.2 Rigid members assumed not to be a part of
18.2.1.3 Structures assigned to SDC B shall satisfy the seismic-force-resisting system shall be
18.2.2. permitted provided their effect on the response of
18.2.1.4 Structures assigned to SDC C shall satisfy the system is considered in the structural design.
18.2.2 and 18.2.3. Consequences of failure of structural and
nonstructural members that are not a part of the
18.2.1.5 Structures assigned to SDC D, E, or F shall
seismic-force-resisting system shall be considered.
satisfy 18.2.2 through 18.2.8 and 18.12 through
18.14. 18.2.2.3 Structural members extending below the
base of structure that are required to transmit forces
18.2.1.6 Structural systems designated as part of the
resulting from earthquake effects to the foundation
seismic force-resisting system shall be restricted to
shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 18
those permitted by SBC 301. Except for Seismic
that are consistent with the seismic-force-resisting
Design Category A, for which Chapter 18 does not
system above the base of structure.

SBC 304-CR-18 132

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

18.2.3 Anchoring to concrete 18.2.8.2 Welding of stirrups, ties, inserts, or other

similar elements to longitudinal reinforcement
18.2.3.1 Anchors resisting earthquake-induced
required by design shall not be permitted.
forces in structures assigned to SDC C, D, E, or F
shall be in accordance with 17.2.3. 18.3—Ordinary moment frames
18.2.4 Strength reduction factors 18.3.1 Scope
18.2.4.1 Strength reduction factors shall be in 18.3.1.1 This section shall apply to ordinary
accordance with Chapter 21. moment frames forming part of the seismic-force-
18.2.5 Concrete in special moment frames and resisting system.
special structural walls 18.3.2 Beams shall have at least two continuous
18.2.5.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete bars at both top and bottom faces. Continuous
in special moment frames and special structural bottom bars shall have area not less than one-fourth
walls shall be in accordance with the special seismic the maximum area of bottom bars along the span.
systems requirements of 19.2.1.1. These bars shall be anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 in
tension at the face of support.
18.2.6 Reinforcement in special moment frames
and special structural walls 18.3.3 Columns having unsupported length
𝑙𝑢  5𝑐1 shall have 𝑉𝑛 at least the lesser of (a) and
18.2.6.1 Reinforcement in special moment frames (b):
and special structural walls shall be in accordance
with the special seismic systems requirements of (a) The shear associated with development of
20.2.2. nominal moment strengths of the column at
each restrained end of the unsupported
18.2.7 Mechanical splices in special moment length due to reverse curvature bending.
frames and special structural walls Column flexural strength shall be
18.2.7.1 Mechanical splices shall be classified as calculated for the factored axial force,
(a) or (b): consistent with the direction of the lateral
forces considered, resulting in the highest
(a) Type 1—Mechanical splice conforming to flexural strength.
25.5.7 (b) The maximum shear obtained from design
(b) Type 2—Mechanical splice conforming to load combinations that include 𝐸, with
25.5.7 and capable of developing the 𝑜 𝐸 substituted for 𝐸.
specified tensile strength of the spliced bars
18.4—Intermediate moment frames
18.2.7.2 Type 1 mechanical splices shall not be
located within a distance equal to twice the member 18.4.1 Scope
depth from the column or beam face for special 18.4.1.1 This section shall apply to intermediate
moment frames or from critical sections where moment frames including two-way slabs without
yielding of the reinforcement is likely to occur as a beams forming part of the seismic-force-resisting
result of lateral displacements beyond the linear system.
range of behavior. Type 2 mechanical splices shall
be permitted at any location, except as noted in 18.4.2 Beams
18.9.2.1(c). 18.4.2.1 Beams shall have at least two continuous
18.2.8 Welded splices in special moment frames bars at both top and bottom faces. Continuous
and special structural walls bottom bars shall have area not less than one-fourth
the maximum area of bottom bars along the span.
18.2.8.1 Welded splices in reinforcement resisting
These bars shall be anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 in
earthquake-induced forces shall conform to 25.5.7
tension at the face of support.
and shall not be located within a distance equal to
twice the member depth from the column or beam 18.4.2.2 The positive moment strength at the face
face for special moment frames or from critical of the joint shall be at least one-third the negative
sections where yielding of the reinforcement is moment strength provided at that face of the joint.
likely to occur as a result of lateral displacements Neither the negative nor the positive moment
beyond the linear range of behavior. strength at any section along the length of the beam

SBC 304-CR-18 133

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

shall be less than one-fifth the maximum moment Provision 18.4.3.6 shall apply to all columns
strength provided at the face of either joint. supporting discontinuous stiff members.
18.4.2.3 𝑉𝑛 shall be at least the lesser of (a) and 18.4.3.3 At both ends of the column, hoops shall be
(b): provided at spacing so over a length 𝑙𝑜 measured
from the joint face. Spacing 𝑠𝑜 shall not exceed the
(a) The sum of the shear associated with
smallest of (a) through (d):
development of nominal moment strengths
of the beam at each restrained end of the (a) 8 times the diameter of the smallest
clear span due to reverse curvature bending longitudinal bar enclosed
and the shear calculated for factored gravity (b) 24 times the diameter of the hoop bar
loads (c) One-half of the smallest cross-sectional
(b) The maximum shear obtained from design dimension of the column
load combinations that include 𝐸, with (d) 300 mm.
𝐸 taken as twice that prescribed by the (e) Length 𝑙𝑜 shall not be less than the greatest
SBC 201 and SBC 301 of (e), (f), and (g):
(f) One-sixth of the clear span of the column
18.4.2.4 At both ends of the beam, hoops shall be
(g) Maximum cross-sectional dimension of the
provided over a length of at least 2ℎ measured from
column
the face of the supporting member toward midspan.
(h) 450 mm
The first hoop shall be located not more than 50 mm
from the face of the supporting member. Spacing of 18.4.3.4 The first hoop shall be located not more
hoops shall not exceed the smallest of (a) through than so/2 from the joint face.
(d):
18.4.3.5 Outside of length 𝑙𝑜 , spacing of transverse
(a) 𝑑/4 reinforcement shall be in accordance with
(b) Eight times the diameter of the smallest 10.7.6.5.2.
longitudinal bar enclosed
18.4.3.6 Columns supporting reactions from
(c) 24 times the diameter of the hoop bar
discontinuous stiff members, such as walls, shall be
(d) 300 mm
provided with transverse reinforcement at the
18.4.2.5 Transverse reinforcement spacing shall not spacing so in accordance with 18.4.3.3 over the full
exceed 𝑑/2 throughout the length of the beam. height beneath the level at which the discontinuity
occurs if the portion of factored axial compressive
18.4.2.6 In beams having factored axial
force in these members related to earthquake effects
compressive force exceeding 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /10, transverse
exceeds 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /10. If design forces have been
reinforcement required by 18.4.2.5 shall conform to
magnified to account for the over-strength of the
25.7.2.2 and either 25.7.2.3 or 25.7.2.4.
vertical elements of the seismic-force-resisting
18.4.3 Columns system, the limit of 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /10 shall be increased to
18.4.3.1 𝑉𝑛 shall be at least the lesser of (a) and 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /4. Transverse reinforcement shall extend
(b): above and below the column in accordance with
18.7.5.6(b).
(a) The shear associated with development of
nominal moment strengths of the column at 18.4.4 Joints
each restrained end of the unsupported 18.4.4.1 Beam-column joints shall have transverse
length due to reverse curvature bending. reinforcement conforming to Chapter 15.
Column flexural strength shall be
calculated for the factored axial force, 18.4.5 Two-way slabs without beams
consistent with the direction of the lateral 18.4.5.1 Factored slab moment at the support
forces considered, resulting in the highest including earthquake effects, 𝐸, shall be calculated
flexural strength for load combinations given in Eq. (5.3.1e) and
(b) The maximum shear obtained from (5.3.1g). Reinforcement to resist 𝑀𝑠𝑐 shall be
factored load combinations that include 𝐸, placed within the column strip defined in 8.4.1.5 .
with 𝑜 𝐸 substituted for 𝐸
18.4.5.2 Reinforcement placed within the effective
18.4.3.2 Columns shall be spirally reinforced in width given in 8.4.2.3.3 shall be designed to resist
accordance with Chapter 10 or shall be in 𝑓 𝑀𝑠𝑐 · Effective slab width for exterior and corner
accordance with 18.4.3.3 through 18.4.3.5.

SBC 304-CR-18 134

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

connections shall not extend beyond the column 18.5.2.4 In structures assigned to SDC D, E, or F,
face a distance greater than 𝑐𝑡 measured wall piers shall be designed in accordance with
perpendicular to the slab span. 18.10.8 or 18.14.
18.4.5.3 At least one-half of the reinforcement in 18.6—Beams of special moment
the column strip at the support shall be placed frames
within the effective slab width given in 8.4.2.3.3.
18.6.1 Scope
18.4.5.4 At least one-fourth of the top
reinforcement at the support in the column strip 18.6.1.1 This section shall apply to beams of special
shall be continuous throughout the span. moment frames that form part of the seismic-force-
resisting system and are proportioned primarily to
18.4.5.5 Continuous bottom reinforcement in the resist flexure and shear.
column strip shall be at least one-third of the top
reinforcement at the support in the column strip. 18.6.1.2 Beams of special moment frames shall
frame into columns of special moment frames
18.4.5.6 At least one-half of all bottom middle strip satisfying 18.7.
reinforcement and all bottom column strip
reinforcement at midspan shall be continuous and 18.6.2 Dimensional limits
shall develop 𝑓𝑦 at the face of support as defined in 18.6.2.1 Beams shall satisfy (a) through (c):
8.10.3.2.1.
(a) Clear span ln shall be at least 4𝑑
18.4.5.7 At discontinuous edges of the slab, all top (b) Width bw shall be at least the lesser of 0.3ℎ
and bottom reinforcement at the support shall be and 250 mm
developed at the face of support as defined in (c) Projection of the beam width beyond the
8.10.3.2.1. width of the supporting column on each
18.4.5.8 At the critical sections for columns defined side shall not exceed the lesser of 𝑐2 and
in 22.6.4.1, two-way shear caused by factored 0.75𝑐1
gravity loads shall not exceed 0.4𝑉𝑐 , where 𝑉𝑐 shall 18.6.3 Longitudinal reinforcement
be calculated in accordance with 22.6.5. This
18.6.3.1 Beams shall have at least two continuous
requirement need not be satisfied if the slab satisfies
bars at both top and bottom faces. At any section,
18.14.5.
for top as well as for bottom reinforcement, the
18.5—Intermediate precast structural amount of reinforcement shall be at least that
walls required by 9.6.1.2 and the reinforcement ratio ρ
shall not exceed 0.025.
18.5.1 Scope
18.6.3.2 Positive moment strength at joint face shall
18.5.1.1 This section shall apply to intermediate be at least one-half the negative moment strength
precast structural walls forming part of the seismic- provided at that face of the joint. Both the negative
force-resisting system. and the positive moment strength at any section
18.5.2 General along member length shall be at least one-fourth the
maximum moment strength provided at face of
18.5.2.1 In connections between wall panels, or
either joint.
between wall panels and the foundation, yielding
shall be restricted to steel elements or 18.6.3.3 Lap splices of deformed longitudinal
reinforcement. reinforcement shall be permitted if hoop or spiral
reinforcement is provided over the lap length.
18.5.2.2 Connections that are designed to yield
Spacing of the transverse reinforcement enclosing
shall be capable of maintaining 80 percent of their
the lap-spliced bars shall not exceed the lesser of
design strength at the deformation induced by the
𝑑/4 and 100 mm. Lap splices shall not be used in
design displacement or shall use Type 2 mechanical
locations (a) through (c):
splices.
(a) Within the joints
18.5.2.3 For elements of the connection that are not
(b) Within a distance of twice the beam depth
designed to yield, the required strength shall be
from the face of the joint
based on 1.5𝑆𝑦 of the yielding portion of the
(c) Within a distance of twice the beam depth
connection. from critical sections where flexural
yielding is likely to occur as a result of

SBC 304-CR-18 135

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

lateral displacements beyond the elastic 18.6.4.3 Hoops in beams shall be permitted to be
range of behavior made up of two pieces of reinforcement: a stirrup
having seismic hooks at both ends and closed by a
18.6.3.4 Mechanical splices shall conform to 18.2.7
crosstie. Consecutive crossties engaging the same
and welded splices shall conform to 18.2.8.
longitudinal bar shall have their 90-degree hooks at
18.6.3.5 Unless used in a special moment frame as opposite sides of the flexural member. If the
permitted by 18.9.2.3, prestressing shall satisfy (a) longitudinal reinforcing bars secured by the
through (d): crossties are confined by a slab on only one side of
the beam, the 90-degree hooks of the crossties shall
(a) The average prestress 𝑓𝑝𝑐 calculated for an
be placed on that side.
area equal to the least cross-sectional
dimension of the beam multiplied by the 18.6.4.4 The first hoop shall be located not more
perpendicular cross-sectional dimension than 50 mm. defined in 25.3.5 from the face of a
shall not exceed the lesser of 3.5 MPa and supporting column. Spacing of the hoops shall not
𝑓𝑐′ /10. exceed the least of (a) through (c):
(b) Prestressing steel shall be unbonded in (a) 𝑑/4
potential plastic hinge regions, and the (b) Six times the diameter of the smallest
calculated strains in prestressing steel primary flexural reinforcing bars excluding
under the design displacement shall be less longitudinal skin reinforcement required by
than 0.01. 9.7.2.3
(c) Prestressing steel shall not contribute more (c) 150 mm
than one-fourth of the positive or negative
flexural strength at the critical section in a 18.6.4.5 Where hoops are required, they shall be
plastic hinge region and shall be anchored designed to resist shear according to 18.6.5.
at or beyond the exterior face of the joint. 18.6.4.6 Where hoops are not required, stirrups
(d) Anchorages of post-tensioning tendons with seismic hooks at both ends shall be spaced at a
resisting earthquake-induced forces shall distance not more than 𝑑/2 throughout the length
be capable of allowing tendons to withstand of the beam.
50 cycles of loading, with prestressed
reinforcement forces bounded by 40 and 85 18.6.4.7 In beams having factored axial
percent of the specified tensile strength of compressive force exceeding 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /10, hoops
the prestressing steel. satisfying 18.7.5.2 through 18.7.5.4 shall be
provided along lengths given in 18.6.4.1 Along the
18.6.4 Transverse reinforcement
remaining length, hoops satisfying 18.7.5.2 shall
18.6.4.1 Hoops shall be provided in the following have spacing s not exceeding the lesser of six times
regions of a beam: the diameter of the smallest longitudinal beam bars
and 150 mm. Where concrete cover over transverse
(a) Over a length equal to twice the beam depth
reinforcement exceeds 100 mm, additional
measured from the face of the supporting
transverse reinforcement having cover not
column toward midspan, at both ends of the
exceeding 100 mm and spacing not exceeding 300
beam.
mm shall be provided.
(b) Over lengths equal to twice the beam depth
on both sides of a section where flexural 18.6.5 Shear strength
yielding is likely to occur as a result of
18.6.5.1 Design forces—The design shear force 𝑉𝑒
lateral displacements beyond the elastic
shall be calculated from consideration of the forces
range of behavior.
on the portion of the beam between faces of the
18.6.4.2 Where hoops are required, primary joints. It shall be assumed that moments of opposite
longitudinal reinforcing bars closest to the tension sign corresponding to probable flexural strength,
and compression faces shall have lateral support in 𝑀𝑝𝑟 act at the joint faces and that the beam is loaded
accordance with 25.7.2.3 and 25.7.2.4. The with the factored tributary gravity load along its
spacing of transversely supported flexural span.
reinforcing bars shall not exceed 350 mm. Skin
reinforcement required by 9.7.2.3 need not be 18.6.5.2 Transverse reinforcement—Transverse
laterally supported. reinforcement over the lengths identified in 18.6.4.1
shall be designed to resist shear assuming 𝑉𝑐 = 0
when both (a) and (b) occur:

SBC 304-CR-18 136

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

(a) The earthquake-induced shear force moments acting in both directions in the vertical
calculated in accordance with 18.6.5.1 plane of the frame considered.
represents at least one-half of the maximum
18.7.3.3 If 18.7.3.2 is not satisfied at a joint, the
required shear strength within those
lateral strength and stiffness of the columns framing
lengths.
into that joint shall be ignored when calculating
(b) The factored axial compressive force 𝑃𝑢
strength and stiffness of the structure. These
including earthquake effects is less than
columns shall conform to 18.14.
𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /20.
18.7.4 Longitudinal reinforcement
18.7—Columns of special moment
frames 18.7.4.1 Area of longitudinal reinforcement, 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ,
shall be at least 0.01𝐴𝑔 and shall not exceed
18.7.1 Scope 0.06𝐴𝑔 .
18.7.1.1 This section shall apply to columns of 18.7.4.2 In columns with circular hoops, there shall
special moment frames that form part of the be at least six longitudinal bars.
seismic-force-resisting system and are proportioned
primarily to resist flexure, shear, and axial forces. 18.7.4.3 Mechanical splices shall conform to 18.2.7
and welded splices shall conform to 18.2.8. Lap
18.7.2 Dimensional limits splices shall be permitted only within the center half
18.7.2.1 Columns shall satisfy (a) and (b): of the member length, shall be designed as tension
lap splices, and shall be enclosed within transverse
(a) The shortest cross-sectional dimension,
reinforcement in accordance with 18.7.5.2 and
measured on a straight line passing through
18.7.5.3.
the geometric centroid, shall be at least 300
mm. 18.7.5 Transverse reinforcement
(b) The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional 18.7.5.1 Transverse reinforcement required in
dimension to the perpendicular dimension 18.7.5.2 through 18.7.5.4 shall be provided over a
shall be at least 0.4.
length 𝑙𝑜 from each joint face and on both sides of
18.7.3 Minimum flexural strength of columns any section where flexural yielding is likely to
occur as a result of lateral displacements beyond the
18.7.3.1 Columns shall satisfy 18.7.3.2 or 18.7.3.3.
elastic range of behavior. Length 𝑙𝑜 shall be at least
18.7.3.2 The flexural strengths of the columns shall the greatest of (a) through (c):
satisfy
(a) The depth of the column at the joint face or
𝑀𝑛𝑐  (6⁄5)𝑀𝑛𝑏 (18.7.3.2) at the section where flexural yielding is
likely to occur
where (b) One-sixth of the clear span of the column
𝑀𝑛𝑐 is sum of nominal flexural strengths of (c) 450 mm
columns framing into the joint, evaluated at the 18.7.5.2 Transverse reinforcement shall be in
faces of the joint. Column flexural strength shall be accordance with (a) through (f):
calculated for the factored axial force, consistent
with the direction of the lateral forces considered, (a) Transverse reinforcement shall comprise
resulting in the lowest flexural strength. either single or overlapping spirals, circular
hoops, or rectilinear hoops with or without
𝑀𝑛𝑏 is sum of nominal flexural strengths of the crossties.
beams framing into the joint, evaluated at the faces (b) Bends of rectilinear hoops and crossties
of the joint. In T-beam construction, where the slab shall engage peripheral longitudinal
is in tension under moments at the face of the joint, reinforcing bars.
slab reinforcement within an effective slab width (c) Crossties of the same or smaller bar size as
defined in accordance with 6.3.2 shall be assumed the hoops shall be permitted, subject to the
to contribute to 𝑀𝑛𝑏 if the slab reinforcement is limitation of 25.7.2.2 . Consecutive crossties
developed at the critical section for flexure. shall be alternated end for end along the
Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the longitudinal reinforcement and around the
column moments oppose the beam moments. perimeter of the cross section.
Equation (18.7.3.2 ) shall be satisfied for beam (d) Where rectilinear hoops or crossties are
used, they shall provide lateral support to

SBC 304-CR-18 137

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

longitudinal reinforcement in accordance 18.7.5.6 Columns supporting reactions from

with 25.7.2.2 and 25.7.2.3. discontinued stiff members, such as walls, shall
(e) Reinforcement shall be arranged such that satisfy (a) and (b):
the spacing hx of longitudinal bars laterally
(a) Transverse reinforcement required by
supported by the corner of a crosstie or
18.7.5.2 through 18.7.5.4 shall be provided
hoop leg shall not exceed 350 mm around
over the full height at all levels beneath the
the perimeter of the column.
discontinuity if the factored axial
(f) Where 𝑃𝑢 > 0.3𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ or 𝑓𝑐′ > 70 MPa in
compressive force in these columns, related
columns with rectilinear hoops, every to earthquake effect, exceeds 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /10.
longitudinal bar or bundle of bars around
Where design forces have been magnified
the perimeter of the column core shall have
to account for the overstrength of the
lateral support provided by the corner of a
vertical elements of the seismic-force-
hoop or by a seismic hook, and the value of
resisting system, the limit of 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /10 shall
ℎ𝑥 shall not exceed 200 mm. 𝑃𝑢 shall be the
largest value in compression consistent be increased to 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /4.
with factored load combinations including (b) Transverse reinforcement shall extend into
𝐸. the discontinued member at least 𝑙𝑑 of the
largest longitudinal column bar, where 𝑙𝑑 is
18.7.5.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall in accordance with 18.8.5. Where the lower
not exceed the smallest of (a) through (c): end of the column terminates on a wall, the
(a) One-fourth of the minimum column required transverse reinforcement shall
dimension extend into the wall at least 𝑙𝑑 of the largest
(b) Six times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal column bar at the point of
longitudinal bar termination. Where the column terminates
(c) 𝑠𝑜 , as calculated by: on a footing or mat, the required transverse
reinforcement shall extend at least 300 mm
350 − ℎ𝑥 into the footing or mat.
𝑠𝑜 = 100 + ( ) (18.7.5.3)
3
18.7.5.7 If the concrete cover outside the confining
The value of so from Eq. (18.7.5.3) shall not exceed transverse reinforcement required by 18.7.5.1,
150 mm and need not be taken less than 100 mm. 18.7.5.5, and 18.7.5.6 exceeds 100 mm, additional
transverse reinforcement having cover not
18.7.5.4 Amount of transverse reinforcement shall exceeding 100 mm and spacing not exceeding 300
be in accordance with Table 18.7.5.4. mm shall be provided.
The concrete strength factor 𝑘𝑓 and confinement 18.7.6 Shear strength
effectiveness factor 𝑘𝑛 are calculated according to
Eq. (18.7.5.4a) and (18.7.5.4b). 18.7.6.1 Design forces
18.7.6.1.1 The design shear force 𝑉𝑒 shall be
𝑓𝑐′ calculated from considering the maximum forces
(a) 𝑘𝑓 = + 0.6 ≥ 1.0 (18.7.5.4a)
175 that can be generated at the faces of the joints at
each end of the column. These joint forces shall be
𝑛𝑙
(b) 𝑘𝑛 = (18.7.5.4b) calculated using the maximum probable flexural
𝑛𝑙 − 2 strengths, 𝑀𝑝𝑟 at each end of the column associated
with the range of factored axial forces, 𝑃𝑢 , acting on
where 𝑛𝑙 is the number of longitudinal bars or bar
the column. The column shears need not exceed
bundles around the perimeter of a column core with
those calculated from joint strengths based on 𝑀𝑝𝑟
rectilinear hoops that are laterally supported by the
corner of hoops or by seismic hooks. of the beams framing into the joint. In no case shall
𝑉𝑒 be less than the factored shear calculated by
18.7.5.5 Beyond the length 𝑙𝑜 given in 18.7.5.1, the analysis of the structure.
column shall contain spiral or hoop reinforcement
satisfying 25.7.2 through 25.7.4 with spacing s not 18.7.6.2 Transverse reinforcement
exceeding the lesser of six times the diameter of the 18.7.6.2.1 Transverse reinforcement over the
smallest longitudinal column bars and 150 mm, lengths 𝑙𝑜 , given in 18.7.5.1, shall be designed to
unless a greater amount of transverse reinforcement resist shear assuming 𝑉𝑐 = 0 when both (a) and (b)
is required by 18.7.4.3 or 18.7.6. occur:

SBC 304-CR-18 138

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

(a) The earthquake-induced shear force, requirements of 18.6.4.2, and 18.6.4.3, if such
calculated in accordance with 18.7.6.1, is at confinement is not provided by a beam framing into
least one-half of the maximum required the joint.
shear strength within 𝑙𝑜
18.8.3.4 Where beam negative moment
(b) The factored axial compressive force
reinforcement is provided by headed deformed bars
𝑃𝑢 including earthquake effects is less than
that terminate in the joint, the column shall extend
𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /20 above the top of the joint a distance at least the
18.8—Joints of special moment frames depth ℎ of the joint. Alternatively, the beam
reinforcement shall be enclosed by additional
18.8.1 Scope vertical joint reinforcement providing equivalent
18.8.1.1 This section shall apply to beam-column confinement to the top face of the joint.
joints of special moment frames forming part of the 18.8.4 Shear strength
seismic-force-resisting system.
18.8.4.1 𝑉𝑛 of the joint shall be in accordance with
18.8.2 General Table 18.8.4.1.
18.8.2.1 Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement 18.8.4.2 In Table 18.8.4.1, a joint face is
at the joint face shall be calculated assuming that considered to be confined by a beam if the beam
the stress in the flexural tensile reinforcement is width is at least three-quarters of the effective joint
1.25𝑓𝑦 . width. Extensions of beams at least one overall
18.8.2.2 Beam longitudinal reinforcement beam depth ℎ beyond the joint face are considered
terminated in a column shall extend to the far face adequate for confining that joint face. Extensions of
of the confined column core and shall be developed beams shall satisfy 18.6.2.1(b), 18.6.3.1, 18.6.4.2,
in tension in accordance with 18.8.5 and in 18.6.4.3, and 18.6.4.4.
compression in accordance with 25.4.9. 18.8.4.3 Effective cross-sectional area within a
18.8.2.3 Where longitudinal beam reinforcement joint, 𝐴𝑗 , shall be calculated from joint depth times
extends through a beam-column-joint, the column effective joint width. Joint depth shall be the overall
dimension parallel to the beam reinforcement shall depth of the column, ℎ. Effective joint width shall
be at least 20 times the diameter of the largest be the overall width of the column, except where a
longitudinal beam bar for normal-weight concrete beam frames into a wider column, effective joint
or 26 times the diameter of the largest longitudinal width shall not exceed the lesser of (a) and (b):
bar for lightweight concrete. (a) Beam width plus joint depth
18.8.2.4 Depth ℎ of the joint shall not be less than (b) Twice the smaller perpendicular distance
one-half of depth ℎ of any beam framing into the from longitudinal axis of beam to column
joint and generating joint shear as part of the side
seismic-force-resisting system. 18.8.5 Development length of bars in tension
18.8.3 Transverse reinforcement 18.8.5.1 For bar sizes Dia 10 through Dia 36
18.8.3.1 Joint transverse reinforcement shall satisfy terminating in a standard hook, 𝑙𝑑ℎ shall be
18.7.5.2, 18.7.5.3, 18.7.5.4, and 18.7.5.7, except as calculated by Eq. (18.8.5.1), but 𝑙𝑑ℎ shall be at least
permitted in 18.8.3.2. the greater of 8𝑑𝑏 and 150 mm for normal-weight
concrete and at least the greater of 10𝑑𝑏 and 190
18.8.3.2 Where beams frame into all four sides of
mm for lightweight concrete.
the joint and where each beam width is at least
three-fourths the column width, the amount of 𝑓𝑦 𝑑𝑏
reinforcement required by 18.7.5.4 shall be 𝑙𝑑ℎ = (18.8.5.1)
permitted to be reduced by one-half, and the (5.4λ√𝑓𝑐′ )
spacing required by 18.7.5.3 shall be permitted to
be increased to 150 mm within the overall depth ℎ The value of  shall be 0.75 for lightweight and 1.0
of the shallowest framing beam. for normalweight concrete.
18.8.3.3 Longitudinal beam reinforcement outside The hook shall be located within the confined core
the column core shall be confined by transverse of a column or of a boundary element, with the hook
reinforcement passing through the column that bent into the joint.
satisfies spacing requirements of 18.6.4.4, and

SBC 304-CR-18 139

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

18.8.5.2 For headed deformed bars satisfying (b) Provision 18.6.2.1(a) shall apply to
20.2.1.6, development in tension shall be in segments between locations where flexural
accordance with 25.4.4, except clear spacing yielding is intended to occur due to design
between bars shall be permitted to be at least 3𝑑𝑏 or displacements
greater. (c) Design strength of the strong connection,
𝑆𝑛 , shall be at least 𝑆𝑒
18.8.5.3 For bar sizes, Dia 10 through Dia 36, 𝑙𝑑 ,
(d) Primary longitudinal reinforcement shall be
the development length in tension for a straight bar,
made continuous across connections and
shall be at least the greater of (a) and (b):
shall be developed outside both the strong
(a) 2.5 times the length in accordance with connection and the plastic hinge region
18.8.5.1 if the depth of the concrete cast in (e) For column-to-column connections, 𝑆𝑛
one lift beneath the bar does not exceed 300 shall be at least 1.4𝑆𝑒 , 𝑀𝑛 shall be at least
mm. 0.4𝑀𝑝𝑟 for the column within the story
(b) 3.25 times the length in accordance with height, and 𝑉𝑛 shall be at least 𝑉𝑒 in
18.8.5.1 if the depth of the concrete cast in accordance with 18.7.6.1
one lift beneath the bar exceeds 300 mm.
18.9.2.3 Special moment frames constructed using
18.8.5.4 Straight bars terminated at a joint shall precast concrete and not satisfying 18.9.2.1 or
pass through the confined core of a column or a 18.9.2.2 shall satisfy (a) through (c):
boundary element. Any portion of 𝑙𝑑 not within the
confined core shall be increased by a factor of 1.6. (a) ACI 374.1
(b) Details and materials used in the test
18.8.5.5 If epoxy-coated reinforcement is used, the specimens shall be representative of those
development lengths in 18.8.5.1, 18.8.5.3, and used in the structure
18.8.5.4 shall be multiplied by applicable factors in (c) The design procedure used to proportion
25.4.2.4 or 25.4.3.2. the test specimens shall define the
18.9—Special moment frames mechanism by which the frame resists
gravity and earthquake effects, and shall
constructed using precast concrete
establish acceptance values for sustaining
18.9.1 Scope that mechanism. Portions of the mechanism
18.9.1.1 This section shall apply to special moment that deviate from Code requirements shall
frames constructed using precast concrete forming be contained in the test specimens and shall
part of the seismic-force-resisting system. be tested to determine upper bounds for
acceptance values.
18.9.2 General
18.10—Special structural walls
18.9.2.1 Special moment frames with ductile
connections constructed using precast concrete 18.10.1 Scope
shall satisfy (a) through (c): 18.10.1.1 This section shall apply to special
(a) Requirements of 18.6 through 18.8 for structural walls and all components of special
special moment frames constructed with structural walls including coupling beams and wall
cast-in-place concrete. piers forming part of the seismic-force-resisting
(b) 𝑉𝑛 for connections calculated according to system.
22.9 shall be at least 2𝑉𝑒 , where 𝑉𝑒 is in 18.10.1.2 Special structural walls constructed using
accordance with 18.6.5.1 or 18.7.6.1. precast concrete shall be in accordance with 18.11
(c) Mechanical splices of beam reinforcement in addition to 18.10.
shall be located not closer than ℎ/2 from
18.10.2 Reinforcement
the joint face and shall satisfy 18.2.7
18.10.2.1 The distributed web reinforcement ratios,
18.9.2.2 Special moment frames with strong
connections constructed using precast concrete 𝑙 and 𝑡 for structural walls shall be at least
shall satisfy (a) through (e): 0.0025, except that if 𝑉𝑢 does not exceed
0.083𝐴𝑐𝑣 λ√𝑓𝑐′ , 𝑙 and 𝑡 shall be permitted to be
(a) Requirements of 18.6 through 18.8 for
special moment frames constructed with reduced to the values in 11.6. Reinforcement
cast-in-place concrete spacing each way in structural walls shall not
exceed 450 mm. Reinforcement contributing to 𝑉𝑛

SBC 304-CR-18 140

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

shall be continuous and shall be distributed across section of the individual vertical wall segment
the shear plane. considered.
18.10.2.2 At least two curtains of reinforcement 18.10.4.5 For horizontal wall segments and
shall be used in a wall if 𝑉𝑢 > 0.17𝐴𝑐𝑣 λ√𝑓𝑐′ or coupling beams, 𝑉𝑛 shall not be taken greater than
ℎ𝑤 /𝑙𝑤  2.0, in which ℎ𝑤 and 𝑙𝑤 refer to height and 0.83𝐴𝑐𝑤 √𝑓𝑐′ , where 𝐴𝑐𝑤 is the area of concrete
length of entire wall, respectively. section of a horizontal wall segment or coupling
beam.
18.10.2.3 Reinforcement in structural walls shall be
developed or spliced for 𝑓𝑦 in tension in accordance 18.10.5 Design for flexure and axial force
with 25.4, 25.5, and (a) through (c): 18.10.5.1 Structural walls and portions of such
(a) Longitudinal reinforcement shall extend walls subject to combined flexure and axial loads
beyond the point at which it is no longer shall be designed in accordance with 22.4. Concrete
required to resist flexure by least 0.8𝑙𝑤 and developed longitudinal reinforcement within
except at the top of a wall effective flange widths, boundary elements, and the
(b) At locations where yielding of longitudinal wall web shall be considered effective. The effects
reinforcement is likely to occur as a result of openings shall be considered.
of lateral displacements, development 18.10.5.2 Unless a more detailed analysis is
lengths of longitudinal reinforcement shall performed, effective flange widths of flanged
be 1.25 times the values calculated for 𝑓𝑦 in sections shall extend from the face of the web a
tension distance equal to the lesser of one-half the distance
(c) Mechanical splices of reinforcement shall to an adjacent wall web and 25 percent of the total
conform to 18.2.7 and welded splices of wall height.
reinforcement shall conform to 18.2.8
18.10.6 Boundary elements of special structural
18.10.3 Design forces—𝑉𝑢 shall be obtained from walls
the lateral load analysis in accordance with the
factored load combinations. 18.10.6.1 The need for special boundary elements
at the edges of structural walls shall be evaluated in
18.10.4 Shear strength accordance with 18.10.6.2 or 18.10.6.3. The
18.10.4.1 𝑉𝑛 of structural walls shall not exceed: requirements of 18.10.6.4 and 18.10.6.5 shall also
be satisfied.
𝑉𝑛 = 𝐴𝑐𝑣 (α𝑐 λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 𝑡 𝑓𝑦 ) (18.10.4.1)
18.10.6.2 Walls or wall piers with ℎ𝑤 /𝑙𝑤  2.0 that
where the coefficient α𝑐 is 0.25 for ℎ𝑤 /𝑙𝑤 ≤ 1.5 , are effectively continuous from the base of structure
is 0.17 for ℎ𝑤 /𝑙𝑤  2.0, and varies linearly between to top of wall and are designed to have a single
0.25 and 0.17 for ℎ𝑤 ⁄𝑙𝑤 between 1.5 and 2.0. critical section for flexure and axial loads shall
satisfy (a) and (b) or shall be designed by 18.10.6.3:
18.10.4.2 In 18.10.4.1, the value of ratio ℎ𝑤 ⁄𝑙𝑤
used to calculate 𝑉𝑛 for segments of a wall shall be (a) Compression zones shall be reinforced with
the greater of the ratios for the entire wall and the special boundary elements where
segment of wall considered.
𝑙𝑤
18.10.4.3 Walls shall have distributed shear 𝑐≥ (18.10.6.2)
600(1.5δ𝑢 /ℎ𝑤 )
reinforcement in two orthogonal directions in the
plane of the wall. If ℎ𝑤 ⁄𝑙𝑤 does not exceed 2.0, and 𝑐 corresponds to the largest neutral axis depth
reinforcement ratio 𝑙 shall be at least the calculated for the factored axial force and nominal
reinforcement ratio 𝑡 . moment strength consistent with the direction of the
design displacement 𝑢 . Ratio 𝑢 /ℎ𝑤 shall not be
18.10.4.4 For all vertical wall segments sharing a taken less than 0.005.
common lateral force, 𝑉𝑛 shall not be taken greater
(b) Where special boundary elements are
than 0.66𝐴𝑐𝑣 λ√𝑓𝑐′ , where 𝐴𝑐𝑣 is the gross area of required by (a), the special boundary
concrete bounded by web thickness and length of element transverse reinforcement shall
section. For any one of the individual vertical wall extend vertically above and below the
segments, 𝑉𝑛 shall not be taken greater than critical section at least the greater of 𝑙𝑤 and
0.83𝐴𝑐𝑤 √𝑓𝑐′ , where 𝐴𝑐𝑤 is the area of concrete

SBC 304-CR-18 141

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

𝑀𝑢 /4𝑉𝑢 , except as permitted in (g) Where the critical section occurs at the wall
18.10.6.4(g). base, the boundary element transverse
reinforcement at the wall base shall extend
18.10.6.3 Structural walls not designed in
into the support at least 𝑙𝑑 , in accordance
accordance with 18.10.6.2 shall have special
with 18.10.2.3, of the largest longitudinal
boundary elements at boundaries and edges around
reinforcement in the special boundary
openings of structural walls where the maximum
element. Where the special boundary
extreme fiber compressive stress, corresponding to
element terminates on a footing, mat, or
load combinations including earthquake effects 𝐸,
pile cap, special boundary element
exceeds 0.2 𝑓𝑐′ . The special boundary element shall
transverse reinforcement shall extend at
be permitted to be discontinued where the
least 300 mm into the footing, mat, or pile
calculated compressive stress is less than 0.15 𝑓𝑐′ .
cap, unless a greater extension is required
Stresses shall be calculated for the factored loads
by 18.10.2.3.
using a linearly elastic model and gross section
(h) Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web
properties. For walls with flanges, an effective
shall extend to within 150 mm of the end of
flange width as given in 18.10.5.2 shall be used.
the wall. Reinforcement shall be anchored
18.10.6.4 Where special boundary elements are to develop 𝑓𝑦 within the confined core of
required by 18.10.6.2 or 18.10.6.3, (a) through (h) the boundary element using standard hooks
shall be satisfied: or heads. Where the confined boundary
(a) The boundary element shall extend element has sufficient length to develop the
horizontally from the extreme compression horizontal web reinforcement, and 𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦 /𝑠
fiber a distance at least the greater of 𝑐 − of the horizontal web reinforcement does
0.1𝑙𝑤 and 𝑐/2, where 𝑐 is the largest not exceed 𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦𝑡 /𝑠 of the boundary
neutral axis depth calculated for the element transverse reinforcement parallel
factored axial force and nominal moment to the horizontal web reinforcement, it shall
strength consistent with 𝑢 . be permitted to terminate the horizontal
(b) Width of the flexural compression zone, 𝑏, web reinforcement without a standard hook
over the horizontal distance calculated by or head.
18.10.6.4(a), including flange if present, 18.10.6.5 Where special boundary elements are not
shall be at least ℎ𝑢 /16. required by 18.10.6.2 or 18.10.6.3, (a) and (b) shall
(c) For walls or wall piers with ℎ𝑤 /𝑙𝑤  2.0 be satisfied:
that are effectively continuous from the
base of structure to top of wall, designed to (a) If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the
have a single critical section for flexure and wall boundary exceeds 2.8/𝑓𝑦 , boundary
axial loads, and with 𝑐/𝑙𝑤  3/8, width of transverse reinforcement shall satisfy
the flexural compression zone 𝑏 over the 18.7.5.2(a) through (e) over the distance
length calculated in 18.10.6.4(a) shall be calculated in accordance with 18.10.6.4(a).
greater than or equal to 300 mm. The longitudinal spacing of transverse
(d) In flanged sections, the boundary element reinforcement at the wall boundary shall
shall include the effective flange width in not exceed the lesser of 200 mm and 8𝑑𝑏 of
compression and shall extend at least 300 the smallest primary flexural reinforcing
mm into the web. bars, except the spacing shall not exceed
(e) The boundary element transverse the lesser of 150 mm and 6𝑑𝑏 within a
reinforcement shall satisfy 18.7.5.2(a) distance equal to the greater of 𝑙𝑤 and
through (e) and 18.7.5.3, except the value 𝑀𝑢 /4𝑉𝑢 above and below critical sections
ℎ𝑥 in 18.7.5.2 shall not exceed the lesser of where yielding of longitudinal
350 mm and two-thirds of the boundary reinforcement is likely to occur as a result
element thickness, and the transverse of inelastic lateral displacements.
reinforcement spacing limit of 18.7.5.3(a) (b) Except where 𝑉𝑢 in the plane of the wall is
shall be one-third of the least dimension of less than 0.083𝐴𝑐𝑣 λ√𝑓𝑐′ , horizontal
the boundary element. reinforcement terminating at the edges of
(f) The amount of transverse reinforcement structural walls without boundary elements
shall be in accordance with Table shall have a standard hook engaging the
18.10.6.4(f) . edge reinforcement or the edge

SBC 304-CR-18 142

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

reinforcement shall be enclosed in U- 18.7.5.2(a) through (e), with 𝐴𝑠ℎ not less
stirrups having the same size and spacing than the greater of (i) and (ii):
as, and spliced to, the horizontal 𝑓𝑐′
(i) 0.09𝑠𝑏𝑐
reinforcement. 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
18.10.7 Coupling beams (ii) 0.3𝑠𝑏𝑐 ( − 1)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡

18.10.7.1 Coupling beams with (𝑙𝑛 /ℎ)  4 shall For the purpose of calculating 𝐴𝑔 , the concrete
satisfy the requirements of 18.6, with the wall cover in 20.6.1 shall be assumed on all four sides
boundary interpreted as being a column. The of each group of diagonal bars. The transverse
provisions of 18.6.2.1(b) and (c) need not be reinforcement shall have spacing measured parallel
satisfied if it can be shown by analysis that the beam to the diagonal bars satisfying 18.7.5.3(c) and not
has adequate lateral stability. exceeding 6𝑑𝑏 of the smallest diagonal bars, and
18.10.7.2 Coupling beams with (𝑙𝑛 ⁄ℎ) < 4 and shall have spacing of crossties or legs of hoops
with 𝑉𝑢 ≥ 0.33λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑐𝑤 shall be reinforced with measured perpendicular to the diagonal bars not
two intersecting groups of diagonally placed bars exceeding 350 mm. The transverse reinforcement
symmetrical about the midspan, unless it can be shall continue through the intersection of the
shown that loss of stiffness and strength of the diagonal bars. At the intersection, it is permitted to
coupling beams will not impair the vertical load- modify the arrangement of the transverse
carrying ability of the structure, the egress from the reinforcement provided the spacing and volume
structure, or the integrity of nonstructural ratio requirements are satisfied. Additional
components and their connections to the structure. longitudinal and transverse reinforcement shall be
distributed around the beam perimeter with total
18.10.7.3 Coupling beams not governed by area in each direction of at least 0.002𝑏𝑤 𝑠 and
18.10.7.1 or 18.10.7.2 shall be permitted to be spacing not exceeding 300 mm.
reinforced either with two intersecting groups of
diagonally placed bars symmetrical about the (d) Transverse reinforcement shall be provided
midspan or according to 18.6.3 through 18.6.5, with for the entire beam cross section in
the wall boundary interpreted as being a column. accordance with 18.7.5.2(a) through
(e)with 𝐴𝑠ℎ not less than the greater of (i)
18.10.7.4 Coupling beams reinforced with two and (ii):
intersecting groups of diagonally placed bars 𝑓𝑐′
(i) 0.09𝑠𝑏𝑐
symmetrical about the midspan shall satisfy (a), (b), 𝑓𝑦𝑡
and either (c) or (d), and the requirements of 9.9 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
(ii) 0.3𝑠𝑏𝑐 ( − 1)
need not be satisfied: 𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡

(a) 𝑉𝑛 shall be calculated by Longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement

shall not exceed the lesser of 150 mm and 6𝑑𝑏 of
𝑉𝑛 = 2𝐴𝑣𝑑 𝑓𝑦 sinα ≤ 0.83√𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑐𝑤 (18.10.7.4) the smallest diagonal bars. Spacing of crossties or
legs of hoops both vertically and horizontally in the
where  is the angle between the diagonal bars and plane of the beam cross section shall not exceed 200
the longitudinal axis of the coupling beam. mm. Each crosstie and each hoop leg shall engage
a longitudinal bar of equal or greater diameter. It
(b) Each group of diagonal bars shall consist of
shall be permitted to configure hoops as specified in
a minimum of four bars provided in two or
18.6.4.3.
more layers. The diagonal bars shall be
embedded into the wall at least 1.25 times 18.10.8 Wall piers
the development length for 𝑓𝑦 in tension. 18.10.8.1 Wall piers shall satisfy the special
(c) Each group of diagonal bars shall be moment frame requirements for columns of 18.7.4,
enclosed by rectilinear transverse 18.7.5, and 18.7.6, with joint faces taken as the top
reinforcement having out-to-out and bottom of the clear height of the wall pier.
dimensions of at least 𝑏𝑤 /2 in the direction Alternatively, wall piers with (𝑙𝑤 /𝑏𝑤 ) > 2.5 shall
parallel to 𝑏𝑤 and 𝑏𝑤 /5 along the other satisfy (a) through (f):
sides, where 𝑏𝑤 is the web width of the
coupling beam. The transverse (a) Design shear force shall be calculated in
reinforcement shall be in accordance with accordance with 18.7.6.1 with joint faces

SBC 304-CR-18 143

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

taken as the top and bottom of the clear 18.11.2.1 are permitted provided they satisfy the
height of the wall pier. requirements of ACI ITG-5.1.
(b) 𝑉𝑛 and distributed shear reinforcement shall
satisfy 18.10.4.
18.12—Diaphragms and trusses
(c) Transverse reinforcement shall be hoops 18.12.1 Scope
except it shall be permitted to use single-leg
18.12.1.1 This section shall apply to diaphragms
horizontal reinforcement parallel to 𝑙𝑤
and collectors forming part of the seismic-force-
where only one curtain of distributed shear
resisting system in structures assigned to SDC D, E,
reinforcement is provided. Single-leg
or F.
horizontal reinforcement shall have 180-
degree bends at each end that engage wall 18.12.1.2 Section 18.12.11 shall apply to structural
pier boundary longitudinal reinforcement. trusses forming part of the seismic-force-resisting
(d) Vertical spacing of transverse system in structures assigned to SDC D, E, or F.
reinforcement shall not exceed 150 mm. 18.12.2 Design forces
(e) Transverse reinforcement shall extend at
least 300 mm above and below the clear 18.12.2.1 The earthquake design forces for
height of the wall pier. diaphragms shall be obtained from the SBC 201
(f) Special boundary elements shall be and SBC 301 using the applicable provisions and
provided if required by 18.10.6.3. load combinations.
18.10.8.2 For wall piers at the edge of a wall, 18.12.3 Seismic load path
horizontal reinforcement shall be provided in 18.12.3.1 All diaphragms and their connections
adjacent wall segments above and below the wall shall be designed and detailed to provide for
pier and be designed to transfer the design shear transfer of forces to collector elements and to the
force from the wall pier into the adjacent wall vertical elements of the seismic-force-resisting
segments. system.
18.10.9 Construction joints 18.12.3.2 Elements of a structural diaphragm
18.10.9.1 Construction joints in structural walls system that are subjected primarily to axial forces
shall be specified according to 26.5.6, and contact and used to transfer diaphragm shear or flexural
surfaces shall be roughened consistent with forces around openings or other discontinuities
condition (b) of Table 22.9.4.2. shall satisfy the requirements for collectors in
18.12.7.5 and 18.12.7.6.
18.10.10 Discontinuous walls
18.12.4 Cast-in-place composite topping slab
18.10.10.1 Columns supporting discontinuous diaphragms
structural walls shall be reinforced in accordance
with 18.7.5.6. 18.12.4.1 A cast-in-place composite topping slab
on a precast floor or roof shall be permitted as a
18.11—Special structural walls structural diaphragm, provided the cast-in-place
constructed using precast concrete topping slab is reinforced and the surface of the
18.11.1 Scope previously hardened concrete on which the topping
slab is placed is clean, free of laitance, and
18.11.1.1 This section shall apply to special intentionally roughened.
structural walls constructed using precast concrete
forming part of the seismic-force-resisting system. 18.12.5 Cast-in-place noncomposite topping slab
diaphragms
18.11.2 General
18.12.5.1 A cast-in-place noncomposite topping on
18.11.2.1 Special structural walls constructed using a precast floor or roof shall be permitted as a
precast concrete shall satisfy all the requirements of structural diaphragm, provided the cast-in-place
18.10 for cast-in-place special structural walls in topping slab acting alone is designed and detailed to
addition to 18.5.2. resist the design earthquake forces.
18.11.2.2 Special structural walls constructed using 18.12.6 Minimum thickness of diaphragms
precast concrete and unbonded post-tensioning
tendons and not satisfying the requirements of 18.12.6.1 Concrete slabs and composite topping
slabs serving as diaphragms used to transmit

SBC 304-CR-18 144

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

earthquake forces shall be at least 50 mm thick. 18.12.7.6 Longitudinal reinforcement detailing for
Topping slabs placed over precast floor or roof collector elements at splices and anchorage zones
elements, acting as diaphragms and not relying on shall satisfy (a) or (b):
composite action with the precast elements to resist
(a) Center-to-center spacing of at least three
the design earthquake forces, shall be at least 65
longitudinal bar diameters, but not less than
mm thick.
40 mm, and concrete clear cover of at least
18.12.7 Reinforcement two and one-half longitudinal bar
diameters, but not less than 50 mm.
18.12.7.1 The minimum reinforcement ratio for
(b) Area of transverse reinforcement,
diaphragms shall be in conformance with 24.4.
providing 𝐴𝑣 at least the greater of
Except for post-tensioned slabs, reinforcement
spacing each way in floor or roof systems shall not 0.062√𝑓𝑐′ (𝑏𝑤 𝑠/𝑓𝑦𝑡 ) and 0.35√𝑓𝑐′ (𝑏𝑤 𝑠/
exceed 450 mm. Where welded wire reinforcement 𝑓𝑦𝑡 ) except as required in 18.12.7.5.
is used as the distributed reinforcement to resist
18.12.8 Flexural strength
shear in topping slabs placed over precast floor and
roof elements, the wires parallel to the joints 18.12.8.1 Diaphragms and portions of diaphragms
between the precast elements shall be spaced not shall be designed for flexure in accordance with
less than 250 mm on center. Reinforcement Chapter 12. The effects of openings shall be
provided for shear strength shall be continuous and considered.
shall be distributed uniformly across the shear 18.12.9 Shear strength
plane.
18.12.9.1 𝑉𝑛 of diaphragms shall not exceed:
18.12.7.2 Bonded tendons used as reinforcement to
resist collector forces, diaphragm shear, or flexural 𝑉𝑛 = 𝐴𝑐𝑣 (0.17λ√𝑓𝑐′ + ρ𝑡 𝑓𝑦 ) (18.12.9.1)
tension shall be designed such that the stress due to
design earthquake forces does not exceed 420 MPa. For cast-in-place topping slab diaphragms on
Precompression from unbonded tendons shall be precast floor or roof members, 𝐴𝑐𝑣 , shall be
permitted to resist diaphragm design forces if a calculated using only the thickness of topping slab
seismic load path is provided. for noncomposite topping slab diaphragms and the
combined thickness of cast-in-place and precast
18.12.7.3 All reinforcement used to resist collector
elements for composite topping slab diaphragms.
forces, diaphragm shear, or flexural tension shall be
For composite topping slab diaphragms, the value
developed or spliced for 𝑓𝑦 in tension.
of 𝑓𝑐′ used to calculate 𝑉𝑛 shall not exceed the lesser
18.12.7.4 Type 2 splices are required where of 𝑓𝑐′ for the precast members and 𝑓𝑐′ for the topping
mechanical splices are used to transfer forces slab.
between the diaphragm and the vertical elements of 18.12.9.2 𝑉𝑛 of diaphragms shall not exceed 𝑉𝑛 =
the seismic-force-resisting system.
0.66𝐴𝑐𝑣 √𝑓𝑐′ .
18.12.7.5 Collector elements with compressive
stresses exceeding 0.2𝑓𝑐′ at any section shall have 18.12.9.3 Above joints between precast elements m
transverse reinforcement satisfying 18.7.5.2(a) noncomposite and composite cast-in-place topping
through (e) and 18.7.5.3, except the spacing limit of slab diaphragms, 𝑉𝑛 shall not exceed:
18.7.5.3(a) shall be one-third of the least dimension 𝑉𝑛 = 𝐴𝑣𝑓 𝑓𝑦 μ (18.12.9.3)
of the collector. The amount of transverse
reinforcement shall be in accordance with Table where 𝐴𝑣𝑓 is the total area of shear friction
18.12.7.5. The specified transverse reinforcement reinforcement within the topping slab, including
is permitted to be discontinued at a section where both distributed and boundary reinforcement, that is
the calculated compressive stress is less than oriented perpendicular to joints in the precast
0.15𝑓𝑐′ . If design forces have been amplified to system and coefficient of friction, μ, is 1.0, where
account for the over-strength of the vertical  is given in 19.2.4. At least one-half of 𝐴𝑣𝑓 shall
elements of the seismic-force-resisting system, the be uniformly distributed along the length of the
limit of 0.2𝑓𝑐′ shall be increased to 0.5𝑓𝑐′ , and the potential shear plane. The area of distributed
limit of 0.15𝑓𝑐′ shall be increased to 0.4𝑓𝑐′ . reinforcement in the topping slab shall satisfy
24.4.3.2 in each direction.

SBC 304-CR-18 145

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

18.12.9.4 Above joints between precast elements in the footing. This reinforcement shall extend into the
noncomposite and composite cast-in-place topping footing, mat, or pile cap a length equal to the
slab diaphragms, 𝑉𝑛 shall not exceed the limits in development length, calculated for 𝑓𝑦 in tension, of
22.9.4.4, where 𝐴𝑐 is calculated using only the the column or boundary element longitudinal
thickness of the topping slab. reinforcement.
18.12.10 Construction joints 18.13.2.4 Where earthquake effects create uplift
18.12.10.1 Construction joints in diaphragms shall forces in boundary elements of special structural
be specified according to 26.5.6, and contact walls or columns, flexural reinforcement shall be
surfaces shall be roughened consistent with provided in the top of the footing, mat, or pile cap
condition (b) of Table 22.9.4.2. to resist actions resulting from the factored load
combinations, and shall be at least that required by
18.12.11 Structural trusses 7.6.1 or 9.6.1.
18.12.11.1 Structural truss elements with 18.13.2.5 Structural plain concrete in footings and
compressive stresses exceeding 0.2 𝑓𝑐′ at any basement walls shall be in accordance with 14.1.4.
section shall have transverse reinforcement, in
accordance with 18.7.5.2, 18.7.5.3, 18.7.5.7, and 18.13.3 Grade beams and slabs-on-ground
Table 18.12.11.1, over the length of the element. 18.13.3.1 Grade beams designed to act as
18.12.11.2 All continuous reinforcement in horizontal ties between pile caps or footings shall
structural truss elements shall be developed or have continuous longitudinal reinforcement that
spliced for 𝑓𝑦 in tension. shall be developed within or beyond the supported
column or anchored within the pile cap or footing at
18.13—Foundations all discontinuities.
18.13.1 Scope 18.13.3.2 Grade beams designed to act as
horizontal ties between pile caps or footings shall
18.13.1.1 Foundations resisting earthquake- be sized such that the smallest cross-sectional
induced forces or transferring earthquake-induced dimension shall be at least equal to the clear spacing
forces between a structure and ground shall comply between connected columns divided by 20, but need
with the requirements of 18.13 and other applicable not exceed 450 mm. Closed ties shall be provided
provisions of SBC 304. at a spacing not to exceed the lesser of one-half the
18.13.1.2 The provisions in this section for piles, smallest orthogonal cross-sectional dimension and
drilled piers, caissons, and slabs-on-ground shall 300 mm.
supplement other applicable Code design and 18.13.3.3 Grade beams and beams that are part of a
construction criteria, including 1.4.5 and 1.4.6 mat foundation subjected to flexure from columns
18.13.2 Footings, foundation mats, and pile caps that are part of the seismic-force-resisting system
shall be in accordance with 18.6.
18.13.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement of columns
and structural walls resisting forces induced by 18.13.3.4 Slabs-on-ground that resist earthquake
earthquake effects shall extend into the footing, forces from walls or columns that are part of the
mat, or pile cap, and shall be fully developed for seismic-force-resisting system shall be designed as
tension at the interface. diaphragms in accordance with 18.12. The
construction documents shall clearly indicate that
18.13.2.2 Columns designed assuming fixed-end
the slab-on-ground is a structural diaphragm and
conditions at the foundation shall comply with
part of the seismic-force-resisting system.
18.13.2.1 and, if hooks are required, longitudinal
reinforcement resisting flexure shall have 90- 18.13.4 Piles, piers, and caissons
degree hooks near the bottom of the foundation with 18.13.4.1 Piles, piers, or caissons resisting tension
the free end of the bars oriented toward the center loads shall have continuous longitudinal
of the column. reinforcement over the length resisting design
18.13.2.3 Columns or boundary elements of special tension forces. The longitudinal reinforcement shall
structural walls that have an edge within one-half be detailed to transfer tension forces within the pile
the footing depth from an edge of the footing shall cap to supported structural members.
have transverse reinforcement in accordance with 18.13.4.2 Where tension forces induced by
18.7.5.2 through 18.7.5.4 provided below the top of earthquake effects are transferred between pile cap

SBC 304-CR-18 146

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

or mat foundation and precast pile by reinforcing public assembly, and all areas where 𝐿 is greater
bars grouted or post-installed in the top of the pile, than 5 kN/m2.
the grouting system shall have been demonstrated-
18.14.3 Cast-in-place beams, columns, and joints
by test to develop at-least 1.25𝑓𝑦 of the bar.
18.14.3.1 Cast-in-place beams and columns shall be
18.13.4.3 Piles, piers, or caissons shall have detailed in accordance with 18.14.3.2 or 18.14.3.3
transverse reinforcement in accordance with depending on the magnitude of moments and shears
18.7.5.2(a) through (e), 18.7.5.3, and 18.7.5.4 induced in those members when subjected to the
excluding requirements of (c) and (f) of Table design displacement 𝑢 . If effects of 𝑢 are not
18.7.5.4 at locations (a) and (b): explicitly checked, the provisions of 18.14.3.3 shall
(a) At the top of the member for at least five be satisfied.
times the member cross-sectional 18.14.3.2 Where the induced moments and shears
dimension, and at least 1.8 m below the do not exceed the design moment and shear strength
bottom of the pile cap. of the frame member, (a) through (c) shall be
(b) For the portion of piles in soil that is not satisfied:
capable of providing lateral support, or in
air and water, along the entire unsupported (a) Beams shall satisfy 18.6.3.1. Transverse
length plus the length required in (a). reinforcement shall be provided throughout
the length of the beam at spacing not to
18.13.4.4 For precast concrete driven piles, the exceed 𝑑/2. Where factored axial force
length of transverse reinforcement provided shall be exceeds 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ /10, transverse
sufficient to account for potential variations in the
reinforcement shall be hoops satisfying
elevation of pile tips.
18.7.5.2 at spacing so, according to
18.13.4.5 Concrete piles, piers, or caissons in 18.14.3.2(b).
foundations supporting one- and two-story stud (b) Columns shall satisfy 18.7.4.1, 18.7.5.2,
bearing wall construction are exempt from the and 18.7.6. The maximum longitudinal
transverse reinforcement requirements of 18.13.4.3 spacing of hoops shall be so for the full
and 18.13.4.4. column length. Spacing 𝑠𝑜 shall not exceed
18.13.4.6 Pile caps incorporating batter piles shall the lesser of six diameters of the smallest
be designed to resist the full compressive strength longitudinal bar enclosed and 150 mm.
of the batter piles acting as short columns. The (c) Columns with factored gravity axial forces
slenderness effects of batter piles shall be exceeding 0.35𝑃𝑜 shall satisfy 18.14.3.2(b)
considered for the portion of the piles in soil that is and 18.7.5.7. The amount of transverse
not capable of providing lateral support, or in air or reinforcement provided shall be one-half of
water. that required by 18.7.5.4 and spacing shall
not exceed 𝑠𝑜 for the full column length.
18.14—Members not designated as
18.14.3.3 Where the induced moments or shears
part of the seismic-force-resisting
exceed 𝑀𝑛 or 𝑉𝑛 of the frame member, or if
system induced moments or shears are not calculated, (a)
18.14.1 Scope through (d) shall be satisfied:
18.14.1.1 This section shall apply to members not (a) Materials, mechanical splices, and welded
designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting splices shall satisfy the requirements for
system in structures assigned to SDC D, E, and F. special moment frames in 18.2.5 through
18.2.8.
18.14.2 Design actions
(b) Beams shall satisfy 18.14.3.2(a) and 18.6.5.
18.14.2.1 Members not designated as part of the (c) Columns shall satisfy 18.7.4, 18.7.5, and
seismic-force-resisting system shall be evaluated 18.7.6.
for gravity load combinations of (1.2𝐷 + 1.0𝐿) or (d) Joints shall satisfy 18.8.3.1.
0.9𝐷, whichever is critical, acting simultaneously 18.14.4 Precast beams and columns
with the design displacement u. The load factor on
the live load, 𝐿, shall be permitted to be reduced to 18.14.4.1 Precast concrete frame members assumed
0.5 except for garages, areas occupied as places of not to contribute to lateral resistance, including their
connections, shall satisfy (a) through (d):

SBC 304-CR-18 147

 CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

(a) Requirements of 18.14.3 extend at least four times the slab thickness from the
(b) Ties specified in 18.14.3.2(b) over the face of the support adjacent to the slab critical
entire column height, including the depth of section. The shear reinforcement requirements of
the beams this provision shall not apply if 𝑥 ⁄ℎ𝑠𝑥 ≤ 0.005.
(c) Structural integrity reinforcement, in
The value of (𝑥 ⁄ℎ𝑠𝑥 ) shall be taken as the greater
accordance with 4.10
of the values of the adjacent stories above and
(d) Bearing length at the support of a beam
below the slab-column connection. 𝑣𝑐 shall be
shall be at least 50 mm longer than
calculated in accordance with 22.6.5. 𝑣𝑢𝑔 is the
determined from 16.2.6
factored shear stress on the slab critical section for
18.14.5 Slab-column connections two-way action due to gravity loads without
18.14.5.1 For slab-column connections of two-way moment transfer.
slabs without beams, slab shear reinforcement 18.14.6 Wall piers
satisfying the requirements of 8.7.6 or 8.7.7 shall
be provided at any slab critical section defined in 18.14.6.1 Wall piers not designated as part of the
22.6.4.1 if 𝑥 ⁄ℎ𝑠𝑥  0.035 − (1/20)(𝑣𝑢𝑔 /𝑣𝑐 ). seismic-force-resisting system shall satisfy the
requirements of 18.10.8.
Required slab shear reinforcement shall provide
𝑣𝑠  0.29√𝑓𝑐′ at the slab critical section and shall

SBC 304-CR-18 148

CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

TABLES OF CHAPTER 18

Table 18.7.5.4—Transverse reinforcement for columns of special moment frames

Transverse
Conditions Applicable expressions
reinforcement

𝑃𝑢  0.3𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ and Greater of 0.3 (

𝐴𝑔
− 1)
𝑓𝑐′
(a)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑓𝑐′ ≤ 70 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (a) and (b)
𝐴𝑠ℎ /𝑠𝑏𝑐 for 𝑓𝑐′
0.09 (b)
rectilinear hoop 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑃𝑢 > 0.3𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ and Greatest of (a), (b),
𝑓𝑐′ > 70 𝑀𝑃𝑎 and (c) 𝑃𝑢
0.2𝑘𝑓 𝑘𝑛 (c)
𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝐴𝑐ℎ

𝑃𝑢 ≤ 0.3𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ and Greater of 0.45 (

𝐴𝑔
− 1)
𝑓𝑐′
(d)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑓𝑐′ ≤ 70 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (d) and (e)
𝑠 , for spiral or 𝑓𝑐′
0.12 (e)
circular hoop 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑃𝑢 > 0.3𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′ and Greatest of (d), (e),
𝑓𝑐′ > 70 𝑀𝑃𝑎 and (f) 𝑃𝑢
0.35𝑘𝑓 (f)
𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝐴𝑐ℎ

Table 18.8.4.1—Nominal joint shear strength 𝑽𝒏

Joint configuration 𝑉𝑛

For joints confined by beams on all four faces[1] 1.7𝜆√𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑗 [2]

For joints confined by beams on three faces or on two opposite

1.2𝜆√𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑗 [2]
faces[1]

For other cases 1.0𝜆√𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑗 [2]

[1]
Refer to 18.8.4.2.
[2]
 shall be 0.75 for lightweight concrete and 1.0 for normal weight concrete. 𝐴𝑗 is given in 18.8.4.3.

SBC 304-CR-18 149

CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

Table 18.10.6.4(f)—Transverse reinforcement for special boundary elements

Transverse reinforcement Applicable expressions

𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
0.3 ( − 1) (a)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝐴𝑠ℎ /𝑠𝑏𝑐 for rectilinear hoop Greater of
𝑓𝑐′
0.09 (b)
𝑓𝑦𝑡

𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
0.45 ( − 1) (c)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑠 , for spiral or circular hoop Greater of
𝑓𝑐′
0.12 (d)
𝑓𝑦𝑡

Table 18.12.7.5 —Transverse reinforcement for collector elements

Transverse reinforcement Applicable expressions

𝑓𝑐′
𝐴𝑠ℎ /𝑠𝑏𝑐 for rectilinear hoop 0.09 (a)
𝑓𝑦𝑡

𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
0.45 ( − 1) (b)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑠 , for spiral or circular hoop Greater of:
𝑓𝑐′
0.12 (c)
𝑓𝑦𝑡

Table 18.12.11.1—Transverse reinforcement for structural trusses

Transverse reinforcement Applicable expressions

𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
0.3 ( − 1) (a)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
Ash/sbc for rectilinear hoop Greater of:
𝑓𝑐′
0.09 (b)
𝑓𝑦𝑡

𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
0.45 ( − 1) (c)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
s, for spiral or circular hoop Greater of:
𝑓𝑐′
0.12 (d)
𝑓𝑦𝑡

SBC 304-CR-18 150

CHAPTER 18—EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 151

 CHAPTER 19—CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS

CHAPTER 19—CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY

REQUIREMENTS

19.2.3.1 Modulus of rupture, 𝑓𝑟 , for concrete shall

19.1—Scope be calculated by:
19.1.1 This chapter shall apply to concrete,
including: 𝑓𝑟 = 0.62λ√𝑓𝑐′ (in MPa) (19.2.3.1)
(a) Properties to be used for design
(b) Durability requirements where the value of  is in accordance with 19.2.4.

19.1.2 This chapter shall apply to durability 19.2.4 Lightweight concrete

requirements for grout used for bonded tendons in 19.2.4.1 To account for the properties of
accordance with 19.4. lightweight concrete, a modification factor  is used
19.2—Concrete design properties as a multiplier of √𝑓𝑐′ in all applicable provisions of
this Code.
19.2.1 Specified compressive strength
19.2.4.2 The value of  shall be based on the
19.2.1.1 The value of 𝑓𝑐′ shall be specified in composition of the aggregate in the concrete
construction documents and shall be in accordance mixture in accordance with Table 19.2.4.2 or as
with (a) through (c): permitted in 19.2.4.3.
(a) Not less than 20 MPa for normalweight and 19.2.4.3 If the measured average splitting tensile
lightweight concrete and not more than 35 strength of lightweight concrete, 𝑓𝑐𝑡 , is used to
MPa for lightweight concrete used for
calculate , laboratory tests shall be conducted in
special moment frames and special
accordance with ASTM C330 to establish the value
structural walls
of 𝑓𝑐𝑡 and the corresponding value of 𝑓𝑐𝑚 and 
(b) Durability requirements in Table 19.3.2.1
shall be calculated by:
(c) Structural strength requirements
19.2.1.2 The specified compressive strength shall 𝑓𝑐𝑡
λ= ≤ 1.0 (19.2.4.3)
be used for proportioning of concrete mixtures in 0.56√𝑓𝑐𝑚
26.4.3 and for testing and acceptance of concrete in
26.12.3. The concrete mixture tested in order to calculate λ
19.2.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, 𝑓𝑐′ shall be shall be representative of that to be used in the
based on 28-day tests. If other than 28 days, test age Work.
for 𝑓𝑐′ shall be indicated in the construction 19.3—Concrete durability requirements
documents.
19.3.1 Exposure categories and classes
19.2.2 Modulus of elasticity
19.3.1.1 The licensed design professional shall
19.2.2.1 Modulus of elasticity, 𝐸𝑐 , for concrete assign exposure classes in accordance with the
shall be permitted to be calculated as (a) or (b): severity of the anticipated exposure of members for
(a) For values of 𝑤𝑐 between 1440 and 2560 each exposure category in Table 19.3.1.1.
kg/m3 19.3.2 Requirements for concrete mixtures
𝐸𝑐 = 𝑤𝑐1.5 0.043√𝑓𝑐′ (in MPa) (19.2.2.1.a) 19.3.2.1 Based on the exposure classes assigned
(b) For normalweight concrete from Table 19.3.1.1, concrete mixtures shall
conform to the most restrictive requirements in
𝐸𝑐 = 4700√𝑓𝑐′ (in MPa) (19.2.2.1.b) Table 19.3.2.1.

19.2.3 Modulus of rupture

SBC 304-CR-18 152

 CHAPTER 19—CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS

19.4—Grout durability requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM C1218,

measured by mass of chloride ion to mass of
19.4.1 Water-soluble chloride ion content of grout
cement.
for bonded tendons shall not exceed 0.06 percent

SBC 304-CR-18 153

CHAPTER 19—CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 19

Table 19.2.4.2—Modification factor 

Concrete Composition of aggregates 

Fine: ASTM C330

All-lightweight 0.75
Coarse: ASTM C330

Fine: Combination of ASTM C330 and C33

Lightweight, fine blend 0.75 to 0.85[1]
Coarse: ASTM C330

Fine: ASTM C33

Sand-lightweight 0.85
Coarse: ASTM C330

Fine: ASTM C33

Sand-lightweight, coarse
Coarse: Combination of ASTM C330 and 0.85 to 1[2]
blend
C33

Fine: ASTM C33

Normalweight 1
Coarse: ASTM C33
[1]
Linear interpolation from 0.75 to 0.85 is permitted based on the absolute volume of normalweight fine
aggregate as a fraction of the total absolute volume of fine aggregate.
[2]
Linear interpolation from 0.85 to 1 is permitted based on the absolute volume of normal weight coarse
aggregate as a fraction of the total absolute volume of coarse aggregate.

SBC 304-CR-18 154

CHAPTER 19—CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS

Table 19.3.1.1—Exposure categories and classes

Category Class Condition

Freezing and
Not applicable in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
thawing (F)

Water-soluble sulfate (SO2−

4 ) in soil, Dissolved sulfate (SO2−
4 ) in water,
percent by mass[1] ppm[2]

S0 SO2−
4 < 0.10 SO2−
4 < 150

Sulfate (S) 150 ≤ SO2−

4 < 1500
S1 0.10 ≤ SO2−
4 < 0.20 or seawater

S2 0.20 ≤ SO2−
4 ≤ 2.00 1500 ≤ SO2−
4 ≤ 10,000

S3 SO2−
4 > 2.00 SO2−
4 > 10,000

C0 Concrete dry or protected from moisture

Concrete exposed to moisture or in contact with water but not to an external

C1
source of chlorides
Corrosion
Concrete exposed to moisture and an external source of chlorides from soil,
protection of
C2 groundwater or other sources in moderate concentrations (water-soluble chloride
reinforcement
ion, Cl- less than 0.1% by mass in soil or less than 2000 ppm in water).
(C)

a) Concrete exposed to moisture and an external source of chlorides from soil,

groundwater or other sources in high concentrations (water-soluble chloride
C3 ion, Cl- more than 0.1% by mass in soil or more than 2000 ppm in water).
b) Concrete in coastal areas exposed to moisture and airborne chlorides but not
in direct contact with sea water

Concrete in coastal areas exposed to moisture and an external source of

C4
chlorides from seawater, brackish water or spray from these sources

Concrete exposed to sabkha soils characterized by very high concentration of

C5
chlorides

[1]
Percent sulfate by mass in soil shall be determined by ASTM C1580
[2]
Concentration of dissolved sulfate in water, in ppm, shall be determined by ASTM D516 or ASTM D4130.

SBC 304-CR-18 155

CHAPTER 19—CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS

Table 19.3.2.1—Requirements for concrete by exposure class

Exposure Maximum Minimum

Cement type[3]
class 𝒘/𝒄𝒎[1][2] 𝒇′𝒄 , MPa
S0 N/A 20 No type restriction
S1 0.50 28 II[4]
S2 0.45 31 V
V + pozzolan or
S3 0.45 31
slag cement[5]
Maximum water-soluble
chloride ion (Cl-) content
in concrete, percent by Additional
weight of cement[6] provisions
Non pre-
Pre-stressed
stressed
concrete
concrete
C0 N/A 20 No type restriction 1.00 0.06 None
C1 0.50 28 No type restriction 0.30 0.06 None
Concrete
C2 0.50 28 No type restriction 0.15 0.06
cover[7]
Concrete
C3 0.45 31 I or II 0.15 0.06
cover[7]
I + pozzolan or Concrete
C4 0.40 35 0.15 0.06
slag cement cover[7]
I + pozzolan or Concrete
C5 0.35 40 0.15 0.06
slag cement cover[7]
[1]
The maximum 𝑤/𝑐𝑚 limits in Table 19.3.2.1 do not apply to lightweight concrete.
[2]
For concrete exposed in service to both chlorides and sulfates, the lowest applicable maximum water-
cementitious materials ratio shall be used.
[3]
For concrete exposed in service to both chlorides and sulfates, the cement type specified for chloride
exposures shall be used.
[4]
The use of Type V cement instead of Type II cement is permitted.
[5]
The amount of the specific source of the pozzolan or slag cement to be used shall be at least the amount
that has been determined by service record to improve sulfate resistance when used in concrete containing
Type V cement.
[6]
Water-soluble chloride ion content that is contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates,
cementitious materials, and admixtures shall be determined on the concrete mixture by ASTM C1218 at
age between 28 and 42 days.
[7]
Concrete cover shall be in accordance with 20.6.

SBC 304-CR-18 156

CHAPTER 19—CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 157

 CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES,

DURABILITY, AND EMBEDMENTS

except that yield strength shall be determined in

20.1—Scope accordance with 20.2.1.2:
20.1.1 This chapter shall apply to steel
(a) A1064  carbon steel
reinforcement, and shall govern (a) through (c):
(b) A1022  stainless steel
(a) Material properties
20.2.1.7.1 Deformed wire sizes MD25 through
(b) Properties to be used for design
MD200 shall be permitted.
(c) Durability requirements, including
minimum specified cover requirements 20.2.1.7.2 Deformed wire sizes larger than MD200
20.1.2 Provisions of 20.7 shall apply to shall be permitted in welded wire reinforcement if
treated as plain wire for calculation of development
embedments.
and splice lengths in accordance with 25.4.7 and
20.2—Nonprestressed bars and wires 25.5.4, respectively.
20.2.1 Material properties 20.2.1.7.3 Except as permitted for welded wire
reinforcement used as stirrups in accordance with
20.2.1.1 Nonprestressed bars and wires shall be
25.7.1, spacing of welded intersections in welded
deformed, except plain bars or wires are permitted
wire reinforcement in the direction of calculated
for use in spirals.
stress shall not exceed (a) or (b):
20.2.1.2 Yield strength of nonprestressed bars and
(a) 400 mm for welded deformed wire
wires shall be determined by either (a) or (b):
reinforcement
(a) The offset method, using an offset of 0.2 (b) 300 mm for welded plain wire
percent in accordance with ASTM A370 reinforcement
(b) The yield point by the halt-of-force method,
20.2.2 Design properties
provided the nonprestressed bar or wire has
a sharp-kneed or well-defined yield point 20.2.2.1 For nonprestressed bars and wires, the
stress below 𝑓𝑦 shall be 𝐸𝑠 times steel strain. For
20.2.1.3 Deformed bars shall conform to (a), (b),
(c), or (d): strains greater than that corresponding to 𝑓𝑦 , stress
shall be considered independent of strain and equal
(a) ASTM A615  carbon steel to 𝑓𝑦 .
(b) ASTM A706  low-alloy steel
(c) ASTM A955  stainless steel 20.2.2.2 Modulus of elasticity, 𝐸𝑠 , for
(d) ASTM A1035  low-carbon chromium steel nonprestressed bars and wires shall be permitted to
be taken as 200,000 MPa.
20.2.1.4 Plain bars for spiral reinforcement shall
conform to ASTM A615, A706, or A955. 20.2.2.3 Yield strength for nonprestressed bars and
wires shall be based on the specified grade of
20.2.1.5 Welded deformed bar mats shall conform reinforcement and shall not exceed the values given
to ASTM A184. Deformed bars used in welded in 20.2.2.4 for the associated applications.
deformed bar mats shall conform to ASTM A615 or
A706. 20.2.2.4 Types of nonprestressed bars and wires to
be specified for particular structural applications
20.2.1.6 Headed deformed bars shall conform to shall be in accordance with Table 20.2.2.4a for
ASTM A970 , including Annex A1 requirements for deformed reinforcement and Table 20.2.2.4b for
Class HA head dimensions. plain reinforcement.
20.2.1.7 Deformed wire, plain wire, welded 20.2.2.5 Deformed nonprestressed longitudinal
deformed wire reinforcement, and welded plain reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced
wire reinforcement shall conform to (a) or (b), moment, axial force, or both, in special moment
frames, special structural walls, and all components

SBC 304-CR-18 158

 CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

of special structural walls including coupling beams 20.3.2.2 Tensile strength, 𝑓𝑝𝑢 , shall be based on the
and wall piers shall be in accordance with (a) or (b): specified grade or type of prestressing
(a) ASTM A706, Grade 420 reinforcement and shall not exceed the values given
(b) ASTM A615 Grade 280 reinforcement if in Table 20.3.2.2.
(i) and (ii) are satisfied and ASTM A615 20.3.2.3 Stress in bonded prestressed reinforcement
Grade 420 reinforcement if (i) through (iii) at nominal flexural strength, 𝑓𝑝𝑠 .
are satisfied.
(i) Actual yield strength based on mill 20.3.2.3.1 An alternative to a more accurate
tests does not exceed 𝑓𝑦 by more calculation of 𝑓𝑝𝑠 based on strain compatibility,
than 125 MPa values of 𝑓𝑝𝑠 calculated in accordance with Eq.
(ii) Ratio of the actual tensile strength (20.3.2.3.1) shall be permitted for members with
to the actual yield strength is at bonded prestressed reinforcement if all prestressed
least 1.25 reinforcement is in the tension zone and 𝑓𝑠𝑒 ≥
(iii) Minimum elongation in 200 mm 0.5𝑓𝑝𝑢 .
shall be at least 14 percent for bar γ𝑝 𝑓𝑝𝑢 𝑑 𝑓𝑦
sizes Dia 8 through Dia 20, at least 𝑓𝑝𝑠 = 𝑓𝑝𝑢 {1 − [ρ𝑝 ′ + (ρ − ρ′ )]} (20.3.2.3.1)
β1 𝑓𝑐 𝑑𝑝 𝑓𝑐′
12 percent for bar sizes Dia 22
through Dia 36, and at least 10 where 𝑝 is in accordance with Table 20.3.2.3.1.
percent for bar sizes Dia 45 and
Dia 50. If compression reinforcement is considered for the
calculation of 𝑓𝑝𝑠 by Eq. (20.3.2.3.1), (a) and (b)
20.3—Prestressing strands, wires, and shall be satisfied.
bars
(a) If 𝑑′ exceeds 0.15𝑑𝑝 , the compression
20.3.1 Material properties
reinforcement shall be neglected in Eq.
20.3.1.1 Except as required in 20.3.1.3 for special (20.3.2.3.1).
moment frames and special structural walls, (b) If compression reinforcement is included in
prestressing reinforcement shall conform to (a), (b), Eq. (20.3.2.3.1), the term
(c), or (d): 𝑓𝑝𝑢 𝑑 𝑓𝑦
ρ𝑝 + (ρ − ρ′ )
(a) ASTM A416  strand 𝑓𝑐′ 𝑑𝑝 𝑓𝑐′
(b) ASTM A421  wire
shall not be taken less than 0.17.
(c) ASTM A421  low-relaxation wire
including Supplementary Requirement S1, 20.3.2.3.2 For pretensioned strands, the strand
"Low-Relaxation Wire and Relaxation design stress at sections of members located within
Testing" 𝑙𝑑 from the free end of strand shall not exceed that
(d) ASTM A722  high-strength bar calculated in accordance with 25.4.8.3.
20.3.1.2 Prestressing strands, wires, and bars not 20.3.2.4 Stress in unbonded prestressed
listed in ASTM A416, A421, or A722 are permitted reinforcement at nominal flexural strength, 𝑓𝑝𝑠
provided they conform to minimum requirements of
these specifications and are shown by test or 20.3.2.4.1 As an alternative to a more accurate
analysis not to impair the performance of the calculation of 𝑓𝑝𝑠 , values of 𝑓𝑝𝑠 s calculated in
member. accordance with Table 20.3.2.4.1 shall be
permitted for members prestressed with unbonded
20.3.1.3 Prestressing reinforcement resisting tendons if 𝑓𝑠𝑒 ≥ 0.5𝑓𝑝𝑢 .
earthquake-induced moment, axial force, or both, in
special moment frames, special structural walls, and 20.3.2.5 Permissible tensile stresses in prestressed
all components of special structural walls including reinforcement
coupling beams and wall piers, cast using precast 20.3.2.5.1 The tensile stress in prestressed
concrete shall comply with ASTM A416 or A722. reinforcement shall not exceed the limits in Table
20.3.2 Design properties 20.3.2.5.1.
20.3.2.1 Modulus of elasticity, 𝐸𝑝 , for prestressing 20.3.2.6 Prestress losses
reinforcement shall be determined from tests or as 20.3.2.6.1 Prestress losses shall be considered in the
reported by the manufacturer. calculation of the effective tensile stress in the

SBC 304-CR-18 159

 CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

prestressed reinforcement, 𝑓𝑠𝑒 and shall include (a) 20.4.2.2 For structural steel used in composite
through (f): columns with a structural steel core, value of 𝑓𝑦
(a) Prestressed reinforcement seating at shall not exceed 350 MPa.
transfer 20.5—Headed shear stud
(b) Elastic shortening of concrete reinforcement
(c) Creep of concrete
(d) Shrinkage of concrete 20.5.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement and stud
(e) Relaxation of prestressed reinforcement assemblies shall conform to ASTM A1044.
(f) Friction loss due to intended or unintended 20.6—Provisions for durability of steel
curvature in post-tensioning tendons reinforcement
20.3.2.6.2 Calculated friction loss in post- 20.6.1 Specified concrete cover
tensioning tendons shall be based on experimentally
determined wobble and curvature friction 20.6.1.1 Unless the Code requires a greater
coefficients. concrete cover for fire protection, the minimum
specified concrete cover shall be in accordance with
20.3.2.6.3 Where loss of prestress in a member is 20.6.1.2 through 20.6.1.4.
anticipated due to connection of the member to
adjoining construction, such loss of prestress shall 20.6.1.2 It shall be permitted to consider concrete
be included in design calculations. floor finishes as part of required cover for
nonstructural purposes.
20.4—Structural steel, pipe, and tubing
for composite columns 20.6.1.3 Specified concrete cover requirements

20.4.1 Material properties 20.6.1.3.1 Nonprestressed cast-in-place concrete

members shall have specified concrete cover for
20.4.1.1 Structural steel other than steel pipe or reinforcement at least that given in Table
tubing used in composite columns shall conform to 20.6.1.3.1.
(a), (b), (c), (d), or (e):
20.6.1.3.2 Cast-in-place prestressed concrete
(a) ASTM A36  carbon steel members shall have specified concrete cover for
(b) ASTM A242 high-strength low-alloy reinforcement, ducts, and end fittings at least that
steel given in Table 20.6.1.3.2.
(c) ASTM A572  high-strength, low-alloy,
20.6.1.3.3 Precast nonprestressed or prestressed
columbium-vanadium steel
concrete members manufactured under plant
(d) ASTM A588  high-strength, low-alloy,
conditions shall have specified concrete cover for
345 MPa steel
reinforcement, ducts, and end fittings at least that
(e) ASTM A992  structural shapes given in Table 20.6.1.3.3.
20.4.1.2 Steel pipe or tubing used in composite 20.6.1.3.4 For bundled bars, specified concrete
columns to encase a concrete core shall conform to cover shall be at least the smaller of (a) and (b):
(a), (b), (c), or (d):
(a) The equivalent diameter of the bundle
(a) ASTM A53 Grade B  black steel, hot- (b) 50 mm
dipped, zinc-coated
(b) ASTM A500  cold-formed, welded, and for concrete cast against and permanently in
seamless contact with ground, the specified cover shall be 75
(c) ASTM A501  hot-formed, welded, mm.
seamless 20.6.1.3.5 For headed shear stud reinforcement,
(d) ASTM A1085  cold-formed, welded specified concrete cover for the heads and base rails
20.4.2 Design properties shall be at least that required for the reinforcement
in the member.
20.4.2.1 For structural steel in composite columns,
maximum value of 𝑓𝑦 shall be in accordance with 20.6.1.4 Specified concrete cover requirements
for corrosive environments
the appropriate ASTM standards in 20.4.1.
20.6.1.4.1 In corrosive environments or other
severe exposure conditions, the specified concrete
cover shall be increased as deemed necessary. The

SBC 304-CR-18 160

 CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

applicable requirements for concrete based on reinforcement, grout, and corrosion inhibitor
exposure categories in 19.3 shall be satisfied, or admixtures.
other protection shall be provided.
20.6.4.2 Ducts shall be maintained free of water.
20.6.1.4.2 For prestressed concrete members
20.6.4.3 Ducts for grouted single-wire, single-
classified as Class T or C in 24.5.2 and exposed to
strand, or single-bar tendons shall have an inside
corrosive environments or other severe exposure
diameter at least 6 mm larger than the diameter of
categories such as those given in 19.3, the specified
the prestressing reinforcement.
concrete cover for prestressed reinforcement shall
be at least one and one-half times the cover in 20.6.4.4 Ducts for grouted multiple wire, multiple
20.6.1.3.2 for cast-in-place members and in strand, or multiple bar tendons shall have an inside
20.6.1.3.3 for precast members. cross-sectional area at least two times the cross-
sectional area of the prestressing reinforcement.
20.6.1.4.3 If the precompressed tension zone is not
in tension under sustained loads, 20.6.1.4.2 need not 20.6.5 Corrosion protection for post-tensioning
be satisfied. anchorages, couplers, and end fittings
20.6.2 Nonprestressed coated reinforcement 20.6.5.1 Anchorages, couplers, and end fittings
shall be protected to provide long-term resistance to
20.6.2.1 Nonprestressed coated reinforcement shall
corrosion.
conform to Table 20.6.2.1.
20.6.6 Corrosion protection for external post-
20.6.2.2 Deformed bars to be zinc-coated, epoxy-
tensioning
coated, or zinc and epoxy dual-coated shall conform
to 20.2.1.3 (a), (b), or (c). 20.6.6.1 External tendons and tendon anchorage
regions shall be protected to provide resistance to
20.6.2.3 Wire and welded wire reinforcement to be
corrosion.
epoxy-coated shall conform to 20.2.1.7 (a).
20.6.3 Corrosion protection for unbonded
20.7—Embedments
prestressing reinforcement 20.7.1 Embedments shall not significantly impair
the strength of the structure and shall not reduce fire
20.6.3.1 Unbonded prestressing reinforcement
shall be encased in sheathing, and the space protection.
between the strand and the sheathing shall be 20.7.2 Embedment materials shall not be harmful
completely filled with a material formulated to to concrete or reinforcement.
inhibit corrosion. Sheathing shall be water-tight and
20.7.3 Aluminum embedments shall be coated or
continuous over the unbonded length.
covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction and
20.6.3.2 The sheathing shall be connected to all electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.
stressing, intermediate, and fixed anchorages in a
20.7.4 Reinforcement with an area at least 0.002
watertight fashion.
times the area of the concrete section shall be
20.6.3.3 Unbonded single-strand tendons shall be provided perpendicular to pipe embedments.
protected to provide resistance to corrosion in
20.7.5 Specified concrete cover for pipe
accordance with ACI 423.7.
embedments with their fittings shall be at least 40
20.6.4 Corrosion protection for grouted mm for concrete exposed to earth or weather, and at
tendons least 20 mm for concrete not exposed to weather, or
not in contact with ground.
20.6.4.1 Ducts for grouted tendons shall be grout-
tight and nonreactive with concrete, prestressing

SBC 304-CR-18 161

CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

Tables of Chapter 20

Table 20.2.2.4a—Nonprestressed deformed reinforcement

Maximum Applicable ASTM specification

value of 𝒇𝒚 or
𝒇𝒚𝒕 permitted Welded
Usage Application Deformed Welded wire
for design Deformed bars deformed
wires reinforcement
calculations, bar mats
MPa
Flexure; Special
Refer to Not
axial force; seismic 420 Not permitted Not permitted
20.2.2.5 permitted
and systems
shrinkage
A615, A706,
and Other 550 A1064, A1022 A1064, A1022 A184[1]
A955
temperature
Special
Lateral A615, A706, A1064[2], Not
seismic 700 A1064, A1022
support of A955, A1035 A1022[2] permitted
systems
longitudinal
A615, A706, Not
bars; or 700 A1064, A1022 Not permitted
Spirals A955, A1035 permitted
concrete
Other A615, A706, Not
confinement 550 A1064, A1022 A1064, A1022
A955 permitted
Special
A615, A706, A1064[2], Not
seismic 420 A1064, A1022
A955 A1022[2] permitted
systems
Spirals 420 A615, A706, A1064, A1022 Not permitted Not
A955 permitted
Shear friction A615, A706, Not
420 A1064, A1022 A1064, A1022
Shear A955 permitted
A1064 and
A615, A706, Not
Stirrups, ties, 420 A1064, A1022 A1022 welded
A955 permitted
hoops plain wire
A1064 and
Not
550 Not permitted Not permitted A1022 welded
permitted
deformed wire
Longitudinal
A615, A706, Not
Torsion and 420 A1064, A1022 A1064, A1022
A955 permitted
transverse
[1]
Welded deformed bar mats shall be permitted to be assembled using A615 or A706 deformed bars.
[2]
ASTM Al064 and Al022 are not permitted in special seismic systems where the weld is required to resist
stresses in response to confinement, lateral support of longitudinal bars, shear, or other actions.

SBC 304-CR-18 162

CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

Table 20.2.2.4b—Nonprestressed plain spiral reinforcement

Maximum value of 𝒇𝒚 or Applicable ASTM specification
Usage Application 𝒇𝒚𝒕 permitted for design
calculations, MPa Plain bars Plain wires

Spirals in special A615, A706,

Lateral support of 700 A1064, A1022
seismic systems A955, A1035
longitudinal bars; or
concrete confinement A615, A706,
Spirals 700 A1064, A1022
A955, A1035

A615, A706,
Shear Spirals 420 A1064, A1022
A955, A1035

Torsion in A615, A706,

Spirals 420 A1064, A1022
nonprestressed beams A955, A1035

Table 20.3.2.2—Prestressing strands, wires, and bars

Maximum value of 𝒇𝒑𝒖

Type permitted for design Applicable ASTM Specification
calculations, MPa

Strand (stress-relieved and low-

1,860 A416
relaxation)

A421
Wire(stress-relieved and low- A421, including Supplementary
1,725
relaxation) Requirement Sl "Low-Relaxation Wire and
Relaxation Testing"

High-strength bar 1,035 A722

Table 20.3.2.3.1—Values of 𝒑 for use in Eq. (20.3.2.3.1)

𝒇𝒑𝒚 /𝒇𝒑𝒖 𝒑
≥ 0.80 0.55
≥ 0.85 0.40
≥ 0.90 0.28

SBC 304-CR-18 163

CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

Table 20.3.2.4.1—Approximate values of 𝒇𝒑𝒔 at nominal flexural strength for unbonded tendons

𝒍𝒏 /𝒉 𝒇𝒑𝒔

𝑓𝑠𝑒 + 70 + 𝑓𝑐′ /(100𝑝 )

≤ 35 The least of: 𝑓𝑠𝑒 + 420

𝑓𝑝𝑦

𝑓𝑠𝑒 + 70 + 𝑓𝑐′ /(300𝑝 )

> 35 The least of: 𝑓𝑠𝑒 + 210

𝑓𝑝𝑦

Table 20.3.2.5.1—Maximum permissible tensile stresses in prestressed reinforcement

Stage Location Maximum tensile stress

0.94𝑓𝑝𝑦

0.80𝑓𝑝𝑢
During stressing At jacking end Least of:
Maximum jacking force
recommended by the supplier of
anchorage device

Immediately after At post-tensioning anchorage

0.70𝑓𝑝𝑢
force transfer devices and couplers

SBC 304-CR-18 164

CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

Table 20.6.1.3.1—Specified concrete cover for cast-in-place nonprestressed concrete members

Specified
Concrete exposure Member Reinforcement
cover, mm

Cast against and permanently

All All 75
in contact with ground

Dia 18 through Dia 50 bars 50

Exposed to weather or in
All Dia 16 bar, MW200 or MD200
contact with ground 40
wire, and smaller

Dia 40 and Dia 50 bars 40

Slabs, joists, and walls
Dia 36 bar and smaller 20
Not exposed to weather or in
contact with ground Beams, columns, Primary reinforcement, stirrups,
pedestals, and tension ties, spirals, and hoops 40
ties

Table 20.6.1.3.2—Specified concrete cover for cast-in-place prestressed concrete members

Specified
Concrete exposure Member Reinforcement
cover, mm

Cast against and permanently in

All All 75
contact with ground

Exposed to weather or in contact Slabs, joists, and walls All 25

with ground All other All 40

Slabs, joists, and walls All 20

Primary
Not exposed to weather or in contact 40
Beams, columns, and reinforcement
with ground
tension ties Stirrups, ties, spirals,
25
and hoops

SBC 304-CR-18 165

CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

Table 20.6.1.3.3—Specified concrete cover for precast nonprestressed or prestressed concrete

members manufactured under plant conditions
Concrete Specified cover,
Member Reinforcement
exposure mm
Dia 40 and Dia 50 bars; tendons larger than
40
40 mm diameter
Walls Dia 36 bars and smaller; MW200 and
MD200 wire and smaller; tendons and 20
strands 40 mm diameter and smaller
Exposed to
Dia 40 and Dia 50 bars; tendons larger than
weather or in 50
40 mm diameter
contact with
ground Dia 20 through Dia 36 bars; tendons and
strands larger than 16 mm diameter through 40
All other
40 mm diameter
Dia 16 bar, MW200 or MD200 wire, and
smaller; tendons and strands 16 mm diameter 30
and smaller
Dia 40 and Dia 50 bars; tendons larger than
30
40 mm diameter
Slabs, joists, and Tendons and strands 40 mm diameter and
20
Not exposed to walls smaller
weather or in Dia 36 bar, MW200 or MD200 wire, and
16
contact with smaller
ground Greater of db and 16
Beams, columns,
Primary reinforcement and need not exceed
pedestals, and
40
tension ties
Stirrups, ties, spirals, and hoops 10

Table 20.6.2.1—Nonprestressed coated reinforcement

Applicable ASTM specifications

Type of coating
Bar Wire Welded wire

Zinc-coated A767 Not permitted Al060

Epoxy-coated A775 or A934 A884 A884

Zinc and epoxy dual-coated Al055 Not permitted Not permitted

SBC 304-CR-18 166

CHAPTER 20—STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
EMBEDMENTS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 167

 CHAPTER 21—STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS

CHAPTER 21—STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS

21.1—Scope 𝑓𝑠𝑒
𝑙𝑡𝑟 = ( )𝑑 (21.2.3)
21.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the selection of 21 𝑏
strength reduction factors used in design, except as 21.2.4 For structures that rely on elements in (a),
permitted by Chapter 27. (b), or (c) to resist earthquake effects 𝐸, the value
21.2—Strength reduction factors for of  for shear shall be modified in accordance with
structural concrete members and 21.2.4.1 through 21.2.4.3:
connections (a) Special moment frames
21.2.1 Strength reduction factors  shall be in (b) Special structural walls
accordance with Table 21.2.1, except as modified (c) Intermediate precast structural walls in
by 21.2.2, 21.2.3, and 21.2.4. structures assigned to Seismic Category D,
E, or F
21.2.2 Strength reduction factor for moment, axial
force, or combined moment and axial force shall be 21.2.4.1 For any member designed to resist 𝐸,  for
in accordance with Table 21.2.2. shear shall be 0.60 if the nominal shear strength of
the member is less than the shear corresponding to
21.2.2.1 For deformed reinforcement,ε𝑡𝑦 shall be the development of the nominal moment strength of
𝑓𝑦 /𝐸𝑠 . For Grade 420 deformed reinforcement, it the member. The nominal moment strength shall be
shall be permitted to take ε𝑡𝑦 equal to 0.002. calculated considering the most critical factored
axial loads and including 𝐸.
21.2.2.2 For all prestressed reinforcement, ε𝑡𝑦 shall
be taken as 0.002. 21.2.4.2 For diaphragms,  for shear shall not
exceed the least value of  for shear used for the
21.2.3 For sections in pretensioned members vertical components of the primary seismic-force-
where strand is not fully developed,  shall be resisting system.
calculated at each section in accordance with Table
21.2.3, where 𝑙𝑡𝑟 is calculated using Eq. (21.2.3), 21.2.4.3 For beam-column joints and diagonally
𝑙𝑑𝑏 is the debonded length at the end of the member, reinforced coupling beams,  for shear shall be
𝑓𝑠𝑒 is the effective stress in the prestressed 0.85.
reinforcement after allowance for all losses, and 𝑙𝑑
is given in 25.4.8.1.

SBC 304-CR-18 168

CHAPTER 21—STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS

Tables of Chapter 21

Table 21.2.1—Strength reduction factors 

Action or structural element  Exceptions

0.65 to 0.90 in Near ends of pretensioned members
Moment, axial force, or combined
(a) accordance with where strands are not fully developed, 
moment and axial force
21.2.2 shall be in accordance with 21.2.3.
Additional requirements are given in
(b) Shear 0.75 21.2.4 for structures designed to resist
earthquake effects.
(c) Torsion 0.75 -

(d) Bearing 0.65 -

(e) Post-tensioned anchorage zones 0.85 -
(f) Brackets and corbels 0.75 -
Struts, ties, nodal zones, and bearing
(g) areas designed in accordance with strut- 0.75 -
and-tie method in Chapter 23
Components of connections of precast
(h) members controlled by yielding of steel 0.90 -
elements in tension
(i) Plain concrete elements 0.60 -
0.45 to 0.75 in
(j) Anchors in concrete elements accordance with -
Chapter 17

Table 21.2.2—Strength reduction factor  for moment, axial force, or combined moment and axial
force

Net tensile
Classification Type of transverse reinforcement
strain 𝛆𝒕
Spirals conforming to 25.7.3 Other
Compression-
ε𝑡 ≤ ε𝑡𝑦 0.75 (a) 0.65 (b)
Controlled

ε𝑡𝑦 < ε𝑡 (ε𝑡 −ε𝑡𝑦 ) (ε𝑡 −ε𝑡𝑦 )

Transition[1] 0.75 + 0.15 (c) 0.65 + 0.25 (d)
≤ 0.005 (0.005 − ε𝑡𝑦 ) (0.005 − ε𝑡𝑦 )

Tension-
ε𝑡 ≥ 0.005 0.90 (e) 0.90 (f)
Controlled
For sections classified as transition, it shall be permitted to use  corresponding to compression-controlled
[1]

sections.

SBC 304-CR-18 169

CHAPTER 21—STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS

Table 21.2.3—Strength reduction factor  for sections near the end of pretensioned members
Stress in
Condition near end Distance from end of member to
concrete under 
of member [1] section under consideration
service load
≤ 𝑙𝑡𝑟 0.75 (a)
Linear
All strands bonded Not applicable interpolation
𝑙𝑡𝑟 𝑡𝑜 𝑙𝑑 (b)
from 0.75 to
0.90[2]
≤ (𝑙𝑑𝑏 + 𝑙𝑡𝑟 ) 0.75 (c)

No tension Linear
calculated interpolation
(𝑙𝑑𝑏 + 𝑙𝑡𝑟 ) to (𝑙𝑑𝑏 + 𝑙𝑑 )
from 0.75 to (d)
One or more strands 0.90[2]
debonded ≤ (𝑙𝑑𝑏 + 𝑙𝑡𝑟 ) 0.75 (e)

Tension Linear
calculated interpolation
(𝑙𝑑𝑏 + 𝑙𝑡𝑟 ) to (𝑙𝑑𝑏 + 2𝑙𝑑 )
from 0.75 to (f)
0.90[2]
[1]
Stress calculated using gross cross-sectional properties in extreme concrete fiber of precompressed tension
zone under service loads after allowance for all prestress losses at section under consideration.
[2]
It shall be permitted to use a strength reduction factor of 0.75.

SBC 304-CR-18 170

CHAPTER 21—STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 171

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

substantial agreement with results of

22.1—Scope comprehensive tests.
22.1.1 This chapter shall apply to calculating 22.2.2.4 The equivalent rectangular concrete stress
nominal strength at sections of members, including
distribution in accordance with 22.2.2.4.1 through
(a) through (g):
22.2.2.4.3 satisfies 22.2.2.3.
(a) Flexural strength.
22.2.2.4.1 Concrete stress of 0.85𝑓𝑐′ shall be
(b) Axial strength or combined flexural and
assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent
axial strength.
compression zone bounded by edges of the cross
(c) One-way shear strength.
section and a line parallel to the neutral axis located
(d) Two-way shear strength.
a distance 𝑎 from the fiber of maximum
(e) Torsional strength.
compressive strain, as calculated by:
(f) Bearing.
(g) Shear friction. 𝑎 = β1 𝑐 (22.2.2.4.1)
22.1.2 Sectional strength requirements of this 22.2.2.4.2 Distance from the fiber of maximum
chapter shall be satisfied unless the member or compressive strain to the neutral axis, 𝑐, shall be
region of the member is designed in accordance measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.
with Chapter 23.
22.2.2.4.3 Values of β1 shall be in accordance with
22.1.3 Design strength at a section shall be taken Table 22.2.2.4.3.
as the nominal strength multiplied by the applicable
22.2.3 Design assumptions for nonprestressed
strength reduction factor  given in Chapter 21.
reinforcement
22.2—Design assumptions for moment 22.2.3.1 Deformed reinforcement used to resist
and axial strength tensile or compressive forces shall conform to
22.2.1 Equilibrium and strain compatibility 20.2.1.
22.2.1.1 Equilibrium shall be satisfied at each 22.2.3.2 Stress-strain relationship and modulus of
section. elasticity for deformed reinforcement shall be
idealized in accordance with 20.2.2.1 and 20.2.2.2.
22.2.1.2 Strain in concrete and nonprestressed
reinforcement shall be assumed proportional to the 22.2.4 Design assumptions for prestressing
distance from neutral axis. reinforcement
22.2.1.3 Strain in prestressed concrete and in 22.2.4.1 For members with bonded prestressing
bonded and unbonded prestressed reinforcement reinforcement conforming to 20.3.1, stress at
shall include the strain due to effective prestress. nominal flexural strength, 𝑓𝑝𝑠 , shall be calculated in
accordance with 20.3.2.3.
22.2.1.4 Changes in strain for bonded prestressed
reinforcement shall be assumed proportional to the 22.2.4.2 For members with unbonded prestressing
distance from neutral axis. reinforcement conforming to 20.3.1, 𝑓𝑝𝑠 shall be
22.2.2 Design assumptions for concrete calculated in accordance with 20.3.2.4.

22.2.2.1 Maximum strain at the extreme concrete 22.2.4.3 If the embedded length of the prestressing
compression fiber shall be assumed equal to 0.003. strand is less than 𝑙𝑑 , the design strand stress shall
not exceed the value given in 25.4.8.3, as modified
22.2.2.2 Tensile strength of concrete shall be by 25.4.8.1(b).
neglected in flexural and axial strength calculations.
22.3—Flexural strength
22.2.2.3 The relationship between concrete
compressive stress and strain shall be represented 22.3.1 General
by a rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or other
shape that results in prediction of strength in

SBC 304-CR-18 172

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

22.3.1.1 Nominal flexural strength 𝑀𝑛 shall be 𝑃𝑜 = 0.85𝑓𝑐′ (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 (22.4.2.2)
calculated in accordance with the assumptions of
22.2. where 𝐴𝑠𝑡 is the total area of nonprestressed
22.3.2 Prestressed concrete members longitudinal reinforcement.

22.3.2.1 Deformed reinforcement conforming to 22.4.2.3 For prestressed members, 𝑃𝑜 shall be

20.2.1, provided in conjunction with prestressed calculated by:
reinforcement, shall be permitted to be considered 𝑃𝑜 = 0.85𝑓𝑐′ (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 − 𝐴𝑝𝑑 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡
to contribute to the tensile force and be included in
− (𝑓𝑠𝑒 − 0.003𝐸𝑝 )𝐴𝑝𝑡
flexural strength calculations at a stress equal to 𝑓𝑦 .
(22.4.2.3)
22.3.2.2 Other nonprestressed reinforcement shall
be permitted to be considered to contribute to the where 𝐴𝑝𝑡 is the total area of prestressing
flexural strength if a strain compatibility analysis is reinforcement, and 𝐴𝑝𝑑 is the total area occupied by
performed to calculate stresses in such duct, sheathing, and prestressing reinforcement; the
reinforcement. value of 𝑓𝑠𝑒 shall be at least 0.003𝐸𝑝 . For grouted,
post-tensioned tendons, it shall be permitted to
22.3.3 Composite concrete members
assume 𝐴𝑝𝑑 equals 𝐴𝑝𝑡 ·
22.3.3.1 Provisions of 22.3.3 apply to members
constructed in separate placements but connected so 22.4.2.4 Tie reinforcement for lateral support of
that all elements resist loads as a unit. longitudinal reinforcement in compression
members shall satisfy 10.7.6.2 and 25.7.2.
22.3.3.2 For calculation of 𝑀𝑛 for composite slabs
and beams, use of the entire composite section shall 22.4.2.5 Spiral reinforcement for lateral support of
be permitted. longitudinal reinforcement in compression
members shall satisfy 10.7.6.3 and 25.7.3.
22.3.3.3 For calculation of 𝑀𝑛 for composite slabs
and beams, no distinction shall be made between 22.4.3 Maximum axial tensile strength
shored and unshored members. 22.4.3.1 Nominal axial tensile strength of a
22.3.3.4 For calculation of 𝑀𝑛 for composite nonprestressed, composite, or prestressed member,
members where the specified concrete compressive 𝑃𝑛𝑡 , shall not be taken greater than 𝑃𝑛𝑡,𝑚𝑎𝑥
strength of different elements varies, properties of calculated by:
the individual elements shall be used in design. 𝑃𝑛𝑡,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 + (𝑓𝑠𝑒 + ∆𝑓𝑝 )𝐴𝑝𝑡 (22.4.3.1)
Alternatively, it shall be permitted to use the value
of 𝑓𝑐′ for the element that results in the most critical where (𝑓𝑠𝑒 + 𝑓𝑝 ) shall not exceed 𝑓𝑝𝑦 and 𝐴𝑝𝑡 is
value of 𝑀𝑛 . zero for nonprestressed members.
22.4—Axial strength or combined 22.5—One-way shear strength
flexural and axial strength 22.5.1 General
22.4.1 General 22.5.1.1 Nominal one-way shear strength at a
22.4.1.1 Nominal flexural and axial strength shall section, 𝑉𝑛 , shall be calculated by:
be calculated in accordance with the assumptions of
𝑉𝑛 = 𝑉𝑐 + 𝑉𝑠 (22.5.1.1)
22.2.
22.4.2 Maximum axial compressive strength 22.5.1.2 Cross-sectional dimensions shall be
selected to satisfy Eq. (22.5.1.2 ).
22.4.2.1 Nominal axial compressive strength 𝑃𝑛
shall not exceed 𝑃𝑛,𝑚𝑎𝑥 in accordance with Table 𝑉𝑢 ≤  (𝑉𝑐 + 0.66√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑) (22.5.1.2)
22.4.2.1, where 𝑃𝑜 is calculated by Eq. (22.4.2.2)
22.5.1.3 For nonprestressed members, 𝑉𝑐 shall be
for nonprestressed members and composite steel
calculated in accordance with 22.5.5, 22.5.6, or
and concrete members, and by Eq. (22.4.2.3) for
22.5.7.
prestressed members.
22.5.1.4 For prestressed members, 𝑉𝑐 , 𝑉𝑐𝑖 , and 𝑉𝑐𝑤
22.4.2.2 For nonprestressed members and
shall be calculated in accordance with 22.5.8 or
composite steel and concrete members, 𝑃𝑜 shall be
22.5.9.
calculated by:

SBC 304-CR-18 173

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

22.5.1.5 For calculation of, 𝑉𝑐 , 𝑉𝑐𝑖 , and 𝑉𝑐𝑤 ,  shall permitted to use the properties of the element that
be in accordance with 19.2.4. results in the most critical value of 𝑉𝑛 .
22.5.1.6 𝑉𝑠 shall be calculated in accordance with 22.5.4.4 If an entire composite member is assumed
22.5.10. to resist vertical shear, it shall be permitted to
calculate 𝑉𝑐 assuming a monolithically cast member
22.5.1.7 Effect of any openings in members shall be
of the same cross-sectional shape.
considered in calculating 𝑉𝑛 .
22.5.4.5 If an entire composite member is assumed
22.5.1.8 Effect of axial tension due to creep and
to resist vertical shear, it shall be permitted to
shrinkage in restrained members shall be
calculate 𝑉𝑠 assuming a monolithically cast member
considered in calculating 𝑉𝑐 .
of the same cross-sectional shape if shear
22.5.1.9 Effect of inclined flexural compression in reinforcement is fully anchored into the
variable depth members shall be permitted to be interconnected elements in accordance with 25.7.
considered in calculating 𝑉𝑐 .
22.5.5 𝑽𝒄 for nonprestressed members without
22.5.2 Geometric assumptions axial force
22.5.2.1 For calculation of 𝑉𝑐 and 𝑉𝑠 in prestressed 22.5.5.1 For nonprestressed members without axial
members, 𝑑 shall be taken as the distance from the force, 𝑉𝑐 shall be calculated by:
extreme compression fiber to the centroid of
prestressed and any nonprestressed longitudinal 𝑉𝑢 ≤  (𝑉𝑐 + 0.66√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑) (22.5.5.1)
reinforcement but need not be taken less than 0.8ℎ.
unless a more detailed calculation is made in
22.5.2.2 For calculation of 𝑉𝑐 and 𝑉𝑠 in solid, accordance with Table 22.5.5.1.
circular sections, 𝑑 shall be permitted to be taken as
22.5.6 𝑽𝒄 for nonprestressed members with
0.8 times the diameter, and 𝑏𝑤 shall be permitted to
axial compression
be taken as the diameter.
22.5.6.1 For nonprestressed members with axial
22.5.3 Limiting material strengths
compression, 𝑉𝑐 shall be calculated by:
22.5.3.1 The value of √𝑓𝑐′ used to calculate 𝑉𝑐 , 𝑉𝑐𝑖 , 𝑁𝑢
and 𝑉𝑐𝑤 for one-way shear shall not exceed 8.3 MPa 𝑉𝑐 = 0.17 (1 + ) λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (22.5.6.1)
14𝐴𝑔
unless allowed in 22.5.3.2.
unless a more detailed calculation is made in
22.5.3.2 Values of √𝑓𝑐′ greater than 8.3 MPa shall accordance with Table 22.5.6.1, where 𝑁𝑢 is
be permitted in calculating 𝑉𝑐 , 𝑉𝑐𝑖 , and 𝑉𝑐𝑤 for positive for compression.
reinforced or prestressed concrete beams and
concrete joist construction having minimum web 22.5.7 𝑽𝒄 for nonprestressed members with
reinforcement in accordance with 9.6.3.3 or significant axial tension.
9.6.4.2. 22.5.7.1 For nonprestressed members with
22.5.3.3 The values of 𝑓𝑦 and 𝑓𝑦𝑡 used to calculate significant axial tension, 𝑉𝑐 shall be calculated by:
𝑉𝑠 shall not exceed the limits in 20.2.2.4. 𝑁𝑢
𝑉𝑐 = 0.17 (1 + ) λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (22.5.7.1)
22.5.4 Composite concrete members 3.5𝐴𝑔
22.5.4.1 This section shall apply to members where 𝑁𝑢 is negative for tension, and 𝑉𝑐 shall not be
constructed in separate placements but connected so less than zero.
that all elements resist loads as a unit.
22.5.8 𝑽𝒄 for prestressed members
22.5.4.2 For calculation of 𝑉𝑛 for composite
22.5.8.1 This section shall apply to the calculation
members, no distinction shall be made between
of 𝑉𝑐 for post-tensioned and pretensioned members
shored and unshored members.
in regions where the effective force in the
22.5.4.3 For calculation of 𝑉𝑛 for composite prestressed reinforcement is fully transferred to the
members where the specified concrete compressive concrete. For regions of pretensioned members
strength, unit weight, or other properties of different where the effective force in the prestressed
elements vary, properties of the individual elements reinforcement is not fully transferred to the
shall be used in design. Alternatively, it shall be concrete, 22.5.9 shall govern the calculation of 𝑉𝑐 .

SBC 304-CR-18 174

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

22.5.8.2 For prestressed flexural members with 22.5.8.3.4 In composite members, the principal
𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑠𝑒 ≥ 0.4(𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑝𝑢 + 𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦 ), 𝑉𝑐 shall be tensile stress in 22.5.8.3.3 shall be calculated using
calculated in accordance with Table 22.5.8.2, but the cross section that resists live load.
need not be less than the value calculated by Eq. 22.5.9 𝑽𝒄 for pretensioned members in regions
(22.5.1.1). Alternatively, it shall be permitted to of reduced prestress force
calculate 𝑉𝑐 in accordance with 22.5.8.3.
22.5.9.1 When calculating 𝑉𝑐 , the transfer length of
22.5.8.3 For prestressed members, 𝑉𝑐 shall be prestressed reinforcement, 𝑙𝑡𝑟 , shall be assumed to
permitted to be the lesser of 𝑉𝑐𝑖 calculated in be 50𝑑𝑏 for strand and 100𝑑𝑏 for wire.
accordance with 22.5.8.3.1 and 𝑉𝑐𝑤 calculated in
accordance with 22.5.8.3.2 or 22.5.8.3.3. 22.5.9.2 If bonding of strands extends to the end of
the member, the effective prestress force shall be
22.5.8.3.1 The flexure-shear strength 𝑉𝑐𝑖 shall be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the end of the
the greater of (a) and (b): prestressed reinforcement to a maximum at a
𝑉𝑖 𝑀𝑐𝑟𝑒 distance 𝑙𝑡𝑟 from the end of the prestressed
𝑉𝑐𝑖 = 0.05λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑𝑝 + 𝑉𝑑 + reinforcement.
𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥
(a)
(22.5.8.3.1a) 22.5.9.3 At locations corresponding to a reduced
effective prestress force in 22.5.9.2, 𝑉𝑐 shall be
𝑉𝑐𝑖 = 0.14λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 calculated in accordance with (a) through (c):
(b)
(22.5.8.3.1b) (a) The reduced effective prestress force shall
be used to determine the applicability of
22.5.8.2.
where 𝑑𝑝 need not be taken less than 0.80ℎ, the (b) The reduced effective prestress force shall
values of 𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 and 𝑉𝑖 shall be calculated from the be used to calculate 𝑉𝑐𝑤 in 22.5.8.3.
load combinations causing maximum factored (c) The value of 𝑉𝑐 calculated using 22.5.8.2
moment to occur at section considered, and 𝑀𝑐𝑟𝑒 shall not exceed the value of 𝑉𝑐𝑤 calculated
shall be calculated by: using the reduced effective prestress force.
22.5.9.4 If bonding of strands does not extend to the
𝐼
𝑀𝑐𝑟𝑒 = ( ) (0.5λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 𝑓𝑝𝑒 − 𝑓𝑑 ) (22.5.8.3.1c) end of the member, the effective prestress force
𝑦𝑡 shall be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the
22.5.8.3.2 The web-shear strength 𝑉𝑐𝑤 shall be point where bonding commences to a maximum at
calculated by: a distance 𝑙𝑡𝑟 from that point.
22.5.9.5 At locations corresponding to a reduced
𝑉𝑐𝑤 = (0.29λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 0.3𝑓𝑝𝑐 ) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑𝑝 + 𝑉𝑝 (22.5.8.3.2) effective prestress force according to 22.5.9.4, 𝑉𝑐
shall be calculated in accordance with (a) through
(c):
where 𝑑𝑝 need not be taken less than 0.80ℎ, and 𝑉𝑝
(a) The reduced effective prestress force shall
is the vertical component of the effective prestress. be used to determine the applicability of
22.5.8.3.3 As an alternative to 22.5.8.3.2, it shall be 22.5.8.2.
permitted to calculate 𝑉𝑐𝑤 as the shear force (b) The reduced effective prestress force shall
corresponding to dead load plus live load that be used to calculate 𝑉𝑐 in accordance with
results in a principal tensile stress of 0.33λ√𝑓𝑐′ at 22.5.8.3.
location (a) or (b): (c) The value of 𝑉𝑐 calculated using 22.5.8.2
shall not exceed the value of 𝑉𝑐𝑤 calculated
(a) Where the centroidal axis of the prestressed using the reduced effective prestress force.
cross section is in the web, the principal
tensile stress shall be calculated at the 22.5.10 One-way shear reinforcement
centroidal axis. 22.5.10.1 At each section where 𝑉𝑢 > 𝑉𝑐 ,
(b) Where the centroidal axis of the prestressed transverse reinforcement shall be provided such that
cross section is in the flange, the principal Eq. (22.5.10.1) is satisfied.
tensile stress shall be calculated at the
intersection of the flange and the web. 𝑉𝑢
𝑉𝑠 ≥ − 𝑉𝑐 (22.5.10.1)


SBC 304-CR-18 175

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

22.5.10.2 For one-way members reinforced with 22.5.10.5.6 For each circular tie or spiral, 𝐴𝑣 shall
transverse reinforcement, 𝑉𝑠 shall be calculated in be two times the area of the bar or wire within
accordance with 22.5.10.5. spacing 𝑠.
22.5.10.3 For one-way members reinforced with 22.5.10.6 One-way shear strength provided by
bent-up longitudinal bars, 𝑉𝑠 shall be calculated in bent-up longitudinal bars
accordance with 22.5.10.6.
22.5.10.6.1 The center three-fourths of the inclined
22.5.10.4 If more than one type of shear portion of bent-up longitudinal bars shall be
reinforcement is provided to reinforce the same permitted to be used as shear reinforcement in
portion of a member, 𝑉𝑠 shall be the sum of the 𝑉𝑠 nonprestressed members if the angle  between the
values for the various types of shear reinforcement. bent-up bars and the longitudinal axis of the
member is at least 30 degrees.
22.5.10.5 One-way shear strength provided by
transverse reinforcement 22.5.10.6.2 If shear reinforcement consists of a
single bar or a single group of parallel bars having
22.5.10.5.1 In nonprestressed and prestressed
an area 𝐴𝑣 , all bent the same distance from the
members, shear reinforcement satisfying (a), (b), or
support, 𝑉𝑠 shall be the lesser of (a) and (b):
(c) shall be permitted:
(a) Stirrups, ties, or hoops perpendicular to (a) 𝑉𝑠 = 𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑦 sin α (22.5.10.6.2a)
longitudinal axis of member
(b) Welded wire reinforcement with wires
(b) 𝑉𝑠 = 0.25√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (22.5.10.6.2b)
located perpendicular to longitudinal axis where  is the angle between bent-up reinforcement
of member and longitudinal axis of the member.
(c) Spiral reinforcement
22.5.10.6.3 If shear reinforcement consists of a
22.5.10.5.2 Inclined stirrups making an angle of at series of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel
least 45 degrees with the longitudinal axis of the bent-up bars at different distances from the support,
member and crossing the plane of the potential 𝑉𝑠 shall be calculated by Eq. (22.5.10.5.4).
shear crack shall be permitted to be used as shear
reinforcement in nonprestressed members. 22.6—Two-way shear strength
22.5.10.5.3 𝑉𝑠 for shear reinforcement in 22.6.1 General
22.5.10.5.1 shall be calculated by: 22.6.1.1 Provisions 22.6.1 through 22.6.8 apply to
the nominal shear strength of two-way members
𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝑑
𝑉𝑠 = (22.5.10.5.3) with and without shear reinforcement. Where
𝑠 structural steel I- or channel-shaped sections are
used as shearheads, two-way members shall be
where 𝑠 is the spiral pitch or the longitudinal designed for shear in accordance with 22.6.9.
spacing of the shear reinforcement, and 𝐴𝑣 is given
in 22.5.10.5.5 or 22.5.10.5.6. 22.6.1.2 Nominal shear strength for two-way
members without shear reinforcement shall be
22.5.10.5.4 𝑉𝑠 for shear reinforcement in calculated by
22.5.10.5.2 shall be calculated by:
𝑣𝑛 = 𝑣𝑐 (22.6.1.2)
𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦𝑡 (sin α + cos α) 𝑑
𝑉𝑠 = (22.5.10.5.4) 22.6.1.3 Nominal shear strength for two-way
𝑠
members with shear reinforcement other than
where  is the angle between the inclined stirrups shearheads shall be calculated by
and the longitudinal axis of the member, 𝑠 is
measured parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement, 𝑣𝑛 = 𝑣𝑐 + 𝑣𝑠 (22.6.1.3)
and 𝐴𝑣 is given in 22.5.10.5.5.
22.6.1.4 Two-way shear shall be resisted by a
22.5.10.5.5 For each rectangular tie, stirrup, hoop, section with a depth 𝑑 and an assumed critical
or crosstie, 𝐴𝑣 shall be the effective area of all bar perimeter 𝑏𝑜 as defined in 22.6.4.
legs or wires within spacing 𝑠.
22.6.1.5 𝑣𝑐 for two-way shear shall be calculated in
accordance with 22.6.5. For two-way members with

SBC 304-CR-18 176

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

shear reinforcement, 𝑣𝑐 shall not exceed the limits 22.6.4.3 If an opening is located within a column
in 22.6.6.1. strip or closer than 10ℎ from a concentrated load or
reaction area, a portion of 𝑏𝑜 enclosed by straight
22.6.1.6 For calculation of 𝑣𝑐 ,  shall be in
lines projecting from the centroid of the column,
accordance with 19.2.4.
concentrated load or reaction area and tangent to the
22.6.1.7 For two-way members reinforced with boundaries of the opening shall be considered
single- or multiple-leg stirrups, 𝑣𝑠 shall be ineffective.
calculated in accordance with 22.6.7.
22.6.5 Two-way shear strength provided by
22.6.1.8 For two-way members reinforced with concrete
headed shear stud reinforcement, 𝑣𝑠 shall be
22.6.5.1 For nonprestressed two-way members, 𝑣𝑐
calculated in accordance with 22.6.8.
shall be calculated in accordance with 22.6.5.2. For
22.6.2 Effective depth prestressed two-way members, 𝑣𝑐 shall be
calculated in accordance with (a) or (b):
22.6.2.1 For calculation of 𝑣𝑐 and 𝑣𝑠 for two-way
shear, 𝑑 shall be the average of the effective depths (a) 22.6.5.2
in the two orthogonal directions. (b) 22.6.5.5, if the conditions of 22.6.5.4 are
satisfied
22.6.2.2 For prestressed, two-way members, 𝑑 need
not be taken less than 0.8ℎ. 22.6.5.2 𝑣𝑐 shall be calculated in accordance with
Table 22.6.5.2.
22.6.3 Limiting material strengths
22.6.5.3 The value of α𝑠 is 40 for interior columns,
22.6.3.1 The value of √𝑓𝑐′ used to calculate 𝑣𝑐 for 30 for edge columns, and 20 for corner columns.
two-way shear shall not exceed 8.3 MPa.
22.6.5.4 For prestressed, two-way members, it shall
22.6.3.2 The value of 𝑓𝑦𝑡 used to calculate 𝑣𝑠 shall be permitted to calculate 𝑣𝑐 using 22.6.5.5,
not exceed the limits in 20.2.2.4. provided that (a) through (c) are satisfied:
22.6.4 Critical sections for two-way members (a) Bonded reinforcement is provided in
22.6.4.1 For two-way shear, critical sections shall accordance with 8.6.2.3 and 8.7.5.3
be located so that the perimeter 𝑏𝑜 is a minimum but (b) No portion of the column cross section is
need not be closer than 𝑑/2 to (a) and (b): closer to a discontinuous edge than four
times the slab thickness ℎ
(a) Edges or corners of columns, concentrated (c) Effective prestress 𝑓𝑝𝑐 in each direction is
loads, or reaction areas not less than 0.9 MPa
(b) Changes in slab or footing thickness, such
as edges of capitals, drop panels, or shear 22.6.5.5 For prestressed, two-way members
caps conforming to 22.6.5.4, 𝑣𝑐 shall be permitted to be
the lesser of (a) and (b):
22.6.4.1.1 For square or rectangular columns,
concentrated loads, or reaction areas, critical 𝑉𝑝
𝑣𝑐 = 0.29λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 0.3𝑓𝑝𝑐 +
sections for two-way shear in accordance with (a) 𝑏𝑜 𝑑
22.6.4.1(a) and (b) shall be permitted to be defined (22.6.5.5a)
assuming straight sides.
α𝑠 𝑑 𝑉𝑝
22.6.4.1.2 For a circular or regular polygon-shaped 𝑣𝑐 = 0.083 (1.5 + ) λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 0.3𝑓𝑝𝑐 +
(b) 𝑏𝑜 𝑏𝑜 𝑑
column, critical sections for two-way shear in
accordance with 22.6.4.1(a) and (b) shall be (22.6.5.5b)
permitted to be defined assuming a square column where α𝑠 is given in 22.6.5.3; the value of 𝑓𝑝𝑐 is the
of equivalent area. average of 𝑓𝑝𝑐 in the two directions and shall not
22.6.4.2 For two-way members reinforced with exceed 3.5 MPa; 𝑉𝑝 is the vertical component of all
headed shear reinforcement or single- or multi-leg effective prestress forces crossing the critical
stirrups, a critical section with perimeter 𝑏𝑜 located section; and the value of √𝑓𝑐′ shall not exceed 5.8
𝑑/2 beyond the outermost peripheral line of shear MPa.
reinforcement shall also be considered. The shape
of this critical section shall be a polygon selected to 22.6.6 Maximum shear for two-way members
minimize 𝑏𝑜 . with shear reinforcement

SBC 304-CR-18 177

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

22.6.6.1 For two-way members with shear 𝐴𝑣 𝑏𝑜

reinforcement, the value of 𝑣𝑐 calculated at critical ≥ 0.17√𝑓𝑐′ (22.6.8.3)
𝑠 𝑓𝑦𝑡
sections shall not exceed the limits in Table
22.6.6.1. 22.6.9 Design provisions for two-way members
22.6.6.2 For two-way members with shear with shearheads
reinforcement, effective depth shall be selected 22.6.9.1 Each shearhead shall consist of steel
such that 𝑣𝑢 calculated at critical sections does not shapes fabricated with a full penetration weld into
exceed the values in Table 22.6.6.2. identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall
22.6.7 Two-way shear strength provided by not be interrupted within the column section.
single- or multiple-leg stirrups 22.6.9.2 A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70
22.6.7.1 Single- or multiple-leg stirrups fabricated times the web thickness of the steel shape.
from bars or wires shall be permitted to be used as 22.6.9.3 The ends of each shearhead arm shall be
shear reinforcement in slabs and footings satisfying permitted to be cut at angles of at least 30 degrees
(a) and (b): with the horizontal if the plastic flexural strength
(a) 𝑑 is at least 150 mm 𝑀𝑝 of the remaining tapered section is adequate to
(b) 𝑑 is at least 16𝑑𝑏 , where 𝑑𝑏 is the diameter resist the shear force attributed to that arm of the
of the stirrups shearhead.
22.6.7.2 For two-way members with stirrups, 𝑣𝑠 22.6.9.4 Compression flanges of steel shapes shall
shall be calculated by: be within 0.3𝑑 of the compression surface of the
slab.
𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑦𝑡
𝑣𝑠 = (22.6.7.2) 22.6.9.5 The ratio 𝑣 between the flexural stiffness
𝑏𝑜 𝑠 of each shearhead arm and that of the surrounding
where 𝐴𝑣 is the sum of the area of all legs of composite cracked slab section of width (𝑐2 + 𝑑)
reinforcement on one peripheral line that is shall be at least 0.15.
geometrically similar to the perimeter of the column 22.6.9.6 For each arm of the shearhead, 𝑀𝑝 shall
section, and 𝑠 is the spacing of the peripheral lines satisfy:
of shear reinforcement in the direction
perpendicular to the column face. 𝑉𝑢 𝑐1
𝑀𝑝 ≥ [ℎ𝑣 + 𝑣 (𝑙𝑣 − )] (22.6.9.6)
22.6.8 Two-way shear strength provided by 2𝑛 2
headed shear stud reinforcement where  corresponds to tension-controlled
22.6.8.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement shall be members, 𝑛 is the number of shearhead arms, and
permitted to be used as shear reinforcement in slabs 𝑙𝑣 is the minimum length of each shearhead arm
and footings if the placement and geometry of the required to satisfy 22.6.9.8 and 22.6.9.10.
headed shear stud reinforcement satisfies 8.7.7. 22.6.9.7 Nominal flexural strength contributed to
22.6.8.2 For two-way members with headed shear each slab column strip by a shearhead, 𝑀𝑣 shall
stud reinforcement, 𝑣𝑠 shall be calculated by: satisfy:
𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑦𝑡 𝑣 𝑉𝑢 𝑐1
𝑣𝑠 = (22.6.8.2) 𝑀𝑣 ≤ (𝑙𝑣 − ) (22.6.9.7)
𝑏𝑜 𝑠 2𝑛 2

where 𝐴𝑣 is the sum of the area of all shear studs on where  corresponds to tension-controlled
one peripheral line that is geometrically similar to members. However, 𝑀𝑣 shall not exceed the least
the perimeter of the column section, and 𝑠 is the of (a) through (c):
spacing of the peripheral lines of headed shear stud (a) 30 percent of 𝑀𝑢 in each slab column strip
reinforcement in the direction perpendicular to the (b) Change in 𝑀𝑢 in column strip over the
column face. length 𝑙𝑣
22.6.8.3 If headed shear stud reinforcement is (c) 𝑀𝑝 as given in 22.6.9.6
provided, 𝐴𝑣 /𝑠 shall satisfy: 22.6.9.8 The critical section for shear shall be
perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shall cross
each shearhead arm at a distance (3/4)[𝑙𝑣 −

SBC 304-CR-18 178

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

(𝑐1 /2)] from the column face. This critical section 22.7.3.2 In a statically indeterminate structure
shall be located so that 𝑏𝑜 is a minimum, but need where 𝑇𝑢  𝑇𝑐𝑟 ,and a reduction of 𝑇𝑢 can occur
not be closer than 𝑑/2 to the edges of the supporting due to redistribution of internal forces after
column. torsional cracking, it shall be permitted to reduce 𝑇𝑢
to 𝑇𝑐𝑟 where the cracking torsion 𝑇𝑐𝑟 , is calculated
22.6.9.9 If an opening is located within a column
in accordance with 22.7.5.
strip or closer than 10ℎ from a column in slabs with
shearheads, the ineffective portion of 𝑏𝑜 shall be 22.7.3.3 If 𝑇𝑢 is redistributed in accordance with
one-half of that given in 22.6.4.3. 22.7.3.2, the factored moments and shears used for
design of the adjoining members shall be in
22.6.9.10 Factored shear stress due to vertical loads
equilibrium with the reduced torsion.
shall not be greater than 0.33√𝑓𝑐′ on the critical
section given in 22.6.9.8 and shall not be greater 22.7.4 Threshold torsion
than 0.58√𝑓𝑐′ on the critical section closest to the 22.7.4.1 Threshold torsion 𝑇𝑡ℎ shall be calculated in
column given in 22.6.4.1(a). accordance with Table 22.7.4.1(a) for solid cross
sections and Table 22.7.4.1(b) for hollow cross
22.6.9.11 Where transfer of moment is considered,
sections, where 𝑁𝑢 is positive for compression and
the shearhead shall have adequate anchorage to
negative for tension.
transmit 𝑀𝑝 to the column.
22.7.5 Cracking torsion
22.6.9.12 Where transfer of moment is considered,
the sum of factored shear stresses due to vertical 22.7.5.1 Cracking torsion 𝑇𝑐𝑟 shall be calculated in
load acting on the critical section given in 22.6.9.8 accordance with Table 22.7.5.1 for solid and
and the shear stresses resulting from factored hollow cross sections, where 𝑁𝑢 is positive for
moment transferred by eccentricity of shear about compression and negative for tension.
the centroid of the critical section closest to the 22.7.6 Torsional strength
column given in 22.6.4.1(a) shall not exceed
0.33λ√𝑓𝑐′ . 22.7.6.1 For nonprestressed and prestressed
members, 𝑇𝑛 shall be the lesser of (a) and (b):
22.7—Torsional strength
2𝐴𝑜 𝐴𝑡 𝑓𝑦𝑡
22.7.1 General (a) 𝑇𝑛 = cot θ (22.7.6.1a)
𝑠
22.7.1.1 This section shall apply to members if 2𝐴𝑜 𝐴𝑙 𝑓𝑦
𝑇𝑢 ≥ 𝑇𝑡ℎ , where  is given in Chapter 21 and (b) 𝑇𝑛 = tan θ (22.7.6.1b)
𝑝ℎ
threshold torsion 𝑇𝑡ℎ is given in 22.7.4 If 𝑇𝑢 <
𝑇𝑡ℎ , it shall be permitted to neglect torsional where 𝐴𝑜 shall be determined by analysis, θ shall
effects. not be taken less than 30 degrees nor greater than
22.7.1.2 Nominal torsional strength shall be 60 degrees; 𝐴𝑡 is the area of one leg of a closed
calculated in accordance with 22.7.6. stirrup resisting torsion; 𝐴𝑙 is the area of
longitudinal torsional reinforcement; and 𝑝ℎ is the
22.7.1.3 For calculation of 𝑇𝑡ℎ and 𝑇𝑐𝑟 ,  shall be
perimeter of the centerline of the outermost closed
in accordance with 19.2.4.
stirrup.
22.7.2 Limiting material strengths
22.7.6.1.1 In Eq. (22.7.6.1a) and (22.7.6.1b), it
22.7.2.1 The value of √𝑓𝑐′ usedto calculate 𝑇𝑡ℎ and shall be permitted to take 𝐴𝑜 equal to 0.85𝐴𝑜ℎ ·
𝑇𝑐𝑟 , shall not exceed 8.3 MPa. 22.7.6.1.2 In Eq. (22.7.6.1a) and (22.7.6.1b), it
22.7.2.2 The values of 𝑓𝑦 and 𝑓𝑦𝑡 for longitudinal shall be permitted to take  θ equal to (a) or (b):
and transverse torsional reinforcement shall not (a) 45 degrees for nonprestressed members or
exceed the limits in 20.2.2.4. members with 𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑠𝑒 < 0.4(𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑝𝑢 +
22.7.3 Factored design torsion 𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦 )
(b) 37.5 degrees for prestressed members with
22.7.3.1 If 𝑇𝑢  𝑇𝑐𝑟 , and 𝑇𝑢 is required to maintain
𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑠𝑒 ≥ 0.4(𝐴𝑝𝑠 𝑓𝑝𝑢 + 𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦 )
equilibrium, the member shall be designed to resist
𝑇𝑢 . 22.7.7 Cross-sectional limits

SBC 304-CR-18 179

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

22.7.7.1 Cross-sectional dimensions shall be 22.8.3.2 Nominal bearing strength 𝐵𝑛 shall be

selected such that (a) or (b) is satisfied: calculated in accordance with Table 22.8.3.2,
where 𝐴1 is the loaded area, and 𝐴2 is the area of
(a) For solid sections
the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid,
cone, or tapered wedge contained wholly within the
2 support and having its upper base equal to the
𝑉𝑢 2 𝑇𝑢 𝑝ℎ 𝑉𝑐
√( ) +( ) ≤ ( + 0.66√𝑓𝑐′ ) (22.7.7.1a) loaded area. The sides of the pyramid, cone, or
𝑏𝑤 𝑑 1.7𝐴2𝑜ℎ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
tapered wedge shall be sloped 1 vertical to 2
horizontal.
(b) For hollow sections
22.9—Shear friction
𝑉𝑢 𝑇𝑢 𝑝ℎ 𝑉𝑐 22.9.1 General
( )+( 2 ) ≤ ( + 0.66√𝑓𝑐′ ) (22.7.7.1b)
𝑏𝑤 𝑑 1.7𝐴𝑜ℎ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 22.9.1.1 This section shall apply where it is
appropriate to consider shear transfer across any
22.7.7.1.1 For prestressed members, the value of given plane, such as an existing or potential crack,
𝑑 used in 22.7.7.1 need not be taken less than 0.8ℎ. an interface between dissimilar materials, or an
22.7.7.1.2 For hollow sections where the wall interface between two concretes cast at different
thickness varies around the perimeter, Eq. times.
(22.7.7.1b) shall be evaluated at the location where 22.9.1.2 The required area of shear-friction
the term reinforcement across the assumed shear plane, 𝐴𝑣𝑓 ,
𝑉𝑢 𝑇𝑢 𝑝ℎ shall be calculated in accordance with 22.9.4.
( )+( ) Alternatively, it shall be permitted to use shear
𝑏𝑤 𝑑 1.7𝐴2𝑜ℎ
transfer design methods that result in prediction of
is a maximum. strength in substantial agreement with results of
comprehensive tests.
22.7.7.2 For hollow sections where the wall
thickness is less than 𝐴𝑜ℎ /𝑝ℎ , the term (𝑇𝑢 𝑝ℎ / 22.9.1.3 The value of 𝑓𝑦 used to calculate 𝑉𝑛 for
1.7 𝐴2𝑜ℎ ) in Eq. (22.7.7.1b) shall be taken as shear friction shall not exceed the limit in 20.2.2.4.
(𝑇𝑢 /1.7𝐴𝑜ℎ 𝑡), where 𝑡 is the thickness of the wall
22.9.1.4 Surface preparation of the shear plane
of the hollow section at the location where the
assumed for design shall be specified in the
stresses are being checked.
construction documents.
22.8—Bearing 22.9.2 Required strength
22.8.1 General 22.9.2.1 Factored forces across the assumed shear
22.8.1.1 Section 22.8 shall apply to the calculation plane shall be calculated in accordance with the
of bearing strength of concrete members. factored load combinations defined in Chapter 5
and analysis procedures defined in Chapter 6.
22.8.1.2 Bearing strength provisions in 22.8 shall
not apply to post-tensioned anchorage zones or 22.9.3 Design strength
strut-and-tie models. 22.9.3.1 Design shear strength across the assumed
22.8.2 Required strength shear plane shall satisfy:
22.8.2.1 Factored compressive force transferred 𝑉𝑛 ≥ 𝑉𝑢 (22.9.3.1)
through bearing shall be calculated in accordance
with the factored load combinations defined in for each applicable factored load combination.
Chapter 5 and analysis procedures defined in 22.9.4 Nominal shear strength
Chapter 6.
22.9.4.1 Value of 𝑉𝑛 across the assumed shear plane
22.8.3 Design strength shall be calculated in accordance with 22.9.4.2 or
22.8.3.1 Design bearing strength shall satisfy: 22.9.4.3. 𝑉𝑛 shall not exceed the value calculated in
accordance with 22.9.4.4.
𝐵𝑛 ≥ 𝐵𝑢 (22.8.3.1)
22.9.4.2 If shear-friction reinforcement is
for each applicable factored load combination. perpendicular to the shear plane, nominal shear

SBC 304-CR-18 180

 CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

strength across the assumed shear plane shall be 22.9.4.4 The value of 𝑉𝑛 across the assumed shear
calculated by: plane shall not exceed the limits in Table 22.9.4.4.
Where concretes of different strengths are cast
𝑉𝑛 = μ𝐴𝑣𝑓 𝑓𝑦 (22.9.4.2) against each other, the lesser value of 𝑓𝑐′ shall be
used in Table 22.9.4.4.
where 𝐴𝑣𝑓 is the area of reinforcement crossing the
assumed shear plane to resist shear, and  is the 22.9.4.5 Permanent net compression across the
coefficient of friction in accordance with Table shear plane shall be permitted to be added to 𝐴𝑣𝑓 𝑓𝑦 ,
22.9.4.2. the force in the shear-friction reinforcement, to
calculate required 𝐴𝑣𝑓 .
22.9.4.3 If shear-friction reinforcement is inclined
to the shear plane and the shear force induces 22.9.4.6 Area of reinforcement required to resist a
tension in the shear friction reinforcement, nominal net factored tension across an assumed shear plane
shear strength across the assumed shear plane shall shall be added to the area of reinforcement required
be calculated by: for shear friction crossing the assumed shear plane.
𝑉𝑛 = 𝐴𝑣𝑓 𝑓𝑦 (μ sin α + cos α) (22.9.4.3) 22.9.5 Detailing for shear-friction
reinforcement
where α is the angle between shear-friction
22.9.5.1 Reinforcement crossing the shear plane to
reinforcement and assumed shear plane, and μ is the
satisfy 22.9.4 shall be anchored to develop 𝑓𝑦 on
coefficient of friction in accordance with Table
both sides of the shear plane.
22.9.4.2.

SBC 304-CR-18 181

CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

TABLES OF CHAPTER 22

Table 22.2.2.4.3—Values of 𝟏 for equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution

𝒇′𝒄 , MPa 𝟏

17 ≤ 𝑓𝑐′ ≤ 28 0.85 (a)

0.05(𝑓𝑐′ − 28)
28 < 𝑓𝑐′ < 55 0.85 − (b)
7

𝑓𝑐′ ≥ 55 0.65 (c)

Table 22.4.2.1—Maximum axial strength

Member Transverse reinforcement 𝑷𝒏,𝒎𝒂𝒙

Ties conforming to
0.80𝑃𝑜 (a)
22.4.2.4
Nonprestressed
Spirals conforming to
0.85𝑃𝑜 (b)
22.4.2.5

Ties 0.80𝑃𝑜 (c)

Prestressed
Spirals 0.85𝑃𝑜 (d)

Composite steel and concrete

columns in accordance with Chapter All 0.85𝑃𝑜 (e)
10

Table 22.5.5.1—Detailed method for calculating 𝑽𝒄

𝑽𝒄
𝑉𝑢 𝑑
(0.16λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 17ρ𝑤 ) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 [1] (a)
𝑀𝑢

Least of (a), (b), and

(c): (0.16λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 17ρ𝑤 ) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (b)

0.29λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (c)
[l]
𝑀𝑢 occurs simultaneously with 𝑉𝑢 at the section considered.

SBC 304-CR-18 182

CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

Table 22.5.6.1—Detailed method for calculating 𝑽𝒄 for Nonprestressed members with axial
compression
𝑽𝒄

𝑉𝑢 𝑑
(0.16λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 17ρ𝑤 (4ℎ−𝑑) ) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 [1]
𝑀𝑢 −𝑁𝑢 − (a)
8

Lesser of (a) (4ℎ−𝑑)

Equation not applicable if 𝑀𝑢 − 𝑁𝑢 − ≤0
8
and (b)

0.29𝑁𝑢
0.29λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 √1 + (b)
𝐴𝑔
[1]
𝑀𝑢 occurs simultaneously with 𝑉𝑢 at the section considered.

Table 22.5.8.2—Approximate method for calculating 𝑽𝒄

𝑽𝒄

𝑉𝑢 𝑑𝑝
(0.05λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 4.8 ) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 [1] (a)
𝑀𝑢
Least of (a), (b) and (c)
(0.05λ√𝑓𝑐′ + 4.8) 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (b)
0.42λ√𝑓𝑐′ 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 (c)
[l]
𝑀𝑢 occurs simultaneously with 𝑉𝑢 at the section considered.

Table 22.6.5.2—Calculation of 𝒗𝒄 for two-way shear

𝒗𝒄
0.33λ√𝑓𝑐′ (a)
2
0.17 (1 + ) λ√𝑓𝑐′ (b)
Least of (a), (b) and (c): β
α𝑠 𝑑
0.083 (2 + ) λ√𝑓𝑐′ (c)
𝑏𝑜
Note:  is the ratio of long side to short side of the column, concentrated load, or reaction area and 𝑠 , is
given in 22.6.5.3.

SBC 304-CR-18 183

CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

Table 22.6.6.1—Maximum 𝑽𝒄 for two-way members with shear reinforcement

Maximum 𝒗𝒄 at critical Maximum 𝒗𝒄 at

Type of shear
sections defined in critical section
reinforcement
22.6.4.1 defined in 22.6.4.2

Stirrups 0.17λ√𝑓𝑐′ (a) 0.17λ√𝑓𝑐′ (b)

Headed shear stud

0.25λ√𝑓𝑐′ (c) 0.17λ√𝑓𝑐′ (d)
reinforcement

Table 22.6.6.2—Maximum 𝑽𝒖 for two-way members with shear reinforcement

Maximum vu at critical section defined in

Type of shear reinforcement
22.6.4.2

Stirrups 0.5√𝑓𝑐′ (a)

Headed shear stud

0.66√𝑓𝑐′ (b)
reinforcement

Table 22.7.4.1(a)—Threshold torsion for solid cross sections

Type member 𝑻𝒕𝒉

𝐴2𝑐𝑝
Nonprestressed member 0.083λ√𝑓𝑐′ ( ) (a)
𝑝𝑐𝑝

𝐴2𝑐𝑝 𝑓𝑝𝑐
Prestressed member 0.083λ√𝑓𝑐′ ( ) √1 + (b)
𝑝𝑐𝑝 0.33λ√𝑓𝑐′

Nonprestressed member subjected ′

𝐴2𝑐𝑝 𝑁𝑢
0.083λ√𝑓𝑐 ( ) √1 + (c)
to axial force 𝑝𝑐𝑝 0.33𝐴𝑔 λ√𝑓𝑐′

SBC 304-CR-18 184

CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

Table 22.7.4.1(b)—Threshold torsion for hollow cross sections

Type of member Tth

𝐴𝑔2
Nonprestressed member 0.083λ√𝑓𝑐′ ( ) (a)
𝑝𝑐𝑝

𝐴𝑔2 𝑓𝑝𝑐
Prestressed member 0.083λ√𝑓𝑐′ ( ) √1 + (b)
𝑝𝑐𝑝 0.33λ√𝑓𝑐′

Nonprestressed member subjected to 𝐴𝑔2 𝑁𝑢

0.083λ√𝑓𝑐′ ( ) √1 + (c)
axial force 𝑝𝑐𝑝 0.33𝐴𝑔 λ√𝑓𝑐′

Table 22.7.5.1—Cracking torsion

Type of member 𝑻𝒄𝒓

𝐴2𝑐𝑝
Nonprestressed member 0.083λ√𝑓𝑐′ ( ) (a)
𝑝𝑐𝑝

𝐴2𝑐𝑝 𝑓𝑝𝑐
Prestressed member 0.083λ√𝑓𝑐′ ( ) √1 + (b)
𝑝𝑐𝑝 0.33λ√𝑓𝑐′

Nonprestressed member subjected to ′

𝐴2𝑐𝑝 𝑁𝑢
0.083λ√𝑓𝑐 ( ) √1 + (c)
axial force 𝑝𝑐𝑝 0.33𝐴𝑔 λ√𝑓𝑐′

Table 22.8.3.2—Nominal bearing strength

Geometry of bearing area 𝑩𝒏

Supporting surface is wider on all sides Lesser of (a) √𝐴2 /𝐴1 (0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 ) (a)
than the loaded area and (b)
2(0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 ) (b)

Other cases 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 (c)

SBC 304-CR-18 185

CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

Table 22.9.4.2—Coefficients of friction

Coefficient of
Contact surface condition
friction [1]

Concrete placed monolithically 1.4 (a)

Concrete placed against hardened concrete that

is clean, free of laitance, and intentionally roughened to a full amplitude 1.0 (b)
of approximately 6 mm.

Concrete placed against hardened concrete that is clean, free of laitance,

0.6 (c)
and not intentionally roughened

Concrete placed against as-rolled structural steel that is clean, free of

paint, and with shear transferred across the contact surface by headed 0.7 (d)
studs or by welded deformed bars or wires.
[1]
λ = 1.0 for normal-weight concrete; λ = 0.75 for all light-weight concrete. Otherwise, λ is calculated based
on volumetric proportions of light-weight and normal weight aggregate as given in 19.2.4, but shall not
exceed 0.85.

Table 22.9.4.4—Maximum 𝑽𝒏 across the assumed shear plane

Condition Maximum 𝑽𝒏

Normal-weight concrete placed monolithically or 0.2𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑐 (a)

placed against hardened concrete intentionally Least of (a), (b),
(3.3 + 0.08𝑓𝑐′ )𝐴𝑐 (b)
roughened to a full amplitude of approximately 6 and (c)
mm. 11𝐴𝑐 (c)

Lesser of 0.2𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑐 (d)

Other cases
(d) and (e) 5.5𝐴𝑐 (e)

SBC 304-CR-18 186

CHAPTER 22—SECTIONAL STRENGTH

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 187

 CHAPTER 23—STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS

CHAPTER 23—STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS

nodal zone in a strut-and-tie model shall satisfy

23.1—Scope 𝑆𝑛  𝑈, including (a) through (c):
23.1.1 This chapter shall apply to the design of
(a) Struts: 𝐹𝑛𝑠  𝐹𝑢𝑠
structural concrete members, or regions of
(b) Ties: 𝐹𝑛𝑡  𝐹𝑢𝑡
members, where load or geometric discontinuities
(c) Nodal zones: 𝐹𝑛𝑛  𝐹𝑢𝑠
cause a nonlinear distribution of longitudinal strains
within the cross section. 23.3.2  shall be in accordance with 21.2.
23.1.2 Any structural concrete member, or 23.4—Strength of struts
discontinuity region in a member, shall be permitted
to be designed by modeling the member or region 23.4.1 The nominal compressive strength of a
as an idealized truss in accordance with this chapter. strut, 𝐹𝑛𝑠 shall be calculated by (a) or (b):
(a) Strut without longitudinal reinforcement
23.2—General
𝐹𝑛𝑠 = 𝑓𝑐𝑒 𝐴𝑐𝑠 (23.4.1a)
23.2.1 Strut-and-tie models shall consist of struts
and ties connected at nodes to form an idealized (b) Strut with longitudinal reinforcement
truss.
𝐹𝑛𝑠 = 𝑓𝑐𝑒 𝐴𝑐𝑠 + 𝐴′𝑠 𝑓𝑠′ (23.4.1b)
23.2.2 Geometry of the idealized truss shall be
consistent with the dimensions of the struts, ties, where 𝐹𝑛𝑠 shall be evaluated at each end of the strut
nodal zones, bearing areas, and supports. and taken as the lesser value; 𝐴𝑐𝑠 is the cross-
sectional area at the end of the strut under
23.2.3 Strut-and-tie models shall be capable of
consideration; 𝑓𝑐𝑒 is given in 23.4.3; 𝐴′𝑠 is the area
transferring all factored loads to supports or
of compression reinforcement along the length of
adjacent B-regions.
the strut; and 𝑓𝑠′ is the stress in the compression
23.2.4 The internal forces in strut-and-tie models reinforcement at the nominal axial strength of the
shall be in equilibrium with the applied loads and strut. It shall be permitted to take 𝑓𝑠′ equal to 𝑓𝑦 for
reactions. Grade 280 or 420 reinforcement.
23.2.5 Ties shall be permitted to cross struts and 23.4.2 Effective compressive strength of concrete
other ties. in a strut, 𝑓𝑐𝑒 , shall be calculated in accordance with
23.2.6 Struts shall intersect or overlap only at 23.4.3 or 23.4.4.
nodes. 23.4.3 Effective compressive strength of concrete
23.2.7 The angle between the axes of any strut and in a strut, 𝑓𝑐𝑒 , shall be calculated by:
any tie entering a single node shall be at least 25
degrees. 𝑓𝑐𝑒 = 0.85β𝑠 𝑓𝑐′ (23.4.3)
23.2.8 Deep beams designed using strut-and-tie where 𝑠 in accordance with Table 23.4.3,
models shall satisfy 9.9.2.1, 9.9.3.1, and 9.9.4. accounts for the effect of cracking and crack-
23.2.9 Brackets and corbels with shear span-to- control reinforcement on the effective compressive
depth ratio 𝑎𝑣 /𝑑 < 2.0 designed using strut-and-tie strength of the concrete.
models shall satisfy 16.5.2, 16.5.6, and Eq. 23.4.4 If confining reinforcement is provided
(23.2.9). along the length of a strut and its effect is
documented by tests and analyses, it shall be
𝐴𝑠𝑐 ≥ 0.04(𝑓𝑐′ ⁄𝑓𝑦 )(𝑏𝑤 𝑑) (23.2.9) permitted to use an increased value of 𝑓𝑐𝑒 when
calculating 𝐹𝑛𝑠 .
23.3—Design strength
23.3.1 For each applicable factored load
combination, design strength of each strut, tie, and

SBC 304-CR-18 188

 CHAPTER 23—STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS

23.5—Reinforcement crossing bottle- (c) 16𝑑𝑏 of compression reinforcement

shaped struts 23.6.3.2 The first closed tie shall be located not
23.5.1 For bottle-shaped struts designed using more than 0.5𝑠 from the face of the nodal zone at
𝑠 = 0.75, reinforcement to resist transverse each end of a strut.
tension resulting from spreading of the compressive 23.6.3.3 Closed ties shall be arranged such that
force in the strut shall cross the strut axis. It shall be every corner and alternate longitudinal bar shall
permitted to determine the transverse tension by have lateral support provided by crossties or the
assuming that the compressive force in a corner of a tie with an included angle of not more
bottle-shaped strut spreads at a slope of 2 parallel to than 135 degrees and no longitudinal bar shall be
1 perpendicular to the axis of the strut. farther than 150 mm clear on each side along the tie
23.5.2 Reinforcement required in 23.5.1 shall be from such a laterally supported bar.
developed beyond the extent of the strut in 23.6.4 Spirals enclosing compression
accordance with 25.4 reinforcement in struts shall satisfy 25.7.3.
23.5.3 Distributed reinforcement calculated in 23.7—Strength of ties
accordance with Eq. (23.5.3) and crossing the strut
axis shall be deemed to satisfy 23.5.1, if 23.7.1 Tie reinforcement shall be nonprestressed
𝑓𝑐′  40 MPa. or prestressed.
23.7.2 The nominal tensile strength of a tie, 𝐹𝑛𝑡 ,
𝐴𝑠𝑖 shall be calculated by:
∑ sin α𝑖 ≥ 0.003 (23.5.3)
𝑏𝑠 𝑠𝑖
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 𝐴𝑡𝑠 𝑓𝑦 + 𝐴𝑡𝑝 (𝑓𝑠𝑒 + ∆𝑓𝑝 ) (23.7.2)
where 𝐴𝑠𝑖 is the total area of distributed
reinforcement at spacing 𝑠𝑖 in the 𝑖-th direction of where (𝑓𝑠𝑒 + ∆𝑓𝑝 ) shall not exceed 𝑓𝑝𝑦 and 𝐴𝑡𝑝 is
reinforcement crossing a strut at an angle α𝑖 to the zero for nonprestressed members.
axis of a strut, and 𝑏𝑠 is the width of the strut.
23.7.3 In Eq. (23.7.2), it shall be permitted to take
23.5.3.1 Distributed reinforcement required in ∆𝑓𝑝 equal to 420 MPa for bonded prestressed
23.5.3 shall be placed orthogonally at angles α1 and reinforcement and 70 MPa for unbonded
α2 to the axis of the strut, or in one direction at an prestressed reinforcement. Higher values of ∆𝑓𝑝
angle 𝛼1 to the axis of the strut. Where the
shall be permitted if justified by analysis.
reinforcement is placed in only one direction, 𝛼1
shall be at least 40 degrees. 23.8—Tie reinforcement detailing
23.6—Strut reinforcement detailing 23.8.1 The centroidal axis of the tie reinforcement
shall coincide with the axis of the tie assumed in the
23.6.1 Compression reinforcement in struts shall
strut-and-tie model.
be parallel to the axis of the strut and enclosed along
the length of the strut by closed ties in accordance 23.8.2 Tie reinforcement shall be anchored by
with 23.6.3 or by spirals in accordance with 23.6.4. mechanical devices, post-tensioning anchorage
devices, standard hooks, or straight bar
23.6.2 Compression reinforcement in struts shall
development in accordance with 23.8.3.
be anchored to develop 𝑓𝑠′ at the face of the nodal
zone, where 𝑓𝑠′ is calculated in accordance with 23.8.3 Tie reinforcement shall be developed in
23.4.1. accordance with (a) or (b):
23.6.3 Closed ties enclosing compression (a) The difference between the tie force on one
reinforcement in struts shall satisfy 25.7.2 and this side of a node and the tie force on the other
section. side shall be developed within the nodal
zone.
23.6.3.1 Spacing of closed ties, 𝑠, along the length (b) At nodal zones anchoring one or more ties,
of the strut shall not exceed the smallest of (a) the tie force in each direction shall be
through (c): developed at the point where the centroid of
(a) Smallest dimension of cross section of strut the reinforcement in the tie leaves the
(b) 48𝑑𝑏 of bar or wire used for closed tie extended nodal zone.
reinforcement

SBC 304-CR-18 189

 CHAPTER 23—STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS

23.9—Strength of nodal zones by tests and analyses, it shall be permitted to use an

increased value of 𝑓𝑐𝑒 when calculating 𝐹𝑛𝑛 ·
23.9.1 The nominal compressive strength of a
nodal zone, 𝐹𝑛𝑛 , shall be calculated by: 23.9.4 The area of each face of a nodal zone, 𝐴𝑛𝑧 ,
shall be taken as the smaller of (a) and (b):
𝐹𝑛𝑛 = 𝑓𝑐𝑒 𝐴𝑛𝑧 (23.9.1)
(a) Area of the face of the nodal zone
perpendicular to the line of action of 𝐹𝑢𝑠
where 𝑓𝑐𝑒 is defined in 23.9.2 or 23.9.3 and 𝐴𝑛𝑧 is
(b) Area of a section through the nodal zone
given in 23.9.4 or 23.9.5.
perpendicular to the line of action of the
23.9.2 The effective compressive strength of resultant force on the section
concrete at a face of a nodal zone, 𝑓𝑐𝑒 , shall be
23.9.5 In a three-dimensional strut-and-tie model,
calculated by:
the area of each face of a nodal zone shall be at least
that given in 23.9.4, and the shape of each face of
𝑓𝑐𝑒 = 0.85β𝑛 𝑓𝑐′ (23.9.2)
the nodal zone shall be similar to the shape of the
projection of the end of the strut onto the
where β𝑛 shall be in accordance with Table 23.9.2.
corresponding face of the nodal zone.
23.9.3 If confining reinforcement is provided
within the nodal zone and its effect is documented

SBC 304-CR-18 190

CHAPTER 23—STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 23

Table 23.4.3—Strut coefficient 𝒔

Reinforcement crossing
Strut geometry and location 𝒔
a strut

Struts with uniform cross- sectional area along

NA 1.0 (a)
length

Struts located in a region of a member where Satisfying 23.5 0.75 (b)

the width of the compressed concrete at mid
length of the strut can spread laterally (bottle- Not Satisfying 23.5 0.60 (c)
shaped struts)

Struts located in tension members or the tension

NA 0.40 (d)
zones of members

All other cases NA 0.60 (e)

Table 23.9.2—Nodal zone coefficient 𝒏

Configuration of nodal zone 𝒏

Nodal zone bounded by struts, bearing areas, or both 1.0 (a)

Nodal zone anchoring one tie 0.80 (b)

Nodal zone anchoring two or more ties 0.60 (c)

SBC 304-CR-18 191

CHAPTER 23—STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 192

 CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

24.1—Scope 𝑀𝑐𝑟 3 𝑀𝑐𝑟 3

𝐼𝑒 = ( ) 𝐼𝑔 + [1 − ( ) ] 𝐼𝑐𝑟 (24.2.3.5a)
24.1.1 This chapter shall apply to member design 𝑀𝑎 𝑀𝑎
for minimum serviceability, including (a) through where, 𝑀𝑐𝑟 is calculated by
(d):
(a) Deflections due to service-level gravity 𝑓𝑟 𝐼𝑔
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = (24.2.3.5b)
loads (24.2) 𝑦𝑡
(b) Distribution of flexural reinforcement in
one-way slabs and beams to control 24.2.3.6 For continuous one-way slabs and beams,
cracking (24.3) 𝐼𝑒 shall be permitted to be taken as the average of
(c) Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement values obtained from Eq. (24.2.3.5a) for the critical
(24.4) positive and negative moment sections.
(d) Permissible stresses in prestressed flexural
24.2.3.7 For prismatic one-way slabs and beams, 𝐼𝑒
members (24.5)
shall be permitted to be taken as the value obtained
24.2—Deflections due to service-level from Eq. (24.2.3.5a) at midspan for simple and
gravity loads continuous spans, and at the support for cantilevers.
24.2.1 Members subjected to flexure shall be 24.2.3.8 For prestressed Class U slabs and beams as
designed with adequate stiffness to limit deflections defined in 24.5.2, it shall be permitted to calculate
or deformations that adversely affect strength or deflections based on 𝐼𝑔 .
serviceability of a structure. 24.2.3.9 For prestressed Class T and Class C slabs
24.2.2 Deflections calculated in accordance with and beams as defined in 24.5.2, deflection
24.2.3 through 24.2.5 shall not exceed the limits in calculations shall be based on a cracked
Table 24.2.2. transformed section analysis. It shall be permitted
to base deflection calculations on a bilinear
24.2.3 Calculation of immediate deflections
moment-deflection relationship or 𝐼𝑒 in accordance
24.2.3.1 Immediate deflections shall be calculated with Eq. (24.2.3.5a), where 𝑀𝑐𝑟 is calculated as:
using methods or formulas for elastic deflections,
(𝑓𝑟 + 𝑓𝑝𝑒 )𝐼𝑔
considering effects of cracking and reinforcement 𝑀𝑐𝑟 = (24.2.3.9)
on member stiffness. 𝑦𝑡
24.2.3.2 Effect of variation of cross-sectional 24.2.4 Calculation of time-dependent
properties, such as haunches, shall be considered deflections
when calculating deflections. 24.2.4.1 Nonprestressed members
24.2.3.3 Deflections in two-way slab systems shall 24.2.4.1.1 Unless obtained from a more
be calculated taking into account size and shape of comprehensive analysis, additional time-dependent
the panel, conditions of support, and nature of deflection resulting from creep and shrinkage of
restraints at the panel edges. flexural members shall be calculated as the product
24.2.3.4 Modulus of elasticity, 𝐸𝑐 , shall be of the immediate deflection caused by sustained
permitted to be calculated in accordance with load and the factor λ .
19.2.2. ξ
24.2.3.5 For nonprestressed members, effective λ = (24.2.4.1.1)
1 + 50′
moment of inertia, 𝐼𝑒 , shall be calculated by Eq.
(24.2.3.5a) unless obtained by a more 24.2.4.1.2 In Eq. (24.2.4.1.1 ), ′ shall be calculated
comprehensive analysis, but 𝐼𝑒 shall not be greater at midspan for simple and continuous spans, and at
than 𝐼𝑔 . the support for cantilevers.

SBC 304-CR-18 193

 CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

24.2.4.1.3 In Eq. (24.2.4.1.1), values of the time- equal to the calculated stress based on a cracked
dependent factor for sustained loads, ξ, shall be in section analysis minus the decompression stress
accordance with Table 24.2.4.1.3. 𝑓𝑑𝑐 . It shall be permitted to take𝑓𝑑𝑐 equal to the
effective stress in the prestressed reinforcement 𝑓𝑠𝑒 .
24.2.4.2 Prestressed members
The value of 𝑓𝑝𝑠 shall not exceed 250 MPa. If 𝑓𝑝𝑠
24.2.4.2.1 Additional time-dependent deflection of does not exceed 140 MPa, the spacing limits in
prestressed concrete members shall be calculated Table 24.3.2 need not be satisfied.
considering stresses in concrete and reinforcement
under sustained load, and the effects of creep and 24.3.3 If there is only one bonded bar,
shrinkage of concrete and relaxation of prestressed pretensioned strand, or bonded tendon nearest to the
reinforcement. extreme tension face, the width of the extreme
tension face shall not exceed 𝑠 determined in
24.2.5 Calculation of deflections of composite accordance with Table 24.3.2.
concrete construction
24.3.4 If flanges of T-beams are in tension, part of
24.2.5.1 If composite concrete flexural members the bonded flexural tension reinforcement shall be
are shored during construction so that, after removal distributed over an effective flange width as defined
of temporary supports, the dead load is resisted by in accordance with 6.3.2, but not wider than 𝑙𝑛 /10.
the full composite section, it shall be permitted to If the effective flange width exceeds 𝑙𝑛 /10,
consider the composite member equivalent to a additional bonded longitudinal reinforcement shall
monolithically cast member for calculation of be provided in the outer portion of the flange.
deflections.
24.3.5 The spacing of bonded flexural
24.2.5.2 If composite concrete flexural members reinforcement in nonprestressed and Class C
are not shored during construction, the magnitude prestressed one-way slabs and beams subject to
and duration of load before and after composite fatigue, designed to be watertight, or exposed to
action becomes effective shall be considered in corrosive environments, shall be selected based on
calculating time-dependent deflections. investigations and precautions specific to those
24.2.5.3 Deflections resulting from differential conditions and shall not exceed the limits of 24.3.2.
shrinkage of precast and cast-in-place components, 24.4—Shrinkage and temperature
and of axial creep effects in prestressed members, reinforcement
shall be considered.
24.4.1 Reinforcement to resist shrinkage and
24.3—Distribution of flexural temperature stresses shall be provided in one-way
reinforcement in one-way slabs and slabs in the direction perpendicular to the flexural
beams reinforcement in accordance with 24.4.3 or 24.4.4.
24.3.1 Bonded reinforcement shall be distributed 24.4.2 If shrinkage and temperature movements
to control flexural cracking in tension zones of are restrained, the effects of 𝑇 shall be considered
nonprestressed and Class C prestressed slabs and in accordance with 5.3.6.
beams reinforced for flexure in one direction only.
24.4.3 Nonprestressed reinforcement
24.3.2 Spacing of bonded reinforcement closest to
the tension face shall not exceed the limits in Table 24.4.3.1 Deformed reinforcement to resist
24.3.2, where 𝑐𝑐 is the least distance from surface shrinkage and temperature stresses shall conform to
of deformed or prestressed reinforcement to the Table 20.2.2.4a and shall be in accordance with
tension face. Calculated stress in deformed 24.4.3.2 through 24.4.3.5.
reinforcement, 𝑓𝑠 , and calculated change in stress in 24.4.3.2 The ratio of deformed shrinkage and
bonded prestressed reinforcement, 𝑓𝑝𝑠 shall be in temperature reinforcement area to gross concrete
accordance with 24.3.2.1 and 24.3.2.2, respectively. area shall satisfy the limits in Table 24.4.3.2.
24.3.2.1 Stress fs in deformed reinforcement closest 24.4.3.3 The spacing of deformed shrinkage and
to the tension face at service loads shall be temperature reinforcement shall not exceed the
calculated based on the unfactored moment, or it lesser of 4ℎ and 300 mm.
shall be permitted to take 𝑓𝑠 as (2⁄3)𝑓𝑦 .
24.4.3.4 At all sections where required, deformed
24.3.2.2 Change in stress, 𝑓𝑝𝑠 , in bonded reinforcement used to resist shrinkage and
prestressed reinforcement at service loads shall be temperature stresses shall develop 𝑓𝑦 in tension.

SBC 304-CR-18 194

 CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

24.4.3.5 For one-way precast slabs and one-way 24.5.2.1 Prestressed flexural members shall be
precast, prestressed wall panels, shrinkage and classified as Class U, T, or C in accordance with
temperature reinforcement is not required in the Table 24.5.2.1, based on the extreme fiber stress in
direction perpendicular to the flexural tension 𝑓𝑡 in the precompressed tension zone
reinforcement if (a) through (c) are satisfied. calculated at service loads assuming an uncracked
section.
(a) Precast members are not wider than 3.7 m
(b) Precast members are not mechanically 24.5.2.2 For Class U and T members, stresses at
connected to cause restraint in the service loads shall be permitted to be calculated
transverse direction using the uncracked section.
(c) Reinforcement is not required to resist
24.5.2.3 For Class C members, stresses at service
transverse flexural stresses
loads shall be calculated using the cracked
24.4.4 Prestressed reinforcement transformed section.
24.4.4.1 Prestressed reinforcement to resist 24.5.3 Permissible concrete stresses at transfer
shrinkage and temperature stresses shall conform to of prestress
Table 20.3.2.2, and the effective prestress after
24.5.3.1 Calculated extreme concrete fiber stress in
losses shall provide an average compressive stress
compression immediately after transfer of prestress,
of at least 0.7 MPa on gross concrete area.
but before time-dependent prestress losses, shall not
24.5—Permissible stresses in exceed the limits in Table 24.5.3.1.
prestressed concrete flexural members 24.5.3.2 Calculated extreme concrete fiber stress in
24.5.1 General tension immediately after transfer of prestress, but
before time-dependent prestress losses, shall not
24.5.1.1 Concrete stresses in prestressed flexural exceed the limits in Table 24.5.3.2, unless
members shall be limited in accordance with 24.5.2 permitted by 24.5.3.2.1.
through 24.5.4 unless it is shown by test or analysis
that performance will not be impaired. 24.5.3.2.1 The limits in Table 24.5.3.2 shall be
permitted to be exceeded where additional bonded
24.5.1.2 For calculation of stresses at transfer of reinforcement in the tension zone resists the total
prestress, at service loads, and at cracking loads, tensile force in the concrete calculated with the
elastic theory shall be used with assumptions (a) assumption of an uncracked section.
and (b):
24.5.4 Permissible concrete compressive
(a) Strains vary linearly with distance from stresses at service loads
neutral axis in accordance with 22.2.1
(b) At cracked sections, concrete resists no 24.5.4.1 For Class U and T members, the calculated
tension extreme concrete fiber stress in compression at
service loads, after allowance for all prestress
24.5.2 Classification of prestressed flexural losses, shall not exceed the limits in Table 24.5.4.1.
members

SBC 304-CR-18 195

CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 24

Table 24.2.2—Maximum permissible calculated deflections

Deflection
Member Condition Deflection to be considered
limitation

Not supporting or attached to Immediate deflection due to maximum of

Flat roofs 𝑙/180[1]
nonstructural elements likely to be 𝐿𝑟 and 𝑅

Floors damaged by large deflections Immediate deflection due to 𝐿 𝑙/360

Likely to be That part of the total deflection occurring

Supporting or damaged by large after attachment of nonstructural elements, 𝑙/480[3]
Roof or attached to non- deflections which is the sum of the time-dependent
floors structural Not likely to be deflection due to all sustained loads and
elements damaged by large the immediate deflection due to any 𝑙/240[4]
deflections additional live load[2]

[1] Limit not intended to safeguard against ponding. Ponding shall be checked by calculations of deflection,
including added deflections due to ponded water, and considering time dependent effects of sustained
loads, camber, construction tolerances, and reliability of provisions for drainage.
[2] Time-dependent deflection shall be calculated in accordance with 24.2.4, but shall be permitted to be
reduced by amount of deflection calculated to occur before attachment of nonstructural elements. This
amount shall be calculated on basis of accepted engineering data relating to time-deflection
characteristics of members similar to those being considered.
[3] Limit shall be permitted to be exceeded if measures are taken to prevent damage to supported or attached
elements.
[4] Limit shall not exceed tolerance provided for nonstructural elements.

Table 24.2.4.1.3—Time-dependent factor for sustained loads

Sustained load duration, months Time-dependent factor 𝛏

3 1.0

6 1.2

12 1.4

60 or more 2.0

SBC 304-CR-18 196

CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

Table 24.3.2—Maximum spacing of bonded reinforcement in nonprestressed and class C prestressed

one-way slabs and beams

Reinforcement type Maximum spacing s

280
380 ( ) − 2.5𝑐𝑐
𝑓𝑠
Deformed bars or wires Lesser of:
280
300 ( )
𝑓𝑠

2 280
( ) [380 ( ) − 2.5𝑐𝑐 ]
3 𝑓𝑝𝑠
Bonded prestressed
Lesser of:
reinforcement 2 280
( ) [300 ( )]
3 𝑓𝑝𝑠

5 280
( ) [380 ( ) − 2.5𝑐𝑐 ]
Combined deformed bars or 6 𝑓𝑝𝑠
wires and bonded prestressed Lesser of:
reinforcement 5 280
( ) [300 ( )]
6 𝑓𝑝𝑠

Table 24.4.3.2—Minimum ratios of deformed shrinkage and temperature reinforcement area to gross
concrete area

Reinforcement type 𝒇𝒚 , MPa Minimum reinforcement ratio

Deformed bars < 420 0.0020

0.0018 × 420
Deformed bars or welded wire 𝑓𝑦
 420 Greater of:
reinforcement
0.0014

Table 24.5.2.1—Classification of prestressed flexural members based on 𝒇𝒕

Assumed behavior Class Limits of 𝑓𝑡

Uncracked U[1] 𝑓𝑡 ≤ 0.62√𝑓𝑐′

Transition between uncracked and cracked T 0.62√𝑓𝑐′ < 𝑓𝑡 ≤ 1.0√𝑓𝑐′

Cracked C 𝑓𝑡 > 1.0√𝑓𝑐′

Prestressed two-way slabs shall be designed as Class U with 𝑓𝑡 ≤ 0.5√𝑓𝑐′

[1]

SBC 304-CR-18 197

CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

Table 24.5.3.1—Concrete compressive stress limits immediately after transfer of prestress

Location Concrete compressive stress limits

End of simply-supported members 0.70𝑓𝑐𝑖′

All other locations 0.60𝑓𝑐𝑖′

Table 24.5.3.2—Concrete tensile stress limits immediately after transfer of prestress, without
additional bonded reinforcement in tension zone

Location Concrete tensile stress limits

Ends of simply-supported members 0.50√𝑓𝑐𝑖′

All other locations 0.25√𝑓𝑐𝑖′

Table 24.5.4.1—Concrete compressive stress limits at service loads

Load condition Concrete compressive stress limits

Prestress plus sustained load 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑖′

Prestress plus total load 0.60𝑓𝑐𝑖′

SBC 304-CR-18 198

CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

Table R24.5.2.1—Serviceability design requirements

Prestressed
Nonprestressed
Class U Class T Class C

Transition between
Assumed behavior Uncracked Cracked Cracked
uncracked and cracked

Section properties for Cracked

Gross section Gross section
stress calculation at section No requirement
24.5.2.2 24.5.2.2
service loads 24.5.2.3

Allowable stress at
24.5.3 24.5.3 24.5.3 No requirement
transfer

Allowable
compressive stress No
24.5.4 24.5.4 No requirement
based on uncracked requirement
section properties

Tensile stress at No
≤ 0.62√𝑓𝑐′ 0.62√𝑓𝑐′ < 𝑓𝑡 ≤ 1.0√𝑓𝑐′ No requirement
service loads 24.5.2.1 requirement

24.2.3.9,
24.2.3.8, 24.2.4.2 24.2.3, 24.2.4.1
Deflection calculation 24.2.3.9, 24.2.4.2
24.2.4.2 Cracked Effective moment of
basis Cracked section, bilinear
Gross section section, inertia
bilinear

No
Crack control No requirement 24.3 24.3
requirement

Computation of 𝑓𝑝𝑠 Cracked

𝑀/(𝐴𝑠  𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑟𝑚),
or 𝑓𝑠 for crack   section
or 2/3𝑓𝑦
control analysis

Side skin No
No requirement 9.7.2.3 9.7.2.3
reinforcement requirement

SBC 304-CR-18 199

CHAPTER 24—SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 200

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

25.3—Standard hooks, seismic hooks,

25.1—Scope
crossties, and minimum inside bend
25.1.1 This chapter shall apply to reinforcement diameters
details, including:
25.3.1 Standard hooks for the development of
(a) Minimum spacing deformed bars in tension shall conform to Table
(b) Standard hooks, seismic hooks, and 25.3.1.
crossties
(c) Development of reinforcement 25.3.2 Minimum inside bend diameters for bars
(d) Splices used as transverse reinforcement and standard
(e) Bundled reinforcement hooks for bars used to anchor stirrups, ties, hoops,
(f) Transverse reinforcement and spirals shall conform to Table 25.3.2. Standard
(g) Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers hooks shall enclose longitudinal reinforcement.

25.1.2 Provisions of 25.9 shall apply to anchorage 25.3.3 Minimum inside bend diameters for welded
zones for post-tensioned tendons. wire reinforcement used as stirrups or ties shall not
be less than 4𝑑𝑏 for deformed wire larger than D6
25.2—Minimum spacing of and 2𝑑𝑏 for all other wires. Bends with inside
reinforcement diameter of less than 8𝑑𝑏 shall not be less than 4𝑑𝑏
25.2.1 For parallel nonprestressed reinforcement from nearest welded intersection.
in a horizontal layer, clear spacing shall be at least 25.3.4 Seismic hooks used to anchor stirrups, ties,
the greatest of 25 mm, 𝑑𝑏 , and (4⁄3)𝑑𝑎𝑔𝑔 · hoops, and crossties shall be in accordance with (a)
and (b):
25.2.2 For parallel nonprestressed reinforcement
placed in two or more horizontal layers, (a) Minimum bend of 90 degrees for circular
reinforcement in the upper layers shall be placed hoops and 135 degrees for all other hoops
directly above reinforcement in the bottom layer (b) Hook shall engage longitudinal
with a clear spacing between layers of at least 25 reinforcement and the extension shall
mm. project into the interior of the stirrup or
hoop
25.2.3 For longitudinal reinforcement in columns,
pedestals, struts, and boundary elements in walls, 25.3.5 Crossties shall be in accordance with (a)
clear spacing between bars shall be at least the through (e):
greatest of 40 mm, 1.5𝑑𝑏 , and (4⁄3)𝑑𝑎𝑔𝑔 ·
(a) Crosstie shall be continuous between ends
25.2.4 For pretensioned strands at ends of a (b) There shall be a seismic hook at one end
member, minimum center-to-center spacing s shall (c) There shall be a standard hook at other end
be the greater of the value in Table 25.2.4, and with minimum bend of 90 degrees
[(4⁄3)𝑑𝑎𝑔𝑔 + 𝑑𝑏 ]. (d) Hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal
bars
25.2.5 For pretensioned wire at ends of a member, (e) 90-degree hooks of two successive
minimum center-to-center spacing s shall be the crossties engaging the same longitudinal
greater of 5𝑑𝑏 and [(4⁄3)𝑑𝑎𝑔𝑔 + 𝑑𝑏 ]. bars shall be alternated end for end, unless
25.2.6 Reduced vertical spacing including crossties satisfy 18.6.4.3 or 25.7.1.6.1.
bundling of prestressed reinforcement shall be 25.4—Development of reinforcement
permitted in the middle portion of a span.
25.4.1 General
25.4.1.1 Calculated tension or compression in
reinforcement at each section of a member shall be
developed on each side of that section by

SBC 304-CR-18 201

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

embedment length; hook, headed deformed bar,

0.24𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑒 ψ𝑐 ψ𝑟
mechanical device, or a combination thereof. (a) ( ) 𝑑𝑏 with ψ𝑒 , ψ𝑐 , ψ𝑟 and λ
λ√𝑓𝑐′
25.4.1.2 Hooks and heads shall not be used to
develop bars in compression. given in 25.4.3.2.
(b) 8𝑑𝑏
25.4.1.3 Development lengths do not require a (c) 150 mm
strength reduction factor .
25.4.3.2 For the calculation of 𝑙𝑑ℎ , modification
25.4.1.4 The values of √𝑓𝑐′ used to calculate factors shall be in accordance with Table 25.4.3.2.
development length shall not exceed 8.3 MPa. Factors 𝑐 and 𝑟 shall be permitted to be taken as
25.4.2 Development of deformed bars and 1.0. At discontinuous ends of members, 25.4.3.3
deformed wires in tension shall apply.
25.4.2.1 Development length 𝑙𝑑 for deformed bars 25.4.3.3 For bars being developed by a standard
and deformed wires in tension shall be the greater hook at discontinuous ends of members with both
of (a) and (b): side cover and top (or bottom) cover to hook less
than 65 mm, (a) through (c) shall be satisfied:
(a) Length calculated in accordance with
25.4.2.2 or 25.4.2.3 using the applicable (a) The hook shall be enclosed along 𝑙𝑑ℎ
modification factors of 25.4.2.4 within ties or stirrups perpendicular to 𝑙𝑑ℎ
(b) 300 mm at 𝑠 ≤ 3𝑑𝑏
(b) The first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent
25.4.2.2 For deformed bars or deformed wires, 𝑙𝑑 portion of the hook within 2𝑑𝑏 of the
shall be calculated in accordance with Table outside of the bend
25.4.2.2. (c) 𝑟 shall be taken as 1.0 in calculating 𝑙𝑑ℎ
25.4.2.3 For deformed bars or deformed wires, 𝑙𝑑 in accordance with 25.4.3.1(a)
shall be calculated by:
where 𝑑𝑏 is the nominal diameter of the hooked bar.
25.4.4 Development of headed deformed bars
𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑡 ψ𝑒 ψ𝑠 in tension
𝑙𝑑 = [ ] 𝑑𝑏 (25.4.2.3a)
1.1λ√𝑓𝑐′ (𝑐𝑏 + 𝐾𝑡𝑟 ) 25.4.4.1 Use of heads to develop deformed bars in
𝑑𝑏
tension shall be permitted if conditions (a) through
in which the confinement term (𝑐𝑏 + 𝐾𝑡𝑟 )⁄𝑑𝑏 shall (g) are satisfied:
not exceed 2.5, and (a) Bar shall conform to 20.2.1.3
(b) Bar 𝑓𝑦 shall not exceed 420 MPa
40𝐴𝑡𝑟
𝐾𝑡𝑟 = (25.4.2.3b) (c) Bar size shall not exceed Dia 36
𝑠𝑛 (d) Net bearing area of head 𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑔 shall be at
where 𝑛 is the number of bars or wires being least 4𝐴𝑏
developed or lap spliced along the plane of splitting. (e) Concrete shall be normalweight
It shall be permitted to use 𝐾𝑡𝑟 = 0 as a design (f) Clear cover for bar shall be at least 2𝑑𝑏
simplification even if transverse reinforcement is (g) Clear spacing between bars shall be at least
present. 4𝑑𝑏

25.4.2.4 For the calculation of 𝑙𝑑 , modification 25.4.4.2 Development length 𝑙𝑑𝑡 for headed
factors shall be in accordance with Table 25.4.2.4. deformed bars in tension shall be the greatest of (a)
through (c):
25.4.3 Development of standard hooks in
tension 0.19𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑒
(a) ( ) 𝑑𝑏 , with 𝑒 , given in 25.4.4.3
25.4.3.1 Development length 𝑙𝑑ℎ for deformed bars √𝑓𝑐′
in tension terminating in a standard hook shall be
and value of 𝑓𝑐′ shall not exceed 40 MPa
the greater of (a) through (c):
(b) 8𝑑𝑏
(c) 150 mm

SBC 304-CR-18 202

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

25.4.4.3 Modification factor 𝑒 in 25.4.4.2(a) shall deformed wire reinforcement in the direction of the
be 1.2 for epoxy-coated or zinc and epoxy dual- development length, the reinforcement shall be
coated bars and 1.0 for uncoated or zinc-coated developed in accordance with 25.4.7.
(galvanized) bars. 25.4.6.6 Zinc-coated (galvanized) welded
25.4.5 Development of mechanically anchored deformed wire reinforcement shall be developed in
deformed bars in tension accordance with 25.4.7.
25.4.5.1 Any mechanical attachment or device 25.4.7 Development of welded plain wire
capable of developing 𝑓𝑦 of deformed bars shall be reinforcement in tension
permitted, provided it is approved by the building 25.4.7.1 Development length 𝑙𝑑 for welded plain
official in accordance with 1.10. Development of wire reinforcement in tension measured from the
deformed bars shall be permitted to consist of a critical section to the outermost cross wire shall be
combination of mechanical anchorage plus the greater of (a) and (b) and shall require a
additional embedment length of the deformed bars minimum of two cross wires within 𝑙𝑑 .
between the critical section and the mechanical
attachment or device. (a) Length calculated in accordance with
25.4.7.2
25.4.6 Development of welded deformed wire (b) 150 mm
reinforcement in tension
25.4.7.2 𝑙𝑑 shall be the greater of (a) and (b):
25.4.6.1 Development length 𝑙𝑑 for welded
deformed wire reinforcement in tension measured (a) spacing of cross wires + 50 mm
from the critical section to the end of wire shall be 𝑓𝑦 𝐴
the greater of (a) and (b), where wires in the (b) 3.3( ) ( 𝑏 )where s is the spacing
𝑠
direction of the development length shall all be 𝜆√𝑓𝑐′

deformed MD200 or smaller. between the wires to be developed, and λ is

(a) Length calculated in accordance with given in Table 25.4.2.4.
25.4.6.2 25.4.8 Development of pretensioned seven-wire
(b) 200 mm strands in tension
25.4.6.2 For welded deformed wire reinforcement, 25.4.8.1 Development length 𝑙𝑑 of pretensioned
𝑙𝑑 shall be calculated from 25.4.2.2 or 25.4.2.3, seven-wire strands in tension shall be in accordance
times welded deformed wire reinforcement factor with (a) and (b):
𝑤 from 25.4.6.3 or 25.4.6.4. For epoxy-coated
welded deformed wire reinforcement meeting 𝑓𝑠𝑒 𝑓𝑝𝑠 − 𝑓𝑠𝑒
(a) 𝑙𝑑 = ( )𝑑 + ( ) 𝑑𝑏 (25.4.8.1)
25.4.6.3, it shall be permitted to use 𝑒 = 1.0 in 21 𝑏 7
25.4.2.2 or 25.4.2.3. (b) If bonding of a strand does not extend to
25.4.6.3 For welded deformed wire reinforcement end of member, and design includes tension
with at least one cross wire within 𝑙𝑑 that is at least at service loads in the precompressed
50 mm from the critical section, 𝑤 shall be the tension zone, 𝑙𝑑 calculated by Eq. (25.4.8.1 )
greater of (a) and (b), and need not exceed 1.0: shall be doubled.
𝑓𝑦 −240 25.4.8.2 Seven-wire strand shall be bonded at least
(a) ( ) 𝑙𝑑 beyond the critical section except as provided in
𝑓𝑦
5𝑑𝑏 25.4.8.3.
(b) ( )
𝑠
25.4.8.3 Embedment less than 𝑙𝑑 shall be permitted
where 𝑠 is the spacing between the wires to be at a section of a member, provided the design strand
developed. stress at that section does not exceed values
25.4.6.4 For welded deformed wire reinforcement obtained from the bilinear relationship defined by
with no cross wires within 𝑙𝑑 or with a single cross Eq. (25.4.8.1).
wire less than 50 mm from the critical section, 𝑤 25.4.9 Development of deformed bars and
shall be taken as 1.0. deformed wires in compression
25.4.6.5 Where any plain wires, or deformed wires
larger than MD200, are present in the welded

SBC 304-CR-18 203

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

25.4.9.1 Development length 𝑙𝑑𝑐 for deformed bars 25.5.1.3 For noncontact splices in flexural
and deformed wires in compression shall be the members, the transverse center-to-center spacing of
greater of (a) and (b) spliced bars shall not exceed the lesser of one-fifth
the required lap splice length and 150 mm.
(a) Length calculated in accordance with
25.4.9.2 25.5.1.4 Reduction of development length in
(b) 200 mm accordance with 25.4.10.1 is not permitted in
calculating lap splice lengths.
25.4.9.2 𝑙𝑑𝑐 shall be the greater of (a) and (b), using
the modification factors of 25.4.9.3: 25.5.1.5 Lap splices of bundled bars shall be in
accordance with 25.6.1.7.
0.24𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑟
(a) ( ) 𝑑𝑏 , 25.5.2 Lap splice lengths of deformed bars and
λ√𝑓𝑐′ deformed wires in tension
(b) 0.043𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑟 𝑑𝑏 25.5.2.1 Tension lap splice length 𝑙𝑠𝑡 for deformed
bars and deformed wires in tension shall be in
25.4.9.3 For the calculation of 𝑙𝑑𝑐 , modification
accordance with Table 25.5.2.1 , where 𝑙𝑑 shall be
factors shall be in accordance with Table 25.4.9.3,
in accordance with 25.4.2.1(a).
except 𝑟 , shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0.
25.5.2.2 If bars of different size are lap spliced in
25.4.10 Reduction of development length for tension, 𝑙𝑠𝑡 shall be the greater of 𝑙𝑑 of the larger
excess reinforcement bar and 𝑙𝑠𝑡 of the smaller bar.
25.4.10.1 Reduction of development lengths 25.5.3 Lap splice lengths of welded deformed
defined in 25.4.2.1(a), 25.4.3.1(a), 25.4.6.1(a), wire reinforcement in tension
25.4.7.1(a), and 25.4.9.1(a) shall be permitted by
use of the ratio (𝐴𝑠,𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑑 )/ (𝐴𝑠,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 ), except 25.5.3.1 Tension lap splice length 𝑙𝑠𝑡 of welded
where prohibited by 25.4.10.2. The modified deformed wire reinforcement in tension with cross
development lengths shall not be less than the wires within the lap splice length shall be the greater
respective minimums specified in 25.4.2.1(b), of 1.3𝑙𝑑 and 200 mm, where 𝑙𝑑 is calculated in
25.4.3.1(b), 25.4.3.1(c), 25.4.6.1(b), 25.4.7.1(b), accordance with 25.4.6.1(a), provided (a) and (b)
and 25.4.9.1(b). are satisfied:
25.4.10.2 A reduction of development length in (a) Overlap between outermost cross wires of
accordance with 25.4.10.1 is not permitted for (a) each reinforcement sheet shall be at least 50
through (e). mm
(b) Wires in the direction of the development
(a) At noncontinuous supports length shall all be deformed MD200 or
(b) At locations where anchorage or smaller
development for 𝑓𝑦 is required
(c) Where bars are required to be continuous 25.5.3.1.1 If 25.5.3.1(a) is not satisfied, 𝑙𝑠𝑡 shall be
(d) For headed and mechanically anchored calculated in accordance with 25.5.2.
deformed reinforcement 25.5.3.1.2 If 25.5.3.1(b) is not satisfied, 𝑙𝑠𝑡 shall be
(e) In seismic-force-resisting systems in calculated in accordance with 25.5.4.
structures assigned to Seismic Design
Categories D, E, or F 25.5.3.1.3 If the welded deformed wire
reinforcement is zinc-coated (galvanized), 𝑙𝑠𝑡 shall
25.5—Splices be calculated in accordance with 25.5.4.
25.5.1 General 25.5.4 Lap splice lengths of welded plain wire
25.5.1.1 Lap splices shall not be permitted for bars reinforcement in tension
larger than Dia 36, except as provided in 25.5.5.3. 25.5.4.1 Tension lap splice length 𝑙𝑠𝑡 of welded
25.5.1.2 For contact lap splices, minimum clear plain wire reinforcement in tension between
spacing between the contact lap splice and adjacent outermost cross wires of each reinforcement sheet
splices or bars shall be in accordance with the shall be at least the greatest of (a) through (c):
requirements for individual bars in 25.2.1. (a) 𝑠 + 50 mm
(b) 1.5𝑙𝑑
(c) 150 mm

SBC 304-CR-18 204

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

where 𝑠 is the spacing of cross wires and 𝑙𝑑 is 25.5.7.1 A mechanical or welded splice shall
calculated in accordance with 25.4.7.2(b). develop in tension or compression, as required, at
least 1.25𝑓𝑦 of the bar.
25.5.4.2 If 𝐴𝑠,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 ⁄𝐴𝑠,𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑑 ≥ 2.0 over the
length of the splice, 𝑙𝑠𝑡 measured between 25.5.7.2 Welding of reinforcing bars shall conform
outermost cross wires of each reinforcement sheet to 26.6.4.
shall be permitted to be the greater of (a) and (b).
25.5.7.3 Mechanical or welded splices need not be
(a) 1.5𝑙𝑑 staggered except as required by 25.5.7.4.
(b) 50 mm 25.5.7.4 Splices in tension tie members shall be
where 𝑙𝑑 is calculated by 25.4.7.2(b). made with a mechanical or welded splice in
accordance with 25.5.7.1. Splices in adjacent bars
25.5.5 Lap splice lengths of deformed bars in
shall be staggered at least 750 mm.
compression
25.6—Bundled reinforcement
25.5.5.1 Compression lap splice length 𝑙𝑠𝑐 of Dia
36 or smaller deformed bars in compression shall be 25.6.1 Nonprestressed reinforcement
calculated in accordance with (a) or (b):
25.6.1.1 Groups of parallel reinforcing bars
(a) For 𝑓𝑦  420 MPa: 𝑙𝑠𝑐 is the greater of bundled in contact to act as a unit shall be limited to
0.071 𝑓𝑦 𝑑𝑏 and 300 mm four in any one bundle.
(b) For 𝑓𝑦 > 420 MPa: 𝑙𝑠𝑐 is the greater of 25.6.1.2 Bundled bars shall be enclosed within
(0.13 𝑓𝑦 − 24)𝑑𝑏 and 300 mm transverse reinforcement. Bundled bars in
compression members shall be enclosed by
For 𝑓𝑐′ < 21 MPa, the length of lap shall be transverse reinforcement at least Dia 12 in size.
increased by one-third.
25.6.1.3 Bars larger than Dia 36 shall not be
25.5.5.2 Compression lap splices shall not be used bundled in beams.
for bars larger than Dia 36, except as permitted in
25.5.5.3. 25.6.1.4 Individual bars within a bundle terminated
within the span of flexural members shall terminate
25.5.5.3 Compression lap splices of Dia 45 or Dia at different points with at least 40𝑑𝑏 stagger.
50 bars to Dia 36 or smaller bars shall be permitted
and shall be in accordance with 25.5.5.4. 25.6.1.5 Development length for individual bars
within a bundle, in tension or compression, shall be
25.5.5.4 Where bars of different size are lap spliced that of the individual bar, increased 20 percent for a
in compression, 𝑙𝑠𝑐 shall be the greater of 𝑙𝑑𝑐 of three-bar bundle, and 33 percent for a four-bar
larger bar calculated in accordance with 25.4.9.1 bundle.
and 𝑙𝑠𝑐 of smaller bar calculated in accordance with
25.5.5.1 as appropriate. 25.6.1.6 A unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a
single bar with an area equivalent to that of the
25.5.6 End-bearing splices of deformed bars in bundle and a centroid coinciding with that of the
compression bundle. The diameter of the equivalent bar shall be
25.5.6.1 For bars required for compression only, used for 𝑑𝑏 in (a) through (e):
transmission of compressive stress by end bearing (a) Spacing limitations based on 𝑑𝑏
of square-cut ends held in concentric contact by a
(b) Cover requirements based on 𝑑𝑏
suitable device shall be permitted.
(c) Spacing and cover values in 25.4.2.2
25.5.6.2 End-bearing splices shall be permitted (d) Confinement term in 25.4.2.3
only in members containing closed stirrups, ties, (e) 𝑒 factor in 25.4.2.4
spirals, or hoops.
25.6.1.7 Lap splices of bars in a bundle shall be
25.5.6.3 Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces based on the lap splice length required for
within 1.5 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the individual bars within the bundle, increased in
bars and shall be fitted within 3 degrees of full accordance with 25.6.1.5. Individual bar splices
bearing after assembly. within a bundle shall not overlap. Entire bundles
25.5.7 Mechanical and welded splices of shall not be lap spliced.
deformed bars in tension or compression 25.6.2 Post-tensioning ducts

SBC 304-CR-18 205

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

25.6.2.1 Bundling of post-tensioning ducts shall be two longitudinal wires at a minimum spacing of 50
permitted if shown that concrete can be mm in accordance with (a) and (b):
satisfactorily placed and if provision is made to
(a) Inner longitudinal wire at least the greater
prevent the prestressing steel, when tensioned, from
of 𝑑/4 or 50 mm from 𝑑/2
breaking through the duct.
(b) Outer longitudinal wire at tension face shall
25.7—Transverse reinforcement not be farther from the face than the portion
of primary flexural reinforcement closest to
25.7.1 Stirrups
the face
25.7.1.1 Stirrups shall extend as close to the
25.7.1.6 Stirrups used for torsion or integrity
compression and tension surfaces of the member as
reinforcement shall be closed stirrups perpendicular
cover requirements and proximity of other
to the axis of the member. Where welded wire
reinforcement permits and shall be anchored at both
reinforcement is used, transverse wires shall be
ends. Where used as shear reinforcement, stirrups
perpendicular to the axis of the member. Such
shall extend a distance 𝑑 from extreme compression
stirrups shall be anchored by (a) or (b):
fiber.
(a) Ends shall terminate with 135-degree
25.7.1.2 Between anchored ends, each bend in the standard hooks around a longitudinal bar
continuous portion of a single or multiple U-stirrup (b) In accordance with 25.7.1.3(a) or (b) or
and each bend in a closed stirrup shall enclose a
25.7.1.4, where the concrete surrounding
longitudinal bar or strand.
the anchorage is restrained against spalling
25.7.1.3 Anchorage of deformed bar and wire shall by a flange or slab or similar member
be in accordance with (a), (b), or (c): 25.7.1.6.1 Stirrups used for torsion or integrity
(a) For Dia 16 bar and MD200 wire, and reinforcement shall be permitted to be made up of
smaller, and for Dia 18 through Dia 25 bars two pieces of reinforcement: a single U-stirrup
with 𝑓𝑦𝑡  280 MPa, a standard hook anchored according to 25.7.1.6(a) closed by a
around longitudinal reinforcement. crosstie where the 90-degree hook of the crosstie
(b) For Dia 18 through Dia 25 bars with 𝑓𝑦𝑡 > shall be restrained against spalling by a flange or
280 MPa, a standard hook around a slab or similar member.
longitudinal bar plus an embedment 25.7.1.7 Except where used for torsion or integrity
between midheight of the member and the reinforcement, closed stirrups are permitted to be
outside end of the hook equal to or greater made using pairs of U-stirrups spliced to form a
than 0.17𝑑𝑏 𝑓𝑦𝑡 /(λ√𝑓𝑐′ ), with λ as given in closed unit where lap lengths are at least 1.3𝑙𝑑 . In
Table 25.4.3.2. members with a total depth of at least 450 mm, such
(c) In joist construction, for Dia 12 bar and splices with 𝐴𝑏 𝑓𝑦𝑡  40 kN per leg shall be
MD130 wire and smaller, a standard hook considered adequate if stirrup legs extend the full
available depth of member.
25.7.1.4 Anchorage of each leg of welded plain
wire reinforcement forming a single U-stirrup shall 25.7.2 Ties
be in accordance with (a) or (b):
25.7.2.1 Ties shall consist of a closed loop of
(a) Two longitudinal wires spaced at a 50 mm deformed bar with spacing in accordance with (a)
spacing along the member at the top of the and (b):
U.
(a) Clear spacing of at least (4⁄3)𝑑𝑎𝑔𝑔
(b) One longitudinal wire located not more
than 𝑑/4 from the compression face and a (b) Center-to-center spacing shall not exceed
second wire closer to the compression face the least of 16𝑑𝑏 of longitudinal bar, 48𝑑𝑏
and spaced not less than 50 mm from the of tie bar, and smallest dimension of
first wire. The second wire shall be member
permitted to be located on the stirrup leg 25.7.2.2 Diameter of tie bar shall be at least (a) or
beyond a bend, or on a bend with an inside (b):
diameter of bend of at least 8𝑑𝑏 .
(a) Dia 10 enclosing Dia 32 or smaller
25.7.1.5 Anchorage of each end of a single leg longitudinal bars
stirrup of welded wire reinforcement shall be with

SBC 304-CR-18 206

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

(b) Dia 12 enclosing Dia 36 or larger 25.7.3.2 For cast-in-place construction, spiral bar or
longitudinal bars or bundled longitudinal wire diameter shall be at least 9.5 mm
bars
25.7.3.3 Volumetric spiral reinforcement ratio 𝑠
25.7.2.2.1 As an alternative to deformed bars, shall satisfy Eq. (25.7.3.3).
deformed wire or welded wire reinforcement of
equivalent area to that required in 25.7.2.1 shall be 𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑐′
permitted subject to the requirements of Table ρ𝑠 ≥ 0.45 ( − 1) (25.7.3.3)
𝐴𝑐ℎ 𝑓𝑦𝑡
20.2.2.4a.
25.7.2.3 Rectilinear ties shall be arranged to satisfy where the value of 𝑓𝑦𝑡 shall not be taken greater
(a) and (b): than 700 MPa.
(a) Every corner and alternate longitudinal bar 25.7.3.4 Spirals shall be anchored by 1-1/2 extra
shall have lateral support provided by the turns of spiral bar or wire at each end.
corner of a tie with an included angle of not
more than 135 degrees 25.7.3.5 Spirals are permitted to be spliced by (a) or
(b) No unsupported bar shall be farther than (b):
150 mm clear on each side along the tie (a) Mechanical or welded splices in
from a laterally supported bar accordance with 25.5.7.
25.7.2.3.1 Anchorage of rectilinear ties shall be (b) Lap splices in accordance with 25.7.3.6 for
provided by standard hooks that conform to 25.3.2 𝑓𝑦𝑡 not exceeding 420 MPa.
and engage a longitudinal bar. A tie shall not be 25.7.3.6 Spiral lap splices shall be at least the
made up of interlocking headed deformed bars. greater of 300 mm and the lap length in Table
25.7.2.4 Circular ties shall be permitted where 25.7.3.6.
longitudinal bars are located around the perimeter 25.7.4 Hoops
of a circle.
25.7.4.1 Hoops shall consist of a closed tie or
25.7.2.4.1 Anchorage of individual circular ties continuously wound tie, which can consist of
shall be in accordance with (a) through (c): several reinforcement elements each having seismic
(a) Ends shall overlap by at least 150 mm hooks at both ends.
(b) Ends shall terminate with standard hooks in 25.7.4.2 The ends of the reinforcement elements in
accordance with 25.3.2 that engage a hoops shall be anchored using seismic hooks that
longitudinal bar conform to 25.3.4 and engage a longitudinal bar. A
(c) Overlaps at ends of adjacent circular ties hoop shall not be made up of interlocking headed
shall be staggered around the perimeter deformed bars.
enclosing the longitudinal bars
25.8—Post-tensioning anchorages and
25.7.2.5 Ties to resist torsion shall be perpendicular couplers
to the axis of the member anchored by either (a) or
(b): 25.8.1 Anchorages and couplers for tendons shall
develop at least 95 percent of 𝑓𝑝𝑢 when tested in an
(a) Ends shall terminate with 135-degree
unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated
standard hooks or seismic hooks around a
set.
longitudinal bar
(b) In accordance with 25.7.1.3(a) or (b) or 25.8.2 Anchorages and couplers for bonded
25.7.1.4, where the concrete surrounding tendons shall be located so that 100 percent of 𝑓𝑝𝑢
the anchorage is restrained against spalling shall be developed at critical sections after the post-
25.7.3 Spirals tensioned reinforcement is bonded in the member.

25.7.3.1 Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced 25.8.3 In unbonded construction subject to
continuous bar or wire with clear spacing repetitive loads, the possibility of fatigue of
conforming to (a) and (b): prestressed reinforcement in anchorages and
couplers shall be considered.
(a) At least the greater of 25 mm and
(4⁄3)𝑑𝑎𝑔𝑔 25.8.4 Couplers shall be placed at locations
approved by the licensed design professional and
(b) Not greater than 75 mm

SBC 304-CR-18 207

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

enclosed in housings long enough to permit (b) Basic multistrand anchorage devices shall
necessary movements. meet the bearing resistance requirements of
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
25.9—Anchorage zones for post- Specifications , Article 5.10.9.7.2, except
tensioned tendons that the load factors shall be in accordance
25.9.1 General with 5.3.12 and  shall be in accordance
with 22.2.1
25.9.1.1 Anchorage regions of post-tensioned (c) Special anchorage devices shall satisfy the
tendons shall consist of two zones, (a) and (b): tests required in AASHTO LRFD Bridge
(a) The local zone shall be assumed to be a Design Specifications, Article 5.10.9.7.3,
rectangular prism (or equivalent and described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge
rectangular prism for circular or oval Construction Specifications, Article
anchorages) of concrete immediately 10.3.2.3.
surrounding the anchorage device and any 25.9.3.2 Where special anchorage devices are used,
confining reinforcement supplementary skin reinforcement shall be provided
(b) The general zone includes the local zone in addition to the confining reinforcement specified
and shall be assumed to be the portion of for the anchorage device.
the member through which the
concentrated prestressing force is 25.9.3.2.1 Supplementary skin reinforcement shall
transferred to the concrete and distributed be similar in configuration and at least equivalent in
more uniformly across the section. volumetric ratio to any supplementary skin
reinforcement used in the qualifying acceptance
25.9.1.2 The local zone shall be designed in tests of the anchorage device.
accordance with 25.9.3.
25.9.4 General zone
25.9.1.3 The general zone shall be designed in
accordance with 25.9.4. 25.9.4.1 The extent of the general zone is equal to
the largest dimension of the cross section. In the
25.9.1.4 Compressive strength of concrete required case of slabs with anchorages or groups of
at time of post-tensioning shall be specified as anchorages spaced along the slab edge, the depth of
required by 26.10. the general zone shall be taken as the spacing of the
25.9.1.5 Stressing sequence shall be considered in tendons.
the design process and specified as required by 25.9.4.2 For anchorage devices located away from
26.10. the end of a member, the general zone shall include
25.9.2 Required strength the disturbed regions ahead of and behind the
anchorage devices.
25.9.2.1 Factored prestressing force at the
anchorage device, 𝑃𝑝𝑢 , shall exceed the least of (a) 25.9.4.3 Analysis of general zones
through (c), where 1.2 is the load factor from 25.9.4.3.1 Methods (a) through (c) shall be
5.3.12: permitted for design of general zones:
(a) 1.2(0.94 𝑓𝑝𝑦 )𝐴𝑝𝑠 (a) Strut-and-tie models in accordance with
(b) 1.2(0.80 𝑓𝑝𝑦 )𝐴𝑝𝑠 Chapter 23
(c) Maximum jacking force designated by the (b) Linear stress analysis, including finite
supplier of anchorage devices multiplied by element analysis or equivalent
1.2 (c) Simplified equations in AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, Article
25.9.3 Local zone 5.10.9.6, except where restricted by
25.9.3.1 The design of local zone in post-tensioned 25.9.4.3.2
anchorages shall meet the requirements of (a), (b), The design of general zones by other methods shall
or (c): be permitted, provided that the specific procedures
(a) Monostrand or single 16 mm or smaller used for design result in prediction of strength in
diameter bar anchorage devices shall meet substantial agreement with results of
the bearing resistance and 1ocal zone comprehensive tests.
requirements of ACI 423.7

SBC 304-CR-18 208

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

25.9.4.3.2 Simplified equations as permitted by tendons in slabs or where analysis shows

25.9.4.3.l(c) shall not be used for the design of a reinforcement is not required.
general zone if any of the situations listed in (a)
25.9.4.4.5 Reinforcement with a nominal tensile
through (g) occur:
strength equal to 2 percent of the factored
(a) Member cross sections are nonrectangular prestressing force shall be provided in orthogonal
(b) Discontinuities in or near the general zone directions parallel to the loaded face of the
cause deviations in the force flow path anchorage zone to limit spalling, except for
(c) Minimum edge distance is less than 1.5 monostrand tendons in slabs or where analysis
times the anchorage device lateral shows reinforcement is not required.
dimension in that direction
25.9.4.4.6 For monostrand anchorage devices for
(d) Multiple anchorage devices are used in
12.7 mm or smaller diameter strands in normal-
other than one closely spaced group
weight concrete slabs, reinforcement satisfying (a)
(e) Centroid of the tendons is located outside
and (b) shall be provided in the general zone, unless
the kern
a detailed analysis in accordance with 25.9.4.3
(f) Angle of inclination of the tendon in the
shows that this reinforcement is not required:
general zone is less than – 5 degrees from
the centerline of axis of the member, where (a) Two horizontal bars at least Dia 12 in size
the angle is negative if the anchor force shall be provided parallel to the slab edge.
points away from the centroid of the section They shall be permitted to be in contact
(g) Angle of inclination of the tendon in the with the front face of the anchorage device
general zone is greater than +20 degrees and shall be within a distance of ℎ/2 ahead
from the centerline of axis of the member, of each device. Those bars shall extend at
where the angle is positive if the anchor- least 150 mm either side of the outer edges
force points towards the centroid of the of each device.
section (b) If the center-to-center spacing of anchorage
devices is 300 mm or less, the anchorage
25.9.4.3.3 Three-dimensional effects shall be
devices shall be considered as a group. For
considered in design and analyzed by (a) or (b):
each group of six or more anchorage
(a) Three-dimensional analysis procedures devices, 𝑛 + 1 hairpin bars or closed
(b) Approximated by considering the stirrups at least Dia 10 in size shall be
summation of effects for two orthogonal provided, where 𝑛 is the number of
planes anchorage devices. One hairpin bar or
stirrup shall be placed between each
25.9.4.4 Reinforcement limits
anchorage device and one on each side of
25.9.4.4.1 Tensile strength of concrete shall be the group. The hairpin bars or stirrups shall
neglected in calculations of reinforcement be placed with the legs extending into the
requirements. slab perpendicular to the edge. The center
25.9.4.4.2 Reinforcement shall be provided in the portion of the hairpin bars or stirrups shall
general zone to resist bursting, spalling, and be placed perpendicular to the plane of the
longitudinal edge tension forces induced by slab from 3ℎ/8 to ℎ/2 ahead of the
anchorage devices, as applicable. Effects of abrupt anchorage devices.
changes in section and stressing sequence shall be 25.9.4.5 Limiting stresses in general zones
considered.
25.9.4.5.1 Maximum design tensile stress in
25.9.4.4.3 For anchorage devices located away reinforcement at nominal strength shall not exceed
from the end of the member, bonded reinforcement the limits in Table 25.9.4.5.1.
shall be provided to transfer at least 0.35𝑃𝑝𝑢 into
25.9.4.5.2 Compressive stress in concrete at
the concrete section behind the anchor. Such
nominal strength shall not exceed 0.7λ𝑓𝑐𝑖′ , where λ
reinforcement shall be placed symmetrically around
is defined in 19.2.4.
the anchorage device and shall be fully developed
both behind and ahead of the anchorage device. 25.9.4.5.3 If concrete is confined by spirals or
hoops and the effect of confining reinforcement is
25.9.4.4.4 If tendons are curved in the general zone,
documented by tests and analysis, it shall be
bonded reinforcement shall be provided to resist
permitted to use an increased value of compressive
radial and splitting forces, except for monostrand

SBC 304-CR-18 209

 CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

stress in concrete when calculating the nominal (b) Prestressing reinforcement is stressed to no
strength of the general zone. more than 50 percent of the final
prestressing force
25.9.4.5.4 Prestressing reinforcement shall not be
stressed until compressive strength of concrete, as 25.9.5 Reinforcement detailing
indicated by tests of cylinders cured in a manner
25.9.5.1 Selection of reinforcement size, spacing,
consistent with curing of the member, is at least 17
cover, and other details for anchorage zones shall
MPa for single-strand or bar tendons or at least 28
make allowances for tolerances on fabrication and
MPa for multistrand tendons unless 25.9.4.5.5 is
placement of reinforcement; for the size of
satisfied.
aggregate; and for adequate placement and
25.9.4.5.5 Provisions of 25.9.4.5.4 need not be consolidation of the concrete.
satisfied if (a) or (b) is satisfied:
(a) Oversized anchorage devices are used to
compensate for a lower concrete
compressive strength

SBC 304-CR-18 210

CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 25

Table 25.2.4—Minimum center-to-center spacing of pretensioned strands at ends of members

𝒇′𝒄𝒊 , MPa Nominal strand diameter, mm Minimum 𝒔

< 28 All 4𝑑𝑏

< 12.7 mm 4𝑑𝑏

 28 12.7 mm 45 mm

15.2 mm 50 mm

Table 25.3.1—Standard hook geometry for development of deformed bars in tension

Minimum
Type of Straight
inside bend
standard Bar size extension[1] Type of standard hook
diameter,
hook 𝒍𝒆𝒙𝒕 , mm
mm

Dia 10 through
6𝑑𝑏
Dia 25

Dia 28 through
90-degree 8𝑑𝑏
Dia 36 12𝑑𝑏
hook

Dia 45 and 10𝑑𝑏

Dia 60

Dia 10 through
6𝑑𝑏
Dia 25

Dia 28 through Greater of

180-degree 8𝑑𝑏
Dia 36 4𝑑𝑏 and 65
hook
mm

Dia 45 and 10𝑑𝑏

Dia 60
[1]
A standard hook for deformed bars in tension includes the specific inside bend diameter and straight
extension length. It shall be permitted to use a longer straight extension at the end of a hook. A longer
extension shall not be considered to increase the anchorage capacity of the hook.

SBC 304-CR-18 211

CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

Table 25.3.2—Minimum inside bend diameters and standard hook geometry for stirrups, ties, and
hoops

Minimum
Type of Straight
inside bend
standard Bar size extension[1] 𝒍𝒆𝒙𝒕 , Type of standard hook
diameter,
hook mm
mm

Dia 8 through
4𝑑𝑏 Greater of
90-degree Dia 16
6𝑑𝑏 and 75 mm
hook
Dia 18 through
6𝑑𝑏 12𝑑𝑏
Dia 25

Dia 10 through
4𝑑𝑏
Dia 16
135-degree Greater of
hook Dia 18 through 6𝑑𝑏 and 75 mm
6𝑑𝑏
Dia 25

Dia 10 through
4𝑑𝑏
180-degree Dia 16 Greater of
hook Dia 18 through 4𝑑𝑏 and 65 mm
6𝑑𝑏
Dia 25
[1]
A standard hook for stirrups, ties, and hoops includes the specific inside bend diameter and straight extension
length. It shall be permitted to use a longer straight extension at the end of a hook. A longer extension shall
not be considered to increase the anchorage capacity of the hook.

Table 25.4.2.2—Development length for deformed bars and deformed wires in tension

Dia 20 and smaller

Dia 22 and larger
Spacing and cover bars and deformed
bars
wires

Clear spacing of bars or wires being developed or lap

spliced not less than 𝑑𝑏 , clear cover at least 𝑑𝑏 , and
stirrups or ties throughout 𝑙𝑑 not less than the Code 𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑡 ψ𝑒 𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑡 ψ𝑒
minimum ( ) 𝑑𝑏 ( ) 𝑑𝑏
2.1λ√𝑓𝑐′ 1.7λ√𝑓𝑐′
or
Clear spacing of bars or wires being developed or lap
spliced at least 2𝑑𝑏 and clear cover at least 𝑑𝑏

𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑡 ψ𝑒 𝑓𝑦 ψ𝑡 ψ𝑒
Other cases ( ) 𝑑𝑏 ( ) 𝑑𝑏
1.4λ√𝑓𝑐′ 1.1λ√𝑓𝑐′

SBC 304-CR-18 212

CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

Table 25.4.2.4—Modification factors for development of deformed bars and deformed wires in
tension
Modification factor Condition Value of factor
Lightweight concrete 0.75
In accordance with
Lightweight Lightweight concrete, where 𝑓𝑐𝑡 is specified
19.2.4.3

Normal weight concrete 1.0
Epoxy-coated or zinc and epoxy dual-coated
reinforcement with clear cover less than 3𝑑𝑏 or 1.5
clear spacing less than 6𝑑𝑏
Epoxy[1]
Epoxy-coated or zinc and epoxy dual- coated
𝑒 1.2
reinforcement for all other conditions
Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized)
1.0
reinforcement

Size Dia 22 and larger bars 1.0

𝑠 Dia 20 and smaller bars and deformed wires 0.8
More than 300 mm of fresh concrete placed below
Casting position[1] 1.3
horizontal reinforcement
𝑡
Other 1.0
[1]
The product 𝑡 𝑒 need not exceed 1.7.

SBC 304-CR-18 213

CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

Table 25.4.3.2—Modification factors for development of hooked bars in tension

Value of
Modification factor Condition
factor

Lightweight Lightweight concrete 0.75

 Normal-weight concrete 1.0

Epoxy Epoxy-coated or zinc and epoxy dual- coated reinforcement 1.2

𝑒 Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized) reinforcement 1.0
For Dia 36 bar and smaller hooks with side cover (normal to
Cover plane of hook)  65 mm and for 90-degree hook with cover on 0.7
𝑐 bar extension beyond hook ≥ 50 mm
Other 1.0
For 90-degree hooks of Dia 36 and smaller bars
(1) enclosed along 𝑙𝑑ℎ within ties or stirrups[1] perpendicular to
𝑙𝑑ℎ at 𝑠 ≤ 3𝑑𝑏 , or
Confining (2) enclosed along the bar extension beyond hook including the 0.8
reinforcement bend within ties or stirrups[1] perpendicular to 𝑙𝑒𝑥𝑡 at 𝑠 ≤ 3𝑑𝑏
𝑟 [2]
For 180-degree hooks of Dia 36 and smaller bars enclosed along
𝑙𝑑ℎ within ties or stirrups[1] perpendicular to 𝑙𝑑ℎ at 𝑠 ≤ 3𝑑𝑏
Other 1.0
[1]
The first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of the hook within 2𝑑𝑏 of the outside of the bend.
[2]
𝑑𝑏 is the nominal diameter of the hooked bar.

Table 25.4.9.3—Modification factors for deformed bars and wires in compression

Modification factor Condition Value of factor
Lightweight concrete 0.75
Lightweight In accordance with
Lightweight concrete, if 𝑓𝑐𝑡 , is specified
 19.2.4.3
Normalweight concrete 1.0
Reinforcement enclosed within (1), (2), (3), or (4):
(1) a spiral
(2) a circular continuously wound tie with 𝑑𝑏  6
Confining mm and pitch 100 mm
0.75
reinforcement (3) D i a 12 bar or MD130 wire ties in accordance
𝑟 with 25.7.2 spaced  100 mm on center
(4) hoops in accordance with 25.7.4 spaced ≤ 100
mm on center
Other 1.0

SBC 304-CR-18 214

CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

Table 25.5.2.1—Lap splice lengths of deformed bars and deformed wires in tension

𝑨𝒔,𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒅 /𝑨𝒔,𝒓𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒅 [1] Maximum percent of 𝑨𝒔

spliced within required Splice type 𝑙𝑠𝑡
over length of splice lap length
1.0𝑙𝑑 and
50 Class A Greater of:
 2.0 300 mm
100 Class B 1.3𝑙𝑑 and
Greater of:
< 2.0 All cases Class B 300 mm
[1]
Ratio of area of reinforcement provided to area of reinforcement required by analysis at splice location.

Table 25.7.3.6—Lap length for spiral reinforcement

Ends of lapped spiral
Reinforcement Coating Lap length mm
bar or wire
Uncoated or zinc-coated
Hook not required 48𝑑𝑏
(galvanized)
Deformed bar Epoxy-coated Hook not required 72𝑑𝑏
or zinc and epoxy dual- Standard hook of
coated 48𝑑𝑏
25.3.2[1]
Uncoated Hook not required 48𝑑𝑏
Hook not required 72𝑑𝑏
Deformed wire
Epoxy-coated Standard hook of
48𝑑𝑏
25.3.2[1]
Hook not required 72𝑑𝑏
Uncoated or zinc-coated
Plain bar Standard hook of
(galvanized) 48𝑑𝑏
25.3.2[1]
Hook not required 72𝑑𝑏
Plain wire Uncoated Standard hook of
48𝑑𝑏
25.3.2[1]
[1]
Hooks shall be embedded within the core confined by the spiral.

Table 25.9.4.5.1—Maximum design tensile stress in reinforcement

Type of reinforcement Maximum design tensile stress

Nonprestressed reinforcement 𝑓𝑦

Bonded, prestressed reinforcement 𝑓𝑝𝑦

Unbonded, prestressed reinforcement 𝑓𝑠𝑒 + 70

SBC 304-CR-18 215

CHAPTER 25—REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 216

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND

INSPECTION

(2) Lightweight aggregate: ASTM C330.

26.1—Scope (b) Aggregates not conforming to ASTM C33
26.1.1 This chapter addresses (a) through (c): or ASTM C330 are permitted if they have
been shown by test or actual service to
(a) Design information that the licensed design
produce concrete of adequate strength and
professional shall specify in the
durability and are approved by the building
construction documents, if applicable.
official.
(b) Compliance requirements that the licensed
design professional shall specify in the 26.4.1.3 Water
construction documents, if applicable.
26.4.1.3.1 Compliance requirements:
(c) Inspection requirements that the licensed
design professional shall specify in the (a) Mixing water shall conform to ASTM
construction documents, if applicable. Cl602.
(b) Mixing water, including that portion of
26.2—Design criteria mixing water contributed in the form of free
26.2.1 Design information: moisture on aggregates, shall not contain
deleterious amounts of chloride ion when
(a) Name and year of issue of the Code, and used for prestressed concrete, for concrete
any supplements governing design. that will contain aluminum embedments, or
(b) Loads used in design. for concrete cast against stay-in-place
(c) Design work delegated to the contractor galvanized steel forms.
including applicable design criteria.
26.4.1.4 Admixtures
26.3—Member information
26.4.1.4.1 Compliance requirements:
26.3.1 Design information:
(a) Admixtures shall conform to (1) through
(a) Member size, location, and related (3):
tolerances. (1) Water reduction and setting time
26.4—Concrete materials and mixture modification: ASTM C494.
requirements (2) Producing flowing concrete: ASTM
Cl017.
26.4.1 Concrete materials (3) Inhibiting chloride-induced corrosion:
26.4.1.1 Cementitious materials ASTM Cl582.
(b) Admixtures that do not conform to the
26.4.1.1.1 Compliance requirements: specifications in 26.4.1.4.1(a) shall be
(a) Cementitious materials shall conform to the subject to prior review by the licensed
specifications in Table 26.4.1.1.1(a). design professional.
(b) All cementitious materials specified in (c) Calcium chloride or admixtures containing
Table 26.4.1.1.1(a) and the combinations chloride from sources other than impurities
of these materials shall be included in in admixture ingredients shall not be used.
calculating the 𝑤/𝑐𝑚 of the concrete (d) Admixtures used in concrete containing
mixture. expansive cements conforming to ASTM
C845 shall be compatible with the cement
26.4.1.2 Aggregates and produce no deleterious effects.
26.4.1.2.1 Compliance requirements: 26.4.1.5 Steel fiber reinforcement
(a) Aggregates shall conform to (1) or (2): 26.4.1.5.1 Compliance requirements:
(1) Normal weight aggregate: ASTM C33.

SBC 304-CR-18 217

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

(a) Steel fiber reinforcement used for shear (b) Exposure classes based on the severity of
resistance shall satisfy (1) and (2): the anticipated exposure of members.
(1) Be deformed and conform to ASTM (c) The required compressive strength at
A820. designated stages of construction for each
(2) Have a length-to-diameter ratio of at part of the structure designed by the
least 50 and not exceeding 100. licensed design professional.
26.4.2 Concrete mixture requirements 26.4.2.2 Compliance requirements:
26.4.2.1 Design information: (a) The required compressive strength at
designated stages of construction for each
(a) Requirements (1) through (9) for each
part of the structure not designed by the
concrete mixture, based on assigned
licensed design professional shall be
exposure classes or design of members:
submitted for review.
(1) Minimum specified compressive
′ (b) Steel fiber-reinforced concrete used for
strength of concrete, 𝑓𝑐 .
shear resistance shall satisfy (1) and (2):
(2) Test age for demonstrating compliance
(1) Conform to ASTM C1116.
with 𝑓𝑐′ . if different from 28 days.
(2) Contain at least 60 kg of deformed steel
(3) Maximum 𝑤/𝑐𝑚 applicable to most
fibers per cubic meter of concrete.
restrictive assigned durability exposure
class from 19.3.2.1. 26.4.3 Proportioning of concrete mixtures
(4) Nominal maximum size of coarse 26.4.3.1 Compliance requirements:
aggregate not to exceed the least of (i),
(ii), and (iii): (a) Concrete mixture proportions shall be
(i) one-fifth the narrowest dimension established so that the concrete satisfies (1)
between sides of forms through (3):
(ii) one-third the depth of slabs (1) Can be placed readily without
(iii) three-fourths the minimum segregation into forms and around
specified clear spacing between reinforcement under anticipated
individual reinforcing bars or placement conditions.
wires, bundles of bars, prestressed (2) Meets requirements for assigned
reinforcement, individual tendons, exposure class in accordance with
bundled tendons, or ducts either 26.4.2.1(a) or 26.4.2.1(b).
(3) Conforms to strength test requirements
These limitations shall not apply if, in the judgment for standard cured specimens.
of the licensed design professional, workability and (b) Concrete mixture proportions shall be
methods of consolidation are such that concrete can established in accordance with Article 4.2.3
be placed without honeycombs or voids. of ACI 301 or by an alternative method
(5) For members assigned to Exposure acceptable to the licensed design
Class C, applicable chloride ion limits professional. Alternative methods shall
for assigned Exposure Class from have a probability of satisfying the strength
19.3.2.1. requirements for acceptance tests of
(6) For members assigned to Exposure standard cured specimens that meets or
Category S, type of cementitious exceeds the probability associated with the
materials for assigned Exposure Class method in Article 4.2.3 of ACI 301. If
from 19.3.2.1. Article 4.2.3 of ACI 301 is used, the
(7) Equilibrium density of lightweight strength test records used for establishing
concrete. and documenting concrete mixture
(8) Requirement for submittal of the proportions shall not be more than 12
volumetric fractions of aggregate in months old.
lightweight concrete mixtures for the (c) The concrete materials used to develop the
verification of  value if used in design. concrete mixture proportions shall
(9) If used for shear resistance in correspond to those to be used in the
accordance with 9.6.3.1, requirements proposed Work.
for steel fiber-reinforced concrete. (d) If different concrete mixtures are to be used
for different portions of proposed Work,

SBC 304-CR-18 218

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

each mixture shall comply with the (c) Equipment for mixing and transporting
concrete mixture requirements stated in the concrete shall conform to ASTM C94 or
construction documents. ASTM C685.
(d) Concrete shall be batched, mixed, and
26.4.4 Documentation of concrete mixture
delivered in accordance with ASTM C94 or
characteristics
ASTM C685.
26.4.4.1 Compliance requirements:
26.5.2 Concrete placement and consolidation
(a) Documentation of concrete mixture
26.5.2.1 Compliance requirements:
characteristics shall be submitted for
review by the licensed design professional (a) Debris shall be removed from spaces to be
before the mixture is used and before occupied by concrete before placement.
making changes to mixtures already in use. (b) Standing water shall be removed from
Evidence of the ability of the proposed place of deposit before concrete is placed
mixture to comply with the concrete unless a tremie is to be used or unless
mixture requirements in the construction otherwise permitted by both the licensed
documents shall be included in the design professional and the building
documentation. The evidence shall be official.
based on field test records or laboratory (c) Masonry filler units that will be in contact
trial batches. Field test records shall with concrete shall be prewetted prior to
represent conditions similar to those placing concrete.
anticipated during the proposed Work. (d) Equipment used to convey concrete from
(b) If field or laboratory test data are not the mixer to the location of final placement
available, and 𝑓𝑐′  35 MPa, concrete shall have capabilities to achieve the
proportions shall be based on other placement requirements.
experience or information, if approved by (e) Concrete shall not be pumped through pipe
the licensed design professional. If 𝑓𝑐′ > made of aluminum or aluminum alloys.
35 MPa, test data documenting the (f) Concrete shall be placed in accordance with
characteristics of the proposed mixtures are (1) through (5):
required. (1) At a rate to provide an adequate supply
(c) If data become available during of concrete at the location of
construction that consistently exceed the placement.
strength-test acceptance criteria for (2) At a rate so concrete at all times has
standard-cured specimens, it shall be sufficient workability such that it can
permitted to modify a mixture to reduce the be consolidated by the intended
average strength. Submit evidence methods.
acceptable to the licensed design (3) Without segregation or loss of
professional to demonstrate that the materials.
modified mixture will comply with the (4) Without interruptions sufficient to
concrete mixture requirements in the permit loss of workability between
construction documents including the successive placements that would
specified 𝑤/𝑐𝑚 ratio. result in cold joints.
(5) Deposited as near to its final location as
26.5—Concrete production and practicable to avoid segregation due to
construction rehandling or flowing.
26.5.1 Concrete production (g) Concrete that has been contaminated or has
lost its initial workability to the extent that
26.5.1.1 Compliance requirements: it can no longer be consolidated by the
(a) Cementitious materials and aggregates intended methods shall not be used.
shall be stored to prevent deterioration or (h) Retempering concrete with water shall not
contamination. be permitted.
(b) Material that has deteriorated or has been (i) After starting, concreting shall be carried
contaminated shall not be used in concrete. on as a continuous operation until the
completion of a panel or section, as defined
by its boundaries or predetermined joints.

SBC 304-CR-18 219

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

(j) Concrete shall be consolidated by suitable (e) Procedures for protecting and curing
means during placement and shall be concrete shall be considered adequate if (1)
worked around reinforcement and or (2) are satisfied:
embedments and into corners of forms. (1) Average strength of field-cured
(k) Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall cylinders at test age designated for
be generally level. determination of 𝑓𝑐′ is equal to or at
least 85 percent of that of companion
26.5.3 Curing concrete
standard-cured cylinders.
26.5.3.1 Design information: (2) Average strength of field-cured
(a) If supplementary tests of field-cured cylinders at test age exceeds 𝑓𝑐′ by
specimens are required to verify adequacy more than 3.5 MPa.
of curing and protection, the number and 26.5.4 Concreting in cold weather
size of test specimens and the frequency of
Not applicable in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
these supplementary tests.
26.5.3.2 Compliance requirements: 26.5.5 Concreting in hot weather

(a) Concrete, other than high-early-strength, 26.5.5.1 Design information:

shall be maintained at a temperature of at (a) Temperature limits for concrete as
least 10 °C and in a moist condition for at delivered in hot weather.
least the first 7 days after placement, except
26.5.5.2 Compliance requirements:
if accelerated curing is used.
(b) High-early-strength concrete shall be (a) The specified temperature limits for
maintained at a temperature of at least 10 concrete as delivered in hot weather shall
°C and in a moist condition for at least the not exceed 35 °C.
first 3 days after placement, except if (b) Concrete materials and production methods
accelerated curing is used. shall be selected so that the concrete
(c) Accelerated curing to accelerate strength temperature at delivery complies with the
gain and reduce time of curing is permitted specified temperature limits.
using high-pressure steam, steam at (c) Handling, placing, protection, and curing
atmospheric pressure, heat and moisture, or procedures shall limit concrete
other process acceptable to the licensed temperatures or water evaporation that
design professional. If accelerated curing is could reduce strength, serviceability, and
used, (1) and (2) shall apply: durability of the member or structure.
(1) Compressive strength at the load stage
26.5.6 Construction, contraction, and isolation
considered shall be at least the strength
joints
required at that load stage.
(2) Accelerated curing shall not impair the 26.5.6.1 Design information:
durability of the concrete. (a) If required by the design, locations and
(d) If required by the building official or details of construction, isolation, and
licensed design professional, results of tests contraction joints.
of cylinders made and cured in accordance (b) Details required for transfer of shear and
with (1) and (2) shall be provided in other forces through construction joints.
addition to results of standard-cured (c) Surface preparation, including intentional
cylinder strength tests. roughening of hardened concrete surfaces
(1) At least two 150 × 300 mm or at least where concrete is to be placed against
three 100 × 200 mm field-cured previously hardened concrete.
cylinders shall be molded at the same (d) Locations where shear is transferred
time and from the same samples as between as-rolled steel and concrete using
standard-cured cylinders; headed studs or welded reinforcing bars
(2) Field-cured cylinders shall be cured in requiring steel to be clean and free of paint.
accordance with the field curing (e) Surface preparation including intentional
procedure of ASTM C31 and tested in roughening if composite topping slabs are
accordance with ASTM C39. to be cast in place on a precast floor or roof

SBC 304-CR-18 220

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

intended to act structurally with the precast (b) Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels,
members. shear caps, and capitals shall be placed
monolithically as part of a slab system,
26.5.6.2 Compliance requirements:
unless otherwise shown in construction
(a) Joint locations or joint details not shown or documents.
that differ from those indicated in (c) At locations where slab and column
construction documents shall be submitted concrete placements are required to be
for review by the licensed design integrated during placement, column
professional. concrete shall extend full slab depth at least
(b) Except for prestressed concrete, 600 mm into floor slab from face of column
construction joints in floor and roof and be integrated with floor concrete.
systems shall be located within the middle (d) Saw cutting in slabs-on-ground identified
third of spans of slabs, beams, and girders in the construction documents as structural
unless otherwise approved by the licensed diaphragms or part of the seismic-force-
design professional. resisting system shall not be permitted
(c) Construction joints in girders shall be offset unless specifically indicated or approved
a distance of at least two times the width of by the licensed design professional.
intersecting beams, measured from the face
of the intersecting beam, unless otherwise 26.6—Reinforcement materials and
approved by the licensed design construction requirements
professional. 26.6.1 General
(d) Construction joints shall be cleaned and
laitance removed before new concrete is 26.6.1.1 Design information:
placed. (a) Saudi ASTM designation and grade of
(e) Surface of concrete construction joints reinforcement.
shall be intentionally roughened if (b) Type, size, location requirements,
specified. detailing, and embedment length of
(f) Immediately before new concrete is placed, reinforcement.
construction joints shall be prewetted and (c) Concrete cover to reinforcement.
standing water removed. (d) Location and length of lap splices.
26.5.7 Construction of concrete members (e) Type and location of mechanical splices.
(f) Type and location of end-bearing splices.
26.5.7.1 Design information: (g) Type and location of welded splices and
(a) Details required to accommodate other required welding of reinforcing bars.
dimensional changes resulting from (h) ASTM designation for protective coatings
prestressing, creep, shrinkage, and of nonprestressed reinforcement.
temperature. (i) Corrosion protection for exposed
(b) Identify if a slab-on-ground is designed as reinforcement intended to be bonded with
a structural diaphragm or part of the extensions on future Work.
seismic-force-resisting system. 26.6.1.2 Compliance requirements:
(c) Details for construction of sloped or
stepped footings designed to act as a unit. (a) Mill test reports for reinforcement shall be
(d) Locations where slab and column concrete submitted.
placements are required to be integrated (b) Nonprestressed reinforcement with rust,
during placement in accordance with 15.3. mill scale, or a combination of both shall be
(e) Locations where steel fiber-reinforced considered satisfactory, provided a hand-
concrete is required for shear resistance in wire-brushed representative test specimen
accordance with 9.6.3.1. of the reinforcement complies with the
applicable ASTM specification for the
26.5.7.2 Compliance requirements: minimum dimensions (including height of
(a) Beams, girders, or slabs supported by deformations) and weight per unit length.
columns or walls shall not be cast until (c) Prestressing reinforcement shall be free of
concrete in the vertical support members is mill scale, pitting, and excessive rust. A
no longer plastic. light coating of rust shall be permitted.

SBC 304-CR-18 221

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

(d) At the time concrete is placed, 26.6.4.1 Compliance requirements:

reinforcement to be bonded shall be clean
(a) Welding of all nonprestressed bars shall
of mud, oil, or other deleterious coatings
conform to the requirements of AWS D1.4.
that decrease bond.
ASTM specifications for bar
26.6.2 Placement reinforcement, except for ASTM A706,
shall be supplemented to require a mill test
26.6.2.1 Design information:
report of material properties that
(a) Tolerances on location of reinforcement demonstrate conformance to the
taking into consideration tolerances on 𝑑 requirements in AWS Dl.4.
and specified concrete cover in accordance (b) Welding of crossing bars shall not be used
with Table 26.6.2.1(a). for assembly of reinforcement unless
(b) Tolerance for longitudinal location of permitted by the licensed design
bends and ends of reinforcement in professional.
accordance with Table 26.6.2.1(b). The
tolerance for specified concrete cover in 26.7—Anchoring to concrete
Table 26.6.2.1(a) shall also apply at 26.7.1 Design information
discontinuous ends of members.
(a) Requirements for assessment and
26.6.2.2 Compliance requirements: qualification of anchors for the applicable
(a) Reinforcement, including bundled bars, conditions of use in accordance with
shall be placed within required tolerances 17.1.3.
and supported to prevent displacement (b) Type, size, location requirements, effective
beyond required tolerances during concrete embedment depth, and installation
placement. requirements for anchors.
(b) Spiral units shall be continuous bar or wire (c) Minimum edge distance of anchors in
placed with even spacing and without accordance with 17.7.
distortion beyond the tolerances for the (d) Inspection requirements in accordance with
specified dimensions. 26.13.
(c) Splices of reinforcement shall be made only (e) For post-installed anchors, parameters
as permitted in the construction documents, associated with the strength used for
or as authorized by the licensed design design, including anchor category, concrete
professional. strength, and aggregate type.
(d) For longitudinal column bars forming an (f) For adhesive anchors, parameters
end-bearing splice, the bearing of square associated with the characteristic bond
cut ends shall be held in concentric contact. stress used for design in accordance with
(e) Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces 17.4.5, including minimum age of
within 1.5 degrees of a right angle to the concrete, concrete temperature range,
axis of the bars and shall be fitted within 3 moisture condition of concrete at time of
degrees of full bearing after assembly. installation, type of lightweight concrete if
applicable, and requirements for hole
26.6.3 Bending drilling and preparation.
26.6.3.1 Compliance requirements: (g) Qualification requirements for installers of
anchors in accordance with 17.8.1.
(a) Reinforcement shall be bent cold prior to (h) Adhesive anchors installed in a horizontal
placement, unless otherwise permitted by or upwardly inclined orientation, if they
the licensed design professional. support sustained tension loads.
(b) Field bending of reinforcement partially (i) Required certifications for installers of
embedded in concrete shall not be adhesive anchors that are installed in a
permitted, except as shown in the horizontal or upwardly inclined orientation
construction documents or permitted by the to support sustained tension loads in
licensed design professional. accordance with 17.8.2.2 and 17.8.2.3.
(c) Offset bars shall be bent before placement (j) For adhesive anchors, proof loading where
in the forms. required in accordance with 17.8.2.1 .
26.6.4 Welding (k) Corrosion protection for exposed anchors
intended for attachment with future Work.

SBC 304-CR-18 222

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

26.7.2 Compliance requirements: temporary loads from handling, storage,

transportation, and erection, if designed by
(a) Post-installed anchors shall be installed in
the licensed design professional.
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Post-installed adhesive 26.9.2 Compliance requirements:
anchors shall be installed in accordance
(a) Members shall be marked to indicate
with the Manufacturer's Printed Installation
location and orientation in the structure and
Instructions (MPII).
date of manufacture.
26.8—Embedments (b) Identification marks on members shall
correspond to erection drawings.
26.8.1 Design information: (c) Design and details of lifting devices,
(a) Type, size, details, and location of embedments, and related reinforcement
embedments designed by the licensed required to resist temporary loads from
design professional. handling, storage, transportation, and
(b) Reinforcement required to be placed erection shall be provided if not designed
perpendicular to pipe embedments. by the licensed design professional.
(c) Specified concrete cover for pipe (d) During erection, precast members and
embedments with their fittings. structures shall be supported and braced to
(d) Corrosion protection for exposed ensure proper alignment, strength, and
embedments intended to be connected with stability until permanent connections are
future Work. completed.
(e) If approved by the licensed design
26.8.2 Compliance requirements:
professional, items embedded while the
(e) Type, size, details, and location of concrete is in a plastic state shall satisfy (1)
embedments not shown in the construction through (4):
documents shall be submitted for review by (1) Embedded items shall protrude from
the licensed design professional. the precast concrete members or
(f) Aluminum embedments shall be coated or remain exposed for inspection.
covered to prevent aluminum-concrete (2) Embedded items are not required to be
reaction and electrolytic action between hooked or tied to reinforcement within
aluminum and steel. the concrete.
(g) Pipes and fittings not shown in the (3) Embedded items shall be maintained in
construction documents shall be designed the correct position while the concrete
to resist effects of the material, pressure, remains plastic.
and temperature to which they will be (4) The concrete shall be consolidated
subjected. around embedded items.
(h) No liquid, gas, or vapor, except water not
exceeding 32 °C or 0.35 MPa pressure, 26.10—Additional requirements for
shall be placed in the pipes until the prestressed concrete
concrete has attained its specified strength. 26.10.1 Design information:
(i) In solid slabs, piping shall be placed
between top and bottom reinforcement. (a) Magnitude and location of prestressing
(j) Conduit and piping shall be fabricated and forces.
installed so that cutting, bending, or (b) Stressing sequence of tendons.
displacement of reinforcement from its (c) Type, size, details, and location of post-
specified location is not required. tensioning anchorages for systems selected
by the licensed design professional.
26.9—Additional requirements for (d) Tolerances for placement of tendons and
precast concrete post-tensioning ducts in accordance with
Table 26.6.2.1(a).
26.9.1 Design information:
(e) Materials and details of corrosion
(a) Dimensional tolerances for precast protection for tendons, couplers, end
members and interfacing members. fittings, post-tensioning anchorages, and
(b) Details of lifting devices, embedments, and anchorage regions.
related reinforcement required to resist (f) Requirements for ducts for bonded tendons.

SBC 304-CR-18 223

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

(g) Requirements for grouting of bonded cutting sequence shall be selected to avoid
tendons, including maximum water-soluble undesired temporary stresses in
chloride ion (Cl-) content requirements in pretensioned members.
19.4.1. (i) Long lengths of exposed pretensioned
strand shall be cut near the member to
26.10.2 Compliance requirements:
minimize shock to the concrete.
(a) Type, size, details, and location of post- (j) Prestressing reinforcement in post-
tensioning anchorage systems not shown in tensioned construction shall not be stressed
the construction documents shall be until the concrete compressive strength is at
submitted to the licensed design least 17 MPa for single-strand or bar
professional for review. tendons, 28 MPa for multistrand tendons,
(b) Tendons and post-tensioning ducts shall be or a higher strength, if required. An
placed within required tolerances and exception to these strength requirements is
supported to prevent displacement beyond provided in 26.10.2(k).
required tolerances during concrete (k) Lower concrete compressive strength than
placement. required by 26.10.2(j) shall be permitted if
(c) Couplers shall be placed in areas approved (1) or (2) is satisfied:
by the licensed design professional and (1) Oversized anchorage devices are used
enclosed in housings long enough to permit to compensate for a lower concrete
necessary movements. compressive strength.
(d) Burning or welding operations in the (2) Prestressing reinforcement is stressed
vicinity of prestressing reinforcement shall to no more than 50 percent of the final
be performed in such a manner that prestressing force.
prestressing reinforcement is not subject to
welding sparks, ground currents, or 26.11—Formwork
temperatures that degrade the properties of 26.11.1 Design of formwork
the reinforcement.
(e) Prestressing force and friction losses shall 26.11.1.1 Design information:
be verified by (1) and (2). (a) Requirement for the contractor to design,
(1) Measured elongation of prestressed fabricate, install, and remove formwork.
reinforcement compared with (b) Location of composite members requiring
elongation calculated using the shoring.
modulus of elasticity determined from (c) Requirements for removal of shoring of
tests or as reported by the composite members.
manufacturer.
26.11.1.2 Compliance requirements:
(2) Jacking force measured using
calibrated equipment such as a (a) Design of formwork shall consider (1)
hydraulic pressure gauge, load cell, or through (5):
dynamometer. (1) Method of concrete placement.
(f) The cause of any difference in force (2) Rate of concrete placement.
determination between (1) and (2) of (3) Construction loads, including vertical,
26.10.2(e) that exceeds 5 percent for horizontal, and impact.
pretensioned construction or 7 percent for (4) Avoidance of damage to previously
post-tensioned construction shall be constructed members.
ascertained and corrected, unless otherwise (5) For post-tensioned members,
approved by the licensed design allowance for movement of the
professional. member during application of the
(g) Loss of prestress force due to unreplaced prestressing force without damage to
broken prestressed reinforcement shall not the member.
exceed 2 percent of the total prestress force (b) Formwork fabrication and installation shall
in prestressed concrete members. result in a final structure that conforms to
(h) If the transfer of force from the anchorages shapes, lines, and dimensions of the
of the pretensioning bed to the concrete is members as required by the construction
accomplished by flame cutting prestressed documents.
reinforcement, the cutting locations and

SBC 304-CR-18 224

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

(c) Formwork shall be sufficiently tight to placed on any unshored portion of the
inhibit leakage of paste or mortar. structure under construction, unless
(d) Formwork shall be braced or tied together analysis indicates adequate strength to
to maintain position and shape. support such additional loads and without
impairing serviceability.
26.11.2 Removal of formwork
26.11.2.1 Compliance requirements: 26.12—Concrete evaluation and
acceptance
(a) Before starting construction, the contractor
shall develop a procedure and schedule for 26.12.1 General
removal of formwork and installation of 26.12.1.1 Compliance requirements:
reshores, and shall calculate the loads
transferred to the structure during this (a) A strength test shall be the average of the
process. strengths of at least two 150 × 300 mm
(b) Structural analysis and concrete strength cylinders or at least three 100 × 200 mm
requirements used in planning and cylinders made from the same sample of
implementing the formwork removal and concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age
reshore installation shall be furnished by designated for 𝑓𝑐′ .
the contractor to the licensed design (b) The testing agency performing acceptance
professional and to the building official, testing shall comply with ASTM C1077.
when requested. (c) Qualified field testing technicians shall
(c) No construction loads shall be placed on, perform tests on fresh concrete at the job
nor any formwork removed from, any part site, prepare specimens for standard curing,
of the structure under construction except prepare specimens for field curing, if
when that portion of the structure in required, and record the temperature of the
combination with remaining formwork has fresh concrete when preparing specimens
sufficient strength to support safely its for strength tests.
weight and loads placed thereon and (d) Qualified laboratory technicians shall
without impairing serviceability. perform required laboratory tests.
(d) Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated (e) All reports of acceptance tests shall be
by structural analysis considering provided to the licensed design
anticipated loads, strength of formwork, professional, contractor, concrete producer,
and an estimate of in-place concrete and, if requested, to the owner and the
strength. building official.
(e) The estimate of in-place concrete strength 26.12.2 Frequency of testing
shall be based on tests of field-cured
cylinders or on other procedures to evaluate 26.12.2.1 Compliance requirements:
concrete strength approved by the licensed (a) Samples for preparing strength test
design professional and, when requested, specimens of each concrete mixture placed
approved by the building official. each day shall be taken in accordance with
(f) Formwork shall be removed in such a (1) through (3):
manner not to impair safety and (1) At least once a day.
serviceability of the structure. (2) At least once for each 110 m3 of
(g) Concrete exposed by formwork removal concrete.
shall have sufficient strength not to be (3) At least once for each 460 m2 of surface
damaged by the removal. area for slabs or walls.
(h) Formwork supports for post-tensioned (b) On a given project, if total volume of
members shall not be removed until concrete is such that frequency of testing
sufficient post-tensioning has been applied would provide fewer than five strength tests
to enable post-tensioned members to for a given concrete mixture, strength test
support their dead load and anticipated specimens shall be made from at least five
construction loads. randomly selected batches or from each
(i) No construction loads exceeding the batch if fewer than five batches are used.
combination of superimposed dead load
plus live load including reduction shall be 26.12.3 Acceptance criteria for standard-cured
specimens

SBC 304-CR-18 225

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

26.12.3.1 Compliance requirements: referenced in ASTM C42 shall be the

licensed design professional or the building
(a) Specimens for acceptance tests shall be in
official.
accordance with (1) and (2):
(d) Concrete in an area represented by core
(1) Sampling of concrete for strength test
tests shall be considered structurally
specimens shall be in accordance with
adequate if (1) and (2) are satisfied:
ASTM C172.
(1) The average of three cores is equal to at
(2) Cylinders for strength tests shall be
least 85 percent of 𝑓𝑐′ .
made and standard-cured in accordance
(2) No single core is less than 75 percent of
with ASTM C31 and tested in
𝑓𝑐′ .
accordance with ASTM C39.
(e) Additional testing of cores extracted from
(b) Strength level of a concrete mixture shall be
locations represented by erratic core
acceptable if (1) and (2) are satisfied:
strength results shall be permitted.
(1) Every arithmetic average of any three
(f) If criteria for evaluating structural
consecutive strength tests equals or
adequacy based on core strength results are
exceeds 𝑓𝑐′ .
not met, and if the structural adequacy
(2) No strength test falls below 𝑓𝑐′ by more
remains in doubt, the responsible authority
than 3.5 MPa if 𝑓𝑐′ is 35 MPa or less;
shall be permitted to order a strength
or by more than 0.10𝑓𝑐′ if 𝑓𝑐′ exceeds
evaluation in accordance with Chapter 27
35 MPa.
for the questionable portion of the structure
(c) If either of the requirements of 26.12.3.1(b)
or take other appropriate action.
are not satisfied, steps shall be taken to
increase the average of subsequent strength 26.12.5 Acceptance of steel fiber-reinforced
results. concrete
(d) Requirements for investigating low
26.12.5.1 Compliance requirements:
strength-test results shall apply if the
requirements of 26.12.3.1(b) (2) are not (a) Steel fiber-reinforced concrete used for
met. shear resistance shall satisfy (1) through
(3):
26.12.4 Investigation of low strength-test results (1) The compressive strength acceptance
26.12.4.1 Compliance requirements: criteria for standard-cured specimens
(2) The residual strength obtained from
(a) If any strength test of standard-cured
flexural testing in accordance with
cylinders falls below 𝑓𝑐′ by more than the
ASTM C1609 at a midspan deflection
limit allowed for acceptance, or if tests of
of 1/300 of the span length is at least
field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies
the greater of (i) and (ii):
in protection and curing, steps shall be
(i) 90 percent of the measured first-
taken to ensure that structural adequacy of
peak strength obtained from a
the structure is not jeopardized.
flexural test and
(b) If the likelihood of low-strength concrete is
(ii) 90 percent of the strength
confirmed and calculations indicate that
structural adequacy is significantly corresponding to 0.62√𝑓𝑐′
reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area (3) The residual strength obtained from
in question in accordance with ASTM C42 flexural testing in accordance with
shall be permitted. In such cases, three ASTM C1609 at a midspan deflection
cores shall be taken for each strength test of 1/150 of the span length is at least
that falls below 𝑓𝑐′ by more than the limit the greater of (i) and (ii):
allowed for acceptance. (i) 75 percent of the measured first-
(c) Cores shall be obtained, moisture- peak strength obtained from a
conditioned by storage in watertight bags or flexural test and
containers, transported to the testing (ii) 75 percent of the strength
agency, and tested in accordance with corresponding to 0.62√𝑓𝑐′
ASTM C42. Cores shall be tested between
48 hours and 7 days after coring unless
26.13—Inspection
otherwise approved by the licensed design 26.13.1 General
professional. The specifier of tests

SBC 304-CR-18 226

 CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

26.13.1.1 Concrete construction shall be inspected deformed reinforcement is used to resist

as required by the Code. earthquake-induced flexure, axial forces, or both in
special moment frames, special structural walls, and
26.13.1.2 Concrete construction shall be inspected
components of special structural walls including
throughout the various Work stages by or under the
coupling beams and wall piers.
supervision of a licensed design professional or by
a qualified inspector in accordance with the 26.13.3 Items requiring inspection
provisions of this section.
26.13.3.1 Items requiring verification and
26.13.1.3 The licensed design professional, a inspection shall be continuously or periodically
person under the supervision of a licensed design inspected in accordance with 26.13.3.2 and
professional, or a qualified inspector shall verify 26.13.3.3.
compliance with construction documents.
26.13.3.2 Items requiring continuous inspection
26.13.1.4 For continuous construction inspection of shall include (a) through (d):
special moment frames, qualified inspectors under
(a) Placement of concrete.
the supervision of the licensed design professional
(b) Tensioning of prestressing steel and
responsible for the structural design or under the
grouting of bonded tendons.
supervision of a licensed design professional with
(c) Installation of adhesive anchors in
demonstrated capability to supervise inspection of
horizontal or upwardly inclined
these elements shall inspect placement of
orientations to resist sustained tension
reinforcement and concrete.
loads in accordance with 17.8.2.4 and
26.13.2 Inspection reports where required as a condition of the anchor
assessment in accordance with ACI 355.4.
26.13.2.1 Inspection reports shall document
(d) Reinforcement for special moment frames.
inspected items and be developed throughout each
construction Work stage by the licensed design 26.13.3.3 Items requiring periodic inspection shall
professional, person under the supervision of a include (a) through (g):
licensed design professional, or qualified inspector.
(a) Placement of reinforcement, embedments,
Records of the inspection shall be preserved by the
and post- tensioning tendons.
party performing the inspection for at least 2 years
(b) Curing method and duration of curing for
after completion of the project.
each member.
26.13.2.2 Inspection reports shall document (a) (c) Construction and removal of forms and
through (d): reshoring.
(d) Sequence of erection and connection of
(a) General progress of the Work.
precast members.
(b) Any significant construction loadings on
(e) Verification of in-place concrete strength
completed floors, members, or walls.
before stressing post-tensioned
(c) The date and time of mixing, quantity,
reinforcement and before removal of shores
proportions of materials used, approximate
and formwork from beams and structural
placement location in the structure, and
slabs.
results of tests for fresh and hardened
(f) Installation of cast-in anchors, expansion
concrete properties for all concrete
anchors, and undercut anchors in
mixtures used in the Work.
accordance with 17.8.2.
(d) Concrete temperatures and protection given
(g) Installation of adhesive anchors where
to concrete during placement and curing
continuous inspection is not required in
when the ambient temperature falls below
accordance with 17.8.2.4 or as a condition
4°C or rises above 35°C.
of the assessment in accordance with ACI
26.13.2.3 Test reports shall be reviewed to verify 355.4 .
compliance with 20.2.2.5 if ASTM A615

SBC 304-CR-18 227

CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

Tables of Chapter 26

Table 26.4.1.1.1(a)—Specifications for cementitious materials

Cementitious material Specification
Portland cement ASTM Cl50
Expansive hydraulic cement ASTM C845
Fly ash and natural pozzolan ASTM C618
Slag cement ASTM C989
Silica fume ASTM C1240

Table 26.6.2.1(a) —Tolerances on 𝒅 and specified cover

Tolerance on 𝒅,
𝒅, mm Tolerance on specified concrete cover, mm[1]
mm
-10
 200 ±10 Smaller of:
-(1/3) specified cover
-13
> 200 ±13 Smaller of:
-(1/3) specified cover
[1]
Tolerance for cover to formed soffits is -6 mm.

Table 26.6.2.1(b)—Tolerances for longitudinal location of bends and ends of reinforcement

Location of bends or reinforcement ends Tolerances, mm
Discontinuous ends of brackets and corbels ±13
Discontinuous ends of other members ±25
Other locations ±50

SBC 304-CR-18 228

CHAPTER 26—CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 229

 CHAPTER 27—STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

CHAPTER 27—STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING

STRUCTURES

27.3.1.3 If required, an estimated equivalent 𝑓𝑐′

27.1—Scope shall be based on analysis of results of cylinder tests
27.1.1 Provisions of this chapter shall apply to from the original construction or tests of cores
strength evaluation of existing structures by removed from the part of the structure where
analytical means or by load testing. strength is in question.
27.2—General 27.3.1.4 The method for obtaining and testing
cores shall be in accordance with ASTM C42.
27.2.1 If there is doubt that a part or all of a
structure meets the safety requirements of this Code 27.3.1.5 The properties of reinforcement are
and the structure is to remain in service, a strength permitted to be based on tensile tests of
evaluation shall be carried out as required by the representative samples of the material in the
licensed design professional or building official. structure.
27.2.2 If the effect of a strength deficiency is well 27.3.2 Strength reduction factors
understood and it is practical to measure the 27.3.2.1 If dimensions, size, and location of
dimensions and determine the material properties of reinforcement, and material properties are
the members required for analysis, an analytical determined in accordance with 27.3.1, it is
evaluation of strength based on this information is permitted to increase  from the design values
permitted. Required data shall be determined in elsewhere in this Code; however,  shall not exceed
accordance with 27.3. the limits in Table 27.3.2.1.
27.2.3 If the effect of a strength deficiency is not
27.4—Strength evaluation by load test
well understood or it is not practical to measure the
dimensions and determine the material properties of 27.4.1 General
the members required for analysis, a load test is
27.4.1.1 Load tests shall be conducted in a manner
required in accordance with 27.4.
that provides for safety of life and the structure
27.2.4 If uncertainty about the strength of part or during the test.
all of a structure involves deterioration, and if the
27.4.1.2 Safety measures shall not interfere with
observed response during the load test satisfies the
the load test or affect the results.
acceptance criteria in 27.4.5, the structure or part of
the structure is permitted to remain in service for a 27.4.1.3 The portion of the structure subject to the
time period specified by the licensed design test load shall be at least 56 days old. If the owner
professional. If deemed necessary by the licensed of the structure, the contractor, the licensed design
design professional, periodic re-evaluations shall be professional, and all other involved parties agree, it
conducted. shall be permitted to perform the load test at an
earlier age.
27.3—Analytical strength evaluation
27.4.1.4 A precast member to be made composite
27.3.1 Verification of as-built condition with cast-in-place concrete shall be permitted to be
27.3.1.1 Dimensions of members shall be tested in flexure as a precast member alone in
established at critical sections. accordance with (a) and (b):
27.3.1.2 Locations and sizes of reinforcement shall (a) Test loads shall be applied only when
be determined by measurement. It shall be calculations indicate the isolated precast
permitted to base reinforcement locations on member will not fail by compression or
available drawings if field-verified at representative buckling.
locations to confirm the information on the (b) The test load, when applied to the precast
drawings. member alone, shall induce the same total
force in the tensile reinforcement as would

SBC 304-CR-18 230

 CHAPTER 27—STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

be produced by loading the composite 27.4.4.2 The initial value for all applicable response
member with the test load in accordance measurements shall be obtained not more than 1
with 27.4.2. hour before applying the first load increment.
27.4.2 Test load arrangement and load factors 27.4.4.3 A set of response measurements shall be
recorded after each load increment is applied and
27.4.2.1 Test load arrangements shall be selected to
after 𝑇𝑡 has been applied on the structure for at least
maximize the deflection, load effects, and stresses
24 hours.
in the critical regions of the members being
evaluated. 27.4.4.4 A set of final response measurements shall
be made 24 hours after 𝑇𝑡 is removed.
27.4.2.2 The total test load 𝑇𝑡 , including dead load
already in place, shall be at least the greatest of (a), 27.4.5 Acceptance criteria
(b), and (c):
27.4.5.1 The portion of the structure tested shall
𝑇𝑡 = 1.15𝐷 + 1.5𝐿 + 0.4(𝐿𝑟 or 𝑅) show no spalling or crushing of concrete, or other
(a) evidence of failure.
(27.4.2.2a)
𝑇𝑡 = 1.15𝐷 + 0.9𝐿 + 1.5(𝐿𝑟 or 𝑅) 27.4.5.2 Members tested shall not exhibit cracks
(b) indicating imminent shear failure.
(27.4.2.2b)
𝑇𝑡 = 1.3𝐷 27.4.5.3 In regions of members without transverse
(c) reinforcement, structural cracks inclined to the
(27.4.2.2c) longitudinal axis and having a horizontal projection
greater than the depth of the member shall be
27.4.2.3 It is permitted to reduce 𝐿 in 27.4.2.2 in evaluated. For variable-depth members, the depth
accordance with the SBC 201 and SBC 301. shall be measured at the mid-length of the crack.

27.4.2.4 The load factor on the live load 𝐿 in 27.4.5.4 In regions of anchorage and lap splices of
27.4.2.2(b) shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.45 reinforcement, short inclined cracks or horizontal
except for parking structures, areas occupied as cracks along the line of reinforcement shall be
places of public assembly, or areas where 𝐿 is evaluated.
greater than 5 kN/m2. 27.4.5.5 Measured deflections shall satisfy (a) or
27.4.3 Test load application (b):

27.4.3.1 Total test load 𝑇𝑡 shall be applied in at least 𝑙𝑡2

four approximately equal increments. (a) ∆1 ≤ (27.4.5.5a)
20,000ℎ
27.4.3.2 Uniform 𝑇𝑡 shall be applied in a manner
that ensures uniform distribution of the load 𝑙𝑡2
(b) ∆1 ≤ (27.4.5.5b)
transmitted to the structure or portion of the 20,000ℎ
structure being tested. Arching of the test load shall
be avoided. 27.4.5.6 If 27.4.5.5 is not satisfied, it shall be
permitted to repeat the load test, provided that the
27.4.3.3 After the final load increment is applied, 𝑇𝑡
second load test begins no earlier than 72 hours after
shall remain on the structure for at least 24 hours
removal of externally applied loads from the first
unless signs of distress, as noted in 27.4.5, are
load test.
observed.
27.4.5.7 Portions of the structure tested in the
27.4.3.4 After all response measurements are
second load test shall be considered acceptable if:
recorded, the test load shall be removed as soon as
practical. ∆2
∆𝑟 ≤ (27.4.5.7)
27.4.4 Response measurements 5
27.4.4.1 Response measurements, such as
27.5—Reduced load rating
deflection, strain, slip, and crack width, shall be
made at locations where maximum response is 27.5.1 Provision for lower load rating—If the
expected. Additional measurements shall be made structure under investigation does not satisfy
if required. conditions or criteria of 27.3 or 27.4.5, the structure
shall be permitted for use at a lower load rating,

SBC 304-CR-18 231

 CHAPTER 27—STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

based on the results of the load test or analysis, if

approved by the building official.

SBC 304-CR-18 232

CHAPTER 27—STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

TABLES OF CHAPTER 27

Table 27.3.2.1—Maximum permissible strength reduction factors

Transverse Maximum
Strength Classification
reinforcement permissible 
Tension controlled All cases 1.0
Flexure, axial, or both Compression Spirals[1] 0.9
controlled Other 0.8
Shear, torsion, or both 0.8
Bearing 0.8
[1]
Spirals shall satisfy 10.7.6.3, 20.2.2, and 25.7.3.

SBC 304-CR-18 233

CHAPTER 27—STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 234

 REFERENCES

REFERENCES

309R-05—Guide for Consolidation of Concrete

American Association of State Highway and
311.4R-05—Guide for Concrete Inspection
Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
311.6-09—Specification for Ready Mixed
LRFDCONS-3-2010—LRFD Bridge Construction
Concrete Testing Services
Specifications, Third Edition
313-97—Standard Practice for Design and
LRFDUS-6-2012—LRFD Bridge Design
Construction of Concrete Silos and Stacking
Specifications, Sixth Edition
Tubes for Storing Granular Materials
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
318-63—Commentary on Building Code
117-10—Specification for Tolerances for Concrete
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
Construction and Materials
318-11—Building Code Requirements for
201.2R-08—Guide to Durable Concrete
Structural Concrete (ACI 318-11) and
209R-92(08) —Prediction of Creep, Shrinkage, and
Commentary
Temperature Effects in Concrete Structures
318-14—Building Code Requirements for
211.1-91(09)—Standard Practice for Selecting
Structural Concrete (ACI 318-14) and
Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and
Commentary
Mass Concrete
318.2-14—Building Code Requirements for
213R-03—Guide for Structural Lightweight-
Concrete Thin Shells (ACI 318.2-14) and
Aggregate Concrete
Commentary
214R-11—Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test
332-14—Requirements for Residential Concrete
Results of Concrete
Construction (ACI 332-14) and Commentary
214.4R-10—Guide for Obtaining Cores and
334.1R-92(02)—Concrete Shell Structures–
Interpreting Compressive Strength Results
Practice and Commentary
215R-92(97)—Considerations for Design of
334.2R-91—Reinforced Concrete Cooling Tower
Concrete Structures Subjected to Fatigue
Shells–Practice and Commentary
Loading
336.2R-88—Suggested Analysis and Design
216.1-07—Code Requirements for Determining
Procedures for Combined Footings and Mats
Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry
336.3R-93(06) —Design and Construction of
Construction Assemblies
Drilled Piers
222R-01—Protection of Metals in Concrete against
347-04—Guide to Formwork for Concrete
Corrosion
347.2R-05—Guide for Shoring/Reshoring of
223R-10—Guide for the Use of Shrinkage-
Concrete Multistory Buildings
Compensating Concrete
349-06—Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-
228.1R-03—In-Place Methods to Estimate
Related Concrete Structures (ACI 349-06) and
Concrete Strength
Commentary
233R-03—Slag Cement in Concrete and Mortar
350-06—Code Requirements for Environmental
234R-06—Guide for the Use of Silica Fume in
Engineering Concrete Structures (ACI 350-06)
Concrete
and Commentary
237R-07—Self-Consolidating Concrete
352R-02—Recommendations for Design of
301-10—Specifications for Structural Concrete
Beam-Column Connections in Monolithic
304R-00(09)—Guide for Measuring, Mixing,
Reinforced Concrete Structures
Transporting, and Placing Concrete
352.1R-11—Guide for Design of Slab-Column
305.1-06—Specification for Hot Weather
Connections in Monolithic Concrete Structures
Concreting
355.2-07—Qualifications of Post Installed
305R-10—Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and
306R-10—Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
Commentary
306.1-90(02) —Standard Specification for Cold
355.4-11—Qualification of Post-Installed
Weather Concreting
Adhesive Anchors in Concrete (ACI 355.4-11)
307-08—Code Requirements for Reinforced
and Commentary
Concrete Chimneys (ACI 307-08) and
359-13—Code for Concrete Containments
Commentary
360R-10—Guide to Design of Slabs-on-Ground
308R-01(08) —Guide to Curing Concrete

SBC 304-CR-18 235

 REFERENCES

362.1R-97(02) —Guide for the Design of Durable SP-4(05)—Formwork for Concrete, Seventh
Parking Structures Edition
372R-13—Guide to Design and Construction of SP-17(09)—ACI Design Handbook
Circular Wire and Strand-Wrapped Prestressed SP-66(04) —ACI Detailing Manual
Concrete Structures American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
374.1-05—Acceptance Criteria for Moment 341-10—Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Frames Based on Structural Testing and Buildings
Commentary 360-10—Specification for Structural Steel
408.1R-90—Suggested Development, Splice, and Buildings
Standard Hook Provisions for Deformed Bars in American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
Tension D100-08—Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
408.2R-12—Report on Bond of Steel Reinforcing Sl00-07—NorthAmerican Specification for the
Bars Under Cyclic Loads Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
421.1R-08—Guide to Shear Reinforcement for Members
Slabs American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
423.3R-05—Recommendations for Concrete 7-10—Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Members Prestressed with Unbonded Tendons Other Structures
423.7-14—Specification for Unbonded Single- American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
Strand Tendon Materials Bl.l-03—Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and
435R-95(00) —Control of Deflection in Concrete UNR Thread Form)
Structures B18. 2.1-96—Square and Hex Bolts and Screws,
435.5R-73(89) —Deflections of Continuous Inch Series
Concrete Beams Bl8.2.6-96—Fasteners for Use in Structural
440.1R-06—Guide for the Design and Construction Applications
of Structural Concrete Reinforced with FRP B31.1-92—Power Piping
Bars B31.3-90—Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery
440.2R-08—Guide for the Design and Construction Piping
of Externally Bonded FRP Systems for American Welding Society (AWS)
Strengthening Concrete Structures D1.1/D1.1M:2010—Structural Welding Code –
445R-99(09)—Recent Approaches to Shear Design Steel
of Structural Concrete D1.4/D1.4M:2005—Structural Welding Code –
543R-00—Guide to Design, Manufacture, and Reinforcing Steel
Installation of Concrete Piles ASTM International
544.3R-08—Guide for Specifying, Proportioning, A36/A36M-12—Standard Specification for Carbon
and Production of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete Structural Steel
550.3-13—Design Specification for Unbonded A307-12—Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
Post-Tensioned Precast Concrete Special Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60000 PSI
Moment Frames Satisfying ACI 374.1 (ACI Tensile Strength
550.3-13) and Commentary A370-14—Standard Test Methods and Definitions
551.2R-10—Design Guide for Tilt-Up Concrete for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
Panels A416/A416M-12a—Standard Specification for
CT-13—Concrete Terminology Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for
ITG-5.1-07—Acceptance Criteria for Special Prestressed Concrete
Unbonded Post-Tensioned Precast Structural A421/A421M-10—Standard Specification for
Walls Based on Validation Testing and Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for
Commentary Prestressed Concrete, including Supplementary
ITG-5.2-09—Requirements for Design of a Special Requirement SI, Low-Relaxation Wire and
Unbonded Post-Tensioned Precast Shear Wall Relaxation Testing
Satisfying ACI ITG-5.1 (ACI 5.2-09) and A615/A615M-14—Standard Specification for
Commentary Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
ITG 7-09—Specification for Tolerances for Precast Concrete Reinforcement
Concrete A706/A706M-14—Standard Specification for
SP-2(07)—Manual of Concrete Inspection, Tenth Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for
Edition Concrete Reinforcement

SBC 304-CR-18 236

 REFERENCES

A767/A767M-09—Standard Specification for C231/C231M-14—Standard Test Method for Air

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Concrete Reinforcement Pressure Method
A775/A775M-07b(2014)—Standard Specification C330/C330M-14—Standard Specification for
for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete
A934/A934M-13—Standard Specification for C469/C469M-10—Standard Test Method for Static
Epoxy- Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson's Ratio of
Bars Concrete in Compression
A955/A955M-14—Standard Specification for C494/C494M-13—Standard Specification for
Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel Bars for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Concrete Reinforcement C567/567M-14—Standard Test Method for
A970/A970M-13a—Standard Specification for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight
Headed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, Concrete
including Annex A1 Requirements for Class HA C618-12a—Standard Specification for Coal Fly
Head Dimensions Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
A1022/A1022M-14-Standard Specification for Use in Concrete
Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel Wire and C685/C685M-ll—Standard Specification for
Welded Wire for Concrete Reinforcement Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
A1035/A1035M-14—Standard Specification for Continuous Mixing
Deformed and Plain, Low-Carbon, Chromium, C803/803M-03(2010)—Standard Test Method for
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete
A1044/A1044M-05(2010)—Standard C805/C805M-08—Standard Test Method for
Specification for Steel Stud Assemblies for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete
Shear Reinforcement of Concrete C845/C845M-12—Standard Specification for
A1055/A1055M-10ε1—Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement
Zinc and Epoxy Dual-Coated Steel Reinforcing C873/873CM-10a—Standard Test Method for
Bars Compressive Strength of Concrete Cylinders
A1064/A1064M-13—Standard Specification for Cast in Place in Cylindrical Molds
Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire C900-06—Standard Test Method for Pullout
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Strength of Hardened Concrete
Concrete C989/C989M-13—Standard Specification for Slag
A1077/A1077M-12—Standard Specification for Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
Structural Steel with Improved Yield Strength at C1012/C1012M-13—Standard Test Method for
High Temperature for Use in Buildings Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars
C31/C31M-12—Standard Practice for Making and Exposed to a Sulfate Solution
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C1017/C1017M-13—Standard Specification for
C33/C33M-13—-Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
Concrete Aggregates Flowing Concrete
C39/C39M-14a—Standard Test Method for C1074-11—Standard Practice for Estimating
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Concrete Strength by the Maturity Method
Specimens C1077-14—Standard Practice for Laboratories
C42/C42M-13—Standard Test Method for Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing
Beams of Concrete Agency Evaluation
C94/C94M-14—Standard Specification for Ready- C1157/C1157M-ll—Standard Performance
Mixed Concrete Specification for Hydraulic Cement
C150/C150M-12—Standard Specification for C1202-10—Standard Test Method for Electrical
Portland Cement Indication of Concrete's Ability to Resist
C172/C172M-14—Standard Practice for Sampling Chloride Ion Penetration
Freshly Mixed Concrete C1218/C1218M-99(2008) —Standard Test Method
C173/C173M-14—Standard Test Method for Air for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Concrete
Volumetric Method C1240-14—Standard Specification for Silica Fume
Used in Cementitious Mixtures

SBC 304-CR-18 237

 REFERENCES

C1602/C1602M-12—Standard Specification for NC-2010—Standard for Non-Composite Steel

Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Floor Deck
Cement Concrete
C1609/C1609M-12—Standard Test Method for Saudi Building Codes
Flexural Performance of Fiber-Reinforced
Concrete (Using Beam With Third-Point 201-18—Saudi Building Code-General
Loading) 301-18— Saudi Building Code for Loading and
D3665-07ε1—Standard Practice for Random Forces.
Sampling of Construction Materials
Fl554-07 ε1—Standard Specification for Anchor 303-18— Saudi Building Code for Soils &
Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength Foundations.
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) 306-18— Saudi Steel Structures Code.
P749-10—Earthquake-Resistant Design Concepts: 305-18— Saudi Masonry Code.
An Introduction to the NEHRP Recommended
Provisions
Seismic Provisions Authored documents
P750-l 0—NEHRP Recommended Seismic AC303, 2011, "Acceptance Criteria for Post-
Provisions for New Buildings and Other Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers of
Structures (2009 edition) Prestressed Concrete," Apr. 2011, editorially
P751-12—NEHRP Recommended Seismic revised Aug. 2012, ICC-ES Evaluation Service,
Provisions: Design Examples (2009 edition) LLC, Whittier, CA.
International Code Council (ICC) ACI Committee 318, 1999, "Closure to Public
2012 IBC—International Building Code Comments on ACI 318-99," Concrete
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) International, V. 21, No. 5, May, pp. 318-1 to
5000-2012—Building Construction Safety Code 318-50.
Portland Cement Association (PCA) ACI Committee 408, 1966, "Bond Stress—The
EB001.15-11—Design and Control of Concrete State of the Art," ACI Journal Proceedings, V.
Mixtures, 15th edition 63, No. 11, Nov., pp. 1161-1188.
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) ACI Committee 435, 1966, "Deflections of
MNL 116-99—Manual for Quality Control for Reinforced Concrete Flexural Members (ACI
Plants and Production of Structural Precast 435.2R-66),"ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 63,
Concrete Products No. 6, June, pp. 637-674.
MNL 117-13—Manual for Quality Control for ACI Committee 435, 1978, “Proposed Revisions by
Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Committee 435 to ACI Building Code and
Concrete Products Commentary Provisions on Deflections,” ACI
MNL 120-10—PCI Design Handbook: Precast and Journal Proceedings, V. 75, No. 6, June, pp.
Prestressed Concrete, Seventh Edition 229-238.
MNL 123-88—Design and Typical Details of ACI Committee 435 Subcommittee 1, 1968,
Connections for Precast and Prestressed “Allowable Deflections (ACI 435.3R-68),” ACI
Concrete Journal Proceedings, V. 65, No. 6, June, pp.
Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI) 433-444.
DC10.5-12—Standard Requirements for Design ACI Committee 435 Subcommittee 5, 1963,
and Analysis of Shallow Post-Tensioned “Deflections of Prestressed Concrete Members
Concrete Foundations of Expansive Soils (ACI 435.1R-63),” ACI Journal Proceedings,
DC20.8-04—Design of Post-Tensioned Slabs V. 60, No. 12, Dec., pp. 1697-1728.
Using Unbonded Tendons Adebar, P.; Kuchma, D.; and Collins, M. P., 1990,
M50.3-12—Guide Specification for Grouted Post- “Strut- and-Tie Models for the Design of Pile
Tensioning Caps: An Experimental Study,” ACI Structural
M55.1-12—Specification for Grouting of Post- Journal, V. 87, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 81-92.
Tensioned Structures Al-Mhaidib A. I., 2002, “Sabkha soil in the
TAB.l-06—Post-Tensioning Manual, Sixth Edition Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: characteristics and
Steel Deck Institute (SDI) treatment,” J King Abdulaziz Univ Eng Sci
C-2011—Standard for Composite Steel Floor 14(2):51 (in Arabic)
Deck-Slabs

SBC 304-CR-18 238

 REFERENCES

Anderson, A. R., 1978, “Shear Strength of Hollow Barney, G. B.; Corley, W. G.; Hanson, J. M.; and
Core Members,” Technical Bulletin 78-81, Parmelee, R. A., 1977, “Behavior and Design of
Concrete Technology Associates, Tacoma, WA, Prestressed Concrete Beams with Large Web
Apr., 33 pp. Openings,” PCI Journal, V. 22, No. 6, Nov.-
Anderson, N. S., and Meinheit, D. F., 2005, “Pryout Dec., pp. 32-61.
Capacity of Cast-In Headed Stud Anchors,” PCI Barney, G. B.; Shiu, K. N.; Rabbat, B. G.; Fiorato,
Journal, V. 50, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 90-112. A. E.; Russell, H. G.; and Corley, W. G., 1980,
Anderson, N. S., and Meinheit, D. F., 2007, “A “Behavior of Coupling Beams under Load
Review of Headed Stud Design Criteria,” PCI Reversals (RD068.01B),”Portland Cement
Journal, V. 52, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 82-100. Association, Skokie, IL.
Anderson, N. S., and Ramirez, J. A., 1989, Bartlett, F. M., 2012, “Using Historical Cylinder
“Detailing of Stirrup Reinforcement,” ACI Data for Structural Evaluation,” Andy Scanlon
Structural Journal, V. 86, No. 5, Sept.-Oct., pp. Symposium on Serviceability and Safety of
507-515. Concrete Structures: From Research to
Angelakos, D.; Bentz, E. C.; and Collins, M. D., Practice, SP-284, P. H. Bischoff, E. Musselman,
2001, “Effect of Concrete Strength and S. Gross, and H. Nassif, eds., American
Minimum Stirrups on Shear Strength of Large Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 12 pp.
Members,” ACI Structural Journal, V. 98, No. (CD-ROM)
3, May-June, pp. 290-300. Bartlett, M. F., and MacGregor, J. G., 1994, “Effect
ASCE Joint Committee, 1940, “Recommended of Moisture Condition on Concrete Core
Practice and Standard Specification for Concrete Strengths,” ACI Materials Journal, V. 91, No. 3,
and Reinforced Concrete,” Proceedings, ASCE, May-June, pp. 227-236.
V. 66, No. 6, Part 2, June, 81 pp. Bartoletti, S. J., and Jirsa, J. O., 1995, “Effects of
Asmus, J., 1999, “Verhalten von Befestigungen bei Epoxy-Coating on Anchorage and Development
der Versagensart Spalten des Betons (Behavior of Welded Wire Fabric,” ACI Structural
of Fastenings with the Failure Mode Splitting of Journal, V. 92, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 757-764.
Concrete),” dissertation, Universität Stuttgart, Base, G. D.; Reed, J. B.; Beeby, A. W.; and Taylor,
Stuttgart, Germany. H. P. J., 1966, “An Investigation of the Crack
Athey, J. W., ed., 1982, “Test Report on Slender Control Characteristics of Various Types of Bar
Walls,” Southern California Chapter of the in Reinforced Concrete Beams,” Research
American Concrete Institute and Structural Report No. 18, Cement and Concrete
Engineers Association of Southern California, Association, London, UK, Dec., 44 pp.
Los Angeles, CA, 129 pp. Becker, R. J., and Buettner, D. R., 1985, “Shear
Azizinamini, A.; Chisala, M.; and Ghosh, S. K., Tests of Extruded Hollow Core Slabs,” PCI
1995, “Tension Development Length of Journal, V. 30, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 40-54.
Reinforcing Bars Embedded in High-Strength Beeby, A. W., 1979, “The Prediction of Crack
Concrete,” Engineering Structures, V. 17, No. 7, Widths in Hardened Concrete,” The Structural
pp. 512-522. doi:10.1016/0141-0296(95)00096- Engineer, V. 57A, No. 1, Jan., pp. 9-17.
P Azizinamini, A.; Pavel, R.; Hatfield, E.; and Behera, U., and Rajagopalan, K. S., 1969, “Two-
Ghosh, S. K., 1999a, “Behavior of Spliced Piece U-Stirrups in Reinforced Concrete
Reinforcing Bars Embedded in High-Strength Beams,” ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 66, No.
Concrete,” ACI Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 5, 7, July, pp. 522-524.
Sept.-Oct., pp. 826-835. Bianchini, A. C.; Woods, R. E.; and Kesler, C. E.,
Azizinamini, A.; Darwin, D.; Eligehausen, R.; 1960, “Effect of Floor Concrete Strength on
Pavel, R.; and Ghosh, S. K., 1999b, “Proposed Column Strength,” ACI Journal Proceedings, V.
Modifications to ACI 318-95 Development and 56, No. 11, May, pp. 1149-1169.
Splice Provisions for High-Strength Concrete,” Birkeland, P. W., and Birkeland, H. W., 1966,
ACI Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., “Connections in Precast Concrete
pp. 922-926. Construction,” ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 63,
Barda, F.; Hanson, J. M.; and Corley, W. G., 1977, No. 3, Mar., pp. 345-368.
“Shear Strength of Low-Rise Walls with Black, W. C., 1973, “Field Corrections to Partially
Boundary Elements,” Reinforced Concrete Embedded Reinforcing Bars,” ACI Journal
Structures in Seismic Zones, SP-53, American Proceedings, V. 70, No. 10, Oct., pp. 690-691.
Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp.
149-202.

SBC 304-CR-18 239

 REFERENCES

Bloem, D. L., 1965, “Concrete Strength Brown, M.D.; Bayrak, O.; and Jirsa, J. O., 2006,
Measurement—Cores vs. Cylinders,” "Design for Shear Based on Loading
Proceedings, ASTM, V. 65, pp. 668-696. Conditions," ACI Structural Journal, V. 103,
Bloem, D. L., 1968, “Concrete Strength in No.4, July-Aug., pp. 541-550.
Structures,” ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 65, Budek, A; Priestley, M.; and Lee, C., 2002,
No. 3, Mar., pp. 176-187. "Seismic Design of Columns with High-
Blume, J. A.; Newmark, N. M.; and Corning, L. H., Strength Wire and Strand as Spiral
1961, Design of Multistory Reinforced Concrete Reinforcement," ACI Structural Journal, V. 99,
Buildings for Earthquake Motions, Portland No.5, Sept.-Oct., pp. 660-670.
Cement Association, Skokie, IL, 318 pp. Burns, N. H., and Hemakom, R., 1977, "Test of
BOCA, 1999, “BOCA National Building Code,” Scale Model Post-Tensioned Flat Plate,"
13th edition, Building Officials and Code Proceedings, ASCE, V. 103, No. ST6, June, pp.
Administration International, Inc., Country Club 1237-1255.
Hills, IL. Canadian Concrete Design Standard, 2009, "Design
Bondy, K. B., 2003, "Moment Redistribution: of Concrete Structures for Buildings," CAN3-
Principles and Practice Using ACI 318-02," PTI A23.3-M84, and "Precast Concrete Materials
Journal, V. 1, No. 1, Jan., pp. 3-21. and Construction," CAN3- A23.4-M84,
Branson, D. E., 1965, "Instantaneous and Time- Canadian Standards Association, Rexdale, ON,
Dependent Deflections on Simple and Canada.
Continuous Reinforced Concrete Beams," HPR Carino, N. J.; Guthrie, W. F.; Lagergren, E. S.; and
Report No. 7, Part 1, Alabama Highway Mullings, G. M., 1994, "Effects of Testing
Department, Bureau of Public Roads, Aug., pp. Variables on the Strength of High-Strength (90
1-78. MPa) Concrete Cylinders," High-Performance
Branson, D. E., 1970, discussion of "Proposed Concrete, SP-149, V M. Malhotra, ed.,
Revision of ACI 318-63: Building Code American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills,
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," ACI MI, pp. 589-632.
Journal Proceedings, V. 67, No. 9, Sept., pp. Carter, J. W. III; Hawkins, N. M.; and Wood, S. L.,
692-695. 1993, "Seismic Response of Tilt-Up
Branson, D. E., 1971, "Compression Steel Effect on Construction," SRS No. 581, Civil Engineering
Long- Time Deflections," ACI Journal Series, University of Illinois, Urbana, IL, Dec.,
Proceedings, V. 68, No. 8, Aug., pp. 555-559. 224 pp.
Branson, D. E., 1977, Deformation of Concrete Castro, A; Kreger, M.; Bayrak, O.;Breen, J. E.; and
Structures, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, Wood, S. L., 2004, "Allowable Design Release
546 pp. Stresses for Pretensioned Concrete Beams,"
Branson, D. E.; Meyers, B. L.; and Kripanarayanan, Report No. FHWA/TX-04/0-4086-2, Center for
K. M., 1970, "Time-Dependent Deformation of Transportation Research, University of Texas at
Noncomposite and Composite Prestressed Austin, Austin, IX, Aug., 127 pp.
Concrete Structures," Symposium on Concrete CEB, 1994, "Fastenings to Concrete and Masonry
Deformation, Highway Research Record 324, Structures, State of the Art Report," Comite
Highway Research Board, pp. 15-43. Euro-Intemational du Beton (CEB), Bulletin No.
Breen, J. E.; Burdet, O.; Roberts, C.; Sanders, D.; 216, Thomas Telford Services Ltd., London,
Wollmann, G.; and Falconer, B., 1994, UK.
"Anchorage Zone Requirements for Post- CEB, 1997, Design of Fastenings in Concrete,
Tensioned Concrete Girders," NCHRP Report Comite Euro-Intemational du Beton (CEB),
356, Transportation Research Board, National Thomas Telford Services Ltd., London, UK,
Academy Press, Washington, DC. Jan.
Briss, G. R.; Paulay, T.; and Park, R., 1978, "Elastic Chen, L.; Mindess, S.; Morgan, D. R.; Shah, S. P.;
Behavior of Earthquake Resistant R. C. Interior Johnston, C. D.; and Pigeon, M., 1995,
Beam- Column Joints," Report 78-13, "Comparative Toughness Testing of Fiber
University of Canterbury, Department of Civil Reinforced Concrete," Testing of Fiber
Engineering, Christchurch, New Zealand, Feb. Reinforced Concrete, SP-155, American
Broms, C. E., 1990, "Shear Reinforcement for Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 41-
Deflection Ductility of Flat Plates," ACI 69.
Structural Journal, V. 87, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. Chow, L.; Conway, H.; and Winter, G., 1953,
696-705. "Stresses in Deep Beams," Transactions of the

SBC 304-CR-18 240

 REFERENCES

American Society of Civil Engineers, V. 118, pp. 218, Civil Engineering Studies, University of
686-708. Illinois, June, 166 pp.
Clough, R. W., 1960, "Dynamic Effects of Crist, R. A, 1966, "Shear Behavior of Deep
Earthquakes," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 86, No. Reinforced Concrete Beams," Proceedings,
ST4, Apr., pp. 49-65. Symposium on the Effects of Repeated Loading
Cohn, M. A, 1965, "Rotational Compatibility in the of Materials and Structural Elements (Mexico
Limit Design of Reinforced Concrete City), V. 4, RILEM, Paris, France, 31 pp.
Continuous Beams," Flexural Mechanics of CRSI Handbook, 1984, sixth edition, Concrete
Reinforced Concrete, SP-12, American Reinforcing Steel Institute, Schaumburg, IL.
Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil CSA, 1984, "Design of Concrete Structures for
Engineers, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 35-46. Buildings," CAN3-A23.3-M84, and "Precast
Collins, M. P., and Lampert, P., 1973, Concrete Materials and Construction," CAN3-
"Redistribution of Moments at Cracking-The A23.4-M84, Canadian Standards Association,
Key to Simpler Torsion Design?" Analysis of Rexdale, ON, Canada.
Structural Systems for Torsion, SP-35, Darwin, D.; Manning, D. G.; and Hognestad, E.,
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, 1985, "Debate: Crack Width, Cover, and
MI, pp. 343-383. Corrosion," Concrete International, V. 7, No. 5,
Collins, M. P., and Mitchell, D., 1991, Prestressed May, pp. 20-35.
Concrete Structures, Prentice Hall Inc., Darwin, D.; Zuo, J.; Tholen, M. L.; and Idun, E. K.,
Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 766 pp. 1996, "Development Length Criteria for
Collins, M. P., and Mitchell, D., 1997, Prestressed Conventional and High Relative Rib Area
Concrete Structures, Response Publications, Reinforcing Bars," ACI Strnctural Journal, V.
Canada, pp. 517-518. 93, No. 3, May-June, pp. 347-359.
Column Research Council, 1966, "Guide to Design Deatherage, J. H.; Burdette, E. G.; and Chew, C. K.,
Criteria for Metal Compression Members," 1994, "Development Length and Lateral
second edition, Fritz Engineering Laboratory, Spacing Requirements of Prcstressing Strand for
Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA Prestressed Concrete Bridge Girders," PCI
Cook, R.A, and Klingner, R. E., 1992a, "Behavior Journal, V. 39, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 70-83.
of Ductile Multiple-Anchor Steel-to-Concrete Design of Fastenings in Concrete, 1997, Comite
Connections with Surface-Mounted Euro- International du Beton (CEB), Thomas
Baseplates," Anchors in Concrete: Design and Telford Services Ltd., London, UK, Jan.
Behavior, SP-130, G. A Senkiw and H. B. Dhowian AW, 1990, “Compressibility
Lancelot III, eds., American Concrete Institute, characteristics of sabkha complex,” Arab J Sci
Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 61-122. Eng 15(1), pp. 47-63.
Cook, R.A, and Klingner, R. E., 1992b,"Ductile Dolan, C. W, and Krohn, J. J., 2007, "A Case for
Multiple- Anchor Steel-to-Concrete Increasing the Allowable Compressive Release
Connections," Journal of Structural Stress for Prestressed Concrete," PCI Journal,
Engineering, ASCE, V 118, No. 6, June, pp. V. 52, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 102-105.
1645-1665. doi: 10.1061/(ASCE)0733- Dovich, L. M., and Wight, J. K., 2005, "Effective
9445(1992)118:6(1645) Slab Width Model for Seismic Analysis of Flat
Cook, R.A ; Kunz, J.; Fuchs, W.; and Konz, R. C., Slab Frames," ACI Structural Journal, V. 102,
1998, "Behavior and Design of Single Adhesive No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 868-875.
Anchors under Tensile Load in Uncracked Durrani, A J., and Wight, J. K., 1982,
Concrete," ACI Structural Journal, V. 95, No. 1, "Experimental and Analytical Study of Internal
Jan.-Feb., pp. 9-26. Beam to Column Connections Subjected to
Corley, W G., and Hawkins, N. M., 1968, Reversed Cyclic Loading," Report No. UMEE
"Shearhead Reinforcement for Slabs," ACI 82R3, Department of Civil Engineering,
Journal Proceedings, V. 65, No. 10, Oct., pp. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, July,
811-824. 275 pp.
Corley, W G., and Jirsa, J. O., 1970, "Equivalent Ehsani, M. R., 1982, "Behavior of Exterior
Frame Analysis for Slab Design," ACI Journal Reinforced Concrete Beam to Column
Proceedings, V. 67, No. 11, Nov., pp. 875-884. Connections Subjected to Earthquake Type
Corley, W G.; Sozen, M. A; and Siess, C. P, 1961, Loading," Report No. UMEE 82R5, Department
"Equivalent-Frame Analysis for Reinforced of Civil Engineering, University of Michigan,
Concrete Slabs," Structural Research Series No. Ann Arbor, MI, July, 275 pp.

SBC 304-CR-18 241

 REFERENCES

Eligehausen, R., and Balogh, T., 1995, "Behavior of 3, "Practical Design," Pub.: SETO, London, UK,
Fasteners Loaded in Tension in Cracked Sept., 112 pp.
Reinforced Concrete," ACI Structural Journal, Fling, R. S., 1987, Practical Design of Reinforced
V. 92, No. 3, May-June, pp. 365-379. Concrete, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York,
Eligehausen, R., and Fuchs, W, 1988, "Load 536 pp.
Bearing Behavior of Anchor Fastenings under Ford, J. S.; Chang, D. C.; and Breen, J. E., 1981,
Shear, Combined Tension and Shear or Flexural "Design Indications from Tests of Unbraced
Loadings," Betonwerk + Fertigteiltechnik, pp. Multipanel Concrete Frames," Concrete
48-56. International, V. 3, No. 3, Mar., pp. 37-47.
Eligehausen, R.; Cook, R. A; and Appl, J., 2006a, Foutch, D. A; Gamble, W L.; and Sunidja, H., 1990,
"Behavior and Design of Adhesive Bonded "Tests of Post-Tensioned Concrete Slab-Edge
Anchors," ACI Structural Journal, V. 103, No. Column Connections," ACI Structural Journal,
6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 822-831. V. 87, No. 2, Mar.- Apr., pp. 167-179.
Eligehausen, R.; Mallee, R.; and Silva, J., 2006b, Frantz, G. C., and Breen, J. E., 1980, "Cracking on
Anchorage in Concrete Construction, Ernst & the Side Faces of Large Reinforced Concrete
Sohn (J. T. Wiley), Berlin, Germany, May, 380 Beams," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 77, No. 5,
pp. Sept.-Oct., pp. 307-313.
Eligehausen, R.; Fuchs, W; and Mayer, B., 1987, French, C. W, and Moehle, J. P., 1991, "Effect of
"Load Bearing Behavior of Anchor Fastenings Floor Slab on Behavior of Slab-Beam-Column
in Tension," Betonwerk + Fertigteiltechnik, V. Connections," Design of Beam-Column Joints
12, pp. 826-832, and 1988, V. 1, pp. 29-35. for Seismic Resistance, SP-123, J. O. Jirsa, ed.,
Elwood, K. J.; Maffei, J. M.; Riederer, K. A; and American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills,
Telleen, K., 2009, "Improving Column MI, pp. 225-258.
Confinement-Part 2: Proposed New Provisions Frosch, R. J., 1999, "Another Look at Cracking and
for the ACI 318 Building Code," Concrete Crack Control in Reinforced Concrete," ACI
International, V. 31, No. 12, Dec., pp. 41-48. Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-June, pp.
Elzanaty, A H.; Nilson, A H.; and Slate, F. O., 1986, 437-442.
"Shear Capacity of Reinforced Concrete Beams Frosch, R. J., 2002, "Modeling and Control of Side
Using High Strength Concrete," ACI Journal Face Beam Cracking," ACI Structural Journal,
Proceedings, V. 83, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 290- V. 99, No. 3, May-June, pp. 376-385.
296. Fuchs, W.; Eligehausen, R.; and Breen, J., 1995,
Faradji, M. J., and Diaz de Cossio, R., 1965, "Concrete Capacity Design (CCD) Approach for
"Diagonal Tension in Concrete Members of Fastening to Concrete," ACI Structural Journal,
Circular Section," (in Spanish) Institut de V 92, No. 1, Jan.-Feb. 1995, pp. 73-93. Also
Ingenieria, Mexico (translation by Portland discussion, ACI Structural Journal, V 92, No. 6,
Cement Association, Foreign Literature Study Nov.-Dec., pp. 787-802.
No. 466), 61 pp. Furche, J., and Eligehausen, R., 1991, "Lateral
Farrow, C. B., and Klingner, R. E., 1995, "Tensile Blow- out Failure of Headed Studs Near a Free
Capacity of Anchors with Partial or Overlapping Edge," Anchors in Concrete-Design and
Failure Surfaces: Evaluation of Existing Behavior, SP-130, G. A Senkiw and H. B.
Formulas on an LRFD Basis," ACI Structural Lancelot III, eds., American Concrete Institute,
Journal, V. 92, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 698-710. Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 235-252.
Fennel, A W; Line, P.; Mochizuki, G. L.; Moore, K. Furlong, R. W.; Fenves, G. L.; and Kasl, E. P.,
S.; Van Dorpe, T. D.; and Voss, T. A, 2009, 1991, "Welded Structural Wire Reinforcement
"Report on Laboratory Testing of Anchor Bolts for Columns," ACI Structural Journal, V. 88,
Connecting Wood Sill Plates to Concrete with No. 5, Sept.-Oct., pp. 585-591.
Minimum Edge Distances," SEAONC, San Furlong, R. W.; Hsu, C.-T. T.; and Mirza, S. A,
Francisco, CA, Mar. 2004, "Analysis and Design of Concrete
Fintel, M.; Ghosh, S. K.; and Iyengar, H., 1986, Columns for Biaxial Bending—Overview," ACI
Column Shortening in Tall Buildings-Prediction Structural Journal, V 101, No. 3, May-June, pp.
and Compensation, EB108D, Portland Cement 413-423.
Association, Skokie, IL, 34 pp. Gamble, W L., 1972, "Moments in Beam Supported
FIP, 1999, FIP Recommendations, Practical Slabs," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 69, No. 3,
Design of Structural Concrete, FIP-Commission Mar., pp. 149-157.

SBC 304-CR-18 242

 REFERENCES

Gamble, W. L.; Sozen, M. A; and Siess, C. P., 1969, Reinforcing Bars," Concrete International, V.
"Tests of a Two-Way Reinforced Concrete Floor 13, No. 7, July, pp. 54-57.
Slab," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 95, No. ST6, Hale, W M., and Russell, B. W., 2006, "Effect of
June, pp. 1073-1096. Allowable Compressive Stress at Release on
Gerber, L. L., and Burns, N.H., 1971, "Ultimate Prestress Losses and on the Performance of
Strength Tests of Post-Tensioned Flat Plates," Precast, Prestressed Concrete Bridge Girders,"
PCI Journal, V. 16, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 40- PCI Journal, V. 51, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 14-25.
58. Hamad, B. S.; Jirsa, J. O.; and D'Abreu, N. I., 1993,
Gergely, P., and Lutz, L. A, 1968, "Maximum "Anchorage Strength of Epoxy-Coated Hooked
Crack Width in Reinforced Concrete Flexural Bars," ACI Structural Journal, V. 90, No. 2,
Members," Causes, Mechanism, and Control of Mar.-Apr., pp. 210-217.
Cracking in Concrete, SP-20, American Hansell, W, and Winter, G., 1959, "Lateral Stability
Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 87- of Reinforced Concrete Beams," ACI Journal
117. Proceedings, V. 56, No. 3, Sept., pp. 193-214.
Gilbert, R. I., 1992, "Shrinkage Cracking in Fully Hanson, J. A, 1961, "Tensile Strength and Diagonal
Restrained Concrete Members," ACI Structural Tension Resistance of Structural Lightweight
Journal, V. 89, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 141-149. Concrete," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 58, No.
Ghali, A., and Favre, R., 1986, Concrete Structures: 1, July, pp. 1-40.
Stresses and Deformations, Chapman and Hall, Hanson, N. W., 1960, "Precast-Prestressed
New York, 348 pp. Concrete Bridges: Horizontal Shear
Goto, Y., 1971, "Cracks Formed in Concrete around Connections," Journal, PCA Research and
Deformed Tension Bars in Concrete," ACI Development Laboratories, V. 2, No. 2, May,
Journal Proceedings, V. 68, No. 4, Apr., pp. pp. 38-58.
244-251. Hanson, N. W., and Conner, H. W., 1967, "Seismic
Griezic, A; Cook, W D.; and Mitchell, D., 1994, Resistance of Reinforced Concrete Beam-
"Tests to Determine Performance of Deformed Column Joints," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 93, No.
Welded-Wire Fabric Stirrups," ACI Structural ST5, Oct., pp. 533-560.
Journal, V. 91, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 211-220. Hanson, N. W., and Hanson, J. M., 1968, "Shear
Grossfield, B., and Bimstiel, C., 1962, "Tests of T- and Moment Transfer between Concrete Slabs
Beams with Precast Webs and Cast-in-Place and Columns," Journal, PCA Research and
Flanges," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 59, No. Development Laboratories, V. 10, No. 1, Jan.,
6, June, pp. 843-851. pp. 2-16.
Grossman, J. S., 1987, "Reinforced Concrete Hanson, N. W., and Kaar, P. H., 1959, "Flexural
Design," Building Structural Design Handbook, Bond Tests Pretensioned Beams," ACI Journal
R.N. White and C. G. Salmon, eds., John Wiley Proceedings, V. 55, No. 7, Jan., pp. 783-802.
and Sons, Inc., New York. Hatcher, D. S.; Sozen, M. A; and Siess, C. P., 1965,
Grossman, J. S., 1990, "Slender Concrete "Test of a Reinforced Concrete Flat Plate,"
Structures- The New Edge," ACI Structural Proceedings, ASCE, V. 91, No. ST5, May, pp.
Journal, V. 87, No. 1, Jan.- Feb., pp. 39-52. 205-231.
Guimares, G. N.; Kreger, M. E.; and Jirsa, J. O., Hatcher, D. S.; Sozen, M. A; and Siess, C. P., 1969,
1992, "Evaluation of Joint-Shear Provisions for "Test of a Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab,"
Interior Beam- Column-Slab Connections Using Proceedings, ASCE, V. 95, No. ST6, June, pp.
High Strength Materials," ACI Structural 1051-1072.
Journal, V. 89, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 89-98. Hawkins, N. M., 1968, "Bearing Strength of
Gulkan, P., and Sozen, M. A, 1974, "Inelastic Concrete Loaded through Rigid Plates,"
Response of Reinforced Concrete Structures to Magazine of Concrete Research, V. 20, No. 62,
Earthquake Motions," ACI Journal Mar., pp. 31-40. doi: 10.1680/
Proceedings, V. 71, No. 12, Dec., pp. 604-610. macr.l968.20.62.31 (London)
Guralnick, S. A, andLaFraugh, R. W., 1963, Hawkins, N. M., 1974, "Shear Strength of Slabs
"Laboratory Study of a Forty-Five-Foot Square with Shear Reinforcement," Shear in Reinforced
Flat Plate Structure," ACI Journal Proceedings, Concrete, SP-42, American Concrete Institute,
V. 60, No. 9, Sept., pp. 1107-1185. Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 785-815.
Gustafson, D. P., and Felder, A L., 1991, Hawkins, N. M., 1981, "Lateral Load Resistance of
"Questions and Answers on ASTM A706 Unbonded Post-Tensioned Flat Plate

SBC 304-CR-18 243

 REFERENCES

Construction," PCI Journal, V. 26, No. 1, Jan.- 87-2, Department of Civil Engineering,
Feb., pp. 94-116. University of Washington, Seattle, WA.
Hawkins, N. M., and Corley, W. G., 1974, Ivey, D. L., and Buth, E., 1967, "Shear Capacity of
"Moment Transfer to Columns in Slabs with Lightweight Concrete Beams," ACI Journal
Shearhead Reinforcement," Shear in Reinforced Proceedings, V. 64, No. 10, Oct., pp. 634-643.
Concrete, SP-42, American Concrete Institute, Jeanty, P.R.; Mitchell, D.; and Mirza, M.S., 1988,
Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 847-879. "Investigation of 'Top Bar' Effects in Beams,"
Hawkins, N. M.; Mitchell, D.; and Hanna, S. N., ACI Structural Journal, V. 85, No. 3, May-June,
1975, "The Effects of Shear Reinforcement on pp. 251-257.
Reversed Cyclic Loading Behavior of Flat Plate Jirsa, J. O., and Breen, J. E., 1981, "Influence of
Structures," Canadian Journal of Civil Casting Position and Shear on Development and
Engineering, V. 2, No. 4, pp. 572-582. Splice Length- Design Recommendations,"
doi:10.1139/175-052 (Ottawa) Research Report 242-3F, Center for
Hirosawa, M., 1977, "Strength and Ductility of Transportation Research, Bureau of Engineering
Reinforced Concrete Members," Report No. 76, Research, University of Texas at Austin, Austin,
Building Research Institute, Ministry of TX, Nov.
Construction, Tokyo, Mar. (in Japanese). Also, Jirsa, J. O.; Lutz, L.A.; and Gergely, P., 1979,
data in Civil Engineering Studies, 1978, "Rationale for Suggested Development, Splice,
Structural Research Series No. 452, University and Standard Hook Provisions for Deformed
of Illinois. Bars in Tension," Concrete International, V. 1,
Hoehler, M., and Eligehausen, R., 2008, "Behavior No. 7, July, pp. 47-61.
and Testing of Anchors in Simulated Seismic Jirsa, J. O., and Marques, J. L. G., 1975, "A Study
Cracks," ACI Structural Journal, V. 105, No. 3, of Hooked Bar Anchorages in Beam-Column
May-June, pp. 348-357. Joints," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 72, No. 5,
Hsu, T. T. C., 1968, "Torsion of Structural May, pp. 198-200.
Concrete—Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Jirsa, J. O.; Sozen, M.A.; and Siess, C. P., 1963,
Rectangular Members," Torsion of Structural "Effects of Pattern Loadings on Reinforced
Concrete, SP-18, American Concrete Institute, Concrete Floor Slabs," Structural Research
Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 291-306. Series No. 269, Civil Engineering Studies,
Hsu, T. T. C., 1990, "Shear Flow Zone in Torsion University of Illinois, Urbana, IL, July.
of Reinforced Concrete," Journal of Structural Jirsa, J. O.; Sozen, M.A.; and Siess, C. P., 1966,
Engineering, ASCE, V. 116, No. 11, Nov., pp. "Test of a Flat Slab Reinforced with Welded
3206-3226. doi: 10.1061/ (ASCE)0733- Wire Fabric," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 92, No.
9445(1990)116: 11(3206) ST6, June, pp. 199-224.
Hsu, T. T. C., 1997, "ACI Shear and Torsion Jirsa, J. O.; Sozen, M.A.; and Siess, C. P., 1969,
Provisions for Prestressed Hollow Girders," ACI "Pattern Loadings on Reinforced Concrete Floor
Structural Journal, V. 94, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. Slabs," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 95, No. ST6,
787-799. June, pp. 1117-1137.
Hsu, T. T. C., and Burton, K. T., 1974, "Design of Johnson, M. K., and Ramirez, J. A., 1989,
Reinforced Concrete Spandrel Beams," "Minimum Amount of Shear Reinforcement in
Proceedings, ASCE, V. 100, No. ST1 , Jan., pp. High Strength Concrete Members," ACI
209-229. Structural Journal, V. 86, No. 4, July-Aug., pp.
Hwang, S., and Moehle, J.P., 2000, "Models for 376-382.
Laterally Loaded Slab-Column Frames," ACI Johnston, D. W., and Zia, P., 1982, "Bond
Structural Journal, V. 97, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. Characteristics of Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing
345-353. Bars," Report No. FHWA/ NC/82-002,
ICBO, 1997, "Uniform Building Code," V. 2, Department of Civil Engineering, North
Structural Engineering Design Provisions, Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC, Aug.
International Conference of Building Officials, Joint ACI-ASCE Committee 326, 1962, "Shear and
Whittier, CA, 492 pp. Diagonal Tension," ACI Journal Proceedings,
Ishizuka, T., and Hawkins, N. M., 1987, "Effect of V. 59, No. 1, Jan. 1962, pp. 1-30; No. 2, Feb.
Bond Deterioration on the Seismic Response of 1962, pp. 277-334; and No. 3, Mar., pp. 352-
Reinforced and Partially Prestressed Concrete 396.
Ductile Moment Resistant Frames," Report SM Joint ACI-ASCE Committee 423, 1958, "Tentative
Recommendations for Prestressed Concrete,"

SBC 304-CR-18 244

 REFERENCES

ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 54, No. 7, Jan., pp. ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 65, No. 9, Sept.,
545-578. pp. 743-756.
Joint ACI-ASCE Committee 423, 1974, "Tentative Khalifa, J. U., and Collins, M. P, 1981, "Circular
Recommendations for Prestressed Concrete Flat Reinforced Concrete Members Subjected to
Plates," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 71, No. 2, Shear," Publications No. 81-08, Department of
Feb., pp. 67-71. Civil Engineering, University of Toronto,
Joint ACI-ASCE Committee 426, 1973, "Shear Toronto, ON, Canada, Dec.
Strength of Reinforced Concrete Members (ACI Khuntia, M., and Ghosh, S. K., 2004a, "Flexural
426R-74)," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 99, No. Stiffness of Reinforced Concrete Columns and
ST6, June, pp. 1148-1157. Beams: Analytical Approach," ACI Structural
Joint ACI-ASCE Committee 426, 1974, "The Shear Journal, V. 101, No. 3, May-June, pp. 351-363.
Strength of Reinforced Concrete Members- Khuntia, M., and Ghosh, S. K., 2004b, "Flexural
Slabs," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 100, No. ST8, Stiffness of Reinforced Concrete Columns and
Aug., pp. 1543-1591. Beams: Experimental Verification," ACI
Joint PCI/WRl Ad Hoc Committee on Welded Wire Structural Journal, V. 101, No. 3, May-June, pp.
Fabric for Shear Reinforcement, 1980, "Welded 364-374.
Wire Fabric for Shear Reinforcement," PCI Klein, G. J., 1986, "Design of Spandrel Beams,"
Journal, V. 25, No. 4, July- Aug., pp. 32-36. PCI Specially Funded Research Project No. 5,
Kaar, P. H., 1966, "High Strength Bars as Concrete Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago,
Reinforcement, Part 8: Similitude in Flexural IL.
Cracking of T-Beam Flanges," Journal, PCA Klein, G. J., and Lindenberg, R. J., 2009, "Volume
Research and Development Laboratories, V. 8, Change Response of Precast Concrete
No. 2, May, pp. 2-12. Buildings," PCI Journal, V. 54, No. 4, Fall, pp.
Kaar, P. H.; Kriz, L. B.; and Hognestad, E., 1960, 112-131.
"Precast-Prestressed Concrete Bridges: (1) Pilot Klingner, R.; Mendonca, J.; and Malik, J., 1982,
Tests of Continuous Girders," Journal, PCA "Effect of Reinforcing Details on the Shear
Research and Development Laboratories, V. 2, Resistance of Anchor Bolts under Reversed
No. 2, May, pp. 21-37. Cyclic Loading," ACI Journal Proceedings, V.
Kaar, P. H.; La Fraugh, R. W.; and Mass, M. A., 79, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 3-12.
1963, "Influence of Concrete Strength on Strand Kramrisch, F., and Rogers, P, 1961, "Simplified
Transfer Length," PCI Journal, V. 8, No. 5, Design of Combined Footings," Proceedings,
Oct., pp. 47-67. ASCE, V. 87, No. SM5, Oct., p. 19.
Kaar, P., and Magura, D., 1965, "Effect of Strand Kriz, L. B., and Raths, C. H., 1965, "Connections in
Blanketing on Performance of Pretensioned Precast Concrete Structures—Strength of
Girders," PCI Journal, V 10, No. 6, Dec., pp. 20- Corbels," PCI Journal, V. 10, No. 1, Feb., pp.
34. 16-47.
Kahn, L. F., and Mitchell, A D., 2002, "Shear Kuhn, D., and Shaikh, F., 1996, "Slip-Pullout
Friction Tests with High-Strength Concrete," Strength of Hooked Anchors," Research Report,
ACI Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, submitted
pp. 98-103. to the National Codes and Standards Council.
Kang, T. H.-K.; Shin, M.; Mitra, N.; and Bonacci, Kurose, Y; Nagami, K.; and Saito, Y, 1991,
J. F., 2009, "Seismic Design of Reinforced "Beam-Column Joints in Precast Concrete
Concrete Beam-Column Joints with Headed Construction in Japan," Design of Beam-Column
Bars," ACI Structural Journal, V. 106, No. 6, Joints for Seismic Resistance, SP-123, J. O.
Nov.-Dec., pp. 868-877. Jirsa, ed., American Concrete Institute,
Karr, P H.; Hanson, N. W.; and Capell, H. T., 1978, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 493-514.
"Stress-Strain Characteristics of High Strength Lai, S. M. A, and MacGregor, J. G., 1983,
Concrete," Douglas McHenry International "Geometric Nonlinearities in Unbraced
Symposium on Concrete and Concrete Multistory Frames," Journal of Structural
Structures, SP-55, American Concrete Institute, Engineering, ASCE, V. 109, No. 11, Nov., pp.
Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 161-185. 2528-2545. doi: 10.1061/(ASCE)0733-
Kemp, E. L.; Brezny, F. S.; and Unterspan, J. A, 9445(1983)109:11(2528)
1968, "Effect of Rust and Scale on the Bond Lee, N.H.; Kim, K. S.; Bang, C. J.; and Park, K. R.,
Characteristics of Deformed Reinforcing Bars," 2007, "Tensile-Headed Anchors with Large
Diameter and Deep Embedment in Concrete,"

SBC 304-CR-18 245

 REFERENCES

ACI Structural Journal, V. 104, No. 4, July- Lubell, A S.; Sherwood, E. G.; Bentz, E. C.; and
Aug., pp. 479-486. Collins, M. P, 2004, "Safe Shear Design of
Lee, N. H.; Park, K. R.; and Suh, Y. P, 2010, "Shear Large Wide Beams," Concrete International, V.
Behavior of Headed Anchors with Large 26, No. 1, Jan., pp. 66-78.
Diameters and Deep Embedments," ACI Lucier, G.; Walter, C.; Rizkalla, S.; Zia, P.; and
Structural Journal, V. 107, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., Klein, G., 2011a, "Development of a Rational
pp. 146-156. Design Methodology for Precast Slender
Leon, R. T., 1989, "Interior Joints with Variable Spandrel Beams, Part 1: Experimental Results,"
Anchorage Lengths," Journal of Structural PCI Journal, V. 56, No. 2, Spring, pp. 88-112.
Engineering, ASCE, V. 115, No. 9, Sept., pp. Lucier, G.; Walter, C.; Rizkalla, S.; Zia, P.; and
2261-2275. doi: 10.1061/ (ASCE)0733- Klein, G., 2011b, "Development of a Rational
9445(1989)115: 9(2261) Design Methodology for Precast Slender
Leonhardt, F., and Walther, R., 1964, "The Stuttgart Spandrel Beams, Part 2: Analysis and Design
Shear Tests," C&CA Translation, No. 111, Guidelines," PCI Journal, V. 56, No. 4, Fall, pp.
Cement and Concrete Association, London, UK, 106-133.
134 pp. Lutz, L., 1995, discussion to "Concrete Capacity
Lepage, A, 1998, "Nonlinear Drift of Multistory RC Design (CCD) Approach for Fastening to
Structures during Earthquakes," Sixth National Concrete," ACI Structural Journal, Nov.-Dec.,
Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Seattle, pp. 791-792. Also, authors' closure, pp. 798-799.
WA MacGregor, J. G., 1976, "Safety and Limit States
Leslie, K. E.; Rajagopalan, K. S.; and Everard, N.J., Design for Reinforced Concrete," Canadian
1976, "Flexural Behavior of High-Strength Journal of Civil Engineering, V 3, No. 4, Dec.,
Concrete Beams," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. pp. 484-513. doi: 10.11391176-055
73, No. 9, Sept., pp. 517-521. MacGregor, J. G., 1993, "Design of Slender
Li, S., and Roy, D. M., 1986, "Investigation of Concrete Columns-Revisited," ACI Structural
Relations between Porosity, Pore Structure and Journal, V. 90, No. 3, May-June, pp. 302-309.
CL Diffusion of Fly Ash and Blended Cement MacGregor, J. G., 1997, Reinforced Concrete:
Pastes," Cement and Concrete Research, V. 16, Mechanics and Design, third edition, Prentice
No. 5, Sept., pp. 749-759. doi: 10.1016/0008- Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 939 pp.
8846(86)90049-9 MacGregor, J. G., and Ghoneim, M. G., 1995,
Lin, T. Y., and Thornton, K., 1972, "Secondary "Design for Torsion," ACI Structural Journal,
Moment and Moment Redistribution in V. 92, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 211-218.
Continuous Prestressed Beams," PCI Journal, MacGregor, J. G., and Hage, S. E., 1977, "Stability
V. 17, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 8-20 and comments Analysis and Design of Concrete Frames,"
by A H. Mattock and author's closure, PCI Proceedings, ASCE, V. 103, No. ST10, Oct., pp.
Journal , V. 17, No. 4, July-Aug., pp. 86-88. 1953-1970.
Lloyd, J. P, 1971, "Splice Requirements for One- MacGregor, J. G., and Hanson, J. M., 1969,
Way Slabs Reinforced with Smooth Welded "Proposed Changes in Shear Provisions for
Wire Fabric," Publication No. R(S)4, Civil Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Beams,"
Engineering, Oklahoma State University, ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 66, No. 4, Apr.,
Stillwater, OK, June, 37 pp. pp. 276-288.
Lloyd,J. P, and Kesler, C. E., 1969, "Behavior of MacGregor, J. G.; Breen, J. E.; and Pfrang, E. O.,
One-Way Slabs Reinforced with Deformed 1970, "Design of Slender Concrete Columns,"
Wire and Deformed Wire Fabric," T&AM ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 67, No. 1, Jan., pp.
Report No. 323, University of Illinois, Urbana, 6-28.
IL, 129 pp. Malhotra, V M., 1976, Testing Hardened Concrete:
Logan, D. R., 1997, "Acceptance Criteria for Bond Nondestructive Methods, ACI Monograph No.
Quality of Strand for Pretensioned Prestressed 9, American Concrete Institute/Iowa State
Concrete Applications," PCI Journal, V. 42, No. University Press, Farmington Hills, MI, 188 pp.
2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 52-90. Malhotra, V M., 1977, "Contract Strength
Lotze, D.; Klingner, R. E.; and Graves, H. L. III, Requirements-Cores Versus In Situ Evaluation,"
2001, "Static Behavior of Anchors under ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 74, No. 4, Apr.,
Combinations of Tension and Shear Loading," pp. 163-172.
ACI Structural Journal, V. 98, No. 4, July-Aug.,
pp. 525-536.

SBC 304-CR-18 246

 REFERENCES

Marti, P, 1985, "Basic Tools of Reinforced Plane," PCI Journal, V. 20, No. 4, July-Aug.,
Concrete Beam Design," ACI Journal pp. 76-93.
Proceedings, V. 82, No. 1, Jan.- Feb., pp. 46-56. Mattock, A H.; Kriz, L. B.; and Hognestad, E.,
Martin, L., and Korkosz, W., 1995, "Strength of 1961, "Rectangular Concrete Stress Distribution
Prestressed Members at Sections Where Strands in Ultimate Strength Design," ACI Journal
Are Not Fully Developed," PCI Journal, V. 40, Proceedings, V. 57, No. 8, Feb., pp. 875-928.
No. 5, Sept.-Oct., pp. 58-66. Mattock, A H.; Yamazaki, J.; and Kattula, B. T.,
Mast, R. F., 1968, "Auxiliary Reinforcement in 1971, "Comparative Study of Prestressed
Concrete Connections," Proceedings, ASCE, V Concrete Beams, with and without Bond," ACI
94, No. ST6, June, pp. 1485-1504. Journal Proceedings, V. 68, No. 2, Feb., pp.
Mast, R. F., 1992, "Unified Design Provision for 116-125.
Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Flexural Megally, S., and Ghali, A, 2002, "Punching Shear
and Compression Members," ACI Structural Design of Earthquake-Resistant Slab-Column
Journal, V. 89, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 185-199. Connections," ACI Structural Journal, V. 97,
Mast, R. F., 1998, "Analysis of Cracked Prestressed No. 5, Sept.-Oct., pp. 720-730.
Concrete Sections: A Practical Approach," PCI Meinheit, D. F., and Jirsa, J. O., 1977, "Shear
Journal, V. 43, No. 4, July-Aug., pp. 80-91. Strength of Reinforced Concrete Beam-Column
Mathey, R. G., and Clifton, J. R., 1976, "Bond of Joints," Report No. 77-1, Department of Civil
Coated Reinforcing Bars in Concrete," Journal Engineering, Structures Research Laboratory,
of the Structural Division, ASCE, V. 102, Jan., University of Texas at Austin, Austin, TX, Jan.
pp. 215-228. Meinheit, D. F., and Jirsa, J. O.,1981, "Shear
Mattock, A H., 1959, "Redistribution of Design Strength of RiC Beam-Column Connections,"
Bending Moments in Reinforced Concrete Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, V.
Continuous Beams," Proceedings, Institution of 107, Nov., pp. 2227-2244.
Civil Engineers, London, UK, V. 13, No. 1, pp. Menn, C., 1986, Prestressed Concrete Bridges,
35-46. doi: 10.1680/iicep.1959.12087 Birkhauser, Basle, ed., 535 pp.
Mattock, A H., 1974, "Shear Transfer in Concrete Mirza, S. A., 1990, "Flexural Stiffness of
Having Reinforcement at an Angle to the Shear Rectangular Reinforced Concrete Columns,"
Plane," Shear in Reinforced Concrete, SP-42, ACI Structural Journal, V. 87, No. 4, July-Aug.,
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, pp. 425-435.
MI, pp. 17-42. Mirza, S. A; Lee, P. M.; and Morgan, D. L., 1987,
Mattock, A H., 1977, discussion of "Considerations "ACI Stability Resistance Factor for RC
for the Design of Precast Concrete Bearing Wall Columns," Journal of Structural Engineering,
Buildings to Withstand Abnormal Loads," by ASCE, V. 113, No. 9, Sept., pp. 1963-1976. doi:
PCI Committee on Precast Concrete Bearing 10.1061/(ASCE)0733-9445(1987)113:9(1963)
Wall Buildings, PCI Journal, V. 22, No. 3, May- Moehle, J. P, 1996, "Seismic Design
June, pp. 105-106. Considerations for Flat Plate Construction,"
Mattock, A H., 2001, "Shear Friction and High- Mete A. Sozen Symposium: A Tribute from his
Strength Concrete," ACI Structural Journal, V. Students, SP-162, J. K. Wight and M. E. Kreger,
98, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 50-59. eds., American Concrete Institute, Farmington
Mattock, A H., and Hawkins, N. M., 1972, "Shear Hills, MI, pp. 1-35.
Transfer in Reinforced Concrete-Recent Moehle, J. P, 1988, "Strength of Slab-Column Edge
Research," PCI Journal, V. 17, No. 2, Mar.- Connections," ACI Structural Journal, V. 85,
Apr., pp. 55-75. No. 1, Jan.- Feb., pp. 89-98.
Mattock, A H.; Chen, K. C.; and Soongswang, K., Moehle, J. P., 1992, "Displacement-Based Design
1976a, "The Behavior of Reinforced Concrete of RC Structures Subjected to Earthquakes,"
Corbels," PCI Journal, V. 21, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., Earthquake Spectra, V. 8, No. 3, Aug., pp. 403-
pp. 52-77. 428. doi: 10.1193/1.1585688
Mattock, A H.; Li, W. K.; and Want, T. C., 1976b, Moehle, J. P.; Ghodsi, T.; Hooper, J. D.; Fields, D.
"Shear Transfer in Lightweight Reinforced C.; and Gedhada, R., 2011, "Seismic Design of
Concrete," PCI Journal, V. 21, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., Cast-in-Place Concrete Special Structural Walls
pp. 20-39. and Coupling Beams: A Guide for Practicing
Mattock, A H.; Johal, L.; and Chow, H. C., 1975, Engineers," NEHRP Seismic Design Technical
"Shear Transfer in Reinforced Concrete with Brief No. 6, National Institute of Standards and
Moment or Tension Acting Across the Shear Technology, Gaithersburg, MD.

SBC 304-CR-18 247

 REFERENCES

Moehle, J. P., Hooper, J. D.; Kelly, D. J.; and University of California, Berkeley, Berkeley,
Meyer, T. R., 2010, "Seismic Design of Cast-in- CA.
Place Concrete Diaphragms, Chords, and Oesterle, R. G., 1997, "The Role of Concrete Cover
Collectors: A Guide for Practicing Engineers," in Crack Control Criteria and Corrosion
NEHRP Seismic Design Technical Brief No. 3, Protection," RD Serial No. 2054, Portland
National Institute of Standards and Technology, Cement Association, Skokie, IL.
Gaithersburg, MD, NISI GCR 10-917-4. Olesen, S. E.; Sozen, M. A. and Siess, C. P., 1967,
Mitchell, D., and Collins, M. P., 1976, "Detailing "Investigation of Prestressed Reinforced
for Torsion," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 73, Concrete for Highway Bridges, Part IV:
No. 9, Sept., pp. 506-511. Strength in Shear of Beams with Web
Mitchell, D., and Cook, W. D., 1984, "Preventing Reinforcement," Bulletin No. 493, Engineering
Progressive Collapse of Slab Structures," Experiment Station, University of Illinois,
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, V. Urbana, IL.
110, No. 7, July, pp. 1513-1532. doi: Orangun, C. O.; Jirsa, J. O.; and Breen, J. E., 1977,
10.1061/(ASCE)0733-9445(1984)110:7(1513). "A Reevaluation of Test Data on Development
Mojtahedi, S., and Gamble, W. L., 1978, "Ultimate Length and Splices," ACI Journal Proceedings,
Steel Stresses in Unbonded Prestressed V. 74, No. 3, Mar., pp. 114-122.
Concrete," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 104, No. Ospina, C. E., and Alexander, S.D. B.,
ST7, July, pp. 1159-1165. 1998,"Transmission of interior Concrete
Mphonde, A G., and Frantz, G. C., 1984, "Shear Column Loads through Floors," Journal of
Tests of High- and Low-Strength Concrete Structural Engineering, ASCE, V. 124, No. 6,
Beams without Stirrups," ACI Journal June, pp. 602-610. doi: 10.1061/(ASCE)0733-
Proceedings, V. 81, No. 4, July-Aug., pp. 350- 9445(1998)124:6(602).
357. Ozbolt, J.; Eligehausen, R.; Periskic G.; and Mayer,
Muguruma, H., and Watanabe, F., 1990, "Ductility U., 2007, "3D FE Analysis of Anchor Bolts with
Improvement of High-Strength Concrete Large Embedments," Engineering Fracture
Columns with Lateral Confinement," Mechanics, V. 74, No. 1-2, Jan., pp. 168-178.
Proceedings, Second International Symposium doi: 10.1016/j.engfracmech.2006.01.019
on High-Strength Concrete, SP-121, American Ozcebe, G.; Ersoy, U.; and Tankut, T., 1999,
Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 47- "Evaluation of Minimum Shear Reinforcement
60. for Higher Strength Concrete," ACI Structural
Muttoni, A; Schwartz, J.; and Thfulimann, B., 1997, Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-June, pp. 361-368.
Design of Concrete Structures with Stress Ozyildirim, C., and Halstead, W., 1988, "Resistance
Fields, Birkhauser, Boston, MA, 143 pp. to Chloride Ion Penetration of Concretes
Nakaki, S.D.; Stanton, J. F.; and Sritharan, S., 1995, Containing Fly Ash, Silica Fume, or Slag,"
"An Overview of the PRESSS Five-Story Permeability of Concrete, SP-108, American
Precast Test Building," PCI Journal, V. 44, No. Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 35-
2, Apr., pp. 26-39. 61.
NEHRP, 1994, "The NEHRP Recommended Palmieri, L.; Saqan, E.; French, C.; and Kreger, M.,
Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New 1996, "Ductile Connections for Precast Concrete
Buildings," Building Seismic Safety Council, Frame Systems," Mete A. Sozen Symposium: A
Washington, DC. Tribute from his Students, SP-162, American
Nichols, J. R., 1914, "Statical Limitations upon the Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp.
Steel Requirement in Reinforced Concrete Flat 315-335.
Slab Floors," Transactions of the American Pan, A, and Moehle, J. P., 1989, "Lateral
Society of Civil Engineers, V. 77, pp. 1670- Displacement Ductility of Reinforced Concrete
1736. Flat Plates," ACI Structural Journal, V. 86, No.
Nilsson, I. H. E., and Losberg, A, 1976, "Reinforced 3, May-June, pp. 250-258.
Concrete Corners and Joints Subjected to Park, R., and Paulay, T., 1975, Reinforced Concrete
Bending Moment," Journal of the Structural Structures, Wiley-Interscience, New York, 769
Division, ASCE, V. 102, June, pp. 1229-1254. pp.
Odello, R. J., and Mehta, B. M., 1967, "Behavior of Park, R., and Thompson, K. J., 1977, "Cyclic Load
a Continuous Prestressed Concrete Slab with Tests on Prestressed and Partially Prestressed
Drop Panels," Report, Division of Structural Beam-Column Joints," PCI Journal, V. 22, No.
Engineering and Structural Mechanics, 3, pp. 84-110.

SBC 304-CR-18 248

 REFERENCES

Parra-Montesinos, G. J., 2006, "Shear Strength of 5: Lapped Splices in Concentrically Loaded

Beams with Deformed Steel Fibers," Concrete Columns," Journal, PCA Research and
International, V. 28, No. 11, Nov., pp. 57-66. Development Laboratories, V. 5, No. 2, May,
Paulay, T., and Binney, J. R., 1974, "Diagonally pp. 27-40.
Reinforced Coupling Beams of Shear Walls," Popov, E. P.; Bertero, V. V.; and Krawinkler, H.,
Shear in Reinforced Concrete, SP-42, American 1972, "Cyclic Behavior of Three R/C Flexural
Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. Members with High Shear," EERC Report No.
579-598. 72-5, Earthquake Engineering Research Center,
Paulson, C.; Graham, S. K.; and Rautenberg, J. M., University of California, Berkeley, Berkeley,
2013, "Determination of Yield Strength for CA, Oct.
Nonprestressed Steel Reinforcement," Charles Portland Cement Association (PCA), 1946, "Design
Pankow Foundation RGA #04-13, WJE No. of Deep Girders," IS079D, Portland Cement
2013.4171, Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Association, Skokie, IL, 10 pp.
Inc., Pasadena, CA, Dec. 31, 100 pp. Portland Cement Association (PCA), 1972,
Paultre, P., and Legeron, F., 2008, "Confinement Handbook of Frame Constants, Skokie, IL,
Reinforcement Design for Reinforced Concrete 1972, 34 pp.
Columns," Journal of Structural Engineering, Portland Cement Association (PCA), 1980, "Design
ASCE, V. 134, No. 5, pp. 738-749. doi: and Construction of Large-Panel Concrete
10.1061/(ASCE)0733-9445(2008)134:5(738) Structures," six reports, 762 pp., EB 100D; three
Pauw, A, 1960, "Static Modulus of Elasticity of studies, 300 pp., 1980, EB 102D, 1976-1980,
Concrete as Affected by Density," ACI Journal Portland Cement Association, Skokie, IL.
Proceedings, V. 57, No. 6, Dec., pp. 679-687 Portland Cement Association (PCA), 2011, "Design
PCI, 1993, "Recommended Practice for Design, and Control of Concrete Mixtures," 15th edition,
Manufacture, and Installation of Prestressed Portland Cement Association, Skokie, IL, 444
Concrete Piling," PCI Journal, V. 38, No. 2, pp.
Mar.-Apr., pp. 14-41. Primavera, E. J.; Pinelli, J.-P.; and Kalajian, E. H.,
PCI Building Code Committee, 1986, "Proposed 1997, "Tensile Behavior of Cast-in-Place and
Design Requirements for Precast Concrete," Undercut Anchors in High-Strength Concrete,"
PCI Journal, V. 31, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 32- ACI Structural Journal, V. 94, No. 5, Sept.-Oct.,
47. pp. 583-594.
PCI Committee on Precast Concrete Bearing Wall Powers, T. C., 1975, "Freezing Effects in
Buildings, 1976, "Considerations for the Design Concrete," Durability of Concrete, SP-47,
of Precast Concrete Bearing Wall Buildings to American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills,
Withstand Abnormal Loads," PCI Journal, V. MI, pp. 1-11.
21, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 18-51. Priestley, M. J. N.; Sritharan, S.; Conley, J.; and
PCI Committee on Prestress Losses, 1975, Pampanin, S., 1999, "Preliminary Results and
"Recommendations for Estimating Prestress Conclusions from the PRESSS Five-Story
Losses," PCI Journal, V. 20, No. 4, July-Aug., Precast Concrete Test Building," PCI Journal,
pp. 43-75. V. 44, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 42-67.
Perez, F. J.; Pessiki, S.; Sause, R.; and Lu, L.-W, Rabbat, B. G.; Kaar, P. H.; Russell, H. G.; and
2003, "Lateral Load Tests of Unbonded Post- Bruce, R. N. Jr., 1979, "Fatigue Tests of
Tensioned Precast Concrete Walls," Large Scale Pretensioned Girders with Blanketed and
Structural Testing, SP-211, American Concrete Draped Strands," PCI Journal, V. 24, No. 4,
Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 161-182. July-Aug., pp. 88-114.
Pessiki, S.; Graybeal, B.; and Mudlock, M., 2001, Reineck, K.-H., ed., 2002, Strut-and-Tie Models,
"Proposed Design of High-Strength Spiral SP-208, American Concrete Institute,
Reinforcement in Compression Members," ACI Farmington Hills, MI, 250 pp.
Structural Journal, V. 98, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. Reineck, K.-H., and Novak, L., C., eds., 2010,
799-810. Further Examples for the Design of Structural
Pfister, J. F., 1964, "Influence of Ties on the Concrete with Strut-and-Tie Models, SP-273,
Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Columns," American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills,
ACI Journal Proceedings, V. 61, No. 5, May, MI, 288 pp.
pp. 521-537. Restrepo, J. I., 2002, "New Generation of
Pfister, J. F., and Mattock, A H., 1963, "High Earthquake Resisting Systems," Proceedings,
Strength Bars as Concrete Reinforcement, Part

SBC 304-CR-18 249

 REFERENCES

First fib Congress, Session 6, Osaka, Japan, 1409. Also see discussion, ACI Journal
Oct., pp. 41-60. Proceedings, V. 62, June 1965.
Restrepo, J. I.; Park, R.; and Buchanan, A H., Sakai, K., and Sheikh, S. A, 1989, "What Do We
1995a, "Tests on Connections of Earthquake Know about Confinement in Reinforced
Resisting Precast Reinforced Concrete Concrete Columns? (A Critical Review of
Perimeter Frames of Buildings," PCI Journal, Previous Work and Code Provisions)," ACI
V. 40, No. 4, July-Aug., pp. 44-61. Structural Journal, V. 86, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp.
Restrepo, J.; Park, R.; and Buchanan, A H., 1995b, 192-207.
"Design of Connections of Earthquake Resisting Salmons, J. R., and McCrate, T. E., 1977, "Bond
Precast Reinforced Concrete Perimeter Frames," Characteristics of Untensioned Prestressing
PCI Journal, V. 40, No. 5, pp. 68-80. Strand," PCI Journal, V. 22, No. 1, Jan.-Feb.,
Richart, F. E., 1933, "Reinforced Concrete Column pp. 52-65.
Investigation-Tentative Final Report of Sant, J. K., and Bletzacker, R. W, 1961,
Committee 105," ACI Journal Proceedings, V. "Experimental Study of Lateral Stability of
29, No. 5, Feb., pp. 275-282. Reinforced Concrete Beams," ACI Journal
Richart, F. E.; Brandzaeg, A; and Brown, R. L., Proceedings, V. 58, No. 6, Dec., pp. 713-736.
1929, "The Failure of Plain and Spirally Sason, A S., 1992, "Evaluation of Degree of
Reinforced Concrete in Compression," Bulletin Rusting on Prestressed Concrete Strand," PCI
No. 190, University of Illinois Engineering Journal, V. 37, No. 3, May-June, pp. 25-30.
Experiment Station, Urbana, IL, Apr., 74 pp. SBC, 1999, "Standard Building Code," Southern
Rogowsky, D. M., and MacGregor, J. G., 1986, Building Code Congress International, Inc.,
"Design of Reinforced Concrete Deep Beams," Birmingham, AL.
Concrete International, V. 8, No. 8, Aug., pp. Schlaich, J.; Schafer, K.; and Jennewein, M., 1987,
46-58. "Toward a Consistent Design of Structural
Roller, J. J., and Russell, H. G., 1990, "Shear Concrete," PCI Journal, V. 32, No. 3, May-
Strength of High-Strength Concrete Beams with June, pp. 74-150.
Web Reinforcement," ACI Structural Journal, Scordelis, A C., 1990, "Non-Linear Material,
V. 87, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 191-198. Geometric, and Time Dependent Analysis of
Rose, D. R., and Russell, B. W, 1997, "Investigation Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Shells,"
of Standardized Tests to Measure the Bond Bulletin, International Association for Shells
Performance of Prestressing Strand," PCI and Spatial Structures, Madrid, Spain, No. 102,
Journal, V. 42, No. 4, July-Aug., pp. 56-80. Apr., pp. 57-90.
Russell, B. W, and Burns, N. H., 1996, "Measured Scordelis, A C.; Lin, T. Y.; and Itaya, R., 1959,
Transfer Lengths of 0.5 and 0.6 in. Strands in "Behavior of a Continuous Slab Prestressed in
Pretensioned Concrete," PCI Journal, V. 41, Two Directions," ACI Journal Proceedings, V.
No. 5, Sept.-Oct., pp. 44-65. 56, No. 6, Dec., pp. 441-459.
Rutledge, S., and DeVries, R. A, 2002, Seismology Committee of the Structural Engineers
"Development of D45 Wire in Concrete," Association of California (SEAOC), 1996,
Report, School of Civil and Environmental "Recommended Lateral Force Requirements
Engineering, Oklahoma State University, and Commentary," sixth edition, Seismology
Still-water, OK, Jan., 28 pp. Committee of the Structural Engineers
Saatcioglu, M., and Razvi, S. R., 2002, Association of California, Sacramento, CA, 504
"Displacement-Based Design of Reinforced pp.
Concrete Columns for Confinement," ACI Shaikh, A F., and Branson, D. E., 1970, "Non-
Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. Tensioned Steel in Prestressed Concrete
3-11. Beams," PCI Journal, V 15, No. 1, Feb., pp. 14-
Sabnis, G. M., Meyers; B. L.; and Roll, F., eds., 36.
1974, Deflections of Concrete Structures, SP- Shaikh, A F., and Yi, W., 1985, "In-Place Strength
43, American Concrete Institute, Farmington of Welded Headed Studs," PCI Journal, V. 30,
Hills, MI, 637 pp. No. 2, Mar.- Apr., pp. 56-81.
Saemann, J. C., and Washa, G. W., 1964, Sivakumar, B.; Gergely, P; and White, R. N., 1983,
"Horizontal Shear Connections between Precast "Suggestions for the Design of RIC Lapped
Beams and Cast-in-Place Slabs," ACI Journal Splices for Seismic Loading," Concrete
Proceedings, V. 61, No. 11, Nov., pp. 1383- International, V. 5, No. 2, Feb., pp. 46-50.

SBC 304-CR-18 250

 REFERENCES

Smith, S. W, and Bums, N. H., 1974, "Post- Tikka, T. K., and Mirza, S. A, 2006, "Nonlinear
Tensioned Flat Plate to Column Connection Equation for Flexural Stiffness of Slender
Behavior," PCI Journal, V. 19, No. 3, May- Composite Columns in Major Axis Bending,"
June, pp. 74-91. Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, V.
Spragg, R.; Castro, J.; Li, W.; Pour-Ghaz, M.; 132, No. 3, Mar., pp. 387-399. doi: 10.1061/
Huang, P; and Weiss, W. J., 2011, "Wetting and (ASCE)0733-9445(2006)132:3(387)
Drying of Concrete in the Presence of Deicing Treece, R. A, and Jirsa, J. O., 1989, "Bond Strength
Salt Solutions," Cement and Concrete of Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars," ACI
Composites, V. 33, No. 5, May, pp. 535-542. Materials Journal, V. 86, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp.
Stecich, J.; Hanson, J. M.; and Rice, P F., 1984, 167-174.
"Bending and Straightening of Grade 60 Vanderbilt, M. D., 1972, "Shear Strength of
Reinforcing Bars," Concrete International, V. 6, Continuous Plates," Journal of the Structural
No. 8, Aug., pp. 14-23. Division, ASCE, V. 98, May, pp. 961-973.
Stone, W; Cheok, G.; and Stanton, J., 1995, Vanderbilt, M. D.; Sozen, M. A; and Siess, C. P,
"Performance of Hybrid Moment-Resisting 1969, "Test of a Modified Reinforced Concrete
Precast Beam-Column Concrete Connections Two-Way Slab," Proceedings, ASCE, V. 95,
Subjected to Cyclic Loading," ACI Structural No. ST6, June, pp. 1097-1116.
Journal, V. 92, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 229-249. Vanderbilt, M. D., and Corley, W G., 1983, "Frame
Sugano, S.; Nagashima, T.; Kimura, H.; Tamura, A; Analysis of Concrete Buildings," Concrete
and Ichikawa, A, 1990, "Experimental Studies International, V. 5, No. 12, Dec., pp. 33-43.
on Seismic Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Vintzileou, E., and Eligehausen, R., 1992,
Members of High Strength Concrete," "Behavior of Fasteners under Monotonic or
Proceedings, Second International Symposium Cyclic Shear Displacements," Anchors in
on High-Strength Concrete , SP-121, American Concrete: Design and Behavior, SP-130,
Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, pp. 61- American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills,
87. MI, pp. 181-203.
Taylor, C. P; Cote, P A; and Wallace, J. W, 1998, Wallace, J. W, 1996, "Evaluation of UBC-94
"Design of Slender RC Walls with Openings," Provisions for Seismic Design of RC Structural
ACI Structural Journal, V. 95, No. 4, July-Aug., Walls," Earthquake Spectra, V. 12, No. 2, May,
pp. 420-433. pp. 327-348. doi: 10.119311.1585883
Thompson, K. J., and Park, R., 1980, "Seismic Wallace, J. W., 2012, "Behavior, Design, and
Response of Partially Prestressed Concrete," Modeling of Structural Walls and Coupling
Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, V. Beams-Lessons from Recent Laboratory Tests
106, pp. 1755-1775. and Earthquakes," International Journal of
Thompson, M. K.; Jirsa, J. O.; and Breen, J. E., Concrete Structures and Materials, V. 6, No. 1,
2006a, "CCI Nodes Anchored by Headed Bars- pp. 3-18. doi: 10.1007/s40069-012-0001-4.
Part 2: Capacity of Nodes," ACI Structural Wallace, J. W., and Orakcal, K., 2002, "ACI 318-
Journal, V. 103, No. 1, Jan.-Feb., pp. 65-73. 99 Provisions for Seismic Design of Structural
Thompson, M. K.; Ledesma, A; Jirsa, J. O.; and Walls," ACI Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 4,
Breen, J. E., 2006b, "Lap Splices Anchored by July-Aug., pp. 499-508.
Headed Bars," ACI Structural Journal, V. 103, Wallace, J. W.; Massone, L. M.; Bonelli, P.;
No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 271-279. Dragovich, J.; Lagos, R.; Luder, C.; and Moehle,
Thompson, M. K.; Ziehl, M. J.; Jirsa, J. O.; and J. P., 2012, "Damage and Implications for
Breen, J. E., 2005, "CCI Nodes Anchored by Seismic Design of RC Structural Wall
Headed Bars-Part 1: Behavior of Nodes," ACI Buildings," Earthquake Spectra, V 28, No. S1,
Structural Journal, V. 102, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., June, pp. 281-299. doi: 10.1193/1.4000047.
pp. 808-815. Watson, S.; Zahn, F. A; and Park, R., 1994,
Thomsen, J. H. IV, and Wallace, J. W., 2004, "Confining Reinforcement for Concrete
"Displacement-Based Design of Slender Columns," Journal of Structural Engineering,
Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls- ASCE, V. 120, No. 6, June, pp. 1798-1824. doi:
Experimental Verification," Journal of 10.1061/(ASCE)0733-9445(1994)120:6(1798).
Structural Engineering, ASCE, V. 130, No. 4, Wilson, E. L., 1997, "Three-Dimensional Dynamic
pp. 618-630. doi: 10.1061/(ASCE)0733- Analysis of Structures-With Emphasis on
9445(2004)130:4(618). Earthquake Engineering," Computers and
Structures, Inc., Berkeley, CA.

SBC 304-CR-18 251

 REFERENCES

Winter, G., 1979, "Safety and Serviceability Yamada, T.; Nanni, A; and Endo, K., 1991,
Provisions in the ACI Building Code," Concrete "Punching Shear Resistance of Flat Slabs:
Design: U.S. and European Practices, SP-59, Influence of Reinforcement Type and Ratio,"
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, ACI Structural Journal, V. 88, No. 4, July- Aug.,
Ml, pp. 35-49. pp. 555-563.
Wire Reinforcement Institute, 2001, "Structural Yoshioka, K., and Sekine, M., 1991, "Experimental
Welded Wire Reinforcement Manual of Study of Prefabricated Beam-Column
Standard Practice," sixth edition, Hartford, CT, Subassemblages," Design of Beam-Column
Apr., 38 pp. Joints for Seismic Resistance, SP-123, J. O.
Wood, S. L.; Stanton, J. F.; and Hawkins, N. M., Jirsa, ed., American Concrete Institute,
2000, "Development of New Seismic Design Farmington Hills, Ml, pp. 465-492.
Provisions for Diaphragms Based on the Zhang, Y.; Klingner, R. E.; and Graves, H. L. III,
Observed Behavior of Precast Concrete Parking 2001, "Seismic Response of Multiple-Anchor
Garages during the 1994 Northridge Connections to Concrete," ACI Structural
Earthquake," PCI Journal, V. 45, No. 1, Jan.- Journal, V. 98, No. 6, Nov.-Dec., pp. 811-822.
Feb., pp. 50-65. Zhu, S., and Jirsa, J. O., 1983, "Study of Bond
Wyllie, L.A. Jr., 1987, "Structural Walls and Deterioration in Reinforced Concrete Beam-
Diaphragms—How They Function," Building Column Joints," PMFSEL Report No. 83-1,
Structural Design Handbook, R. N. White and Department of Civil Engineering, University of
C. G. Salmon, eds., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Texas at Austin, Austin, TX, July.
New York, pp. 188-215. Zia, P.; Preston, H. K.; Scott, N. L.; and Workman,
Xanthakis, M., and Sozen, M. A, 1963, "An E. B., 1979, "Estimating Prestress Losses,"
Experimental Study of Limit Design in Concrete International, V. 1, No. 6, June, pp.
Reinforced Concrete Flat Slabs," Structural 32-38.
Research Series No. 277, Civil Engineering Zia, P., and Hsu, T. T. C., 2004, "Design for Torsion
Studies, University of Illinois, Urbana, IL, Dec., and Shear in Prestressed Concrete Flexural
159 pp. Members," PCI Journal, V. 49, No. 3, May-
June, pp. 34-38.

SBC 304-CR-18 252

REFERENCES

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 253

APPENDIX A—STEEL REINFORCEMENT INFORMATION

APPENDIX A—STEEL REINFORCEMENT INFORMATION

A.1—SASO ASTM STANDARD REINFORCING BARS

Bar designation Nominal diameter, mm Nominal area, mm2 Nominal mass, kg/m
Dia 8 8 50 0.395
Dia 10 10 79 0.617
Dia 12 12 113 0.888
Dia 14 14 154 1.21
Dia 16 16 201 1.58
Dia 18 18 254 2.00
Dia 20 20 314 2.47
Dia 22 22 380 2.98
Dia 25 25 491 3.85
Dia 28 28 616 4.83
Dia 32 32 804 6.31
Dia 36 36 1018 7.99
Dia 40 40 1257 9.87
Dia 45 45 1590 12.5
Dia 50 50 1963 15.4
Dia 60 60 2827 22.2

SBC 304-CR-18 254

 APPENDIX A—STEEL REINFORCEMENT INFORMATION

A.2—ASTM STANDARD PRESTRESSING TENDONS

Nominal Nominal area, Nominal mass,

Type*
diameter, mm mm2 kg/m
6.35 23.22 0.182
7.94 37.42 0.294
9.53 51.61 0.405
Seven-wire Strand (Grade 1750)
11.11 69.68 0.548
12.7 92.9 0.73
15.24 139.35 1.094
9.53 54.84 0.432
11.11 74.19 0.582
Seven-wire Strand (Grade 3290)
12.7 98.71 0.775
15.24 140 1.102
4.88 18.7 0.146
4.98 19.4 0.149
Prestress Wire
6.35 32 0.253
7.01 39 0.298
19 284 2.23
22 387 3.04
25 503 3.97
Prestress Bars (Plain)
29 639 5.03
32 794 6.21
35 955 7.52
15 181 1.46
20 271 2.22
Prestress Bars (Deformed) 26 548 4.48
32 807 6.54
36 1019 8.28
*
Availability of some tendon sizes should be investigated in advance.

SBC 304-CR-18 255

APPENDIX A—STEEL REINFORCEMENT INFORMATION

A.3—ASTM STANDARD WIRE REINFORCEMENT

Nominal Nominal Area (mm2/m)

W and D Size
Diameter Mass Center-to-Center Spacing (mm)
Plain Deformed (mm) (kg/m) 50 75 100 150 200 250 300
MW 290 MD 290 19.22 2.27 5800 3900 2900 1900 1450 1160 970
MW 200 MD 200 15.95 1.5700 4000 2700 2000 1300 1000 800 670
MW 130 MD 130 12.90 1.0204 2600 1700 1300 870 650 520 430
MW 120 MD 120 12.40 0.9419 2400 1600 1200 800 600 480 400
MW 100 MD 100 11.30 0.7849 2000 1300 1000 670 500 400 330
MW 90 MD 90 10.70 0.7064 1800 1200 900 600 450 360 300
MW 80 MD 80 10.10 0.6279 1600 1100 800 530 400 320 270
MW 70 MD 70 9.40 0.5494 1400 930 700 470 350 280 230
MW 65 MD 65 9.10 0.5102 1300 870 650 430 325 260 220
MW 60 MD 60 8.70 0.4709 1200 800 600 400 300 240 200
MW 55 MD 55 8.40 0.4317 1100 730 550 370 275 220 180
MW 50 MD 50 8.00 0.3925 1000 670 500 330 250 200 170
MW 45 MD 45 7.60 0.3532 900 600 450 300 225 180 150
MW 40 MD 40 7.10 0.3140 800 530 400 270 200 160 130
MW 35 MD 35 6.70 0.2747 700 470 350 230 175 140 120
MW 30 MD 30 6.20 0.2355 600 400 300 200 150 120 100
MW 25 MD 25 5.60 0.192 500 330 250 170 125 100 83
MW 20 - 5.00 0.1570 400 270 200 130 100 80 67
MW 15 - 4.40 0.1177 300 200 150 100 75 60 50
MW 10 - 3.60 0.0785 200 130 100 70 50 40 33
MW 5 - 2.50 0.0392 100 67 50 33 25 20 17

SBC 304-CR-18 256

APPENDIX A—STEEL REINFORCEMENT INFORMATION

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 257

 APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

B.1—GENERAL
B.2.4 The critical sections for moment
There are several satisfactory methods for calculations are referred to as principal design
designing two-way slabs. Although they may give sections and are located as follows:
somewhat different results in detail, the resulting 1. For negative moment, along the edges of the
floors give reasonable overall safety factors. Two panel at the faces of the supporting beams.
methods which have been used extensively with 2. For positive moment, along the center lines
satisfactory results are given in this appendix. of the panels.
B.2—METHOD 1
B.2.5 Bending moments. The bending moments
B.2.1 Notation for the middle strips shall be computed from the
formula.
𝐶 = moment coefficient for two-way
𝑀 = 𝐶𝑤𝑆 2
slabs as given in TABLE B1
𝑚 = ratio of short span to long span for B.2.5.1 The average moments per meter of width in
two-way slabs the column strip shall be two-thirds of the
𝑆 = length of short span for two-way corresponding moments in the middle strip. In
slabs. The span shall be considered determining the spacing of the reinforcement in the
as the center-to-center distance column strip, the moment may be assumed to vary
between supports or the clear span from a maximum at the edge of the middle strip to
plus twice the thickness of slab, a minimum at the edge of the panel.
whichever value is the smaller
𝑤 = total factored load per sq. meter B.2.5.2 Where the negative moment on one side of
a support is less than 80 % of that on the other side,
B.2.2 Limitations two-thirds of the difference shall be distributed in
These recommendations are intended to apply to proportion to the relative stiffnesses of the slabs.
slabs (solid or ribbed), isolated or continuous,
supported on all four sides by walls or beams, in B.2.6 Shear. The shear stresses in the slab may
either case built monolithically with the slabs. be computed on the assumption that the load is
distributed to the supports in accordance with
B.2.3 Design strips B.2.6.1
A two-way slab shall be considered as consisting of B.2.6.1 Supporting beams. The loads on the
strips in each direction as follows: supporting beams for a two-way rectangular panel
1. A middle strip one-half panel in width, may be assumed as the load within the tributary
symmetrical about panel center line and areas of the panel bounded by the intersection of 45-
extending through the panel in the direction deg lines from the corners with the median line of
in which moments are considered. the panel parallel to the long side.
2. A column strip one-half panel in width,
occupying the two quarter-panel areas B.2.6.2 The bending moments may be determined
outside the middle strip. approximately by using an equivalent uniform load
3. Where the ratio of short to long span is less per linear meter of beam for each panel supported
than 0.5, the middle strip in the short as follows:
direction shall be considered as having a For the short 𝑤𝑆
width equal to the difference between the span: 3
long and short span, the remaining area For the long 𝑤𝑆 (3 − 𝑚2 )
representing the two column strips.
span: 3 2

SBC 304-CR-18 258

 APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

B.3—METHOD 2
1. For negative moment along the edges of the
B.3.1 Notations panel at the faces of the supports.
2. For positive moment, along the center
𝑙𝑎 = length of clear span in short direction
lines of the panels.
𝑙𝑏 = length of clear span in long direction
B.3.4 Bending moments. The bending moments
𝐶 = moment coefficients for two-way
for the middle strips be computed by the use of
slabs as given in Tables B2, B3, and Tables B2, B3, and B4 from.
B4. Coefficients have identifying
indices, such as 𝐶𝑎,𝑛𝑒𝑔 , 𝐶𝑏,𝑛𝑒𝑔 , 𝑀𝑎 = 𝐶𝑎 𝑤𝑙𝑎2
𝐶𝑎,𝑑𝑙 𝐶𝑏,𝑑𝑙 , 𝐶𝑎,𝑙𝑙 , 𝐶𝑏,𝑙𝑙
𝑚 = ratio of short span to long span for
and
two-way slabs
𝑀𝑏 = 𝐶𝑏 𝑤𝑙𝑏2
𝑤 = uniform load per sq. meter. For
negative moments, 𝑤 is the total The bending moments in the column strips shall be
factored dead load plus live load for gradually reduced from the full value 𝑀𝑎 and 𝑀𝑏
use in TABLE B2. For positive from the edge of the middle strip to one-third (1/3)
moments, 𝑤 is to be separated into of these values at the edge of the panel (FIGURE
B2).
dead and live loads for use in
TABLE B3 and TABLE B4. where the negative moment on one side of a support
is less than 80 percent of that on the other side, the
B.3.2 Limitations difference shall be distributed in proportion to the
A two-way slab shall be considered as consisting of relative stiffnesses of the slabs.

strips in each direction as follows: B.3.5 Factored shear in slab systems with
beams
1. A middle strip one-half panel in width,
symmetrical about panel center line and B.3.5.1 Beams shall be proportioned to resist shear
extending through the panel in the direction caused by factored loads on tributary areas which
in which moments are considered (FIGURE are bounded by 45-deg lines drawn from the corners
B1). of the panels and the centerlines of the adjacent
2. A column strip one-half panel in width, panels parallel to the long sides.
occupying the two quarter-panel areas
outside the middle strip (FIGURE B1 ). B.3.5.2 In addition to shears calculated according
3. Where the ratio of short to long span is less to B.3.5.1, beams shall be proportioned to resist
than 0.5, the slab shall be considered as a shears caused by factored loads applied directly on
one-way slab and is to be designed in beams.
accordance with Chapter 7 except that
negative reinforcement, as required for a B.3.5.3 Computation of slab shear strength on the
ratio of 0.5, shall be provided along the short assumption that load is distributed to supporting
edge. beams in accordance with B.3.5.1 shall be
4. At discontinuous edges, a negative moment
permitted. Resistance to total shear occurring on
one-third (1/3) of the positive moment is to a panel shall be provided.
be used. Shear strength shall satisfy the requirements
of Chapter 22.
B.3.3 Critical sections for moment calculations
are located as follows:

SBC 304-CR-18 259

APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 27

TABLE B1 — MOMENT COEFFICIENTS — METHOD 1

Short span
Long span
Moments Values of 𝒎 all values
1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 of 𝒎
Case 1 – Interior panels
Negative moment at –
Continuous edge 0.033 0.040 0.048 0.055 0.063 0.083 0.033
Discontinuous edge Positive - - - - - - -
moment at midspan 0.025 0.030 0.036 0.041 0.047 0.062 0.025
Case 2 – One edge discontinuous
Negative moment at –
Continuous edge 0.041 0.048 0.055 0.062 0.069 0.085 0.041
Discontinuous edge Positive 0.021 0.024 0.027 0.031 0.035 0.042 0.021
moment at midspan 0.031 0.036 0.041 0.047 0.052 0.064 0.031
Case 3 – Two edges discontinuous
Negative moment at –
Continuous edge 0.049 0.057 0.064 0.071 0.078 0.090 0.049
Discontinuous edge 0.025 0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.045 0.025
Positive moment at midspan 0.037 0.043 0.048 0.054 0.059 0.068 0.037
Case 4 –Three edges discontinuous
Negative moment at –
Continuous edge 0.058 0.066 0.074 0.082 0.090 0.098 0.058
Discontinuous edge 0.029 0.033 0.037 0.041 0.045 0.049 0.029
Positive moment at midspan 0.044 0.050 0.056 0.062 0.068 0.074 0.044
Case 5 – Four edges discontinuous
Negative moment at –
Continuous edge - - - - - - -
Discontinuous edge 0.033 0.038 0.043 0.047 0.053 0.055 0.033
Positive moment at midspan 0.050 0.057 0.064 0.072 0.080 0.083 0.050

SBC 304-CR-18 260

APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

FIGURE B1—DEFINITION OF MIDDLE AND COLUMN STRIPS.

FIGURE B2—VARIATION OF 𝑀𝑎,𝑚𝑎𝑥 .

SBC 304-CR-18 261

 APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

TABLE B2: COEFFICIENTS FOR NEGATIVE MOMENTS IN SLABS (*)

𝑀𝑎,𝑛𝑒𝑔 = 𝐶𝑎,𝑛𝑒𝑔 𝑤𝑙𝑎2

𝑀𝑏,𝑛𝑒𝑔 = 𝐶𝑏,𝑛𝑒𝑔 𝑤𝑙𝑏2 Where 𝑤 = total factored uniform dead plus live load

*A crosshatched edge indicates that the slab continues across, or is fixed at, the support; an unmarked edge indicates a
support at which torsional resistance is negligible.

SBC 304-CR-18 262

 APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

TABLE B3: COEFFICIENTS FOR DEAD-LOAD POSITIVE MOMENTS IN SLABS (*)

𝑀𝑎,𝑝𝑜𝑠,𝑑𝑙 = 𝐶𝑎,𝑑𝑙 𝑤𝑙𝑎2

𝑀𝑏,𝑝𝑜𝑠,𝑑𝑙 = 𝐶𝑏,𝑑𝑙 𝑤𝑙𝑏2 Where 𝑤 = total factored uniform dead load

*A crosshatched edge indicates that the slab continues across, or is fixed at, the support; an unmarked edge indicates a
support at which torsional resistance is negligible.

SBC 304-CR-18 263

 APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

TABLE B4: COEFFICIENTS FOR LIVE-LOAD POSITIVE MOMENTS IN SLABS (*)

𝑀𝑎,𝑝𝑜𝑠,𝑙𝑙 = 𝐶𝑎,𝑙𝑙 𝑤𝑙𝑎2

𝑀𝑏,𝑝𝑜𝑠,𝑙𝑙 = 𝐶𝑏,𝑙𝑙 𝑤𝑙𝑏2 Where 𝑤 = total factored uniform live load

*A crosshatched edge indicates that the slab continues across, or is fixed at, the support; an unmarked edge indicates a
support at which torsional resistance is negligible.

SBC 304-CR-18 264

APPENDIX B—TWO-WAY SLABS: COEFFICIENT METHODS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 304-CR-18 265